Interface Description Part 1: Signals - Siemens...Control SINUMERIK 840C/CE Standard export version...

SINUMERIK 840CSoftware Version 1 to 6Planning Guide 09.2001 Edition

Interface Description

Manufacturer Documentation

Part 1: Signals

SINUMERIK 840CSoftware Version 1 to 6Interface DescriptionPart 1: Signals

Planning Guide

Valid for:

Control SINUMERIK 840C/CE Standard export version

Drive SIMODRIVE 611-D

Software Version Software Version

1.x2.x3.x 1.x4.x 2.x5.x 3.x6.x 4.x

09.2001 Edition

SINUMERIK® documentation

Printing history

Brief details of this edition and previous editions are listed below.

The status of each edition is shown by the code in the ”Remarks” column.

Status code in ”Remarks” column:

A . . . New documentationB . . . Unrevised reprint with new Order No.C . . . Revised edition with new status.

If factual changes have been made on the page since the last edition, this isindicated by a new edition coding in the header on that page.

Edition Order No. Remarks

11.92 6FC5197-0AA00-1BP0 A

06.93 6FC5197-2AA00-0BP0 C

12.93 6FC5197-3AA00-0BP0 C

10.94 6FC5197-4AA00-0BP0 C

03.95 6FC5197-4AA00-0BP1 C

09.95 6FC5197-5AA00-0BP0 C

04.96 6FC5197-5AA00-0BP1 C

08.96 6FC5197-5AA00-0BP2 C

07.97 6FC5197-6AA00-0BP0 C

01.99 6FC5197-6AA00-0BP1 C

09.01 6FC5197-6AA00-0BP2 C

This manual is included in the documentation available on CD-ROM (DOCONCD)Edition Order No. Remarks10.01 6FC5198-6CA00-0BG2 C

TrademarksSIMATIC®, SIMATIC HMI®, SIMATIC NET®, SIROTEC®, SINUMERIK® and SIMODRIVE® are trade-marks of Siemens AG. All other product and system names are registered trademarks of theirrespective companies and must be treated accordingly.

Other functions not described in this documentation might beexecutable in the control. This does not, however, represent anobligation to supply such functions with a new control or whenservicing.

We have checked that the contents of this publication agree withthe hardware and software described herein. The information givenin this publication is reviewed at regular intervals and anycorrections that might be necessary are made in the subsequentprintings. Suggestions for improvement are welcome at all times.

Subject to change without prior notice.

Siemens-Aktiengesellschaft

For more information, refer to the Internet:http://www.ad.siemens.de/sinumerik

The publication was produced on the Siemens 5800 Office System.

The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or itscontents is not permitted without express written authority.Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including created bypatent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved,

© Siemens AG 1992-2001All Rights Reserved

Order No. 6FC5197-6AA00-0BP2Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany

Preliminary Remarks

Notes for the reader

This manual is intended for manufacturers of machine tools with SINUMERIK 840C. Itdescribes the installation and cabling between control and machine as well as the signalsbetween PLC and machine.

The SINUMERIK documentation falls into four groups:

• General Documentation• User Documentation• Manufacturer Documentation• Service Documentation

The Manufacturer Documentation for the SINUMERIK 840C control is divided into thefollowing parts:

• Instruction Manual• Interface

Part 1: SignalsPart 2: Connection Conditions

• Planning Guide PLC 135 WB/WB 2/WD• Function Macros• Function Blocks

Package 0: Basic FunctionsPackage 1: Tool ManagementPackage 4/5: Computer LinkPackage 7: Code CarrierPackage 8: PLC-controlled data input and output

Further SINUMERIK publications apply to all SINUMERIK controls (e.g. Universal Interface,Measuring Cycles, CL 800 Cycle Language). Consult your local Siemens office for further details.

Technical notes

• In the signal charts, the interface signals are represented by thick lines. Thin linesrepresent signals symbolically or refer to internal messages.

• Signals designated with a * are so-called inverse signals, i.e. a 0 signal has an effect ratherthan a 1 signal (e.g. *TEMPERATURE ERROR).

Where order numbers are given with a as placeholder, this indicates that there are severalversions available of one component.

This Guide is valid up to and including Software Version 6!

Safety-related guidelines

WARNING

Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment duringoperation.

Persons who are not qualified should not be allowed to handle theequipment/system. Non-compliance with the warnings can result insevere personal injury or damage to property. Only qualifiedpersonnel familiar with the installation, construction, commissioningand operation of the equipment should be allowed to work on thisequipment/system.

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a


















Qualified personnel

WARNING

Qualified personnel as referred to in the safety guidelines (containedin the documentation or on the product labels) are persons who havethe following qualifications:

• Are trained and authorized to energize, de-energize, clear, groundand tag circuits and equipment in accordance with establishedsafety practices.

• Are trained in the proper care, use and repair of protectiveequipment in accordance with established safety practices.

• Are trained in the use of electrostatic sensitive components andmodules.

• Operating personnel who have been trained to work withautomation equipment and are conversant with the contents ofthe operating and/or programming instructions in as far as theyare connected with the actual operation of the plant.




















a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a aa a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

Anyone engaged in configuring, installation, commissioning

and repair of the control must be familiar

with the relevant documentation.

Danger notices

The notices and guidelines that follow are intended to ensure personal safety, as well asprotect the product and connected equipment and machines against damage.

The safety notices and warnings for protection against loss of life (of the users or servicepersonnel) or for protection against damage to property are highlighted in this document by theterms defined here. The terms used in this document and marked on the equipment itself havethe following significance:

DANGER

For the purpose of this document and the product labels, "Danger"indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial propertydamage will result if proper precautions are not taken.



















WARNING

For the purpose of this document and the product labels, "Warning"indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial propertydamage can result if proper precautions are not taken.




















CAUTION

For the purpose of this document and the product labels, "Caution"indicates that minor personal injury or property damage can result ifproper precautions are not taken.




















CAUTION

This warning notice (without warning triangle) means that a materialdamage can result if the appropriate precautions are not taken.

NOTICE

This warning notice means that an undesired event or an undesiredstate can result if the appropriate notices are not observed.

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a aa a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

”Note" contains important information

about the product, its operation or a part of the document

to which special attention is drawn.

Proper usage

• The equipment/system or the system components may only be used for the applicationsdescribed in the catalog or the technical description, and only in combination with theequipment, components and devices of other manufacturers as far as this isrecommended or permitted by Siemens.

• The product described has been developed, manufactured, tested and the documentationcompiled in keeping with the relevant safety standards. Consequently, if the describedhandling instructions and safety guidelines described for planning, installation, properoperation and maintenance are adhered to, the product, under normal conditions, will notbe a source of danger to property or life.

Active and passive faults in automation equipment

• Depending on the particular task for which the electronic automation equipment is used,both active as well as passive faults can result in a dangerous situation. For example, indrive control, an active fault is generally dangerous because it can result in unauthorizedstarting of the drive. On the other hand, a passive fault in a signalling function can result ina dangerous operating state not being reported to the operator.

• This differentiation of the possible faults and their classification into dangerous and non-dangerous faults, depending on the particular task, is important for all safety considerationsin respect to the product supplied.

WARNING

Wherever a fault in automation equipment can result in severepersonal injury or substantial damage to property, i.e. wherever adangerous fault can occur, additional external measures must betaken or equipment provided to ensure or force safe operatingconditions, even in the event of a fault (e.g. by means of independentlimit monitors, mechanical interlocks, etc.).




















Guidelines for the planning of the product

The product generally forms a part of larger systems or plants. These guidelines are intendedto help integrate the product into its environment without it constituting a source of danger.

The following requires particular attention:

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a aa

aa

aa

aa

aa

aa

aa

aa

aa

Even when a high degree of safety has been included in the design of

automation equipment, e.g. by means of multichannel configuration, it is

still imperative that the instructions contained in the documentation be

exactly adhered to. Incorrect handling can render ineffective the

preventive measures incorporated in the system to protect against

dangerous faults or new sources of danger might be created.

Further notes

If measurement or testing work is to be carried out on an active item of equipment, the rulesand regulations contained in the "VBG 4.0 Accident prevention regulations" of the Germanemployers liability assurance association (Berufsgenossenschaften) must be observed.Particular attention is drawn to paragraph 8 "Permissible exceptions when working on liveparts". Only suitable electrical tools should be used.

WARNING

• Repairs to equipment supplied by us may only be carried out bySiemens service personnel or repair shops authorized bySiemens to carry out such repairs. For replacement purposes,use only parts or components that are contained in the spareparts list. Unauthorized opening of equipment and improperrepairs can result in loss of life or severe personal injury as wellas substantial property damage.

• Before opening the equipment, always remove the power plug oropen the disconnecting switch.

• When replacing fuses, only use the fuse types specified.

• Do not throw batteries into an open fire and do not carry out anysoldering work on batteries (danger of explosion). Maximumambient temperature 100°C. Batteries should not be opened orrecharged. Make sure that the same type is used when replacingbatteries.

• Batteries must always be disposed of properly.

• The following points require attention when using monitors:Improper handling, especially the readjustment of the high voltageor fitting of another tube type can result in excessive X-rayradiation from the unit. The license to operate such a modifiedunit automatically lapses and the unit must not be operated at all.



















General Overview 1

Assigned Areas 2

Description of Basic Signals FY 0 ... FY 24 3

NCK Channel/PLC Interface (DB 10 ... DB 13) as from SW 4 DB 15 4

Spindle/PLC Interface (DB 31) 5

Axis/PLC Interface (DB 32 / DB 29) 6

Data Transfer PLC/NC (DB 36 / DB 29) 7

Control of Data Transfer (DB 37) 8

Operator Panel Interface (DB 40) 9

Command Channel (DB 41) 10

Communication Area NC/PLC Interface (DB 48) 11

Display Programs for PLC Data and Messagesup to SW 2 12

PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 14

Data Blocks Installed for Users (DB 66 ... DB 71) 15

Alphabetical List of Signal Names 16

Terms and Abbreviations 17

Display of PLC Alarms, Messagesand Dialogs as from SW 3 13

Contents

1 General Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

1.1 Control structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–11.1.1 Components of SINUMERIK 840C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–31.1.2 NCK area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–61.1.3 MMC area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–81.1.4 PLC area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–81.1.5 PLC-machine interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–101.2 PLC program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–111.2.1 Tasks of the PLC program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–111.2.2 Structure of the PLC program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–111.2.2.1 PLC operating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–121.2.2.2 Difference between dynamic and static signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–131.2.3 Reaction to interrupt and alarm signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–13

2 Assigned Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1

2.1 Flags, data formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–12.2 Class DB/DX data blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–22.3 Function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–52.3.1 Class FB function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–52.3.2 Class FX function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–92.4 Basic signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–112.4.1 Assignment of DB 1 (diagnostics) (Section 3.6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–132.4.2 High-speed data channels (as from SW 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–162.4.2.1 DB 2 Configuration DB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–162.4.2.2 DB 3 Data transfer areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–172.5 NCK/PLC interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–182.5.1 Channel-specific signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–182.5.1.1 Signals to NCK channel (DB 10 ... DB 13, as from SW 4 DB 15) . . . . . 2–182.5.1.2 Signals from NCK channel (DB 10...DB 13, as from SW 4 DB 15) . . . . 2–202.5.1.3 Auxiliary functions from NCK channel (DB 10 ... DB 13,

as from SW 4 DB 15) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–212.5.1.4 Axis-specific Safety Integrated signals (DB28) (as from SW 5.4) . . . . . . 2–292.5.1.5 Axis-specific GI signals (DB 29) 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–302.5.1.6 Axis-specific 611-D signals (DB 29) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–312.5.1.7 M signals (DB 30) decoded according to list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–322.5.2 Spindle-specific signals (DB 31) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–332.5.2.1 Signals from spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–332.5.2.2 Signals to spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–332.5.2.3 Spindle-specific GI signals from spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–342.5.2.4 Spindle-specific GI signals to spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–342.5.2.5 Star-delta switchover, 611D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–352.5.3 Axis-specific signals (DB 32) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–372.6 Data transfer interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–392.6.1 Data transfer PLC/NCK (DB 36) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–392.6.2 Control of data transfer (DB 37) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–402.7 Operator panel/PLC interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–412.7.1 Key signals from operator panel (DB 40) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–412.7.2 Display dialog line (DB 40) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–43

2.7.3 Menu selection (DB 40) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–442.7.4 Cursor data (DB 40) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–452.7.5 User key signals (DB 40) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–462.7.6 Command channel interface (DB 41) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–482.8 General interface NCK/PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–502.8.1 Signals to/from NCK (DB 48) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–502.9 PLC messages (DB 58) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–522.9.1 Softkey function calls DB 59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–562.10 PLC machine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–572.11 Configuring distributed machine peripherals (DMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–582.12 Set-up DBs for users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–682.12.1 Icon selection in the MMC (DB 66) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–682.12.2 Internal machine control panel (DB 67) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–702.12.3 Data words for users (DB 68) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–702.12.4 Data bits for users (DB 71) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–712.13 Decoding list for M signals (DB 80 ... DB 83) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–71

3 Description of Basic Signals FY 0...FY 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1

3.1 PLC auxiliary signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–13.2 PLC ready signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–63.3 Signals for alarm-controlled machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–73.4 NC ready signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–83.5 Individual signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–83.6 Diagnostics (DB 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11

4 NCK Channel/PLC Interface (DB 10 ... DB 13, as from SW 4 DB 15) 4–1

4.1 SINUMERIK 840C terms and structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14.1.1 Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14.1.2 Operating mode group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–34.1.3 Channel-specific interface signal exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–44.2 Signals to NCK channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–74.2.1 Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–74.2.2 Feedrate modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–84.2.3 Program control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–104.2.4 General feed disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–204.2.5 Read-in disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–224.2.6 NC Start disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–234.3 Signals from NC channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–234.3.1 Program commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–234.3.2 Select program control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–304.3.3 Acknowledgements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–334.3.4 Ready signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–354.4 Output of auxiliary functions and block information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–384.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–384.4.2 Behaviour in different modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–394.4.3 Description of information signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–404.4.4 T/H word routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–454.4.5 TEACH IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–484.5 Structure of program coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–494.5.1 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–494.5.2 NCK/PLC user interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–504.5.3 PLC function blocks FX 38, FX 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–51

5 Spindle/PLC Interface (DB 31) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1

5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–15.2 Signals from spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–35.3 Signals to spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–125.4 Signals from following spindle to PLC, DB 31 for the GI function . . . . . . 5–235.5 Signals from PLC to following spindle for GI function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–295.6 Interface signals for drive 611D (DB 29/DB31) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–33

6 Axis/PLC Interface (DB 32/DB 29) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1

6.1 Signals from axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–26.2 Signals to axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–76.2.1 Signals for endlessly turning rotary axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–246.3 Signals from following axis to PLC, DB 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–276.3.1 Axis-specific 611D signals (DB 29) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–366.4 Structure of M decoding list (DB 30) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–44

7 Data Transfer PLC/NC (DB 36) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1

7.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–17.1.1 Machine data (MD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–27.1.2 Tool offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–37.1.3 R parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–67.1.4 Zero offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–87.2 Data transfer PLC initiative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–97.2.1 Structure with example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–97.2.2 Description of job-specific interface signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–147.3 Data transfer NC initiative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–16

8 Control of Data Transfer (DB 37) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–1

8.1 Description of interface signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–18.2 Signals for PLC initiative data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–1

9 Operator Panel Interface (DB 40) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–1

9.1 Key signals from operator panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–29.1.1 Operating mode group (BAG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–29.1.2 Softkey function signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–39.2 Display dialog line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–89.3 Menu selection interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–89.3.1 Softkey function calls DB 59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–249.3.1.1 Overview of softkey function calls from PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–269.3.1.2 Messages of softkey function calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–279.3.2 Signals from PLC to NCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–289.3.3 Signals from the NC to the PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–319.4 Cursor data to PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–329.5 User key signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–34

10 Command Channel (DB 41) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–1

10.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–110.2 Signals in the command channel header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–210.3 User interface signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–310.4 Net data for command channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–710.4.1 Net data of the path dimension function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–710.4.2 Net data for DIVISION function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–810.4.3 Net data for S EXTERNAL function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–910.4.4 Net data for the M19 tsr function (incremental spindle positioning) . . . . . 10–1110.4.5 Net data for the transformation function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–1310.4.6 Net data for coupled motion function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–1410.4.7 Net data of the ”Temperature compensation” function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–1610.4.8 Net data of ”Read/write IKA data” function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–1810.4.9 Net data of ”Travel against fixed stop” function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–2510.5 Error codes, general errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–2810.6 Error codes, function-related . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–2910.6.1 Errors, function 1, path dimension, static . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–2910.6.2 Errors with function 2, division increment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–3010.6.3 Errors with function 3, S external . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–3110.6.4 Errors with function 5, M19 tsr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–3210.6.5 Errors with function 6, transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–3310.6.6 Errors with function 7, coupled motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–3410.6.7 Errors with function 9, temperature compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–3510.6.8 Errors with function 10/11, ”Read/write IKA data” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–3610.6.9 Errors with function 12, travel against fixed stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–3710.7 Detailed error coding with command channel error number 200 . . . . . . 10–38

11 Communication Area NC/PLC Interface (DB 48) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11–1

11.1 Signals to NCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11–111.2 Signals from NCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11–8

12 Display Programs for PLC Data and Messagesup to Software Version 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–1

12.1 Structure of display programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–112.1.1 Configuring of message texts in alarm lines and dialog boxes up to SW 2 12–312.1.1.1 Signal descriptions DB 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–312.1.1.2 Configuring of alarm attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–412.1.1.3 Configuring of dialog boxe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–512.1.1.4 Creating the text file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–712.1.1.5 Possibilities of dialog box configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–812.1.1.6 Example of dialog box configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–812.2 PLC status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–1012.3 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–1112.3.1 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–1312.3.2 Operational messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–1412.3.3 Message groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–1512.3.4 Bit fields for messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–1612.3.5 Assigned areas for messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–1912.3.6 PLC machine data for messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–2012.3.7 Creating message texts on the WS800A workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–2212.3.8 Creating PCF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–22

12.3.9 Loading and saving PCF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–2312.3.10 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–2512.4 Interface message signals DB 58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–27

13 Display of PLC Alarms, Messages and Dialogs as from SW 3 . . . . 13–1

13.1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–113.2 Interface signals for alarms and messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–213.3 Interface message signals B 58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–513.3.1 Interface signals for dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–913.4 Configuring alarm/message/dialog texts and attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–913.4.1 Defining display attributes by means of the MELDATTR file . . . . . . . . . 13–913.4.2 Generating a MELDATTR user file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–1313.4.3 Configuring the attributes of the PLC user alarms/messages/dialogs . . . 13–1513.4.4 Important notes on the configuration of dialog boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–1813.4.5 The MELDTEXT file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–1813.4.6 Generating a MELDTEXT user file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–1913.4.7 Configuring the message texts for the PLC alarms/messages/dialogs . . 13–2013.4.8 Number of text characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–2113.4.9 Formattings in the text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–2113.5 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–2213.6 Conversion program ALT840C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–2313.7 Example for alarm configuration, SW 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–2313.8 Generating of an info text file for the alarms and messages . . . . . . . . . 13–25

14 PLC Machine Data (PLC-MD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14–1

15 Data Blocks Installed for Users (DB 66 ... DB 71) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15–1

16 Alphabetical List of Signal Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16–1

17 Terms and Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17–1

11.92 1 General Overview

1.1 Control structure

1 General Overview

The following subsections are designed to provide an insight into the SINUMERIK 840C controlstructure.

They describe:

• the division of SINUMERIK 840C into areas

• the tasks of the individual areas and

• they provide information on the mechanical design of the control.


The SINUMERIK 840C comprises three principal areas:

• the NCK (Numerical Control Kernel)

• the PLC (Programmable Logic Controller)

• the MMC area (Man Machine Communication)

The NCK area performs parts of the classic NC tasks, i.e. the workpiece program execution bymeans of block processing and interpolation, and axis and spindle actuation via the positioncontrollers.

The PLC area represents the machine's interface control and controls machine-specificfunction procedures for the auxiliary axes, tool magazines and monitoring devices.

The display and operating functions as well as the master control of the MMC operating modesare implemented in the MMC area (see diagram).

© Siemens AG 1992 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197- AA00 1–1SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)

1 General Overview 12.93


a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a









































a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a





























































































































a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a











Basic system

Display Operation
























Applications

Machine Parameters

Diagnostics Program-ming/

SimulationServices

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a




Harddisk

MMC

PLCoperatingsystem

Standardfunctionblocks

Magazinedata

Computerlink

User program for

machine control

PLC

NCK-UMSMemory

Part programmemory

Communicationsprocessor (CP)

Block preparation

Interpolation

Position control

MMC-NCK

INTERFACE

PLC-NCK

INTERFACE

NCK

Interfaceto machine

(drives/motors)

• Active V.24• SINEC H1• MAP 3.0

Input/outputmachinecontrol

NC workstationOperator panel

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a aa a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a aa a a a a a aa a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a aa aa a

a a a

a a a

a a aa a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

Harddisk

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a



Displays/texts/menus

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

UMS






MMC UMS

MMC-PLC interface

RS232C(V.24) PG

Floppy-diskdrive

Datamemory

RS232C (V.24)input/output

Centronics(streamer)

AT expan-sion box

Toolmanage-

ment

PLC-machineinterface

1–2 © Siemens AG 1992 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197- AA00

SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


1.1.1 Components of SINUMERIK 840C


A detailed list of the SINUMERIK 840C components and their features can be found in theSINUMERIK 840C Catalog and in the Interface Description, Part 2. Some of these componentsare briefly introduced here to give an overall view of the mechanical design of the control.

The most obvious component of SINUMERIK 840C is the operator panel with machine controlpanel. Although the operator panel is housed separately from the central unit, it is connectedserially to it.

The central unit consists of a single-tier rack which houses the printed circuit boards of thecontrol. In addition to the central unit, SIMATIC expansion units and DMP modules can also beadded on to expand the input/output signals.




SINUMERIK slimline operator panel (with inscriptions)

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

GA25.16


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



Machine control panel for SINUMERIK slimline operator panel

A B

H I E C D F

A: Emergency Stop buttonB: Operating modesC: Spindle controlD: Feed controlE: Direction keys with rapid overlay+customer keysF: Key operated switchH: Reset keyI: User keys


























a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a

























a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a





Direction keys for M version

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a





Direction keys for T version

E




Coupling distributed machine peripherals

Central controller

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

Line 1

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

Line 2 *

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a






































































Machine

DMP modules

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a




* Possible only when using the IF-DMP

1.1.2 NCK area

The NCK area essentially comprises:

• Part program memory• Communications processors (CP)• Parameters for the control • UMS• NCK structure• Control of axes and spindles

Part program memory

Part programs for workpieces that are currently being machined are stored and managed inthe NC area. The part program memory in the NCK area is not battery backed. The partprograms can be stored in the data management part of the hard disk (MMC). The data isstored workpiece-oriented.

COM area (CP module)

The SINUMERIK 840C incorporates communication units from MMC and from NCK

• SBC RS232C (V.24)• MMC interface• CP module NCK


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


1.1.2 NCK area

Parameters for the control

The NC contains different types of control parameters:

• Machine dataAll the data fixed by the tool manufacturer which are required for adapting the control tothe particular machine tool are stored in the machine data. They include, for example, theposition of the reference point, the quantity and names of the axes, characteristics foracceleration and deceleration of the drives and spindle speeds or feed rates. The machinedata can be protected by a flexible password.

• Setting dataSetting data are data which can be changed by the machine operator or user. Theyinclude, for example, working area limitations.

• PLC machine dataPLC machine data are located in the link RAM NC-PLC area and are used by themanufacturer to define the machine control panel and machine options etc.The PLC machine data are transferred to the PLC at every cold restart of the NC. All PLCmachine data do not become active until cold restart of the PLC.

• Tool offsetsThe machine operator stores the geometry and wear data of his tools in the tool offsets.

UMS (user memory submodule)

The operator interface can be configured in order to adapt the functionality of the control tothe particular machine and to the requirements of the user. Machine-specific functions (e.g.cycles) or operator interfaces (displays, menus, messages) can be created on theprogramming workstation ”WS 800A”. The functions, texts and displays in the machine andparameter areas configured by the machine manufacturer are stored in the UMS. The UMS isa data file on the hard disk on the MMC-CPU of the SINUMERIK 840C. This file is loaded intothe NCK when the control powers up and supplements the operator interface of the NCK.

NCK structure

The NCK area is divided into channels, each channel acting like an independent NC control.Each NCK channel has its own block processing and interpolator.

The NCK channels are grouped in operating mode groups. The axes and spindles of themachine are assigned to operating mode groups via machine data. Each NCK channel of anoperating mode group can, however, only be controlled by one NCK channel at any one time.

Each axis has a position controller. A position control loop occurs when a drive is connected tothe NC via a measuring system. The same applies to spindles with encoders.

In its maximum configuration, SINUMERIK 840C contains 2 operating mode groups (as fromSW 4: 6) and 4 NC channels (as from SW 4: 6). It can have a maximum of 15 servo loops(486 CPU) of which a maximum of 6 can be for spindles.

Up to 30 servo loops can be defined with software version 5 and higher (611D).

Example:

The 30 servo loops could be divided into: • 30 axes or 24 axes plus 6 spindles• No fictitious axes can be defined in addition to the 30 axes.The limitation to max. 15 real axes or spindles (axes/spindles with servo loops) for analogdrives still applies.

The number of servo loops is limited to 9 when using the 386 CPU.



1.1.3 MMC area

1.1.3 MMC area

The MMC area is divided into the

• basic system and• applications.

The basic system comprises the following:

• standard operating system (FlexOS),• driver,• data management,• master control,• MMC operator communication system,• basic tools, such as an ASCII and DIN editor,• display manager,• communications coordination.

The following MMC areas are implemented in the application area:

• machine,• parameters,• programming,• diagnostics• services and• simulation (as from SW 3)

1.1.4 PLC area

The PLC area contains the interface control. Machine-specific signals are evaluated orswitched here. Within the PLC, the basic signals are regrouped, arranged according to thetype of signal and denoted ”user interface”. A list of all user interface signals required for thePLC user program appears in Section 2. A detailed description of these signals is to be foundin the following sections.

Data communication between the NCK and the PLC is via a communications RAM. In the caseof SINUMERIK 840C, with the exception of the basic signals, all signals are stored in datablocks (DB).


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


1.1.4 PLC area

Overview of NCK-PLC interface

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

NCK a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

PLC

OperatingSystem

NC-PLC InterfaceBasic signals FY 0-24Diagnostics DB 1...4Interface NCK channel 1 to 4 (up to 6 DB 10-13as from SW 4)Modes, program modification, (15 as from SW4)

Ready signals, auxiliary functionsAxis-specific 611D and GI signals DB 29Decoded M signals DB 30Spindle-specific signals DB 31Axis-specific signals DB 32PLC-NCK data transfer DB 36Control of data transfer DB 37Operator panel DB 40Command channel DB 41NCK/PLC communication DB 48PLC messages DB 58PLC machine data (MD) DB 60PLC MD words, function blocks DB 61PLC MD words, users DB 62PLC MD bits for basic program DB 63PLC MD bits, function blocks DB 64PLC MD bits, users DB 65DB installed for users, words DB 68DB installed for users, bits DB 71Computer link DB 101, 102Internal interface User interface

Set and actual valuesAxes and spindles

Input and outputMachine control

Userprogram

Datamanage-

ment

Traversinglogic

Positioncontrol

Computerlink

Master computer

Operator panelMessagesData transfer hard disk and RS232C (V.24)

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

MMC

NCK PLC data transfer is executed by the PLC operating system (BESY).



1.1.5 PLC-machine interface

1.1.5 PLC-machine interfacea a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a aa a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

Please refer to the Installation Lists for the assignment of inputs andoutputs via input and output modules, DMP modules and the machine

control panel, and the setting of addresses. A description of thehardware is contained in the Interface Description, Part 2.

Input/output overview:

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.

Byte No.

0

127

128

Physical interface with process image(input modules, DMP modules, machine control panel)

255

Physical interface without process image(input modules, DMP modules)

Inputs

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.

Byte No.

0

127

128

255

Physical interface with process image(output modules, DMP modules, machine control panel)

Physical interface without process image(output modules, DMP modules)

Outputs


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


1.2 PLC program

1.2 PLC program

The following subsections provide some information on:

• the structure of the PLC program• the tasks of the PLC program• the distribution of tasks between the PLC operating system and the PLC user program• the fundamental mechanisms of signal and data transfer

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a














The ”PLC 135 WB/WB2/WB Planning Guide SINUMERIK 840C/880”

provides a detailed introduction to programming the PLC

1.2.1 Tasks of the PLC program

The SINUMERIK 840C can control a variety of machines. Controlling the drives is among otherthings one of the classic tasks of the NC which is carried out in the NCK area.

In addition to the machine signals which are required for controlling the drives, there are othersignals, different from machine to machine, which cannot be processed with the usual NCfunctionality. The control is adapted to the signal range of the machine by equipping the PLCarea with I/O submodules for creating and switching machine-specific signals.

The PLC user program must establish the connection between the machine-specific signalsand the NC functions. This means that the PLC user program creates the signals required bythe NC from the machine-specific signals and vice versa i.e. it creates the signals required bythe machine from the control signals.

In addition, the PLC user program should use the special features of a machine which are notincluded in the NC functions. The PLC user program must therefore implement these potentialmachine functions, activate them when required and monitor them.

Examples of PLC program tasks:

• implementation of monitoring facilities• activation of machine-specific reactions in the event of errors• controlling auxiliary axes• tool magazine management• execution of auxiliary functions

1.2.2 Structure of the PLC program

The PLC program consists of the PLC operating system (BESY) and the PLC user program.The user program is created by the machine manufacturer.




1.2.2.1 PLC operating system

The PLC operating system organizes the exchange of signals and data between the PLC userprogram and the NCK. The individual tasks are as follows:

• Organization of system start

• Preparation of basic signals (flag "0", "1")

• Signal exchange with inputs/outputs

• Exchange of basic signals for channels, axes, spindles

• M decoding

• Data transfer NCK PLC

• Control of data transfer via the PLC

• Acquisition of operator panel signals

• Saving or loading of FW 200/224 ... 254 during time or alarm processing (depending onmachine data)

Organization of system start

The PLC operating system can be customized to the user-specific channel, spindle and axisstructures of the control via the PLC machine data (see Installation Guide). At cold restart, thePLC operating system checks the machine data and is configured accordingly. In the event ofcontradictory or incorrect PLC machine data, the PLC operating system branches into theSTOP state.

The OB 20 of the PLC user program is called up at system start and processes anycommands inserted by the user. The user thus has the possibility to insert a number offunctions in the system start. System start is completed when OB 1 is called up the first time.When the OB 1 has been processed completely, the PLC is operating cyclically.

Calling up the user program

The PLC operating system calls up organization blocks. These organization blocks representthe upper level of the PLC user program. These are especially organization blocks for:

• cyclical processing (OB 1)

• interrupt-controlled processing (OB 2)

• alarm-controlled processing (OB 3)

• aperiodic processing (OB 4)

• time-controlled periodic processing (OB 5 - OB 7)

The machine manufacturer can structure his PLC program according to these criteria bycalling up program blocks (PB) from the relevant organization blocks (OB).


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



Preparation of basic signals in the flag area

The flag bytes (FY) contain the basic signals for the PLC program. These include (for example)ready signals, basic setting signals, interrupt signals and alarm signals. The PLC operatingsystem provides information on the system state for the PLC user program via the basicsignals.

The flag area contains the flag bytes FY 0 to FY 255. The basic signals are located in FY 0 toFY 24. The area FY 25 to FY 255 can be used freely by the user.

Important:

The flag area FY 200 - 223 is also partly used by SIMATIC© function blocks.

Data formats:

All word-oriented interface signals are output and input as fixed-point numbers .Specific reference is made to exceptions.

1.2.2.2 Difference between dynamic and static signals

There are static and dynamic signals.

Static signals are only set or reset by the communicating partners (PLC user program or NC).Static signals retain their value through several PLC cycles, as long as they are not changedby one of the communicating partners.

Dynamic signals on the other hand are reset by the PLC operating system after one PLCcycle. Dynamic signals only occur in the direction going towards the PLC i.e. from the NC oroperator panel.

Some dynamic signals are also present in the form of static signals, e.g. M functions.

1.2.3 Reaction to interrupt and alarm signals

There are interrupts which are triggered by machine signals (hardware interrupts) and programinterrupts which are triggered by the PLC operating system due to edge changes of alarmsignals.

Hardware interrupts

Hardware interrupts can only be processed in a particular PLC operating mode, the specialmode. The PLC operating system makes an image of the signals which trigger interrupts in theflag area and this image makes it possible to read off which signal has triggered the interrupt.The user interface OB2 is then called up.

The signals which trigger hardware interrupts can be masked. It can be determined whichedge of a signal triggers the interrupt via machine data.

Program interrupts due to edge changes of alarm signals

The user can declare certain input bytes as alarm bytes via machine data. The signals storedthere trigger program interrupts.

In contrast to hardware interrupts, signals do not trigger program interrupts directly. The PLCoperating system updates the list of the ingoing alarm signals in the alarm bytes periodically(approx. every 10ms). If it detects that an edge change has taken place in an alarm byte, OB 3is activated.

END OF SECTION


12.93 2 Assigned Areas

2.1 Flags, data formats

2 Assigned Areas

2.1 Flags, data formats

FY 0.

2425

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.199200

.224

.

.

.FY 255

e.g. auxiliary flags or for dynamic assignment byinterface signalse.g. interface channel 1

channel 2etc.

Available to the user

Saved area on changing planeand restarting

Reserved for functionblocks (see note)

Basic signals

Notes:

1. For the purposes of simple programming, the interface signals from data blocks can becopied into the flag area FY 25 - FY 199 using function macros FB 70 and FB 71.

Function macros are function blocks that are programmed in assembler and integrated inthe PLC operating system.

2. The flag area FY 200/224 - 255 (depending on machine data) is saved by the systemprogram when the machining plane is changed and also in the event of a restart. The flagarea is uploaded at the end of the relevant program.

This flag area can also be utilized by the user for intermediate results.

The flag area FY 200 - FY 255 is partly used by function blocks (see FB PackageDescription). If the user does not utilize these function blocks, these flags can be used inthe same way as the area FY 25 - FY 199.

Important:

The flag area FY 200 - 255 is also partly used by SIMATIC function blocks.

Data formats:

All word-oriented interface signals are output and input as fixed-point numbers . Specificreference is made to exceptions.


2 Assigned Areas 04.96

2.2 Data blocks

2.2 Class DB/DX data blocks

Data blocks DB 1 ... 149 are reserved for Siemens applications.Data blocks DB 150 ... 255 can be utilized by the user.Data blocks DX 0 ... 105 are reserved for Siemens applications.Data blocks DX 106 ... 255 can be utilized by the user.

DB No. DB design. DB name Pack.

1 *2 *3 *4 *

10 *11 *12 *13 *14 *15 *282930 *31 *32 *33343536 *37 *383940 *41 *48 *4958 *5960 *61 *62 *63 *64 *65 *666768 *697071 *

DIAG-DBSTATUS-DBDATKAN-DBFM/BM-DB

NS KN 1NS KN 2NS KN 3NS KN 4NS KN 5NS KN 6SINS ELGDEC MFUSPI SIGACHS SIG

E-PUA-PUDUE NCSER SCH.RK:ZW-DB

NS BEDT.NS KKNS COM

MELDDB-ZENTRALMDG WOMDF WOMDA WOMDG BIMDF BIMDA BIIKO-DBINT-MSTTSEA WO

SEA BI

Diagnostics DBPLC status channel 1)/high-speed data channel 2)

PLC data channel 1)/high-speed data channel 2)

Error and operational messages

Interface NC channel 1Interface NC channel 2Interface NC channel 3Interface NC channel 4Interface NC channel 5 2)

Interface NC channel 6 2)

Interface signals for Safety Integrated 3)

ELG signals and 611-D signalsDecoded M functions (list)Interface for spindle-specific signalsInterface for axis-specific signalsReservedInput buffer, computer linkOutput buffer, computer linkInterface for data transfer NC <-> PLCControl of data transferStatus DB computer link

Interface operator panelInterface command channelInterface communication NC/PLC interface

Interface for general messagesSoftkey function calls (central DB in link RAM)MD words operating systemMD words function blocks MD words user MD bits basic programMD bits function blocksMD bits userIcon drive circuit in the MMCInternal machine control panelSE user words

SE user bits

OSOSOSOS

OSOSOSOSOSOSFBOSOSOSOS

CLCLOSOSCL

OSOSOS

OSOSOSOSOSOSOSOS

OS

OS

Abbreviations:

OS PLC operating systemCL Computer linkSE Setting dataFB Description of

FunctionsSafety Integrated

Note:

The data blocks marked * are set up and initialized by the PLCoperating system at each restart following a reset. These blocks arealways reinitialized in the event of an automatic restart.

_______1) Up to SW 22) As from SW 43) As from SW 5.4


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


2.2 Data blocks


76777879808182838485

99100101 *102 *103104105...122123124125126127128129130131132133134135136137138139140141142143144145146147148149150

Quit FM/BMDB FM/BMQuit FM/BMQUITFMBMLMDKN 1LMDKN 2LMDKN 3LMDKN 4LMDKN 5LMDKN 6

Log-PartNCDAT-TEIN ASSAUS ASSZWSP-WZDWZ-V-BO

S-SIGNALEFORM-DBZUST-DBE-PUFFERA-PUFFER

ZW-STAZZWDYNPUFF 1DYNPUFF 2DYNPUFF 3DYNPUFF 4DYNPUFF 5DYNPUFF 6DYNPUFF 7DYNPUFF 8ZW-DATVT ZW-BT ZW-ANZBT ZW-MESSTO-DATVTTO-DATLSZW-WZV

Acknowledgement signals EM/OM 2)

DB status words EM/OM 2)



List for M decoding NC channel 1List for M decoding NC channel 2List for M decoding NC channel 3List for M decoding NC channel 4List for M decoding NC channel 5 3)

List for M decoding NC channel 6 3)

Assignment user interface/logic partner targetTexts for file transfer image (operator prompt)Input user interfaceOutput user interfaceIntermediate memory tool dataTool management operator interfaceReserved

.

.

.Reserved

Standard signalsFormat listStatus DBUser interface input user data DBUser interface output data DBReserved

Status DB for tool life, quantityStatus words DB for tape inputDynamic bufferDynamic bufferDynamic bufferDynamic bufferDynamic bufferDynamic bufferDynamic bufferDynamic bufferStatus words DB data distributor 1)

Status words DB operator panel 1)

Display parameters operator panelInterface measurementTO memory distributorBuffer for TO data read/write (FB 61/FB 62)Status words tool management

0000URURURURURUR

CLCL, 4CLCLCL, 4

CL

CL

CL66666

111111111111111111

Abbreviations:

OS PLC operating system0 FB package 01 FB package 16 FB package 6CL Computer linkUR User

EM Error messageOM Operational messageUI User interface

Note:

The data blocks marked * are set up and initialized by the PLCoperating system at each restart following a reset. These blocksare always reinitialized in the event of an automatic restart._______1) The data blocks marked 1) are set up contiguously depending on the tool

management configuration.2) Up to SW 23) As from SW 4



2.2 Data blocks


151152153154155156157158159160161162163164165166167168169170171172173174175176177178179180181182

KENN 1KENN 2KENN 3IDENT 1IDENT 2DUPLOANWEND 1ANWEND 2ANWEND 3ANWEND 4ANWEND 5ANWEND 6ANWEND 7D-NR. 1D-NR. 2D-NR. 3D-NR. 4D-NR. 5D-NR. 6D-NR. 7D-NR. 8D-NR. 9ERSATZPLWZAUF1 L1WZAUF2 L1WZAUF1 L2WZAUF2 L2ADAGE1 L1ADAGE2 L1ADAGE1 L2ADAGE1 L2ADALAGE

IdentifiersIdentifiersIdentifiersIdent numberIdent numberDuplo numberUser data 1)

User data 1)

User data 1)

User data 1)

User data 1)

User data 1)

User data 1)

Reference list 1)

Reference list 1)

Reference list 1)

Reference list 1)

Reference list 1) Reference list 1)

Reference list 1)

Reference list 1)

Reference list 1)

Alternative location number 1)

Tool holder L1 1) Tool holder L1 1)

Tool holder L2 1)

Tool holder L2 1)

Adapter geometry L1 1)




Adapter position 1)

11111111111111111111111111111111

Abbreviations:

OS PLC operating system0 FB package 01 FB package 1CL Computer linkUR User

Note:

The data blocks marked * are set up and initialized by the PLCoperating system at each restart following a reset. These blocks arealways reinitialized in the event of an automatic restart.

The data blocks marked 1) are set up contiguously depending onthe tool management configuration.

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a aa a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

DB 150 to DB 182 (maximum) are required to implement toolmanagement. The actual number of data blocks depends on the ”width”

of the magazine table.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


2.3 Function blocks

2.3 Function blocks

2.3.1 Class FB function blocks

Function blocks FB 0 ... 199 are reserved for Siemens applications.Function blocks FB 200 ... 255 can be utilized by the user.

FB No. FB design. FB name Pack.

11 * 12 *

17

3031323334353637383940

41

42

43

44454547484849505152 *54555657585960 *61 *62 *63 *64 *

EINR-DBWDTRG

STATUS

MUL:16

DIV:16DIV:32

DIV/100ADD:32SUB:32

DUAL/BCDCOD:16

COD:32

COD:B4

COD:B8

GST-FMBMANLAUFPSP:FMBMFMBM:HSGFMBM:MMCUP:57/58UP:FB49UP:FB45BTR 8 16FM-ANZBM-ANZMG-ANZFM-ABFRBM-ABFRMG-ABFRBLOCK-TRNCD-LESENCD-SCHR

Create data blocksRetriggering of cycle time monitoring

PLC status channel 2)

Multiply two binary-coded numbers 16 bits eachReservedDiv. two binary-coded numbers 16 bits eachDiv. two binary-coded numbers 32 bits eachReservedDivide by 100Add two binary-coded numbersSubtract two binary-coded numbersReservedCode conversion binary/BCD 4 decadesConvert fixed point binary number (16 bits) into BCD codenumberConvert fixed point binary number (32 bits) into BCD codenumber (used flags FW 220, 222)Convert BCD code number (4 decades) into fixed point binarynumberConvert BCD code number (8 decades) into fixed point binarynumberReservedBasic setting fault/operational messages 2)

Basic setting interrupts and messages 3)

Buffer memory fault/operational messagesAuxiliary signals for fault/operational messages 2)

Auxiliary signals for EM/OM 3)

Subroutine FB57, FB58Subroutine FB49Subroutine FB45Block transfer between 8-bit and 16-bit memory1)Display fault messagesDisplay operational messagesDisplay message groups 2)

Interrogate fault messagesInterrogate operational messagesInterrogate message groups 2)

Block transferRead NC dataWrite NC dataReservedReserved

OSOS

0

0

00

000

00

0

0

0

00000000

000000OSOSOSOSOS

Abbreviations:

OS PLC operating system0 FB package 0

Note:

The blocks marked * are function macros integrated in the PLCoperating system.(See Function Macros Description)

_______2) Up to SW 23) As from SW 3





65 *66 *67 *68 *69 *70 *71 *72 *73 *74 *75 *76 *77 *78 *79 *

88 *89 *

919293949596979899100101102103104105106107108109110111112113*114115116117118119120

M-STACKSTACK-MT:RI ACHAP RUFG-DECODT:NS EAMT:EAM NST:NCK DBT:DB NCKT:SPI DBT:DB SPIT:ACH DBT:DB ACHT:MS KNT:MS ACH

BA-LAMPEBAA-LESE

AK2:V/RAK3:AUTALS:V/RALS:AUTRK:S880RK:TWZD

RK:GLOBARK:MELDGRK:NCDAT

UP:FB101UP:CL880

SUCHSUCHROUTLEERPL1SUCH-SYMSUCH-VORSUCH-RWSWZV-INITEINR-MAGWZ-GR:ST

Transfer flag Flag stackFlag stack Transfer flagTransfer direction keys (840C T version) to axesAperiodic program callG functions decodingTransfer interface DB to I/Q/FTransfer I/Q/F to interface DBTransfer NC channel DB channelTransfer DB channel NC channelTransfer spindle DB spindleTransfer DB spindle spindleTransfer axis DB axisTransfer DB axis axisTransfer machine control panel NC channelTransfer machine control panel DB axis (840C M version)

Modes - LED activationRead block initial address

Sequence cascade forwards/backwards Sequence cascade automaticSequence cascade forwards/backwards Graph 5Sequence cascade automatik Graph 5Computer link FBReserved, transfer TO dataReservedReservedReservedGlobal functionsMessagesFile transfer (operator prompt)ReservedReservedReservedReservedSubroutine for FB101SubroutineReservedSearch wordSearch routineEmpty location search without presetSearch direction symmetricalSearch direction forwardsSearch direction backwardsSet up tool managementSet up magazine tableTool size standardReservedReserved

OSOSOSOSOSOSOSOSOSOSOSOSOSOSOS

OSOS

0000CL, 4CL, 5CLCL CLCL, 4CL, 4CL, 4CLCLCL CLCL, 4CL, 4CL011OS11

1111

Abbreviations:

OS PLC operating system0 FB package 01 FB package 14 FB package 4 of the

computer linkCL Computer link

Note:

The blocks marked * are function macros integrated in the PLCoperating system. (See Function Macros Description)


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)




121122123124125126128129130131132133134135136137138139140141142143144145146147148149150151152153154155156157158159160 1)

161 1)

162 1)

163 1)

164 1)

165 1)

166 1)

167 1)

168 1)

169 1)

170 1)

LEERPL2WZ-BSUP: T=IDUP: T=PL

TRANSFER

TOS-VERUP: MD-BUP: MD-WRI-AUSWTODAT-WD-NR:WZWWZDAT-LS

DYN-PUFFDAT-VERTUP: FB139UP: KC-0UP: KC1-4UP: KC5-7UP:KC8+9BEL-CDTRENT-CDTRCT-FORMAT

NP-SIFAD-ADRK: AW-SSLOCHSTEGSTAZ/VWGSTUE/VWGWZ-SPERBCD-DUAL

ReservedEmpty location search with presetPrepare toolSubprogram TO-search T = IdentSubprogram TO-search T = LocationReservedTransfer TO dataReservedSubprogramSubprogram MD bitsSubprogram MD wordsDirection selectionSubprogramD-No. loading after TO changeRead TO dataReservedManagement of I/O data bufferProcessing of I/O data bufferFB 139 subprogramsFB 139 subprogramsFB 139 subprogramsFB 139 subprogramsFB 139 subprogramsLoad tool with code carrierUnload tool with code carrierFormattingReservedReservedReserved Reserved SubprogramSubprogramUser interface to CL (processing)Tape inputTool life monitoring / early warning limitQuantity monitoring / early warning limitTool disableBCD-DUAL conversionCentral call blockSR controlReserveReserveTransfer TO selectionReserveSignal: load spindleSignal: unload spindleAcknowledge spindleReserveBuffer storage allocation

1111111111111111111111166666111111111111111111111

Abbreviations:

1 FB package 16 FB package 6

_______1) The blocks are given in the operator interface example of tool management.





171 1)

172 1)

173 1)

174 1)

175 1)

176 1)

177 1)

178 1) 179 1) 180 1) 181 1) 182 1) 183 1) 184 1) 185 1) 186 1) 187 1) 188 1) 189 1) 190 1) 191 1) 192 1) 193 1) 194 1) 195196197198199

WZ-LISTETAUSCHLFIFO

Magazine allocationTool selection according to T No.Load/unload magazine from preselection / spindleReserveTO data display from buffer storage allocationTO data modification from buffer storage allocationTO data display from magazine allocationTO data modification from magazine allocationTO selection according to cursor pos. from magaz. alloc.Additional cutting edge from buffer storage and magazineAdditional cutting edge from loadLoadUnloadReserveManual acknowledgeManual termination magazine / spindleDisplay next cutting edgeReactivate TODelete next cutting edgeSelect load display tapeAcknowledge tape positive / negativeTerminate tapeReserveReserveReservedReservedCreate tool listCreate exchange listBuffer processing

11111111111111111111111111111

Abbreviations:

1 FB package 1

_______1) The blocks are given in the operator interface example of tool management.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


2.3.2 Class FX function blocks


Function blocks FX 0 ... 99 are reserved for Siemens applications.

FX No. FX design. FX name Pack.

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223252627282930313233343536373839404142434445464748495051525354

SI

SIMULATWZ-GRIEP

BEL-CDTRENT-CDTRUP-CDTR

DAT-EINDAT-AUSDAT-UHR

GRAYDUALDUALGRAYRECHNENMESSENRESREQ

PRO-K01PRO-K02RK:WZABFRK:WZMRK:WZBELRK:WZENTRK:WZBGBRK:KASSE

UPWZKASSE/A-TRANUPWZDIAL

Self-installationReserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Simulation of a part programTool size default via EPROMReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedLoad code carrierUnload code carrierSubroutine code carrierReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedPLC-controlled data inputPLC-controlled data outputDate/Time of dayReservedReservedGRAY/Binary code converterBinary/GRAY code converterContour and technology computationMeasuring in JOG modeTrigger link bus resetReservedReservedProgram coordination 1)

FX 38 subroutineComputer link, scan toolComputer link, report toolComputer link, load toolComputer link, unload toolComputer link, load magazine assignment dataTool cassette machiningReservedReservedSubroutine tool cassette machiningData transfer I/O buffer tool managementTOOL DIALOG subroutineReservedReservedReservedReserved

OS

111111

777CLCLCLCLCL

888CLCL00CPCPCLCLCL00555555

555

Abbreviations:

0 FB package 01 FB package 15 FB package 57 FB package 78 FB package 8OS Operating systemCP Cycle packageCL Computer link

_______1) As from SW 2




FX No. FX design. FX name Pack.

555657585960676869707172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596979899

PRO-MESSTP-UEBTP-BEARBDRU-AUSGPRO-UP1OEM-SENDOEM-EMPFAX-G-FKT

IkonenSTERNDRE

ReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedLogging of measured dataTransfer part programProcess part programPrintout SubroutineSend data to MMC (reserved for OEM customers) 2)

Receive data from MMC (reserved for OEM customers) 2)

Decode axis-specific G functions 2)

ReservedReserved address computation flag areaReservedReservedReservedDisplay of icons 1)

Star-delta changeover 2)

Reserved PG functionsReserved PG functionsReserved PG functionsReserved PG functionsReserved PG functionsReserved PG functionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReserved

88888

888OSOS00

00

Abbreviations:

OS PLC operating system8 FB package 80 FB package 0

Important:

1. Make sure that there is no risk of confusion with SINUMERIK blocks. Users must not useSINUMERIK standard block names or assign SINUMERIK library numbers to their userblocks.

2. In the range FB 0...FB 199FX 0...FX 99, SINUMERIK blocks have absolute priority.

If SINUMERIK blocks must be used at a later time with numbers that coincide with userblock numbers, the user block numbers must be renamed.

_______1) As from SW 22) As from SW 33) SINUMERIK 840C, OEM-Doku, User's Guide4) Planning Guide Function Macros


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


2.4 Basic signals

2.4 Basic signals

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.

Byte No.

FY 0 Flashingfrequency

0.5 Hz One Zero

FY 1

FY 2OB 7 OB 6 OB 5 OB 4 OB 3 OB 2 OB 1

FY 3OB 7 OB 6 OB 5 OB 4 OB 3 OB 2 OB 1 OB 20

FY 4OB 7 OB 6 OB 5 OB 4 OB 3 OB 2 OB 1

FY 5 Addressingerror

detection

Blocksegmentviolation

Info bit foralarm

package 2)PLC

number 1)

FY 6OB 7 OB 6 OB 5 OB 4 OB 3 OB 2

GroupmessageLIM/SIM

PLC auxiliary signals (Section 3.1)

No. of current processing level (OB No.)

B a s i c s e t t i n g

C o l d r e s t a r t

P a r a m e t e r t e s t

P r o c e s s i n g d e l a y

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.

Byte No.

FY 7

FY 87 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

FY 97 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

FY 107 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

FY 11

PLC ready signals (Section 3.2)

Interrupt inputs for interrupt byte 1



Interrupt inputs for interrupt byte 4 or centralinterrupt byte on INT PLC

_______1) Always ”1” with 840C

2) As from SW 3



2.4 Basic signals

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.

Byte No.

FY 12

FY 13

FY 14

FY 15

FY 16

FY 17

FY 18

FY 19

Signals for alarm-controlled machining (Section 3.3)

N e g a t i v e e d g e o f p r o c e s s a l a r m b y t eB y t e N o . n

P o s i t i v e e d g e o f p r o c e s s a l a r m b y t eB y t e N o . n

B y t e N o. ( n + 1 )

B y t e N o. ( n + 2 )

B y t e N o. ( n + 1 )

B y t e N o. ( n + 2 )

B y t e N o. ( n + 3 )

B y t e N o. ( n + 3 )

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.

Byte No.

FY 20

FY 21 2ndinterface

CL

1stinterface

CL

FY 22 Signal toCSB: data

saved (fromSW 6.3)

Signalfrom CSB:

powerfailure (from

SW 6.3)

Drivesready

(from SW 6)

NC CPUready

(from SW 6)

MMC CPUready

FY 23

NC ready signals (Section 3.4)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.

Byte No.

FY 24 Probeselected

1

Probeselected

2

NC alarmwith proces-

sing stopCPUfailure

Over-tem-perature/fan failure

Tempera-ture pre-warning

Batteryprewarning

NC alarmon

Individual signals (Section 3.5)


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


2.4.1 Assignment of DB 1 (diagnostics) (Section 3.6)


7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.DWNo.

DW 0

DW 1

DW 2

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Cycle times(KF format in ms)

Actual cycle time

Minimum cycle time

Maximum cycle time

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.DWNo.

DL 10

DR 10

DL 1215 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

DR 127 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

DL 1331 30 29 28 27 26 25 24

DR 1323 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

DL 1415 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

DR 147 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

DL 1531 30 29 28 27 26 25 24

DR 1523 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Input I/O group not ready

Output I/O group not ready

ID of I/O type

Input I/O groupnot ready

1: Fault0: no fault

Output I/O groupnot ready

1: Fault0: no fault




7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.DWNo.

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Semaphoretechnique withinprocessing levels

Event counterprocessing timedelay

DW 16

DW 17

DW 18

DW 19

DW 20

DW 21

DW 22

DW 23

DW 24

DW 25

DW 26

DW 27

Number of lost requests during LIM/SIM OB2






Event counter processing time delayOB 2OB 3

OB 4

OB 5

OB 6

OB 7

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.DWNo.

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

DW 30...

DW 45

DW 46...

DW 61

DW 70...

DW 159

Fault messageInput byte1: Fault0: No faultFault messageOutput byte1: Fault0: No faultDisplaystatus registerDMP modules

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DW 160DW 161

:DW 167

Error fine coding

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Error fine coding in diagnostics DB error number


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.

Byte No.

DW 168

DW 169

DW 170

DW 171

DW 172

DW 173

DW 174

DW 175

DW 176

DW 177

Software releases

Interface DMP 1st interfaceSoftware release Int. version number

Reserved

Interface DMP 1st interfaceModule code 1) Slot number (hexadecimal)

Interface DMP 2nd interfaceSoftware release Int. version number

Interface DMP 2nd interface or INTEU/16BModule code 1) Slot number (hexadecimal)

Interface PLC 135 WB2/WDSoftware release Int. version number

Interface PLC 135 WB2/WDModule code 1) Slot number (hexadecimal)

Reserved

PLC softwareSoftware release Int. version number

Reserved

Note:

The order of the I/O modules does not solely depend on the slot position. The followingallocations always apply:

– The interface PLC/interface 135 WD is always the 3rd interface– The INTEU 16 bit is always the 2nd interface– The interface DMP can be set as the 1st or 2nd interface, depending on its slot number

counting from left to right.– With the PLC 135 WD, a second interface DMP can be used in the 18 SEP subrack

(SEP=standard slot dimension).

_______1) Module code (binary)

1010 01 xx Interface DMP

0110 11 xx INT EU/16B

0111 10 xx Interface PLC/135 WB2

1000 11 xx Interface 135 WD

xx=̂ Hardware version



2.4.2 High-speed data channels

2.4.2 High-speed data channels (as from SW 4)

2.4.2.1 DB 2 Configuration DB

......

...

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DL 0With

acknowl.Read/write STROBE

DR 0

DL 1

DR 1

DL 2

DR 2

DL 3

DR 3

DL 4

DR 4

DL 5

DR 5

DL 6

DR 6

DL 7

DR 7

Configuration DB (see Installation Instructions, Section 12)

O p e r a t i n g m o d e

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

E r r o r c o d e o f N C

J o b N o. o f P L C

N o . o f d a t a t r a n s f e r a r e a

U p d a t i n g r a t e N C

F u n c t i o n i d e n t i f i e r

C o n f i g u r a t i o n p a r a m e t e r 1 L O W

C o n f i g u r a t i o n p a r a m e t e r 1 H I G H







DL 31

DR 31

R e s e r v e d

R e s e r v e d

R e s e r v e d

R e s e r v e d


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


2.4.2 High-speed data channels

2.4.2.2 DB 3 Data transfer areas

......

...

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DL 0Data

channel 8Data

channel 7Data

channel 6Data

channel 5Data

channel 4Data

channel 3Data

channel 2Data

channel 1

DR 0Data

channel 16Data

channel 15Data

channel 14Data

channel 13Data

channel 12Data

channel 11Data

channel 10Data

channel 9

DL 1Data

channel 24Data

channel 23Data

channel 22Data

channel 21Data

channel 20Data

channel 19Data

channel 18Data

channel 17

DR 1Data

channel 32Data

channel 31Data

channel 30Data

channel 29Data

channel 28Data

channel 27Data

channel 26Data

channel 25

DL 2Data

channel 8Data

channel 7Data

channel 6Data

channel 5Data

channel 4Data

channel 3Data

channel 2Data

channel 1

DR 2Data

channel 16Data

channel 15Data

channel 14Data

channel 13Data

channel 12Data

channel 11Data

channel 10Data

channel 9

DL 3Data

channel 24Data

channel 23Data

channel 22Data

channel 21Data

channel 20Data

channel 19Data

channel 18Data

channel 17

DR 3Data

channel 32Data

channel 31Data

channel 30Data

channel 29Data

channel 28Data

channel 27Data

channel 26Data

channel 25

Data transfer areas (see Installation Instructions, Section 12)

A c t i v a t i o n b i t s o f P L C

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8




S t a t u s b i t s of NC " C o n f i g u r a t i o n o f d a t a c h a n n e l v a l i d "




......

...

DW 13 R e s e r v e d

DL 14 P o i n t e r t o d a t a t r a n f e r a r e a 1( = N o. o f d a t a w o r d )

DR 14 P o i n t e r t o d a t a t r a n f e r a r e a 2( = N o. o f d a t a w o r d )

DL 29 P o i n t e r t o d a t a t r a n f e r a r e a 31( = N o. o f d a t a w o r d )

DR 29 P o i n t e r t o d a t a t r a n f e r a r e a 32( = N o. o f d a t a w o r d )

DL 30DR 30DL x

DR x Error onwriting NC

data

Error onreading NC

data

Synchron-ous datachannel

"New value”writing ofNC data

"New value”reading ofNC data

DLx+1 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DRx+1 Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8

DLx+2 Bit 23 Bit 22 Bit 21 Bit 20 Bit 19 Bit 18 Bit 17 Bit 16

DRx+2 Bit 31 Bit 30 Bit 29 Bit 28 Bit 27 Bit 26 Bit 25 Bit 24

C o n t r o l b i t s

V A L U E

V A L U E

V A L U E

V A L U E

DW 4 R e s e r v e d

J o b N o . ( A c k n o w l e d g e m e n t f r o m N C )

DR 12 New valueWriting ofNC data

New valueReading ofNC data

C o n t r o l b i t s

Synchronous data channels

______________x = data transfer area nos. 1 to 32 via pointers (DW 14 to 29)



2.5 NCK/PLC interface

2.5 NCK/PLC interface

2.5.1 Channel-specific signals

2.5.1.1 Signals to NCK channel (DB 10 ... DB 13, as from SW 4 DB 15)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DL 0DRF 1) Reset 1)2) CANCEL 4)

DR 0Skip block Single block DEC single

blockDry run feed

rate M01 activeNo reduction

of channelpath

velocity8)

DL 1ESR On

Feedrateoverrideeffective E D C B A

DR 1ESR Off

Rapidtraverseoverrideeffective D C B A

DL 2 Executionfrom exter-

nal

Blocksearch withcalculation

Bl. searchwith calcu-

lation as fromlast main

block

Internal WAITmark synchr.

with blocksearch 8)

Progr.start/endcycles off

7)

Programstep

(PSTEP) 5)

Break(BRK) 5)

Clear(CLR) 5)

DR 2 Deletedistance to

go

Delete no.of subrout.

passes NC Stop NC Start

DL 3C B A

DR 3

DL 4Level 8 Level 7 Level 6 Level 5 Level 4 Level 3 Level 2 Level 1

DR 4

DL 5JOG TEACH IN MDA AUT

DR 5REPOS REF VAR 10 000 INC 1 000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC

Signals to NCK channel (Section 4.2)

Functions

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

F e e d r a t e o v e r r i d e

Rapid traverse override

Spindle number 6)

Block skip at several levels (activation) 3)

Operating modes 1)

_______1) For SW 1: If this signal is selected in the 1st channel (master channel) of an operating mode group, it also

applies to all other channels in the group. The reset signal specific to the operating mode group can beselected only in the master channel.

2) SW 2 (RESET): The effect of RESET is channel-specific. Single channels of a mode group can be set to thereset state without influencing other channels.

3) As from SW 24) As from SW 2: Whether Cancel is to act on all channel-specific alarms or to the selected (current) channel

only can be set by MD 50008.0.5) As from SW 36) As from SW 3, power indication becomes active in the operating mode basic displays for digital spindles.7) SW 5 and higher8) As from SW 5.6


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DL 6m+7 m+6 m+5 m+4 m+3 m+2 m+1 m+0

DR 6m+15 m+14 m+13 m+12 m+11 m+10 m+9 m+8

DL 7m+23 m+22 m+21 m+20 m+19 m+18 m+17 m+16

DR 7m+31 m+30 m+29 m+28 m+27 m+26 m+25 m+24

DL 8m+39 m+38 m+37 m+36 m+35 m+34 m+33 m+32

DR 8m+47 m+46 m+45 m+44 m+43 m+42 m+41 m+40

DL 9m+55 m+54 m+53 m+52 m+51 m+50 m+49 m+48

DR 9m+63 m+62 m+61 m+60 m+59 m+58 m+57 m+56

DL 10m+71 m+70 m+69 m+68 m+67 m+66 m+65 m+64

DR 10m+79 m+78 m+77 m+76 m+75 m+74 m+73 m+72

DL 11m+87 m+86 m+85 m+84 m+83 m+82 m+81 m+80

DR 11m+95 m+94 m+93 m+92 m+91 m+90 m+89 m+88

DL 12

DR 12

Signals to NCK channel (Section 4.2)

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

R e a d - i n d i s a b l e

G e n e r a l f e e d d i s a b l e


G e n e r a l f e e d d i s a b l ea n d r e a d - i n d i s a bl e






N C s t a r t d i s a b l e


N C s t a r t d i s a b l e

123456

DB 10DB 11DB 12DB 13DB 14DB 15

60006100620063006400 (as from SW 4)6500 (as from SW 4)

InterfaceDB

Message text addressm

Chan-nel

Notes:

• The bytes DL 6 ... DR 11 can also be analyzed for error and/or operational messages. Thesetting is made using PLC MD 6032 - 6047.

• The NC start disable is not active in other mode groups. If, e.g. the channels 1 and 2 ofmode group 1 are disabled for NC Start, NC Start becomes active in the channels of modegroup 2.




2.5.1.2 Signals from NCK channel (DB 10...DB 13, as from SW 4 DB 15)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DL 13 M00/

M01

M02/M30/

Reset

G33/G63 G00 G96

Blocksearchactive

Programinterrupted

Programrunning

DR 13 Transform-ation active G36 2)

DL 14 Skip blockselected Reserved

DEC singleblock

selected

Dry runfeedrateselected

M 01selected

Feedrateoverride forrapid trav.selected

DRFselected

Teach in/Play back(as fromSW 6)

DR 14 Executionfrom ex-ternal

Blocksearch withcalculation

Blocksearch withcalculationas from lastmain block

Extendedoverstoring

active 3)

Progr.start/end

cycles off 4)

Programstep

(PSTEP) 2)

Break(BRK) 2)

Clear(CLR) 2)

DL 15 Bl. searchwith calc.

without error

Bl. searchwith calc. asfr. last main

block w/oerror

InternalWAIT marker

(channelwaits for

synchroni-zation)

(as fromSW 6)

DR 15 Error duringblock

search withcalc.

Error duringbl. search withcalc. as fromlast main bl.

ESR 1)

monitoringis active 3)

ESR 1)

response istriggered 3)

DL 16 NC STARTdisable

Protectionspace

adaptationnot possible

(as fromSW 6)

NC alarmwith

machiningstop

NC STARTpossible

Channel inreset

Mode group

ready

NC alarmpresent

DR 16

Signals from NCK channel (Section 4.3)

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

_______1) As from SW 2

2) As from SW 3

3) As from SW 4

4) As from SW 5


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



2.5.1.3 Auxiliary functions from NCK channel (DB 10 ... DB 13,as from SW 4 DB 15)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DL 17 FModifi-cation

DModifi-cation

HModifi-cation

TModifi-cation

SModifi-cation

M word 3Modifi-cation



DR 17 Last in-formation

Fastauxiliary

function 1)

M word 3not

decoded

M word 2not

decoded

M word 1not

decoded

Modification signals (Section 4.4.3)

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DL 18M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0

DR 18M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0

DL 19M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M9 M8

DR 19M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M9 M8

DL 20M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18 M17 M16

DR 20M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18 M17 M16

DL 21M31 M30 M29 M28 M27 M26 M25 M24

DR 21M31 M30 M29 M28 M27 M26 M25 M24

Decoded M functions (Section 4.4.3)

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Dynamic M signals

Static M signals

Dynamic M signals

Static M signals

Dynamic M signals

Static M signals

Dynamic M signals

Static M signals

_______1) As from SW 2




7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DL 22M39 M38 M37 M36 M35 M34 M33 M32

DR 22M39 M38 M37 M36 M35 M34 M33 M32

DL 23M47 M46 M45 M44 M43 M42 M41 M40

DR 23M47 M46 M45 M44 M43 M42 M41 M40

DL 24M55 M54 M53 M52 M51 M50 M49 M48

DR 24M55 M54 M53 M52 M51 M50 M49 M48

DL 25M63 M62 M61 M60 M59 M58 M57 M56

DR 25M63 M62 M61 M60 M59 M58 M57 M56

DL 26M71 M70 M69 M68 M67 M66 M65 M64

DR 26M71 M70 M69 M68 M67 M66 M65 M64

DL 27M79 M78 M77 M76 M75 M74 M73 M72

DR 27M79 M78 M77 M76 M75 M74 M73 M72

DL 28M87 M86 M85 M84 M83 M82 M81 M80

DR 28M87 M86 M85 M84 M83 M82 M81 M80

DL 29M95 M94 M93 M92 M91 M90 M89 M88

DR 29M95 M94 M93 M92 M91 M90 M89 M88

DL 30M99 M98 M97 M96

DR 30M99 M98 M97 M96

Decoded M functions (Section 4.4.3)

Dynamic M signals

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Static M signals

Dynamic M signals

Static M signals

Dynamic M signals

Static M signals

Dynamic M signals

Static M signals

Dynamic M signals

Static M signals

Dynamic M signals

Static M signals

Dynamic M signals

Static M signals

Dynamic M signals

Static M signals

Dynamic M signals

Static M signals


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



High-order byte (DL) Low-order byte (DR)Data

wort No.

DW 31Bit 15 Bit 0

DW 32Bit 15 Bit 0

DW 33Bit 15 Bit 0

DW 34Bit 15 Bit 0

DW 35Bit 15 Bit 0

DW 36Bit 15 Bit 0

DW 37Bit 15 Bit 0

DW 38Bit 31 Bit 16

DW 39Bit 15 Bit 0

Stored words of block information (Section 4.4.3)

Extended address M word 1 (binary)

M word 1 (binary)


M word 2 (binary)


M word 3 (binary)

Extended S address (binary or BCD)

101 100

S word (binary or BCD)

107 106 105 104

S word (binary or BCD)

103 102 101 100

Chan. InterfaceDB

1234

5 1)

6 1)

DB 10DB 11DB 12DB 13DB 14Db 15

5440.3 -.4 -.5 -.6 -.75441.3 -.4 -.5 -.6 -.75442.3 -.4 -.5 -.6 -.75443.3 -.4 -.5 -.6 -.75444.3 -.4 -.5 -.6 -.75445.3 -.4 -.5 -.6 -.7

NC MD for BCD outputS T D H F

_______*) As from SW 4




High-order byte (DL) Low-order byte (DR)DatawordNo.

DW 40Bit 15 Bit 0

DW 41Bit 31 Bit 16

DW 42Bit 15 Bit 0

DW 43Bit 15 Bit 0

DW 44Bit 31 Bit 16

DW 45Bit 15 Bit 0

DW 46Bit 15 Bit 0

DW 47Bit 15 Bit 0

DW 48Bit 31 Bit 16

DW 49Bit 15 Bit 0

DL 51Level 8 Level 7 Level 6 Level 5 Level 4 Level 3 Level 2 Level 1

DR 51

Stored words of block information (Section 4.4.3)

Extended T address (binary or BCD)101 100

T word (binary or BCD) 107 106 105 104

T word (binary or BCD) 103 102 101 100

Extended H address (binary or BCD)101 100

H word (binary or BCD) 107 106 105 104

H word (binary or BCD) 103 102 101 100

D word (binary or BCD) 102 101 100

Extended F address101 100

F word1)

10n+7 10n+6 10n+5 10n+4

F word1)

10n+3 10n+2 10n+1 10n

Select block skip at several levels 2)

_______1) Is dependent on input resolution (e. g. 10–3=̂n=–3) and on G95 (n=–3) or G94 (n=–2). The speed is higher

than with G95 by a factor of 10.2) As from SW 2


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a























7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DL 52 Programcoord.

modific.

DR 52

DL 53

DR 53

DL 54

DR 54

DL 55

DR 55Chann. 6 2) Chann. 5 2) Channel 4 Channel 3 Channel 2 Channel 1

Signals from program coordination 1)

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Program coordination (SET) active in

Program coordination (SET) active in

Marker/program number (BCD)101 100




Command code

________1) These signals must not be overwritten in the program coordination function.

2) As from SW 4




7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DL 56Buffer

assigned

DR 56

DL 57

DR 57

DL 58

DR 58

DL 59


DL 60


DL 61

DR 61

DL 62End of pro-

gramreached

[WAIT E]

NC alarm3166 "Wrong

programcoordination"

Read-indisable

1)

NC START

1)

Signals to program coordination 2)

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Buffer for command code

Buffer for marker/program number (BCD)




Buffer for program coordination (SET) active in

Program coordination (ACT) reached in

Program coordination (ACT) reached in

Detailed error coding


Buffer for program coordination (SET) active in

________1) These signals are to be used only for program coordination.2) These signals must not be overwritten in the program coordination function.3) As from SW 4


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DL 63 SuppressT/H word

routing

DR 63 Coordi-nation errormessage

Suppressrouting

messageH word

validT wordvalid

DW 64Bit 15 Bit 0

DW 65Bit 15 Bit 0

DW 66Bit 15 Bit 0

DW 67Bit 15 Bit 0

DW 68Bit 15 Bit 0

DW 69Bit 15 Bit 0

T/H word routing (Section 4.4.4)

Reserved

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Routed H word 101 100

Routed H word 103 102

Routed H word (address extension)101 100

Routed T word 101 100

Routed T word 103 102

Source channel number (address extension, binary)

Chan-nel

IS DB NC MD for BCD outputS T D H F

1234

51)

61)


5440.3 -.4 -.5 -.6 -.75441.3 -.4 -.5 -.6 -.75442.3 -.4 -.5 -.6 -.75443.3 -.4 -.5 -.6 -.75444.3 -.4 -.5 -.6 -.75445.3 -.4 -.5 -.6 -.7




7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DL 70 2)

DL 80 3) Axis 8 Axis 7 Axis 6 Axis 5 Axis 4 Axis 3 Axis 2 Axis 1

DR 70 2)

DR 80 3) Axis 16 Axis 15 Axis 14 Axis 13 Axis 12 Axis 11 Axis 10 Axis 9

DL 71 2)

DL 81 3)Axis 24 Axis 23 Axis 22 Axis 21 Axis 20 Axis 19 Axis 18 Axis 17

DR 71 2)

DR 81 3)Store

traversedaxes only

Axis 30 Axis 29 Axis 28 Axis 27 Axis 26 Axis 25

TEACH-IN: Axis marking (signals from NCK channel, Section 4.4.5) 1)

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DL 72 2)

DL 82 3) Axis 8 Axis 7 Axis 6 Axis 5 Axis 4 Axis 3 Axis 2 Axis 1

DR 72 2)

DR 82 3) Axis 16 Axis 15 Axis 14 Axis 13 Axis 12 Axis 11 Axis 10 Axis 9

DL 73 2)

DL 83 3)Axis 24 Axis 23 Axis 22 Axis 21 Axis 20 Axis 19 Axis 18 Axis 17

DR 73 2)

DR 83 3)Store

traversedaxes only

Axis 30 Axis 29 Axis 28 Axis 27 Axis 26 Axis 25

TEACH-IN: Axis marking (signals to NCK channel, Section 4.4.5) 1)

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Note:

In SW 3, the TEACH-IN axis markings are stored in DW 70-73, as from SW 4 in DW 80-83.

_______1) As from SW 32) SW 33) As from SW 4


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



2.5.1.4 Axis-specific Safety Integrated signals (DB28) (as from SW 5.4)

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a




















The Safety Integrated function is an option.

For a further description, refer to the

SINUMERIK Safety Integrated documentation.




2.5.1.5 Axis-specific GI signals (DB 29) 1)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Byte No.

DL k Accelerationlimitation

synchronousactive

ESRmonitoringis active

Compensat.controller

active

Wait forpos.-relatedswitching 2)

FA overlayactive

Synchroniz-ation busy Link active

DR k Controlledfollow-up

motion FAMaximum

accelerationMaximumvelocity

Accel. warnthresholdreached

Veloc. warnthresholdreached

Synchron-ous motion

fine

Synchron-ous motion

coarse

DLk+1

Synchroniz.positionreached

ESRresponse is

triggered

DRk+1

Identifierfollowing

axis

ESRresponse isprogrmd. 2)

RequestLINK Off

RequestLINK On

Signals from axis (Section 6.3)

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DL k+2

ActivateESR

monitoring

Pos.-relatedswitching

ON 2)

On-the-flysynchroni-zation ON

LINK–ON

DR k+2

DisableESR

monitoringLINK–OFF

DLk+3

DRk+3

Compensatesynchr.motion

difference *

Accelerationlimit

SYNCHRON-OUS

EnableESR

response 2)

Compensat-ory

controllerON

Enablefollowing

axis overlayInterlock

LINK–OFFInterlockLINK–ON

Signals to axis (Section 6.3)

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

123456789

101112131415

048

121620242832364044485256

161718192021222324252627282930

60646872768084889296

100104108112116

Axis Address K Axis Address K

_______1) As from SW 32) As from SW 4* See DB 31, K+27, bit 7 for description of signal


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



2.5.1.6 Axis-specific 611-D signals (DB 29)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DL k+120

User-progr.ble 1)

message 6

User-progr.ble 1)

message 5

User-progr.ble 1)

message 4

User-progr.ble 1)

message 3

User-progr.ble 1)

message 2

User-progr.ble 1)

message 1

Heat sinkprewarning

1)

Motortemperatureprewarng. 1)

DR k+120 Pulse

enable 1)

Driveswitched on

2)Drive ready

1)

Motorselection bit

1 1)

Motorselection bit

0 1)Parameterblock 2 1)

Parameterblock 1 1)

Parameterblock 0 1)

DLk+121

Traverserequest

drive test 2)

DR k+121

ZK2 generatorspeed <minimum

speedgenerator axis

(MD 1635)

ZK2emergency

retraction orDC link gener-

ator active

ZK2 DC linkvoltage <emergencyretractionthreshold(MD 1634)

ZK2 DC linkvoltage <warning

threshold(MD 1604)

Signals from axis

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DL k+122

Reserve611D-XM1

1)

Reserve611D-XM1

1)

Reserve611D-XM1

1)

Reserve611D-XM1

1)

Set speedsmoothing

1)

2ndtorquelimit 1)

Ramp-function generator

rapid stop 1)

DR k+122

Pulseenable 1)

Integratordisable 1)

Motorselection

executed 1)

Motorselection bit

1 1)

Motorselection bit

0 1)

Parameterblock 2 1)

Parameterblock 1 1)

Parameterblock 0 1)

DLk+123

Motionenable drive

test 2)

Signals to axis

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

123456789

101112131415

048

121620242832364044485256

161718192021222324252627282930

60646872768084889296

100104108112116


_______

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a aa a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

The description of these signals is identical to the signals:

”Interface signals for the drive 611D”, DB 31.

1) SW 3, used by 611D2) SW 3, used by SERVO




2.5.1.7 M signals (DB 30) decoded according to list

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

Signals decoded according to list (Section 6.4)

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

DL 63

DR 63

DL 0

DR 0

DL 1

DR 1

Dynamic M signals

Static M signals

Dynamic M signals

Static M signals

Dynamic M signals

Static M signals

The bit field is common to all channels. A maximum of 64 M functions per channel can bedecoded according to the list.

Decoding list contentsDef. of

DW No.in DB30

M address

0 - 9999(KF)

Extended Maddress

1 - 99(KF)

64thvalue

2ndvalue

.

.

.

.

.

.

1stvalue

DW 0 DW 1

DW 191

0 - 63(KY)

DL 2

DL 192

0 - 7(KY)

stat. bit

DR 2

DR 192

DL 4DW 4DW 3 DR 5

DW 190

Def. ofbit No.

in DB30

Chan. Decodinglist

6009.0.1.2.3.4.5


1234

5 1)

6 1)

PLC MD for decoding

_______1) As from SW 4


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


2.5.2 Spindle-specific signals (DB 31)


2.5.2.1 Signals from spindle

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DL k Actualrotation

clockwiseProg. speed

too highSpindle inset range

Spindlepositionreached

Spindlestop

Spindlesyn-

chronized

Spindlepositioning

activeSpeed limitexceeded

DR k Changegear C B A

Signals from spindle (Section 5.2)

Set gear stage

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

2.5.2.2 Signals to spindle

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DLk+1

Switch overservo gainfactor (Kv)

Controllerenable

Input setvalue 0

Spindleoverrideeffective D C B A

DRk+1 Spindle

resetInvert

M03/M04

Initiate Caxis opera-

tion C B A

DLk+2

1) Feed-forward

control off* E D C B A

DRk+2 Set rotation

cwOscillation

speedBasicspeed

Positionspindle

Resyn-chronizespindle

Acknowl-edge M19

PLC spindlecontrol

DLk+3 n+7 n+6 n+5 n+4 n+3 n+2 n+1 n+0

DRk+3 n+15 n+14 n+13 n+12 n+11 n+10 n+9 n+8

Signals to spindle (Section 5.3)

Spindle override

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

S p i n d l e d i s a b l e

S p i n d l e d i s a b l e

Channel number 2)

Actual gear stage

_______1) SW 2 and higher

2) NC MD 540*.2 must be set for this function.

* Signal is active at 0




2.5.2.3 Spindle-specific GI signals from spindle 1)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DLk+24

Accelera-tion limit

synchron-ous active

ESRmonitoringis active

Compensat-ory

controlleractive

Followingspindleoverlayactive

Synchroni-zation busy Link active

DRk+24

Controlledfollow-upmotion of

foll. spindleMaximum

accelerationMaximumvelocity

Accel. warnthresholdreached

Veloc. warnthresholdreached

Synchro-nous motion

fine

Synchro-nous motion

coarse

DLk+25

Synchroniz-ation

positionreached

ESRresponse is

triggered

DRk+25

Identifierfollowingspindle

ESRresponse isprogramd 2)

RequestLINK-OFF

RequestLINK-ON

DLk+49

Slaveoperationactive 3)

C axisactive 2)

DRk+49


15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

GI = Gear interpolation

2.5.2.4 Spindle-specific GI signals to spindle 1)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DL k+26

ActivateESR

monitoring

Pos.-relatedswitching

ON

On-the-flysynchroniza-

tion ONLINK–ON

DR k+26

DisableESR

monitoringLINK–OFF

DLk+27

DRk+27

Compensatesynchroniz.difference

Acceler. limitSYNCHRO-

NOUS

Enable ESR

response 2)

Compens.controller

ON

Enable foll.spindleoverlay

InterlockLINK–OFF

InterlockLINK–ON

Signals to spindle

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

_______1) As from SW 3

2) As from SW 4

3) As from SW 4.4


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



Notes:

• A maximum of 15 servo loops is possible (axes and spindles). With Software Version 5and higher, max. 30 servo loops are possible (axes and spindles) with digital drives.

• The message text address n is required for the error and operational messages. TheSPINDLE DISABLE signals can additionally be checked for error messages via PLC MD6034. The results of this check can be set as operational messages via PLC MD 6042.The function blocks required for the check/display are contained in FB package 0.

Spindle Address K Message text

address

PLC MD for

processing 3)

123456

048

121620

800080208040806080808100

6012.0.1.2.3.4.5

2.5.2.5 Star-delta switchover, 611D

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DL k+72

User-pro-grammable

message 6 1)

User-pro-grammable

message 5 1)

User-pro-grammable

message 4 1)

User-pro-grammable

message 3 1)

User-pro-grammable

message 2 1)

User-pro-grammable

message 1 1)

Heat sinktemperatureprewarng. 1)

Motortemperatureprewarng. 1)

DR k+72

Pulses areenabled 1)

Driveswitched on

2)

Drive ready1)

Motorselection bit

1 1)

Motorselection bit

0 1)

Parameterset 2 1)

Parameterset 1 1)

Parameterset 0 1)

DL k+73

Travelrequest

drive test

DR k+73

ZK2 generatorspeed <minimum

speedgenerator axis

(MD 1635)

ZK2 emergen-cy retraction

or DC linkgenertr active

ZK2 DC linkvoltage<

emergencyretractionthreshold(MD 1634)

ZK2 DC linkvoltage <warning

threshold(MD 1604)


15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Reserved

_______1) SW 3, used by 611D

2) SW 3, used by SERVO

3) Up to SW 2




7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DL k+50

Parkingspindle 2)

Slaveoperationactive 5)

Gear ratiomonitoring

off 3)

DR k+50DL

k+51DR

k+51 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0


15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Parameter group "Position control" 4)

Actual parameter set number"Speed ratio" 4)

Reserved

Reserved

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DL k+74

Reserve611D-AM1

1)

Reserve611D-AM1

1)

Reserve611D-AM1

1)

Reserve611D-AM1

1)

Set speedsmoothing

1)2nd torque

limit 1)

Ramp-function

generatorrapid stop 1)

DR k+74

Pulseenable 1)

Disableintegrator 1)

Motorselection

executed 1)

Motorselection

bit 1 1)

Motorselection

bit 0 1)Parameter

set 2 1)Parameter

set 1 1)Parameter

set 0 1)

DL k+75

Motionenable

drive test


15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Drive 611-D

123456789

101112131415

048

121620242832364044485256

161718192021222324252627282930

60646872768084889296

100104108112116


_______1) SW 3, used by 611D

2) SW 3, used by SERVO

3) GTS = Gear stages as from SW 34) As from SW 45) As from SW 4.4


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


2.5.3 Axis-specific signals (DB 32)


7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DL k Speedcontrolleractive 1)

Positioncontrolactive

Axis in setrange

Referencepoint

reached

Travelcommand

+

Travelcommand

– fine coarse

DR k Slaveoperationacitve 4)

IKAwarninglimit 1)

IKA/TKvelocity

exceeded 1)

Roundingaxis in

position

Axis is in thereduction

area 5)

DL X

DR XFA reached

1)FaF active

1)

DLX+1

Cam4 +

1)

Cam4 -1)

Cam3 +

1)

Cam3 -1)

Cam2 +

1)

Cam2 -1)

Cam1 +

1)

Cam1 -1)

DRX+1

Signals from axis (Section 6.1)

Position reached withexact stop

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DL k+1 Mirroring

Follow-upmode

Feed disablesimult. axis

*Decel. ref. pointapproach

Parkingaxis

Controllerenable + –

DR k+1 + –

Rapidtraverseoverlay

Feedrate1:100

Axisdisable

dyn. SWlimit sw.

monitoringpassive 5) 2 1

DL k+2

2) Feed-forward

control off

Setting ofreferencedimensn 3)

Referencingw/o internal

setpt entry 3)

MEAS.SYSTEM

1/2

Slaveoperationactive 4) + –

DR k+2 Axis

reset

Reversedirection of

rotationOverride

active E D C B A

DLk+3 n+7 n+6 n+5 n+4 n+3 n+2 n+1 n+0

DRk+3 n+15 n+14 n+13 n+12 n+11 n+10 n+9 n+8


Handwheel active

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

2nd softwarelimit switch

Travel limit

F e e d d i s a b l e


Conventional

Axis-specific override

_______1) As from SW 3, IKA = Interpolation and compensation with tables, TK = Temperature compensation (when

IKA used as compensation)2) As from SW 23) As from SW 44) As from SW 4.45) As from SW 5.6* Signal is active at 0




7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DL x+2

SensorFA

reached 1)

Acknowl.for FA

reached 1)

Acknowl.for FAFactive 1)

DR x+2DL

x+3Select camparameter 4

1)

Select camparameter 3

1)


1)


1)

DR x+3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0


15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Actual parameter set number "Position control" 3)

Actual parameter set number"Speed ratio" 3)

Reserved

x=120, 124, 128, ... 236 (axis 30)

Axis Address K Message textaddress

PLC MD forprocessing 2) Axis Address K Message text

address

PLC MD forprocessing2)

123456789

101112131415

048

121620242832364044485256

820082208240826082808300832083408360838084008420844084608480

6016.06016.16016.26016.36016.46016.56016.66016.76017.06017.16017.26017.36017.46017.56017.6

161718192021222324252627282930

60646872768084889296

100104108112116

850085208540856085808600862086408660868087008720874087608780

6017.76018.06018.16018.26018.36018.46018.56018.66018.76019.06019.16019.26019.36019.46019.5

Notes:

• A maximum of 30 axis data blocks (real and fictitious) is possible (max. 15 servo loops foraxes and spindles together). Max. 30 servo loops are possible with software version 5 andhigher (611D). No fictitious axes can be defined in addition to the 30 "axes".

The limitation to max. 15 real axes or spindles (axes/spindles with servo loops) for analogdrives still applies.

• The message text address n is required for the error and operational messages. The FEEDRATE DISABLE signals can additionally be checked for error messages via PLC MD 6035. The results of this check can be set as operational messages via PLC MD 6043. The function blocks required for the check/display are contained in FB package 0.

_______1) As from SW3, FA=fixed stop, FAF=travel against fixed stop2) Up to SW 23) As from SW 4


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


2.6 NData transfer interface

2.6 Data transfer interface

2.6.1 Data transfer PLC/NCK (DB 36)

No.interface

byte

1 DL 0 Value 1- Value 3

Numberformat

Access dis-abled

Datatransferended

Datatransferassigned

Datatransfer

busy Fifo full

Datatransfer

requested

2 DR 0 Value 1- Value 3

Numberformat

Access dis-abled

Datatransferended


Datatransfer

busy Fifo full

Datatransfer

requested


Numberformat

Access dis-abled

Datatransferended


Datatransfer

busy Fifo full

Datatransfer

requested


Numberformat

Access dis-abled

Datatransferended


Datatransfer

busy Fifo full

Datatransfer

requested


Numberformat

Access dis-abled

Datatransferended


Datatransfer

busy Fifo full

Datatransfer

requested

Status data transfer (Section 7.2.2)

Error

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Byte No.


Numberformat

Access dis-abled

Datatransferended


Datatransfer

busy Fifo full

Datatransfer

requested


Numberformat

Access dis-abled

Datatransferended


Datatransfer

busy Fifo full

Datatransfer

requested


Numberformat

Access dis-abled

Datatransferended


Datatransfer

busy Fifo full

Datatransfer

requested

Error

Error

Error

Error

Error

Error

Error

No. in-terface

byte


Numberformat

Access dis-abled

Datatransferended


Datatransfer

busy Fifo full

Datatransfer

requested

Data transfer alarm-controlled

Error

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Byte No.

Notes:

1) If the PLC goes into the stop state because of a parameterization error, the number of theinterface byte is entered in the high-order byte of ACCU 2.

2) If several jobs are entered in the buffer for data transfer, a job with the number 65 will beprocessed before the others.

3) Data transfer is effected by function macros FB 61 (read) and FB62 (write).



2.6.2 Control of data transfer (DB 37)

2.6.2 Control of data transfer (DB 37)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Byte No.

DL 0 File transferactive

File transferin progress

DR 0

Interface signals

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Bit No.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DL 1 Abort 3) Startoutput 2)

Startinput 1)

DR 1 Error in datatransfer

Data transferended

DW 2 -DW 3DW 4DW 5DL 6DR 6DW 7DW 8DW 9

DW 10 -DW 15

DW 16 -DW 28DL 29

MSD/FDDCircularbuffer

Tool list

Programdata

Partprograms

DR 29Program

dataPart

programs

DL 30Program

dataPart

programs

DR 30Program

dataPart

programs

DL 31Circularbuffer

Tool list

Programdata

Partprograms

DR 31Program

dataPart

programs

Signals for data transfer initiative PLC (see Section 8)

D a t a t y p e f o r d a t a t r a n s f e r (see table Section 8.2)

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

I n i t i a l n u m b e r f o r d a t a t r a n s f e r (see table Section 8.2)

E n d n u m b e r f o r d a t a t r a n s f e r (see table Section 8.2)

C h a n n e l n u m b e r f o r d a t a t r a n s f e r (see table Section 8.2)

R e s e r v e d

E r r o r c o d e (see table Section 8.2)

D e v i c e t y p e (see table Section 8.2, states on which devices data can be input or output)

Device No. 4)

Workpiece name ending with 0h (states which workpiece is being machined (corresponds to directory)during data transfer with the hard disk).

States which data are being read into the NCK

States which data are being read out of the NCK

States for which data read-in has been disabled (with DL 31)

States for which data read-out has been disabled (with DL 31)

Disables reading in of named data into the NCK (must be confirmed in DL 30)

Disables reading out of named data from NCK (must be confirmed in DR 30)

R e s e r v e d

_______1) Data transfer MMC NCK (as from SW 3 1) RS232C (V.24) MMC, MMC NCK (as from SW 3)2) Data transfer NCK MMC (as from SW 3 2) RS232C (V.24) MMC, NCK MMC (as from SW 3)3) Reserved, not allowed for use in SW 1, 2 and 34) As from SW 3


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


2.7 Operator panel/PLC interface

2.7 Operator panel/PLC interface

2.7.1 Key signals from operator panel (DB 40)

The operator panel signals cannot be changed by the PLC user program, they are onlymonitored.The operator panel signals are transmitted in the NCK operating areas:MACHINE, PARAMETERS, EDIT NC and NCK DIAGNOSIS only.

Pageup

Softkey 7

Softkey 7

Softkey 1

Softkey 1

Softkey 2

Softkey 2

Softkey 3

Softkey 3

Softkey 4

Softkey 4

Softkey 5

Softkey 5

Softkey 6

Softkey 6

DL 0

DR 0

Group A softkeys (dynamic signals)

Group A softkeys (static signals)

DW 1

DW 2

Pagedown

DL 3 Group F selection cursor key group (dynamic signals)

SearchLargeactual value

displ.Acknowl.

alarmChange

channel 1)Change

mode grp.1)

DL 4 Group F selection cursor key group (dynamic signals)

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

1 . . n

InputEditCancelDL 5

ClearGroup D correction keys (dynamic signals)

Recall ETCGroup E

HelpDL 6 Group A (dyn.)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

Key signals from operator panel (Section 9.1)

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

The static signals are stored in DR.

_______1) Mode group and change channel is a dual assignment key.



2.7.1 Key signals from operator panel (DB 40)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DL 7

DR 7

Operating mode groups (Section 9.1.1)

Operating mode group number

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DL 87 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

DR 87 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

DL 915 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

DR 915 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Softkey function signals (Section 9.1.2)

Dynamic function signals

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

DL 39255 254 253 252 251 250 249 248

DR 39255 254 253 252 251 250 249 248

DL 40

DR 40 Functionnumberchange

DL 41Bit 15 Bit 8

DR 41Bit 7 Bit 0

Static function signals





Softkey function number

Softkey function number


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


2.7.2 Display dialog line (DB 40)

2.7.2 Display dialog line (DB 40)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DL 43

DR 43

DW 44

DW 45

DW 46

DW 47

DW 48

DL 49 Acknowl.function

result valid

Strobefunction n.

valid

DR 49

DL 50

DR 50

Display dialog line (Section 9.2)

Assigned by internal signals

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Dialog text number

Function result

Function number



2.7.3 Menu selection (DB 40)

2.7.3 Menu selection (DB 40)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DL 51 Start signal

from user

DR 51 Owninsertionactive

Insertionalready act. Fault

Insertionexecuted

DL 52

DR 52

DL 53

DR 53

DL 54

DR 54

DL 55 Request for

key lock INPUT EDIT CANCEL

DR 55

DL 56Spezialrecall

DR 56

Menu selection (Section 9.3)

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Acknowledgements

Job number (1 ... 11)(function code number)

Menu number/dialog text No. (1 ... 65535)(When the WS 800A programming workstation is used, the menu numbers are limited to 999.)

Mode group number/software component 2) (1 ... 4)3)

Channel number/software component 2) (1 ... 4)3)

Unassigned

Displayed channel from NC (1 ... 4)3)

Key lock to NCK

Reference to DW x in DB 59 for SK function of PLC 1)

_______1) As from SW 4

2) Software component, relevant for the "alarm concept"

3) As from SW 4; 6 channels


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


2.7.4 Cursor data (DB 40)

2.7.4 Cursor data (DB 40)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DL 57Data group base

DR 57Data type base

DL 58DB / DX number base (1 ... 255)

DR 58Unassigned

DL 59

DR 59

DL 60Data group pointer

DR 60Data type pointer

DL 61DB / DX number pointer (1 ... 255)

DR 61Unassigned

DL 62

DR 62

DL 63

DR 63

Cursor (Section 9.4)

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

DW number base (0 ... 2042)

DW number pointer (0 ... 2042)

Block number (0 ... 65535)



2.7.5 User key signals (DB 40)


7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DW 64

DW 99

DL 100Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 Key 4 Key 5 Key 6 Key 7 Key 8

DR 100Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 Key 4 Key 5 Key 6 Key 7 Key 8

DL 101Key 9 Key 10 Key 11 Key 12 Key 13 Key 14 Key 15

DR 101Key 9 Key 10 Key 11 Key 12 Key 13 Key 14 Key 15

DL 102LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4 LED 5 LED 6 LED 7 LED 8

DR 102LED 9 LED 10 LED 11 LED 12 LED 13 LED 14 LED 15

DL 103

DR 103

DL 104

DR 104MMC 2)

active Area 1)Statusimage

Set-upmenu

Menunumberchange User menu

DW 105

User key signals (Section 9.5)

Reserved

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

User-assignable keys 1st customer key submodule (dynamic signals) 3)

User-assignable keys 1st customer key submodule (static signals) 3)

User-assignable keys 1st customer key submodule (dynamic signals) 3)

User-assignable keys 1st customer key submodule (static signals) 3)

LEDs 1st customer key submodule 3)

LEDs 1st customer key submodule 3)

Key hexadecimal code (KYRU II code)

Status byte

Menu number

_______1) 0 ... data area

1 ... machine area

2) As from SW 2

3) 1st machine control panel


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DL 106Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 Key 4 Key 5 Key 6 Key 7 Key 8

DR 106Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 Key 4 Key 5 Key 6 Key 7 Key 8

DL 107Key 9 Key 10 Key 11 Key 12 Key 13 Key 14 Key 15

DR 107Key 9 Key 10 Key 11 Key 12 Key 13 Key 14 Key 15

DL 108LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4 LED 5 LED 6 LED 7 LED 8

DR 108LED 9 LED 10 LED 11 LED 12 LED 13 LED 14 LED 15

DL 109

DR 109

DL 110SK14

SK13

SK12

SK11

SK10

SK9

SK8

DR 110SK14

SK13

SK12

SK11

SK10

SK9

SK8

DW 111:

DW 149

User key signals (Section 9.5)

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

User-assignable keys 2nd customer key submodule (dynamic signals) 1)

User-assignable keys 2nd customer key submodule (static signals) 1)

LEDs 2nd customer key submodule 1)

LEDs 2nd customer key submodule 1)

Key hexadecimal code (ASCII code)

Status byte

Vertical softkeys (static)

Vertical softkeys (dynamic)

User-assignable keys 2nd customer key submodule (dynamic signals) 1)

User-assignable keys 2nd customer key submodule (static signals) 1)

Reserved

_______1) 2nd machine control panel



2.7.6 Command channel interface (DB 41)


7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DL 0

DR 0UI 8 UI 7 UI 6 UI 5 UI 4 UI 3 UI 2 UI 1

DL 1

DR 1UI 8 UI 7 UI 6 UI 5 UI 4 UI 3 UI 2 UI 1

DL 2

DR 2

DL 3

DR 3

DL 4

DR 4

DL 5

DR 5

Command channel (DB 41) (Section 10.1)

Reserved

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Request bits

Reserved

Error bits

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Note:

The number of user interfaces (UI) is set in PLC MD 33.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DL m

DR m

DL m+1

DR m+1

DL m+2

DB = 0DX = 1

DR m+2

DL m+3

DR m+3

DL m+4

DB = 0DX = 1

DR m+4

(SW 3 andhigher)

DL m+5

(SW 3 andhigher)

DR m+5

DL m+6

DR m+6

Command channel (Section 10.2)

(High)

Function number

(Low)

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

(High)

Error number

(Low)

Source DB/DX number

Reserved

(High)

Initial DW No. of target DB (IKA) 1)

(Low)

Target DB/DX number (IKA) 1)

(High)

Data word number

(Low)

Note: Possible function numbers:m =6 UI 1 1=Static path dimensionm =13 UI 2 2=Division incrementm =20 UI 3 3=S-externalm =27 UI 4m =34 UI 5 5 =M19 over several revolutionsm =41 UI 6 6 =Transformationm =48 UI 7 7 =Coupled motionm =55 UI 8

9 =Temperature compensation 1)

10=Read IKA data 1)2)

11=Write IKA data 1)2)

12=Travel to fixed stop 1)_______1) As from SW 3



2.8 General interface NCK/PLC


2.8.1 Signals to/from NCK (DB 48)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DL 0 Status write

disable

Keyswitchsetting 1

(colour black)Screen dark

Operatorpanel

disable

Cycledisable

Control with-out operator

panel

Warmrestart

DR 0 Transfercam

values 1)

Activatecam/axis

assignm. 1) 02

(color green)3

(color red)

DL 2

DR 2Trace 4 Trace 3 Trace 2 Trace 1

DL 44) Collisionmonitoring

off 16

Collisionmonitoring

off 15

Collisionmonitoring

off 14

Collisionmonitoring

off 13

Collisionmonitoring

off 12

Collisionmonitoring

off 11

Collisionmonitoring

off 10

Collisionmonitoring

off 9

DR 44) Collisionmonitoring

off 8

Collisionmonitoring

off 7

Collisionmonitoring

off 6

Collisionmonitoring

off 5

Collisionmonitoring

off 4

Collisionmonitoring

off 3

Collisionmonitoring

off 2

Collisionmonitoring

off 1

DL 64) Collisionmonitoring

off 32

Collisionmonitoring

off 31

Collisionmonitoring

off 30

Collisionmonitoring

off 29

Collisionmonitoring

off 28

Collisionmonitoring

off 27

Collisionmonitoring

off 26

Collisionmonitoring

off 25

DR 64) Collisionmonitoring

off 24

Collisionmonitoring

off 23

Collisionmonitoring

off 22

Collisionmonitoring

off 21

Collisionmonitoring

off 20

Collisionmonitoring

off 19

Collisionmonitoring

off 18

Collisionmonitoring

off 17

DL 8

DR 84) Enable"Freeze

IKA"

DL k 4)

DR k4)Request:

Freeze IKA

Acknow-ledge error

signal

Switch onIKA

Switch offIKA

DL 744)

Pr. zone 16 Pr. zone 15 Pr. zone 14 Pr. zone 13 Pr. zone 12 Pr. zone 11 Pr. zone 10 Pr. zone 9

DR 744)


DL 764)


DR 764)


Signals to NCK (Section 11.1)

Keyswitch setting

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

PLC trigger signal 3)

Reduction area Off

Reduction area Off

Reduction area Off

Reduction area Off

_______1) As from SW 32) IKA=Interpolation and compensation with tables3) As from SW 4: The Trace functions are described in the Installation Instructions SINUMERIK 840C, Section

drive servo start-up applications4) As from SW 6


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DL 1 Screen(SW 5 anhigher)

DR 1 Cam valuestransferred

1)

Cam/axisassignm.

activated 1)

NC modi-fies camparam. 1)

Warmrestartended

DL 3

DR 3

DL 54) Protectionzone

collision 16

Protectionzone

collision 15

Protectionzone

collision 14

Protectionzone

collision 13

Protectionzone

collision 12

Protectionzone

collision 11

Protectionzone

collision 10

Protectionzone

collision 9

DR 54) Protectionzone

collision 8

Protectionzone

collision 7

Protectionzone

collision 6

Protectionzone

collision 5

Protectionzone

collision 4

Protectionzone

collision 3

Protectionzone

collision 2

Protectionzone

collision 1

DL 74) Protectionzone

collision 32

Protectionzone

collision 31

Protectionzone

collision 30

Protectionzone

collision 29

Protectionzone

collision 28

Protectionzone

collision 27

Protectionzone

collision 26

Protectionzone

collision 25

DR 74) Protectionzone

collision 24

Protectionzone

collision 23

Protectionzone

collision 22

Protectionzone

collision 21

Protectionzone

collision 20

Protectionzone

collision 19

Protectionzone

collision 18

Protectionzone

collision 17

DLk+14)

DRk+14)

Changelimitation

output

Outputlimitationminimum

Outputlimitationmaximum

IKA frozenIKA in

intermediatestate

Error signalreturned IKA is on IKA is off

DL 754)


DR 754)


DL 774)


DR 774)


Signals from NCK (Section 11.2)

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Protection zone adaptation active




IKA No. Address K IKA No. Address K123456789

10111213141516

10121416182022242628303234363840

17181920212223242526272829303132

42444648505254565860626466687072

_______1) As from SW 32) IKA=Interpolation and compensation with tables3) As from SW 4: The Trace functions are described in the Installation Instructions SINUMERIK 840C, Section

drive servo start-up applications4) As from SW 6



2.9 PLC messages (DB 58)


7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DL 0 Acknowl. NCemergency

stop*)Error 1)

messages Operationalmessages1) Page

Alarm withhighest

priority 2)

Acknowl.PLC errormessage

Control signals (Section 12.4)

Display in message line

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DR 0 NC inemergencystop state

PLC emerg.stop

message

PLC error

message 3)

PLC ope-rational

message 3)

States (Section 12.4)

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DL 19007 9006 9005 9004 9003 9002 9001 9000

DR 19015 9014 9013 9012 9011 9010 9009 9008

DL 29023 9022 9021 9020 9019 9018 9017 9016

DR 29031 9030 9029 9028 9027 9026 9025 9024

Emergency stop to NC (Section 12.4)

Message

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Message

Message

Message

_______*) Static signal

1) SW 1 and SW 2 only

2) As from SW 3

3) As from SW 3: Error message = alarm

Operational message = message


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DL 39039 9038 9037 9036 9035 9034 9033 9032

DR 39047 9046 9045 9044 9043 9042 9041 9040

DL 49055 9054 9053 9052 9051 9050 9049 9048

DR 49063 9062 9061 9060 9059 9058 9057 9056

DL 59071 9070 9069 9068 9067 9066 9065 9064

DR 59079 9078 9077 9076 9075 9074 9073 9072

DL 69087 9086 9085 9084 9083 9082 9081 9080

DR 69095 9094 9093 9092 9091 9090 9089 9088

DL 79103 9102 9101 9100 9099 9098 9097 9096

DR 79111 9110 9109 9108 9107 9106 9105 9104

DL 89119 9118 9117 9116 9115 9114 9113 9112

DR 89127 9126 9125 9124 9123 9122 9121 9120

DL 99135 9134 9133 9132 9131 9130 9129 9128

DR 99143 9142 9141 9140 9139 9138 9137 9136

DL 109151 9150 9149 9148 9147 9146 9145 9144

DR 109159 9158 9157 9156 9155 9154 9153 9152

DL 119167 9166 9165 9164 9163 9162 9161 9160

DR 119175 9174 9173 9172 9171 9170 9169 9168

Messages (Section 12.4)

Message

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Message

Message

Message

Message

Message

Message

Message

Message

Message

Message

Message

Message

Message

Message

Message

Message

Message




7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DL 129183 9182 9181 9180 9179 9178 9177 9176

DR 129191 9190 9189 9188 9187 9186 9185 9184

DL 139199 9198 9197 9196 9195 9194 9193 9192

DR 139207 9206 9205 9204 9203 9202 9201 9200

DL 149215 9214 9213 9212 9211 9210 9209 9208

DR 149223 9222 9221 9220 9219 9218 9217 9216

DL 159231 9230 9229 9228 9227 9226 9225 9224

DR 159239 9238 9237 9236 9235 9234 9233 9232

DL 169247 9246 9245 9244 9243 9242 9241 9240

DR 16

DL 179257 9256 9255 9254 9253 9252 9251 9250

DR 179265 9264 9263 9262 9261 9260 9259 9258

DL 189273 9272 9271 9270 9269 9268 9267 9266

DR 189281 9280 9279 9278 9277 9276 9275 9274

DL 199289 9288 9287 9286 9285 9284 9283 9282

DR 199297 9296 9295 9294 9293 9292 9291 9290

DL 209305 9304 9303 9302 9301 9300 9299 9298

DR 209313 9312 9311 9310 9309 9308 9307 9306

DL 219321 9320 9319 9318 9317 9316 9315 9314

DR 219329 9328 9327 9326 9325 9324 9323 9322

Messages (Section 12.4)

Message

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Message

Message

Message

Message

Message

Message

Message

Message

Reserved

Message

Message

Message

Message

Message

Message

Message

Meldung

Message

Message


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DL 229337 9336 9335 9334 9333 9332 9331 9330

DR 229345 9344 9343 9342 9341 9340 9339 9338

DL 239353 9352 9351 9350 9349 9348 9347 9346

DR 239361 9360 9359 9358 9357 9356 9355 9354

DL 249369 9368 9367 9366 9365 9364 9363 9362

DR 249377 9376 9375 9374 9373 9372 9371 9370

DL 259385 9384 9383 9382 9381 9380 9379 9378

DR 259393 9392 9391 9390 9389 9388 9387 9386

DL 269401 9400 9399 9398 9397 9396 9395 9394

DR 269409 9408 9407 9406 9405 9404 9403 9402

DL 279417 9416 9415 9414 9413 9412 9411 9410

DR 279425 9424 9423 9422 9421 9420 9419 9418

DL 289433 9432 9431 9430 9429 9428 9427 9426

DR 289441 9440 9439 9438 9437 9436 9435 9434

DL 299449 9448 9447 9446 9445 9444 9443 9442

DR 299457 9456 9455 9454 9453 9452 9451 9450

DL 309465 9464 9463 9462 9461 9460 9459 9458

DR 309473 9472 9471 9470 9469 9468 9467 9466

DL 319481 9480 9479 9478 9477 9476 9475 9474

DR 319489 9488 9487 9486 9485 9484 9483 9482

DL 329497 9496 9495 9494 9493 9492 9491 9490

DR 32

Message

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Message

Message

Message

Message

Message

Message

Message

Message

Message

Message

Message

Message

Message

Message

Message

Message

Message

Message

Message

Message

Reserved

Note:

• PLC machine data are used to determine whether messages are to be treated as error oroperational messages.

• The function blocks for message interrogation and display are contained in FB package 0.



2.9.1 Softkey function calls (DB 59)

2.9.1 Softkey function calls DB 59 1)

...

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DL x

DR x

DL x+1

DR x+1

DL x+2

DR x+2

DL x+3

DR x+3

DL x+4

DR x+4

Softkey function calls (Section 9.3.1)

Error message

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

DL x+y

DR x+y

Function number (1 ... 65535)

Number of parameters (max. 49)

Parameter 1

Parameter 2

Parameter n

Valid only with error acknowledgement in DB 40 (DR 51, bit 1)

Note:

DB 59 is initialized by the operating system with a length of 128 DW. x=any DW, default inDB 40, DR 53.

_______1) As from SW 4


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


2.10 PLC machine data

2.10 PLC machine data

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a aa a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

A description of the PLC machine data is to be found in the

Installation Guide Instructions (IA), see table below !

Division of PLC MD

PLC MD DB Meaning SoftkeySection in

InstallationsInstructions

0to

839DB60 MD for operating system System data 8.2

2000to

2849DB61 MD for function blocks FB data 8.3

4000to

4349DB62 MD for user User data 8.4

6000to

6599DB63 MD bits for operating system System bits 8.5

7000to

7799DB64 MD bits for function blocks FB bits 8.6

8000to

8199DB65 MD bits for user User bits 8.7



2.11 Configuring distributed machine peripherals (DMP)


General

Machine data configuring

PLC MD 34-135• Machine control panel• Handheld unit• 1 distributed interrupt byte

per interface











Compact DMP,IP 65, DMP I/O





PLC MD 136

DB/DX configuring(free)

Configuring module DB/DX• Machine control panel• Handheld unit• Max. 4 distributed interrupt bytes

(1 module per interface)

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

= 0





= No. DB/DX

The distributed machine peripherals can either be addressed via machine data or viaconfiguring modules. Mixed configuring is not possible, i.e. once you have chosen aconfiguring method, you must also configure the machine control panel and the handheld unitin the same way.

Exception: The central interrupt byte of the IF-PLC/PLC 135 WD is always configured viaPLC MD 30.

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a aa a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

The simultaneous use of central interrupts and interrupt-generating DMPis not permissible.

Note:

Up to SW 2: 8 terminal blocks per line can be used. The machine control panel isaddressed as a terminal block. The initial address of the machine control panelI/O image must be entered in PLC MD 128.

As from SW 3: A total of 15 DMP stations can be connected to the 135WB2/INTPLC or 135WD modules. Handheld unit, machine control panel and IP65 module arecounted as DMP stations.

In each line, a maximum of 8 DMP stations is allowed for the INTDMP module.The handheld unit and the distributed interrupt are to be connected in line 1.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



Configuring the distributed machine peripherals via machine data

81

Empty

Empty

83

X

X

X

80

82

86

80

82

86

87

A

A

A

E

E

E

X

X

Module

1

2

8

3

4

5

6

7

e.g.: DMP compact

The initial address is defined in the machine data (e.g. PLC MD 34 = 80). Fixed slots are anecessary requirement of DMP machine data configuring. In the example, "DMP compactterminal block" a maximum of 4 input modules and 4 output modules are possible.The input and output modules are word addressed. Machine data must be configured usingconsecutive fixed addressing. Only one byte can be assigned for output modules. As from SW2, 160-modules can also be used.

In the example this means: QB 80QB 82

.

.

.

The analog DMP modules are treated like the digital modules. 4 modules can be inserted ineach terminal block.4 analog input modules can be inserted into the slots 1 ... 4.4 analog output modules can be inserted into the slots 5 ... 8.

Interrupt routing

One interrupt byte is possible per interface (caution: not per line):

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
























PLC MD 130 No. of interrupt byte of 1st INT-DMP 1st line

or

PLC MD 131 No. of interrupt byte of 1st INT-DMP 2nd line...

PLC MD 134 No. of interrupt byte of IF-PLC/PLC 135WD 1st line








e.g. 1st interruptbyte









e.g. 2nd interruptbyte

PLC MD 6068 ... 6072 interrupt edgesPLC MD 6074 ... 6078 interrupt enables




Configuring the distributed machine peripherals via the configuring block DB or DX

Division of the configuring DBs

DWn Module status

Interface no.

MPC no.

Terminal block no.

Initial address I

Initial address O

:

:

:

:

Initial address E

Initial address A

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a











DB head

Configuring block

for 1st terminal block

:

:

:

:

:

:

:

:

Configuring block

for next terminal

block

Configuring block

for INT input

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

n+1

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

n+2

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

n+3

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

n+4

15 0

8th module

1st module or

conventional module

Edge selection

1st INT byte

Edge selection

2nd INT byte

Edge selection

3rd INT byte Edge selection

4th INT byte

Enable

1st INT byte Enable

2nd INT byte

Enable

3rd INT byte Enable

4th INT byte

Interrupt status

No. of 1st INT byte

No. of 2nd INT byte

No. of 3rd INT byte

No. of 4th INT byte

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

n+5

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

n+19

DWi

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

i+1

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

i+2

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

i+3

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

i+4

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

i+8

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

i+5

Module status: Identifier for each terminal block (data type KC)

UN = Module active (UNIT Not blocked)UB = Module active (UNIT Blocked)

Interface no.: Number of INT-PLC/PLC 135 WD/INT-DMP interface module (data type KF)

1 = 1st INT-DMP2 = 2nd INT-DMP (not with SW 1 and SW 2)3 = INT-PLC/PLC 135 WD


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



MPC no.: No. of MPC line (data type KF)0 = Block not assigned, must remain reserved1 = Line 12 = Line 2

Terminal block no.: No. of DMP terminal block in line (1 ... 15) (data type KF)

1 = Terminal block 1 (switch position E)2 = Terminal block 2 (switch position D)

.

.

.

15 = Terminal block 15 (switch position 0)

Interrupt status: Identifier for each interrupt byte (data type KF)

IN = Interrupt active (Interrupt Not blocked)IB = Interrupt blocked (Interrupt Blocked)

No. of INT byte 0 ... 255 (data type KF)

Preset the unassigned INT bytes with -1.

Edge selection: Bit-by-bit assignment of interrupt-generating edges (data type KF)

0: 1 0 edge1: 0 1 edge

Enable: Bit-by-bit enabling of interrupt inputs (data type KF)

0: Interrupt input disabled1: Interrupt input enabled

Notes :

• If PLC machine data 136 >< 0 is set, the value in this machine data states the DB or DXmodule number in which the extended configuring data are stored.

MD 136 = 1 ... 255 DB no. 1 ... 255MD 136 = 1000 ... 255 DX no. 0 ... 255

20 DWs are required for each module. Nine DWs are needed for interrupt routing.

• If the configuring DB is missing (in MD 136) or incorrect, i.e. has impermissible values ordata words are missing (incomplete block lengths), the PLC goes into the stop state witherror message 33 and additional error information.




Configuring notes for different types of module

DW n Module status UN/UB

DW n+1 Interface no. 1/3

DW n+2 MPC no. 1/2

DW n+3 Terminal block no. 1...15

DW n+4 Initial address inputs 1st IW 0...254

DW n+5 Initial address outputs 1st QW 0...254

DW n+6 free -1

: -1

DW n+19 free -1



DW n+2 MPC no. 1/2


DW n+4 Initial address inputs 1st IW 0...254

DW n+5 free -1

DWn+6 Initial address outputs 2nd IW 0...254

DW n+7 free -1

: -1

DW n+19 free -1



DW n+2 MPC no. 1/2


DW n+4 Initial address inputs 1st module 0...254

DW n+5 Initial address outputs 1st module 0...254

DW n+6 Initial address inputs 2nd module 0...254

DW n+7 Initial address outputs 2nd module 0...254

: 0...254

DW n+18 Initial address inputs 8th module 0...254

DW n+19 Initial address outputs 8th module 0...254

DMP 16 I/O

Machine control panel(8 I/O bytes assigned)

Handheld unit(24 I/O bytes assigned)

IP 65

DMP 32 I

DMP compact16 I8 Q

16 QANALOG INANALOG OUT

• 8 output modules fill a whole output word, the high byte of the output word cannot be used

• Preset all unassigned inputs/outputs with -1.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



I/O submodules are routed and entered in the address list by the PLC according to theinformation in the configuration lists.

Any double addressing of I/O submodules in different interface modules is recognized by thePLC and displayed as an error.

Double addressing within an INT-PLC/PLC 135 WD or within an INT-DMP is signalled as anMD error by the interface.

Free configuring examples:

• 16 I/Q

Initial address I: DW n+4Initial address Q: DW n+5

• 32 I

Initial address I: 1st word DW n+4Initial address I: 2nd word DW n+6

• IP 65

Initial address I: DW n+4Initial address Q: DW n+5

• Handheld unit, machine control panel

Initial address I: 1st byte DW n+4Initial address Q: 1st byte DW n+5

Caution:

With handheld unit and machine control panel, in each case only the first byte isconfigured, subsequent bytes are used consecutively. For the machine control panel, theinitial address of the I/O image must be entered in MD 128.

• DMP compact module

Configurable on each I or Q module (depending on the component complement):

e.g. module 1: either DW n+4 (if I)or DW n+5 (if Q)

contains the byte address

• Analog input/output reference module

The analog modules are configured like the digital modules. 4 of each can be inserted asrequired.




Interrupt routing

• The central interrupt byte of the IF-PLC/PLC 135 WD or decentralized peripheral bytes canbe used for the interrupt routing. Central interrupts and interrupt-generating DMPs mustnot be used as the same time.

• A total of 4 interrupt bytes are possible.

• A maximum of 4 interrupt bytes can be used. This also applies to the central interruptbyte, e.g.

INT-PLC, module 2, 2 interrupt byte addressINT-DMP, module 5, 1 interrupt byte addressCentral interrupt byte, 1 interrupt byte address

• The interrupt-generating peripheral bytes can be distributed amongst the modules asrequired.

• All interrupt bytes of an interface must be located on the same module.

• The initial address of a sequence of interrupt bytes must be a module initial address.

• If the central interrupt byte of the INT-PLC/PLC 135 WD is used, it is always the fourthinterrupt byte (must always be configured through MD 30).

• OB 2 must be enabled. PLC MD 6050.2 and the PLC CPU must operate in special mode.PLC MD 6051.0 = 0.

• OB 2 is activated with every interrupt request. Flag bytes 8 to 11 also show the interrupt-triggering bit.

• Flag bytes 8 to 11 must be reset by the user program in organization block 2.

Definition of flag bytes FY 8 to FY 11

FY 8 Interrupt inputs 1st INT byte

FY 9 Interrupt inputs 2nd INT byte

FY 10 Interrupt inputs 3rd INT byte

FY 11 Interrupt inputs 4th INT byte(if the central interrupt byte is defined, then the 4th interruptbyte is always the central one).


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



Free configuration of the DMP using the DMP compact terminal block as an example

e.g. 2nd terminal block rotary switch setting "D"

X

Gap

IB 5

QB 0

IB 4

IB 6

IB 8

QB 4

QB 60

I

O

O

I

O

I

O

X

Slot

1

2

.

.

.

8

X

IB 7

IB 9

QB 20

In contrast to machine data configuring, fixed slot and address configuring is not necessaryhere. The modules are addressed by word. Gaps are permissible.

Defining machine data

You define the number of the configuring block with PLC MD 136, e.g.DB 200 PLC MD 136 = 0200DX 200 PLC MD 136 = 1200

Example: (interrupt byte is IB 6)

INT-PLC/PLC 135 WDinterface module

TB no. Switch position Input/output addresses

Machine control panel 1 E IB 64/ QB 64

DMP compact terminal block 2 D

1st module QB 0

2nd module IW 4

3rd module QB 20

4th module IW 6

5th module IW 8

6th module QB 4

7th module X Gap

8th module QB 60




DX 200 without interrupt processing

0 KS = ”UN”; UN = terminal block enabled/UB = terminal block disabled

1 KF = + 00003; INT-PLC/PLC 135 WD interface

2 KF = + 00001; Line 1

3 KF = + 00001; Terminal block 1 machine control panel rotary switch "E"

4 KF = + 00064; Inputs IB 64 onwards

5 KF= + 00064; Outputs QB 64 onwards

6 KF = - 00001;

7 KF = - 00001;

8 KF = - 00001;

9 KF = - 00001;

10 KF = - 00001;

11 KF = - 00001;

12 KF = - 00001;

13 KF = - 00001;

14 KF = - 00001;

15 KF = - 00001;

16 KF = - 00001;

17 KF = - 00001;

18 KF = - 00001;

19 KF = - 00001;

20 KS = ”UN”; UN = terminal block enabled/UB = terminal block disabled

21 KF = + 00003; Interrupt PLC/PLC 135 WD interface = 3rd INT DMP = 1

22 KF = + 00001; Line 1

23 KF = + 00002; Terminal block 2 DMP compact rotary switch "D"

2425

KF = - 00001;KF = + 00000; 1st module QB 0

2627

KF = + 00004;KF = - 00001; 2nd module IW 4

2829

KF = - 00001;KF = + 00020; 3rd module QB 20

3031

KF = + 00006;KF = - 00001; 4th module IW 6

3233

KF = + 00008;KF = - 00001; 5th module IW 8

3435

KF = - 00001;KF = + 00004; 6th module QB 4

3637

KF = - 00001;KF = - 00001; 7th module Gap

3839

KF = - 00001;KF = + 00060; 8th module QB 60

Any data not required must be preset with "-1".


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



DX 200 with interrupt processing

40 KS = ”iN”; Interrupt processing IN = switch on, IB = switch off

Address IB 0 - 255, -00001 = switch off

41 KF = 6 1st interrupt byte, e.g. IB6

42 KF = –00001; 2nd interrupt byte

43 KF = –00001; 3rd interrupt byte

44 KF = –00001; 4th interrupt byte (only if PLC MD 30 is not used)

Edge evaluation 0 edge = 0 11 edge = 1 0

45 KM = 11001111 00000000 1st byte / 2nd byte

46 KM = 00000000 00000000 3rd byte / 4th byte

Enable bit = 1, disable bit = 0

47 KM = 11111111 00000000 1st byte / 2nd byte

48 KM = 00000000 00000000 3rd byte / 4th byte



2.12 Set-up DBs for users

2.12 Set-up DBs for users

2.12.1 Icon selection in the MMC (DB 66) 1)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DL 0

DR 0

DL 1

DR 1

DL 2

DR 2

DL 3

DR 3

Icon selection (Section 15)

3rd icon field

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

2nd icon field

_______1) As from SW 2


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


2.12.1 Icon selection in the MMC (DB 66)

Icon DB66 Display Clear

Icon 1 Data input/output on start of data input/outputvia the RS232 (V.24) DC interface

Icon 2 Override = 0% DR 0 Bit 0 = 1 = 0

Icon 3 Axis in motion DR 0 Bit 1 = 1 = 0

Icon 4 Program running DL 0 Bit 0 = 1 = 0

Icon 5 Block search, DL 0 Bit 1 = 1 = 0program interrupt

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

0%

All other values lead to no icons being displayed.













Notes:

• The icon 1 data input/output is displayed in the 1st icon field as standard andcannot be overwritten by the PLC program.

• For the icons, three icon fields are available underneath the clock.• The FX 81 (package 0) function block supplies the interface DB 66

Display of the icons is effected across all channels and axes. The following priorities apply:

Axis running: as soon as a travel command is present in one axis and notoverride = 0%

Override = 0%: if feedrate override is set to 0% on at least one machine controlpanel

Program running: if the ”Program running” signal is present in one channel

Program interrupted: if the ”Program running” signal is not present in any of thechannels and, in addition, a program interrupt caused by STOP,mode change or M00/M01 is active in one channel or if blocksearch was triggered.

No icons are displayed in the graphic programming system (WOP).



2.12.2 Internal machine control panel (DB 67)

2.12.2 Internal machine control panel (DB 67) 1)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.PLCMD No. Byte No.

DL 0

DR 0

DL 1

DR 1 RESET(from editor)

DL 2

DR 2

DL 3

DR 3

Internal machine control panel (Section 15)

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

The internal machine control panel offers the possibility of simplifying safety-relevant operatorinputs in the NCK for any customer application. The ”direct change into the editor to theposition of the block pointer” function is set by the NC-RESET bit on selection of the editor.This RESET can be effected by evaluating the bit and transferring it to the relevant channelDB, thus obviating the need for additional operator inputs.

2.12.3 Data words for users (DB 68)

High byte (DL) Low byte (DR)DW No.

PLC

DW 0

DW 63

Data words (Section 15)

...

_______1) As from SW 2


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


2.12.4 Data bits for users (DB 71)

2.12.4 Data bits for users (DB 71)

High byte (DL) Low byte (DR)Byte No.

PLC

DL 0

DR 15

Data bits for users (Section 15)

...

2.13 Decoding list for M signals (DB 80 ... DB 83) 1)

High byte (DL) Low byte (DR)DW No.

PLC

DW m+0

DWm+1

DWm+2

Decoding list for M signals

Extended address

M address

Bit address, DW No. Bit address, bit No.

Notes:

• Address m is derived from the following number of the M function definition:

M function m

123...

64

036...

189

• The table must be completed consecutively starting with the first entry. No gaps areallowed between entries. If fewer than 64 M functions are defined, the remaining entriesmust be preset to 0. All unavailable entries are at the end of the table.

• The decoding lists are channel-specific; decoding list DB 80 is intended for NC channel 1,so that DB 83 accordingly belongs to NC channel 4.

• The decoding message according to list is activated as a channel-specific function bymeans of MDs.

_______1) As from SW 4: 6 channels; DB 80 ... DB 85

END OF SECTION


11.92 3 Description of Basic Signals FY 0...FY 24

3.1 PLC auxiliary signals

3 Description of Basic Signals FY 0...FY 24


FLASHING FREQUENCY 0.5 HZ FY 0, bit 7

The system program provides a flashing frequency of 0.5 Hz in flag F 0.7. The pulse/no-pulseratio is 1:1.

ONE FY 0, bit 1

Flag with defined one signal.

ZERO FY 0, bit 0

Flags with defined zero signal.

The flags ONE and ZERO are used to switch FB parameters which are not required but haveto assume a certain signal state, or which produce a defined result of logic operation (RLO).

ACTUAL OB NO. FY 1

OB No. from which a branch was made into the user program (fixed-point number).

No. Assigned OBs

1234567255

OB 1 Cyclic programOB 2* Alarm-controlled programOB 3 Alarm-controlled programOB 4 Aperiodic programOB 5* Time-controlled programOB 6 Time-controlled programOB 7 Time-controlled programPLC operating system is active

_______* These OBs are processed only in special mode (PLC MD 6051.0=0).


3 Description of Basic Signals FY 0...FY 24 06.93


BASIC SETTING (OB 1 to OB 7) FY 2, bits 1 to 7

1 signal: A warm restart or cold restart has taken place. The processing plane of therelevant OB is called up after DB 20 for the first time.

0 signal: After the last warm restart the relevant OB has been executed completely at leastonce.

After a warm restart or cold restart of the PLC, the basic signals are set for the duration of thefirst complete program execution of the relevant processing plane.

The PLC operating system sets the basic signals back to zero after the first completeexecution of the relevant processing plane.

Example of application:

Using this signal, program parts can be put into a defined initial state after Power On.Depending on the initial settings, an initialization routine can be called up in every OB.

Notes:

• When the processing plane is interrupted by Power Off:

The basic setting signal of the processing plane which is interrupted by a mains failure(e.g. by Power Off) is not set immediately after a warm restart. The basic setting signal forthis processing plane is set after completion of execution of the processing plane, so thatit is set for the duration of the next execution of the relevant OB.

The basic setting signal to an OB is therefore not set while the relevant processing planeis active.

• Several processing planes active at Power Off:

If several processing planes are active simultaneously when program execution isinterrupted (at Power Off), their basic setting signals are set only after all the remaininginterrupted processing planes have been executed after warm restart. This is illustrated inthe example that follows.

Example: Time alarm in the event of mains failure

The PLC is operating in the normal mode. There is a branch from OB 1 to a program module(represented here by PB X).

Situation before warm restart:

A time alarm occurs when the program module PB X is to be executed. The PLC operatingsystem therefore first branches to OB 6. During processing of OB 6 the supply voltage for thePLC fails.This means that in the event of program interruption as the result of a mains failure,the processing planes OB 1 to OB 6 are active.

Situation on warm restart:

The basic setting signals of all processing planes other than OB 1 and OB 6 are set. Theprogram execution continues from the point where it was interrupted in OB 6. At the end ofOB 6, OB 1 becomes active once more, i.e. the JU PB X command, which was interrupted bythe time alarm, is first completed and then relayed to PB X. At the end of the OB 1 module,the PLC operating system sets the basic setting signals for OB 1 and OB 6.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



Setting the basic setting signals on warm restart - example : interrupted time alarm

POWER OFF

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a




OB 6

BE





OB 1

JU PB X

BE





PB X

BE

JU PB X is executed

Time alarm Warm restart with GST = 1 for all

OB except OB 1, OB 6

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a







GST OB 1=1GST OB 6=1

The basic setting signals of the processing planes interrupted by Power Off (here OB 1

and OB 6) are set only after the completion of their remaining execution.

COLD RESTART (OB 1 to OB 7, OB 20) FY 3

1 signal: After initiation of cold restart by PLC operator.

0 signal: After first complete processing of the relevant organization block.

Note on application:

Using this signal, program parts can be put into a defined initial state after a cold restart. Aftera cold restart, data records usually also have to be normalized (in contrast to warm restart)because the PLC is very often reset before a cold restart. The cold restart signals indicate apreceding cold restart during initial state processing, i.e. they remain set until the relevantprocessing time has been fully executed for the first time following a cold restart.

Note on OB 20

The OB 20 has its own cold restart signal. If the signal is zero, this means that the OB 20 wascalled in the warm restart branch. If the OB 20 is interrupted in the warm restart branch withF 3.0 = 0 (i.e. OB 20 undergoing warm restart), the initiated command sequence is not con-tinued. Instead, the OB 20 is executed again from the beginning with a cold restart(F 3.0 = 1).

Note on FY2 and FY3

Warm restart: only FY2 is setCold restart: FY2 and FY3 are set




PARAMETER TEST (OB 1 to OB 7) FY 4, bits 1 to 7

1 signal: a) After warm restartb) After cold restartc) After a transfer of blocks PG PLC

0 signal: a) After first complete processing of the plane concerned following initiation bywarm or cold restart

b) After completion of data transfer PG PLC and complete processing of therelevant organization block.

Signal diagram for block transfer

tc

1

2

1 Block transfer PG PLC2 PARAMETER TEST (tc PLC cycle time)


After a cold or warm restart and after the PG has transferred blocks during operation, theparameterization of the function blocks may have been modified.

By means of the PARAMETER TEST signals for OB 1 to OB 7, the parameters can be chec-ked to determine whether they have been modified. This restricted parameter test reduces theprocessing time of a block during normal operation.

Example:

:AN F 4.1JC=FORT:Test routine:

ADDRESSING ERROR DETECTION FY 5, bit 7

1 signal: The addressing error detection function is selected.

0 signal: The addressing error detection function is not selected (default).


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



Note:

Monitoring is activated by the STEP 5 command AFF (enable addressing error detection). TheSTEP 5 command AFS (inhibit addressing error detection) is the default and deactivatesmonitoring.

When the addressing error detection has been enabled and a non-existent input/output isaddressed, the PLC branches to the STOP state with the error number 8AH.

BLOCK SEGMENT VIOLATION FY 5, bit 6

1 signal: Block segment violation possible.

0 signal: Block segment violation not possible.

As a block can lie above segment limits, not only the offset address but also the segmentnumber must be taken into account for absolute address computation.

INFO BIT FOR ALARM PACKAGE (FB PACKAGE 0), AS FROM SW3 FY 5, bit 5

1 signal: By the PLC operating systemFor alarm processing in package 0 (display of alarms) at least one item ofinformation is available from MMC, i.e. at least one element is in the mail box.

0 signal: By the PLC operating systemMail box is empty

PLC number FY 5, bit 0

1 signal: Always PLC 1

0 signal: No significance for the 840C

PROCESSING DELAY (OB 2 to OB 7) FY 6, bits 2 to 7

1 signal: Processing delay effected by the relevant OB.

0 signal: No meaning

Note:

If time or process-alarm controlled program execution is called again before it has beencompleted, the PLC operating system sets the relevant PROCESSING DELAY bit (dependingon PLC MD 6048 ). These bits are deleted with a cold or warm restart.

The user can set bits within MD 6048 in accordance with the OB No. (except OB 1). If, forexample, bit 4 and bit 5 are set, the PLC operating system causes the control to assume stopstatus in the event of a processing delay activated by OB 4 or OB 5. However, the relevantbits in FB 6 are not set. A processing delay activated by the other OBs does not lead to thestop condition, but causes the bit corresponding to the OB No. in FB 6 to be set.




GROUP MESSAGE LIM/SIM FY 6, bit 1

1 signal: One or several bits in DB 1 "Lost requests during LIM/SIM OB 2 to OB 7" is/areset.

0 signal: No bit in DB 1 "Lost requests during LIM/SIM OB 2 to OB 7" is set.

3.2 PLC ready signals

INTERRUPT INPUTS FY 8 and FY 9, 10, 11

1 signal: Signal change at interrupt input

0 signal: No signal change

After processing the response program (OB 2), the signal change bits must be reset by theuser. If this is omitted, the PLC branches to the stop state with an error message (fine errorcoding F9).

Note:

• Interrupts can be processed only in the special mode of the PLC.

• A maximum of 4 interrupt bytes are possible. Interrupt signals can either be interfaced viathe interface PLC/PLC 135 WD module (central interrupt byte) or via DMP modules(distributed interrupt byte).


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


3.3 Signals for alarm-controlled machining


NEGATIVE EDGE FY 12 to FY 15

1 signal: A change in signal state from 1 to 0 has occurred at the relevant bit of the alarmbyte.

0 signal: No effect

POSITIVE EDGE FY 16 to FY 19

1 signal: A change in signal state from 0 to 1 has occurred at the relevant bit of the alarmbyte.

0 signal: No effect

Notes:

Using PLC MD 124-127 the user defines a maximum of 4 contiguous process alarm byteswithin the available inputs. The process alarm bytes may be in the range of central ordistributed I/Os. Machine control panel input bytes are not allowed.

The PLC operating system checks the alarm bytes for modifications. If a modification isdetermined, the active program is interrupted either at the block or command limit, dependingon the setting of the PLC mode (PLC MD 6051), and the OB 3 is called (depending on specialmode/normal mode).

The user interface for alarm-controlled programs is OB 3.

The operating system stores 0 1 transitions of the alarm byte in FY 16 and the 1 0transitions in FY 12 are present until the next alarm or cancelled by user. The user can branchhis program using the ”signals for alarm processing”.

If, for example, the inputs I 0.0 to I 0.7 are interrogated in the processing program, thefollowing instructions must be programmed, e.g. at the start of the alarm program (update I/Oscan and PII):

: L PY 0: T IB 0

If outputs have to be switched off because of an alarm, these should suitably be output to theprocess I/Os at the end of the OB 3:

: L QB 5: T PY 5

Example

Program branching depending on the activating signal change, e.g. in IB 0.

:A F12.0JC PB 5A F16.0JC PB 6:




3.4 NC ready signals

INTERFACE CL 1, 2 FY 21, bits 6 and 7

1 signal: Computer link module is available and cyclically contacts the PLC CPU.0 signal: a) Computer link module not available.

b) Computer link module failure.

MMC CPU READY FY 22, bit 0

1 signal: The MMC CPU cyclically contacts the PLC CPU.0 signal: MM CPU failure.

Note:

After synchronization with the NCK, the PLC is running cyclically. The ”MMC CPU ready”signal is given by the NC to the PLC, as soon as the MMC NCK ready signal monitoring isactive.








NC CPU READY (SW 6 and higher) FY 22, bit 1

1 signal: The NC CPU is ready for operation.

Note:

The signal is reset with NCK Reset.









DRIVES READY (SW 6 and higher) FY 22, bit 2

1 signal: Drives are ready for operation.

Note:

The signal is reset with "Drive coupling off".








Signal from CSB: power failure FY 22, bit 6

For further information, refer to the documentation SINUMERIK 840C, Interface DescriptionPart 2, Connection Conditions, Section 2.3.6.2








Signal to CSB: data saved FY 22, bit 7

For further information, refer to the documentation SINUMERIK 840C, Interface DescriptionPart 2, Connection Conditions, Section 2.3.6.2

3.5 Individual signals

NC ALARM FY 24, bit 0

1 signal: At least one NC alarm is active (consisting of block- or sequence-related alarmsof all channels).

0 signal: No NC alarm


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



BATTERY PREWARNING FY 24, bit 1

After Power On, the voltage of the installed batteries is cyclically checked for compliance withthe permissible lower limit. This permits a battery failure (on the central service board) to beidentified in good time during extended periods of NC operation.

1 signal: Battery voltage is below limit value.0 signal: Battery voltage is above lower limit value.

Note:

The battery should only be changed when the NC is switched on, to avoid data loss due to theabsence of memory back-up.

TEMPERATURE PREWARNING FY 24, bit 2

1 signal: Activates first threshold of temperature monitoring ( 55°C) because ambienttemperature is too high

0 signal: No effect

OVERTEMPERATURE/FAN FAILURE FY 24, bit 3

1 signal: Activates second threshold of temperature monitoring because ambienttemperature is too highorfan monitoring is activated because of fan failure

0 signal: No effect

Note:

The work process is not interrupted. A relay contact opens on the central service board whichthe NC user must use to take the necessary precautions to prevent damage to the hardware(relay contact: X111 KL. 3/4).

CPU FAILURE FY 24, bit 4

1 signal: Failure of MMC CPU during operation

0 signal: No CPU failure

Note:

Initiate orderly machine stoppage in the event of MMC-CPU failure.

NC ALARM WITH PROCESSING STOP FY 24, bit 5

1 signal: At least one NC alarm, consisting of block or sequence-related alarms of allchannels, with the effect of stopping processing of the control, is active.

0 signal: No NC alarm to stop processing is active.




PROBE SELECTED 1 and 2 FY 24, bits 6 and 7

1 signal: Probe selected

0 signal: Probe not or no longer selected

tv1

1

2

3

tv2

tv1

tv2

1: Probe signal at NC input2: Recognition of probe signal in NC3: PROBE SELECTED signal at interface (approx. 1.5 x IPO scan time+cycle time PLC (min.

3-4 ms))

Note:

• To permit output of the interface signal, the probe has to output the signal for at least onePLC signal otherwise the ”probe selected” signal cannot be scanned by the user. Theprobe signal has the effect ”Delete distance to go”

• By means of hardware jumpering on the CSM module, it can be established whether theprobe is treated as a normally-open or normally-closed contact.

• The probe must be activated for the NC by the CL 800 command @720 or G720=G722.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


3.6 Diagnostics (DB 1)


ACTUAL CYCLE TIME DW 0MINIMUM CYCLE TIME DW 1MAXIMUM CYCLE TIME DW 2

The cycle time (time that the PLC program takes for one run) is stored in these data words inKF format in msec. These values are deleted each time the PLC is started up (cold or warmrestart). These values are invalidated with FB 12.

ID OF I/O TYPE DW 10, bit 0 ... 15INPUT I/O GROUP NOT READY DW 12, bit 0 ... 15

DW 13, bit 0 ... 15OUTPUT I/O GROUP NOT READY DW 14, bit 0 ... 15

DW 15, bit 0 ... 15ERROR SIGNAL I BYTE DW 30 to DW 45ERROR SIGNAL O BYTE DW 46 to DW 61IMAGE OF STATUS REGISTER OF DMP MODULES DW 70 to DW 159

1 signal: The I/O group corresponding to the set bit is not ready, I/Os not ready.

0 signal: No I/O group malfunction.

Notes:

• One I/O group comprises 8 bytes of address space in the I/O area.

• An error is also identified if the I/O device has changed, that is to say if the I/O deviceidentified by the PLC does not correspond to the I/O device anticipated according to theinformation in the machine data. This situation can occur, for instance, if modules arerearranged.

Extended error message in the case of I/O failure

MD 6560 and the following (STOP/no STOP in the case of a failure of one I/O module) are nolonger effective.

This means that the PLC goes into the STOP state if an I/O module fails.

In the case of I/O failures in cyclic operation, the following DB 1 assignment applies:

DW 10 Identification of I/O type– Central I/O, TPx, LPx =1– 16 bit link =3– DMP =4

DW 12 ... 13 Error message input groups

DW 10 Identification of I/O type– Central I/O, TPx, LPx =1– 16 bit link =3– DMP =4




DW 12 ... 13 Error message input groups

DW 14 ... 15 Error message output groups1 bit per groupOne group=8 bytes

DW 30 ... 45 Error message input byte

DW 46 ... 61 Error message output byte1 bit per byte

DW 70 ... 159 Image of status registers of DMP modules

Assignment of status registers of DMP modules

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

DEZNAU

Wire break

Transmission error

Overtemperature

OUTDS

Configuration change input

Configuration change output

Module started (as of SW 3.1 of Interface-DMP)

In addition, the following error messages are entered at addresses F0000 to F0003:

F0000: Error numberF0001: Identification of type of I/O (see DW 10 in DB 1)F0002: Identifier input, output (I/O)F0003: Byte number

NUMBER OF LOSTREQUESTS DURING LIM/SIM (OB 2...OB 7) DW 16...DW 21

A program section can be protected against interrupts caused by program levels OB 2 to OB 7by means of the Step-5 commands LIM and SIM. In this context the PLC user programdisables the processing of requests for OBs that could interfere with the program section.

The PLC operating system counts the number of requests for a disabled OB. When the PLCuser program enables processing of the OBs again, the PLC operating system checks whetherthe disabled OB was requested in the intervening period. A distinction is made between thefollowing cases:


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



Disabled OB not requested during processing disable.

No special measures are necessary in this case.

Disabled OB requested once during processing disable.

In this case the disabled OB is activated now, when processing is enabled. Therefore, norequest for the OB has been lost.

Disabled OB requested several times during processing disable.

The most recent request for the OB during the processing disable can now be implemented:the OB is activated. First of all the number of lost requests for the OB is entered in therelevant data word, DW 16 ... DW 21, in DB 1. Stated more accurately, the number is addedto the contents of the data word.

With reference to the counter contents in NUMBER OF LOST REQUESTS OB 2 ... OB 7, thePLC user program can therefore determine, for example, whether time slices or interrupts havebeen lost and then trigger appropriate reactions as necessary.

Notes:

The counter contents in NUMBER OF LOST REQUESTS OB 2 ... OB 7 are not reset by thePLC operating system; where applicable, the PLC operating system adds new values to thecurrent counter contents. The PLC user program can reset the counter contents in NUMBEROF LOST REQUESTS OB 2 ... OB 7 to zero if required.

Event counter processing time delay OB 2 ... 7

Event counter processing time delay in OB 2 ... 7 has been removed from pseudo addressF0004 ... F0009 (PG function AUSGABE ADR:AG) and moved to DB 1 (DW 22 ... 27). If aprocessing time delay occurs in OB 2 ... 7 and no stop has been set in the machine data thecorresponding identifier is set in flag byte 6 and the current value of the associated data wordis increased by 1 - an overflow is not detected.

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a




































DW 22

DW 23

DW 24

DW 25

DW 26

DW 27

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a







Diagnostics DBDB 1

Event counter processing time delay in OB 2










ERROR NUMBER DW 160SUPPLEMENTARY ERROR DATA DW 161 to DW 164ACCU 1 DW 166ACCU 2 DW 167

The PLC detailed error identifiers and the supplementary error data are stored in thediagnostics DB (DB 1) in data words 160 to 164 (equivalent to PG function OUTPUTADDR:PLC, F0000). In addition, ACCU 1 low and ACCU 2 low are displayed in data words 166and 167.

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a








Same as address withOUTPUT ADDR:PLC

F0000

F0001

F0002

F0003

F0004
















































DW 160

DW 1611)

DW 1621)

DW 1631)

DW 1641)

DW 165

DW 165

DW 166

DW 167

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a








Diagnostics DBDB 1

Supplementary error data 1st word

Supplementary error data 2nd word

Supplementary error data 3rd word

Supplementary error data 4th word

Reserved

ACCU 1, low word

ACCU 2, low word

Error number

Example:































DW 160

DW 161

DW 162

DW 163

DW 164








Diagnostics DBDB 1

00 79 H

00 00 H

00 00 H

00 00 H

00 00 H

_______1) For some error numbers between OUTPUT ADDR: PLC F0000 and DB1 high/low, representation of the

additional error information is interchanged.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



00 79 H means PLC stop by means of mode selection switch. No supplementary error dataexist for this error.

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a














An explanation of detailed error coding is containedin the Diagnostics Guide.

Software releases

SOFTWARE RELEASES DW 168 to DW 175

The releases of the PLC software and the interface DMP firmware are stored in thediagnostics DB (DB 1). Furthermore, the module code and the slot numbers of the InterfaceDMP and INT EU/16B interfaces are entered.

Interface PLC 135 WB2/-WD

Interface PLC 135 WB2/-WD

DW 174

DW 175

DW 173

DW 169

DW 170

DW 171

DW 168

DW 172

DW 176

DW 177

Interface-DMP

Interface-DMP,INT EU/16B

Interface-DMP

Interface-DMP

Diagnostics DBDB 1

PLC software

Reserved

Int. version No.Software release

Software release Int. version No.

Module code1) Slot No.(hexadecimal)





Reserved

Reserved

3rd interface

2nd interface

1st interface

_______1) Module code (binary)

1010 01 xx Interface-DMP

0110 11 xx INT EU/16B

1011 10 xx Interface PLC 135 WB2

1000 11 xx Interface PLC 135 WD

xx=̂ Hardware version

END OF SECTION


09.95 4 NCK Channel/PLC Interface (DB 10 ... DB 13, as from SW 4 DB 15)

4.1 SINUMERIK 840C terms and structure

4 NCK Channel/PLC Interface (DB 10 ... DB 13,as from SW 4 DB 15)

4.1 SINUMERIK 840C terms and structure

4.1.1 Channel

The control has a channel structure. An NCK channel is effectively an NC in its own right withprogram, decoding, block processing and interpolation. The SINUMERIK 840C simultaneouslyoperates with several tools and includes the loader in the machine tool. Thus, SINUMERIK840C can be expanded to comprise 15 servo loops1) (simultaneously active!) for allocation ofaxes, spindles and/or auxiliary axes/auxiliary spindles, as required. The maximum number ofwork spindles is, however, restricted to six.

In accordance with the machine configuration, the NC axes, the tool slide, the work spindlesand the loader are combined to form axis groups. Each axis group is allocated its own inter-polator with associated program processing, which is called a channel. The SINUMERIK 840Chas up to 4 autonomous channels, as from SW 4 up to 6 autonomous channels.

A single-spindle, double-slide turning machine with milling unit, tool turrets and integral loaderis used in the following to illustrate the application of the channel structure.

Schematic representation of a single-spindle, double-slide turning machine for turning/milling with integral

X2

Z2T2

Slide 2

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

S2

(Yf)

(Xf)C3 S3

T1

S1

X1

Z1

Slide 1

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a aa aa aa a

a aa aa aa a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

Q5

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

Q4

Loader

_______1) With SW 5 and higher, a max. of 30 servo loops (digital drives) are possible. The limitation to 15 servo loops

for analog drives and 6 spindles still applies.


4 NCK Channel/PLC Interface (DB 10 ... DB 13, as from SW 4 DB 15) 10.94

4.1.1 Channel

The machine units

• slide 1, main spindle, auxiliary spindle• turret 1,• slide 2,• turret 2 and• loader

can be allocated to the channels of the SINUMERIK 840C as follows:

Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6

Special tasks X1Z1S1C3, S3XfYfT1

X2Z2T2S2

Q4Q5

Slide 1 Slide 2 Loader

The fictitious axes Xf and Yf are required for face-end milling of turned parts (TRANSMIT).Within the control, the axes are treated in the same way as real axes, i.e. all the requiredmachine data must be set.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


4.1.2 Operating mode group

4.1.2 Operating mode group

The channels are put into higher-level operating mode groups . A single operating modegroup contains the channels that always have to work simultaneously in the same mode foroperational reasons. Within the operating mode group, each axis can be programmed in eachchannel. The loader is allocated its own operating mode group. This arrangement permitsoperation of the loader setting-up mode during workpiece production. Up to 2 operating modegroups are possible, and as from SW 4 up to 6 mode groups.

The assignment of:

• NCK channels operating mode groups• NC axes operating mode groups• spindles operating mode groups

is effected by way of NC machine data (see Installation Guide, Instructions).

The assignment of axes to the channels is not effected by way of machine data but in the partprogram. This means that within one operating mode group, an axis can run in differentchannels, although not simultaneously.

Using the previous example, the control structure can be shown thus:

Central part program memory

Channel 1 Channel 2

Slide 1

Channel 3

Slide 2

Channel 4

Loader

Operating mode group 1 Op. mode grp. 2

Assignedaxes/spindles:

X1 Z1 S1 S3/C3 3X2 Z2 S2 Q4 Q5

In addition to the machining channels in which the programs for controlling the working unitsare run, further channels can be allocated special tasks. In this case, channel 1 controls theexecution of save programs that allow tools to be retracted or changed after tool breakage sothat workpiece machining can be continued. This program is not necessarily dedicated tochannel 1. Depending on the workpiece being manufactured, machining programs must becreated for all channels and are read into the central part program memory of the NCK.



4.1.3 Channel-specific interface signal exchange


The channel-specific interface NCK/PLC is stored in data blocks DB 10 (channel 1) to DB 13(channel 4), as from SW 4 to DB 15 (channel 6), and is divided into:

• signals to NCK channelDW 0 to DW 12

• signals from NCK channelDW 13 to DW 69

Overview of the channel-specific signals

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

NCK

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

PLC

NCKchannels

1 to 4(as fromSW 4:1 to 6)

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

M list

Link RAM

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a











Operating modes DW 0SubmodesProgram controlFeed control DW 12












Program commands DW 13Softkey selectionAcknowledgementReady signals DW 16




Modific. signals DW 17








M signals acc. to list DW 18(static, dynamic) DW 30







Auxiliary functions DW 31Block information DW 69

StandardM

decoding

M deco-ding acc.to list

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a








M signalsM00 to M99(static, dynamic)





DB10 to DB13

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

DB30

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

DB80 to DB83

As the processing of bit signals in data blocks is awkward, two function macros (FB 70 and FB 71) are available for transferring signals between the data words and flag words. Thefunction macros FB 70 and FB 71 are contained in the PLC operating system.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



Signal exchange DB channel 1 with flags

FB 70

99

86

25

M area

FB 71

FB 71: T: EA>NSFB 70: T: NS>EA

Dynamic area

K1F

31.25F 0.0F 0.0

QUTYQUADZITYAN/ZPASPZASP

F31.25

K1

QUTYAN/QZITYZIAD

Basic signals

DW 30

DW 0Interface

channel 1

DB 10

Assignment data bytes flag bytes

Signal exchange by

means of FB 70 / 71

Signal transfer interfaces DB Flag area

FY 27

FY 29

FY 30

FY 25

Flag area

FY 26

FY 28

DL 0

DR 0

DL 1

DR 1

DL 2

DR 2

DB interfaces




Several bits are available for each of the signals, GENERAL FEED DISABLE, READ-INDISABLE, NC START DISABLE.

If, for example, a different bit is set for each machine function that has to activate feed disable,it is easy to determine which function initiated feed disable in the event of a fault. Each set bitcan be allocated a message text, so that the operator can be informed of the diagnosis.

Channel-specific messages

FB

PLC MD

PLC MD

NC Start

DW 6

DW 7

DW 8DW 9

DW 10

DW 11

DBm

NC Start disable

General feed disable

General feed disableand read-in disable

Read-in disable

1

1

1

General feeddisableinterface

Read-in disableinterface

NC Startinterface

Interrogatemessages

Buffermemoryerrormessages

Buffermemoryoper.messages

Bytes forerrormessages

Bytes foroper.messages

For GENERAL FEED DISABLE, note that this channel-specific signal is effective only in theautomatic operating modes. If axis travel has to be suppressed independent of the operatingmode, this must be effected by means of the axis-specific signal FEED DISABLE.

Per operating mode group, as many axes can be traversed simultaneously in JOG mode aschannels are assigned to it.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


4.2 Signals to NCK channel

4.2 Signals to NCK channel

4.2.1 Operating modes

DRF SELECTED D 0.15

1 signal: Handwheel operation also becomes effective during AUT/TEACH IN or MDAmode (differential resolver offset).

0 signal: No handwheel operation possible during AUT or MDA modes.

Notes:

1) In the AUT and MDA modes, handwheels 1 and 2 (e.g. activated by a key operatedswitch) can be used to set a permanent path offset (according to the smallest set inputresolution). The offset is shown separately and remains effective even beyond absoluteblocks.

2) DRF SELECTED (DB 10 - 15, D 14.9) softkey function can be used for the selection. Thesignal is transmitted by FB 78.

RESET D 0.14

1 signal: Channel is reset; the reset states are set (e.g. with G functions); the alarms ofthe channel are cancelled

0 signal: No channel reset

Notes:

1) SW 1: The RESET signal must be given by the PLC (e.g. by the RESET key). The signalis interpreted only by the 1st channel of a mode group and affects all channels.The 1st channel of a mode group is set by means of NC MD.

SW 2: The RESET has a channel-specific effect. Single channels of a mode group canbe set to the RESET state without influencing other channels in doing so.

2) EMERGENCY STOP can be cancelled only by ACKNOWLEDGE EMERGENCY STOP.

CANCEL D 0.13

1 signal: Cancel alarms of the channel are acknowledged (signal level must be present forat least one PLC cycle)

as from SW 2: Whether Cancel is to be effective for all channel-specific alarms orfor the selected (current) channel only can be set via MD 5008.0.

0 signal: No acknowledgement



4.2.2 Feedrate modification

4.2.2 Feedrate modificationa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a







Extended Stop and Retract (ESR) On (from SW 6.2) D 1.15

1 signal: Extended Stop and Retract (ESR) On

FEEDRATE OVERRIDE EFFECTIVE D 1.13

1 signal: The selected FEEDRATE OVERRIDE is effective for a specific channel.

0 signal: The selected FEEDRATE OVERRIDE is ineffective; the 100 % override value isstipulated.

Note:

Axis-specific deletion of this signal can be achieved with NC setting data (NC SE 560*.0).This is recommended, for example, if a turret is controlled by an auxiliary axis in the samemode group.


Using the FEEDRATE OVERRIDE EFFECTIVE signal, the feedrate override switches can beenabled, e.g. with the key operated switch, while setting up a new NC program.

FEEDRATE OVERRIDE D 1.8 to 1.12

The feedrate override can be preselected with the selector switch on the machine controlpanel or via the PLC as follows:

Note:

The percentage values given in the tableare stored as machine data (NC MD 100 -130). Only the machine data for positions1 to 23 are entered as standard; thestandard machine data can be altered. Theother machine data can be enteredsubsequently. It is thus possible toevaluate the codes for positions 24 to 31,supplied by a connected code switch orPLC program.

Position CodeE D C B A

Override valuein %

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223

0 0 0 0 10 0 0 1 10 0 0 1 00 0 1 1 00 0 1 1 10 0 1 0 10 0 1 0 00 1 1 0 00 1 1 0 10 1 1 1 10 1 1 1 00 1 0 1 00 1 0 1 10 1 0 0 10 1 0 0 01 1 0 0 01 1 0 0 11 1 0 1 11 1 0 1 01 1 1 1 01 1 1 1 11 1 1 0 11 1 1 0 0

012468

102030405060707580859095

100105110115120

2425262728293031

1 0 1 0 01 0 1 0 11 0 1 1 11 0 1 1 01 0 0 1 01 0 0 1 11 0 0 0 11 0 0 0 0


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


4.2.2 Feedrate modification








Extended Stop and Retract (ESR) Off (from SW 6.2) D 1.7

1 signal: Extended Stop and Retract (ESR) Off

RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE EFFECTIVE D 1.5

1 signal: Channel-specific effect of the selected rapid traverse override.

0 signal: The selected rapid traverse override is ineffective; the 100 % override value isstipulated.

Notes:

• Axis-specific deletion of this signal can be achieved with NC setting data (NC SE 560*.1).This is recommended, for example, if a turret is controlled by an auxiliary axis in the samemode group.

• The softkey function RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE EFFECTIVE (DB 10 - 13, D 14.0) canbe used to make the selection. The signal is transmitted by FB 78.


Using the RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE EFFECTIVE signal, the rapid traverse overrideswitches can be enabled, e.g. with the key operated switch, while setting up a new NCprogram.

RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE D 1.0 to 1.2

The RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE can be selected with the selector switch on the customercontrol panel as follows:

Position CodeD C B A

Override value in %

1234

0 0 0 10 0 1 10 0 1 00 1 1 0

11050

100

5678

0 1 1 10 1 0 10 1 0 01 1 0 0

Notes:

• The percentage values given in the table are stored as machine data (NC MD 147-154).Only the machine data for positions 1 to 4 are entered as standard; the other machine datacan be entered subsequently if required, thus also permitting evaluation of the codes forpositions 5 to 8 which are supplied from a coding switch or from the PLC program.

• The values given in the table are effective only if the "rapid traverse override switchavailable" machine data is set. If the bit is not set, the position of the feedrate overrideswitch applies to RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE subject to a max. value of 100%.



4.2.3 Program control


Notes on block search

There are three ways of reentering an aborted program:

• Block search with calculation

• Block search without calculation

• Block search with calculation from last main block

In part programs a distinction is made between main blocks and subblocks.

Note:

In the case of "External execution", only block search with calculation is permitted.

Block search with calculation

The control starts at the beginning of the program and

• calculates all blocks and• outputs all auxiliary functions to the PLC, depending on the setting of ”group or output” in

NC MD 546*.

Once the target block is reached, the control begins processing from there after NC Start.

Block search without calculation

The control jumps to the specified target block and begins processing the part program fromthere after NC Start. Block search without calculation is of no significance for the PLC.

Block search with calculation from last main block

The control executes a block search (without calculation) to the last main block (:) before thetarget. Starting at this main block, the control performs a block search with calculation up tothe specified target block.

EXECUTION FROM EXTERNAL D 2.15

1 signal: The "Execution from external" function is activated when the signal is set. Thepart program for the NC channel is read in at an interface during machining.

0 signal: The "Execution from external" function is not active or is deselected. The partprogram is executed normally from the part program memory in the COM area.

Notes:

• The "Execution from external" function can be selected by the user by softkey (seeEXECUTION FROM EXTERNAL (SOFTKEY) signal) or automatically by the PLC userprogram.

• The interface to be used is specified in machine data MD 130*. If this interface is alreadybusy when the function is initiated (by NC START), alarm 2044 "External execution error"is issued.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



• If "Execution from external" is initiated by a host computer, the PLC user program mustevaluate errors when the function is started and report to the host.

• If the external part program is executed faster than it is transmitted so that the subsequentblock is not available, workpiece machining comes to a standstill. The PLC user programhas recourse to the following options in order to prevent this in conjunction with time-critical program sections:

– General reduction of machining feedrate (feedrate override)

– Ensure that the buffer for incoming program parts is full before time-critical programsections, e. g. by means of read-in disable. The buffer size and free capacity can bequeried from the NC data channel.

Time-critical program sections can be marked, e. g. by special M functions, so that thePLC user program is able to recognize them.

BLOCK SEARCH WITH CALCULATION D 2.14

1 signal: Start BLOCK SEARCH WITH CALCULATION

0 signal: No BLOCK SEARCH

Note:

The signal must remain present until acknowledged.


Activation of block search. Activation is usually effected by pressing the BLOCK SEARCHsoftkeys (DB 10-13, as from SW 4 DB 15, D 14.6). The signal is transmitted by FB 78.

Signal chart

1

2

3

4

1: NC signal block search with calculation/block search as from main block (DW14)2: PLC signal block search with calculation/block search as from main block (DW2)3: NC signal block search active (DW13)4: NC signal block search result (DW15)




BLOCK SEARCH WITH CALCULATION AS FROM LAST MAIN BLOCK D 2.13

1 signal: Start BLOCK SEARCH WITH CALCULATION AS FROM LAST MAIN BLOCK

0 signal: No BLOCK SEARCH

Note:

The signal must be present until acknowledged.


Activation of block search. Activation is usually effected by pressing the BLOCK SEARCHsoftkeys (DB 10-13, as from SW 4 DB 15, D 14.5). The signal is transmitted by FB 78.

Internal WAIT mark synchronization for block search D 2.12

1 signal: Internal WAIT marks are observed for block search.

0 signal: External WAIT mark synchronization is not observed for block search.

Program start/end cycles off (SW 5 and higher) D 2.11

1 signal: No cycle is called on program start/end. Display NCY (No Cycle) is displayed inthe channel status field.

0 signal: Cycle 1-9999 (no. is set in MD 134*) is called on program start and cycle 1-9999(no. set in MD 136*) is called on end of program.

Note:

For a detailed description see Installation Instructions, Section "NC Machine Data" MD 134*and MD 136*.

See also DB 10 ... 15, D 14.3.

PSTEP selected (SW 3 and higher) D 2.10

1 signal: The main program blocks are executed as single blocks. In contrast to DEC, thesubroutines and the subnested subroutine levels are executed as a complete unitwhen Program Step (PSTEP Procedure Step) is selected.Program execution is then stopped before the 1st block after subroutine return inthe main program.

0 signal: Program control by PSTEP is not active.

Note:

Decoding single block (DEC), break (BRK) and program step (PSTEP) are alternatively active,i.e. according to the principle ”one out of three”.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



BREAK selected (SW 3 and higher) D 2.9

1 signal: A program interruption (BREAK) can be defined via cursor and softkey functions.

0 signal: No program interruption point can be defined.

CLEAR selected (SW 3 and higher) D 2.8

1 signal: An MDA block is automatically cleared (Clear) at end of program, Reset orchange of operating mode.

0 signal: The MDA blocks are not cleared.

DELETE DISTANCE TO GO D 2.3

0/1 transition: The distances-to-go (set/actual value difference) for all axes of the channelare deleted. Any following error is reduced to zero. An active dwell block iscancelled.

1/0 transition: No effect

Notes:

• The DELETE DISTANCE TO GO signal must be active for at least one PLC cycle.

• After DELETE DISTANCE TO GO, a program block with G90 has to follow for the deletedaxis at least.

• If a block with G91 follows, the value programmed under G91 is added to the programmedaxis path in the block with delete distance to go.

• DELETE DISTANCE TO GO with rounding axes leads to an alarm with processing stop.

• DELETE DISTANCE TO GO is permissible only in G01, G02 and G03 blocks (G02/G03blocks only with 2D interpolation)

• With active 5-axis tool length compensation, the set/actual value difference is not reducedto zero until ”Delete distance to go” has been carried out twice. No axis traverses areallowed between the first and second ”Delete distance to go” (Cancel ”Feed Hold” on first”Delete distance to go”).

DELETE NUMBER OF SUBROUTINE PASSES D 2.2

1 signal: Deletes the remaining number of subroutine passes.

0 signal: No effect

Notes:

• By deleting the remaining number of subroutine passes, the NC can be synchronized withan externally reported machine position.

• The subroutine pass that is currently being executed is completed as far as M17.

• The 1 signal must be active until the end of the subroutine and has to be reset with M17.

• To interrupt a specific subroutine, @ 714 (STOP DEC) has to be programmed in the lastblock before M17.




Signal chart

1

2

3

1: DELETE NUMBER OF SUBROUTINE PASSES signal2: Valid M17 decoded3: M modification signal

NC STOP D 2.1

0/1 transition: The current NC program is stopped immediately, the current block is notconcluded. Residual paths are not traversed until the next start. The axes arebrought to a controlled stop.


Signal chart

1

2

3

4

5

1: NC STOP signal2: NC START signal3: PROGRAM ACTIVE signal4: Axis running5: Block executed

Notes:

• If the NC program has been interrupted, additional auxiliary functions can be stored, forexample. These will be executed after the next NC START.

• When the NC START signal is given, program execution recommences at the breakpoint.If additional auxiliary functions were stored while the program was interrupted, only thesewill be effective after the first Start. Program execution is then continued with the secondNC Start.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



• The NC STOP signal must be active for at least one PLC cycle.

• If data were transferred to the NC after NC STOP (e. g. tool offset), these are taken intoaccount immediately after NC START.

NC START D 2.0

Operating mode AUT:

0/1 transition: The selected NC program is started or continued. The progammed auxiliaryfunctions are output.If data were transferred from the PLC to the NC after PROGRAMINTERRUPTED (e. g. tool offset), these are taken into accountimmediately after NC START.

1/0 transition: No effect.


Transfer of new tool offsets with NC START and NC STOP

Signal chart

1

2

3

4

5

6

1: RAPID TRAVERSE signal2: READ-IN DISABLE signal3: Transfer of new tool offsets4: NC STOP signal5: PROGRAM INTERRUPTED6: NC START signal

Operating mode MDA

0/1 transition: The input block data are released for execution.

1/0 transition: No effect.

Operating modes JOG, INC, REPOS (overstore):

0/1 transition: The input M, S, T, H and D functions are released for execution.





Notes:

• The NC START signal must be active for at least one PLC cycle.• Subroutines can also be selected and started directly (without main program).

SPINDLE NUMBER D 3.8 to 3.10

SPINDLE NUMBER informs the NC channel of:

• The number of the spindle from which the NC channel picks off the pulses, e.g. forrevolutional feedrate.

• The number of the spindle to which an S word without extended address is output.

• For digital spindles, power indication is activated in the operating mode basic displays asfrom SW3.

Spindle CodeC B A

1123456

0 0 00 0 10 1 00 1 11 0 01 0 11 1 0

Note:

SPINDLE NUMBER defines the spindle that can be programmed without extended M and Saddresses and is displayed in the basic displays of the NC.

SKIP BLOCK /1.../8 (activation) DW4, bits 8 to 15

1 signal: The identified part program blocks are skipped.

0 signal: The identified part program blocks are not skipped.

OPERATING MODES AND FUNCTIONS DW 5

The OPERATING MODES and FUNCTIONS can, for example, be entered via machine controlpanel keypad or via the PLC:

1 signal: The key concerned is pressed

0 signal: The key concerned is not pressed


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



Notes:

1) The operating modes are only checked by the 1st channel (master channel) of the modegroup.

2) The mode is only changed within the control once all the axes of the mode group arestationary (coarse exact stop).

3) If the mode changes, the operating status is also modified. The following table shows theoperating status modification for each change in the mode:

ResetRun-

ningStop Reset

Run-

ningStop Reset

Run-

ningStopReset

Run-

ningStop

AUTOMATIC JOG TEACH IN MDA

X




















a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a

























































X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

Reset

Run-

ning

Stop

Reset

Run-

ning

Stop

Reset

Run-

ning

Stop

Reset

Run-

ning

Stop

X

AUTO-MATIC

JOG

TEACH-IN

MDA

To

From

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a







a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a








a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

Comments:

No operating status

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

Machine function overview:

The operating modes are supplemented by the machine functions. The machine functions donot depend on the type of technology or machine.

All machine functions are listed below. Depending on the operating status, a certain number ofmachine functions can be selected in each mode. The following table shows which machinefunctions can be selected in which operating mode and operating status.




Functions

AUTOMATIC

ResetRun-

ningStop

MDA

ResetRun-

ningStop

TEACH IN

ResetRun-

ningStop

JOG

ResetRun-

ningStop

Correction block X X

Program controlX X X X X X X X X

Overstore X X X X X X X X

Extended overstoring X X X X X X

Block search X X

PRESET offset X X X X

Program preselect

during TEACH IN

X

Approach reference

point

X

INC 1 ... 10 000

Inc variable

X X X

Reposition X X X

Direction keys X X X X

Handwheel X X X X

Program editing X X

Operatingmode

SKIP BLOCK D 0.7

1 signal: The blocks marked with an oblique stroke (/) in the workpiece program areskipped. If a series of blocks is to be skipped, this signal is effective only if it ispresent before decoding the first block, preferably before NC Start.

0 signal: No blocks of the part program are skipped. If a series of blocks is to be skipped,they are processed only if the 0 signal is present before decoding the first block.

Note:

The signal SKIP BLOCK SELECTED (DB 10 to 13, as from SW 4 DB 15, D 14.15) can beused to make the selection (the signal is transmitted by FB 78).


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



SINGLE BLOCK D 0.6

1 signal: In the AUT and MDA modes, program execution in single block mode.

0 signal: No effect.

Notes:

• If a contour definition is defined in a program block, only one contour element is traversedwith each start if SINGLE BLOCK is selected. If cutter radius compensation is selected,intermediate blocks may be inserted.

• If there is a series of G33 blocks, SINGLE BLOCK is effective only if DRY RUNFEEDRATE is selected.

• Arithmetic blocks are not processed in the single step mode.

• The single block function can be allocated an extended function with NC MD 5004 bits 5and 6 (mode-group-specific single block). (Refer to Installation Guide Instructions in thisconnection.)

DECODING SINGLE BLOCK D 0.5

1 signal: In operating modes AUT and MDA, execution of all program blocks in the singleblock mode.


Notes:

• With single block selected, usually only those blocks containing travel movements and/orauxiliary functions are executed block by block. Using the DECODING SINGLE BLOCKsignal, pure arithmetic blocks can also be tested in the single block mode.

• The softkey function DEC SINGLE BLOCK SELECTED (DB 10-13, as from SW 4 DB 15,D 14.13) can be used to make the selection. The signal is transmitted by FB 78.

DRY RUN FEEDRATE D 0.4

1 signal: Traverse is at the DRY RUN FEEDRATE that has been set via setting datainstead of at the programmed feedrate (with G01, G02, G03). The dry runfeedrate also applies in place of the revolutional feedrate and the feedrate forthread cutting.

0 signal: Traverse is at the programmed feedrate. If the signal changes to ”0” within aG33 block, the programmed feedrate does not become effective until the end ofthe block.

Note:

The DRY RUN FEEDRATE SELECTED signal (DB 10-13, as from SW 4 DB 15, D 14.12) canbe used to make the selection. The signal is transmitted by FB 78.


Testing the workpiece program at increased feedrate.




M01 ACTIVE D 0.3

1 signal: The M01 in the part program leads to programmed stop.

0 signal: The M01 in the part program does not lead to programmed stop.

Note:

The M01 ACTIVE SELECTED signal (D 14.11) can be used to make the selection. The signalis transmitted by FB 78.

Do not reduce channel (SW 6 and higher) D 0.1

1 signal: If the velocity in a channel is not to be reduced despite proximity to a protectionspace, the PLC can switch off reduction of the path velocity channel specificallywith the collision monitoring reduction factor.

No reduction of the channel path velocity 1) D 0.0

1 signal: The path velocity of the channel is not reduced by the dyn. SW limit switch.

0 signal: The path velocity of the channel is reduced by the dyn. SW limit switch.

4.2.4 General feed disable

GENERAL FEED DISABLE DW 6

1 signal: Effects FEED HOLD for all interpolator controlled axes provided that no threadcutting/drilling signal (e.g. G33-G63) is present.

0 signal: Effects FEED ENABLE for all axes.

Notes:

• The signal is effective only in the automatic modes.

• When GENERAL FEED DISABLE is selected, all axes in motion are brought to a stop onthe contour. Position control remains operative, i.e. the following error is reduced to zero.

• GENERAL FEED DISABLE is activated if at least one bit in DW 6 has a 1 signal.

• If an axis must not be traversed in any operating mode due to interlock conditions, thismust be prevented for the specific axis with FEED DISABLE.

• A message can be allocated to any FEED DISABLE bit.

_______1) As from SW 5.6


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


4.2.4 General feed disable

Signal chart

1

2

3

4

5

67

1: FEED OFF signal2: FEED ON signal3: FEED DISABLE signal4: Motion command (e.g. X+)5: X axis in motion6: Block executed7: Controlled positioning


To interrupt machining by selecting FEED OFF on the operator panel.

GENERAL FEED DISABLE AND READ-IN DISABLE DW 7, DW 8

1 signal: Effects FEED HOLD for all interpolator controlled axes provided that no G33 toG63 (thread cutting/tapping) signal is present. The signal is effective only inautomatic modes.

0 signal: Effects FEED ENABLE for all axes and READ-IN ENABLE.

Notes:

• See GENERAL FEED DISABLE and READ-IN DISABLE signal descriptions.

• The signal is activated if at least one bit has a 1 signal.

• A message can be allocated to any bit.



4.2.5 Read-in disable


READ-IN DISABLE DW 9 and DW 10

Operating modes AUT/MDA/TEACH IN:

1 signal: Disables transfer of data for the next block to the main memory.

0 signal: Enables transfer of data for the next block to the main memory.

Operating modes JOG, INC, REPOS or AUT interrupted (OVERSTORE):

1 signal: Activation of the auxiliary functions that have been input is disabled.

0 signal: Enables activation of the auxiliary functions that have been input at the NCoperator panel via NC START.

Notes:

• If complete execution of an auxiliary function is a precondition for processing the nextblock (e.g. tool change), the automatic block change has to be prevented with READ-INDISABLE.

• Read-in disable is activated if at least one READ-IN DISABLE bit has a 1 signal.

• A message can be allocated to any READ-IN DISABLE bit.

• Functioning of the ”Read-in disable” interface signal is not impaired in a G501 block.

Flowchart

MT

N21...N20 T LF

N21GXM LFN20 T LF





1

2

3

4

5

6

7

9

9 108

1: Read-in to buffer2: Block executed3: READ-IN DISABLE signal4: Data transfer5: Content of main memory6: Output of auxiliary functions7: Data transfer to main memory8: Read-in disable for tool change9: Interrogation point for read-in enable10: Cancel READ-IN DISABLE


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


4.2.6 NC Start disable

4.2.6 NC Start disable

NC START DISABLE DW 11

1 signal: No NC START signal

0 signal: NC START signal active

Notes:

• NC START DISABLE is activated if at least one bit in DW 11 has a 1 signal.• A message can be allocated to any NC START DISABLE bit.• NC START DISABLE is not activated in other operating mode groups.

Example of application

Suppression of renewed program execution because of lack of lubricant, for example.

4.3 Signals from NC channel

4.3.1 Program commands

M00/M01; PROGRAMMED STOP D 13.15

1 signal: Block executed, auxiliary functions output anda) M00 in main memory orb) M01 in main memory and M01 ACTIVE selected

0 signal: a) With NC STARTb) Program abort with RESET

Flowchart

M00

tc

1

2

3

4

5

6

1: Data transfer to main memory2: Block executed3: NC block with M word M004: M modification signal (tc=PLC cycle time)5: M00/M01 signal6: NC START




Note:

If a different mode is selected when the M00/M01; PROGRAMMED STOP signal is in the 1state, this state is maintained until the NC START or RESET signal is given.


To bring the main spindle to a stop, e.g. to carry out workpiece checks.

M02/M30; END OF PROGRAM, PROGRAM ABORT D 13.14

1 signal: a) An NC block with M02/M30 (or M17 if a subroutine, and not a main program,has been started) has been fully executed; if traversing movements are alsoprogrammed in this block, the signal is not output until the target position hasbeen reached.

b) Program has been aborted with RESETc) Selection of MDA, PRESET or REF modesd) After EMERGENCY STOP ACKNOWLEDGEMENT

0 signal: No end of program or abort

Flowchart, signal chart

M02

1

2

3

5

4 tc

tc

1: Data transfer to main memory2: Block executed3: NC block with M word M024: M modification signal (tc=PLC cycle time)5: M02/M30 signal


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



Notes:

• The M02 and M30 functions are equivalent.

• The M02/M30 signal is active for only one cycle.

• Not suitable for automatic function sequences such as:– batch counting– bar feed,– opening protective devices etc.For these functions write M02/M30 in a separate block, and use the M02/M30 word or theM02/M30 decoded M signal.

• The following must not be written in the last block of a program:– auxiliary functions that lead to read-in disable– S values that are to be effective beyond M02/M30.


Deleting functions activated by M, T and H words.

G33/G63; THREAD CUTTING D 13.13

Operating modes AUT, MDA

1 signal: Thread cutting has been selected with G33 or G63.

0 signal: a) Thread cutting has been deselected by G00, G01, G02, G03, G10 and G11.b) Program ended or aborted.

Signal chart

G01 G33

1

3

G002

1: Data transfer to main memory2: Contents of main memory3: G33/G63 signal




Notes:

• The following are ineffective:with G33/63: a) Feedrate override

b) Feed hold; (GENERAL FEED DISABLE signal is not interpreted),c) Single block; Stop not effected until the end of the next block without

G33.

• With G33 (thread cutting), "Feed hold" can be achieved indirectly by linking G33 andGENERAL FEED DISABLE to obtain the SPINDLE DISABLE signal.

• With G63, the NC reacts directly to the FEED DISABLE signal.

• Additional G functions can be decoded using FB 69.

G00; RAPID TRAVERSE D 13.12

AUT, MDA, TEACH IN modes

1 signal: Rapid traverse selected with G00.

0 signal: Rapid traverse block ended or aborted.

JOG, REPOS modes

1 signal: Rapid traverse and direction keys operated at the same time.

0 signal: Rapid traverse or direction key not operated.

REF mode (This signal is no longer output with SW5.1and higher)

1 signal: Reference point approach speed (DECELERATION signal = 1, i.e. referencepoint not yet reached).

0 signal: Reference point reached.

Note:

Additional G functions can be decoded using FB 69.

As from SW 5.1, this signal is no longr output in reference point approach mode.


Activation of bed lubrication.

G96; CONSTANT CUTTING SPEED D 13.11

1 signal: CONSTANT CUTTING SPEED selected with G96.

0 signal: CONSTANT CUTTING SPEED not selected.

Note:

Additional G functions can be decoded using FB 69.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



BLOCK SEARCH ACTIVE D 13.10

1 signal: The BLOCK SEARCH function has been started at the NC and not yetcompleted.

0 signal: The BLOCK SEARCH function has been completed.

PROGRAM INTERRUPTED D 13.9


1 signal: Program interrupted by NC STOP or mode change.

0 signal: a) Program not started.b) Program ended or aborted.c) Program has been restarted following NC STOP or mode change.

Note:

The PROGRAM INTERRUPTED signal indicates that NC part program execution can continueby restarting.

PROGRAM RUNNING D 13.8


1 signal: Programm started (NC START).

0 signal: a) Program interrupted by– programmed stop (M00/M01),– NC STOP or– operating mode change.

b) With single block operation: block executed.c) Program end reached (M02/M30).d) Program aborted by RESET.e) No further blocks in the memory (e.g. with MDA).f) Current block cannot be executed.




Signal chart

1

2

3

6

4

5

1: NC START signal2: PROGRAM RUNNING signal3: M00/M01 signal4: Position reached5: M02/M30 signal6: PROGRAM RUNNING display appears

Note:

The PROGRAM RUNNING signal does not change to 0 if workpiece machining is stopped byany of the following conditions:

• Output of GENERAL FEED DISABLE, axis-specific FEED DISABLE or SPINDLE DISABLE• READ-IN DISABLE,• FEEDRATE OVERRIDE at "0%",• Software limit switches or work field limit reached• Tripping of spindle or axis monitors• Set displacement values selected in the NC program for axes in FOLLOW-UP

OPERATION, for axes without CONTROLLER ENABLE or for PARKING AXES• EMERGENCY STOP

TRANSFORMATION ACTIVE D 13.7

1 signal: A transformation is active

0 signal: No transformation is active

Note:

If a transformation is active, the user can determine the transformation concerned by means ofFB 69. The FB 69 call can be made conditional on the TRANSFORMATION ACTIVE signal.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



RIGID TAPPING ACTIVE 1) DW 13.4

1 signal: The ”Rigid tapping” function has been selected.

0 signal: a) The G36 function is deselected from the 1st G group by programming adifferent type of interpolation (G00, G01, ...).

b) The G36 function was aborted by key reset or by the SPINDLE RESETsignal, if the MD 521*.4 bit ”Abort of C axis operation on RESET/M02/M30”is 1.

c) The G36 function is not active after powering-up the machine.

Note:

• Before selecting the ”Rigid tapping” function G36, the correct gear stage must beengaged.

• Before selecting the function, the spindle must be switched over to C axis operation usingthe INITIATE C AXIS OPERATION (DB 31, DW k+3, bit 3) signal. On calling L84 cycle,the threading cycle is called up, the number of which is stored in MD274.

• Prior to changeover to C axis operation, the PLC user program must create the relevantpreconditions, such as – Stop spindle or– Preset axis-specific interface

• Since the infeed axis and the C axis interpolate when tapping, both axes must be set tonearly the same dynamic response.

• The following machine data are valid for the infeed axis, after the spindle has beenchanged over to C axis operation.– MD 1320* Servo gain factor for rigid tapping– MD 1260* Feed forward control factor for rigid tapping– MD 1324* Time constant dynamic feedforward control for rigid tapping

Note:

The G36 function must not be aborted with the ”Deselect C axis operation” M function.

_______1) As from SW 2



4.3.2 Select program control


SKIP BLOCK SELECTED D 14.15

1 signal: SKIP BLOCK submode selected.

0 signal: SKIP BLOCK submode not selected.

Note:

The SKIP BLOCK SELECTED signal must be transferred to the SKIP BLOCK Interface signalby the PLC user program. FB 78 can also be used for this purpose.

DECODING SINGLE BLOCK SELECTED D 14.13

1 signal: DECODING SINGLE BLOCK submode selected.

0 signal: DECODING SINGLE BLOCK submode not selected.

Note:

The DECODING SINGLE BLOCK SELECTED signal must be transferred to the DECODINGSINGLE BLOCK interface signal by the PLC user program. FB 78 can also be used for thispurpose.

RY RUN FEEDRATE SELECTED D 14.12

1 signal: DRY RUN FEEDRATE submode selected.

0 signal: DRY RUN FEEDRATE submode not selected.

Note:

The DRY RUN FEEDRATE SELECTED signal must be transferred to the DRY RUNFEEDRATE interface signal by the PLC user program. FB 78 can also be used for thispurpose.

M01 SELECTED D 14.11

1 signal: M01 ACTIVE submode selected.

0 signal: M01 ACTIVE submode not selected.

Note:

The M01 SELECTED signal must be transferred to the M01 ACTIVE interface signal by thePLC user program. FB 78 can also be used for this purpose.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



FEEDRATE OVERRIDE FOR RAPID TRAVERSE SELECTED D 14.10

1 signal: The feedrate override switch is also to act as the rapid traverse override switch.Feedrate overrides of more than 100 % are limited to 100 % rapid traverseoverride.

0 signal: The feedrate override switch is not to act as the rapid traverse overrride switch(rapid traverse 100 %).

Notes:

• The FEEDRATE OVERRIDE FOR RAPID TRAVERSE SELECTED signal must be trans-ferred to the RAPID TRAVERSE ACTIVE interface signal by the PLC user program.FB 78 can also be used for this purpose.

• This signal is useful only if no separate rapid traverse override switch is provided.

DRF SELECTED D 14.9

1 signal: DIFFERENTIAL RESOLVER OFFSET function selected by softkey in the relevantselect display.

0 signal: DIFFERENTIAL RESOLVER OFFSET function not selected.

Note:

The DRF SELECTED signal must be transferred to the DRF ACTIVE interface signal by thePLC user program. FB 78 can also be used for this purpose.

EXECUTION FROM EXTERNAL SELECTED D 14.7

1 signal: The softkey for the EXECUTION FROM EXTERNAL function is active, i.e. theuser has selected this function.

0 signal: The softkey for the EXECUTION FROM EXTERNAL function is not active, i.e. thefunction has not been selected or it has been deselected.

Note:

The PLC user program must transfer the EXECUTION FROM EXTERNAL SELECTED signalinto the EXECUTION FROM EXTERNAL signal (see signal description).

BLOCK SEARCH WITH CALCULATION SELECTED D 14.6

1 signal: The BLOCK SEARCH WITH CALCULATION function has been selected.

0 signal: a) The BLOCK SEARCH WITH CALCULATION function has not been selected.b) Following 1 signal with BLOCK SEARCH WITH CALCULATION WITHOUT

ERRORS or ERRORS DURING BLOCK SEARCH WITH CALCULATION Note:

The BLOCK SEARCH WITH CALCULATION SELECTED signal must be transferred to theBLOCK SEARCH WITH CALCULATION interface signal by the PLC user program. FB 78 canalso be used for this purpose.




BLOCK SEARCH WITH CALC. AS FROM LAST MAIN BLOCK SELECTED D 14.5

1 signal: The BLOCK SEARCH WITH CALCULATION AS FROM LAST MAIN BLOCKfunction is selected.

0 signal: a) The BLOCK SEARCH WITH CALCULATION AS FROM LAST MAIN BLOCKis not selected.

b) Following 1 signal with BLOCK SEARCH WITH CALCULATION AS FROMLAST MAIN BLOCK WITHOUT ERROR or ERROR DURING BLOCKSEARCH WITH CALCULATION AS FROM LAST MAIN BLOCK

Note:

The BLOCK SEARCH WITH CALCULATION AS FROM LAST MAIN BLOCK SELECTEDsignal must be transferred to the BLOCK SEARCH WITH CALCULATION AS FROM LASTMAIN BLOCK interface signal by the PLC user program. FB 78 can also be used for thispurpose.

Extended overstoring active (SW 4 and higher) DR 14.4

1 signal: The ”Extended overstoring” function has been selected.

0 signal: The ”Extended overstoring” function has been deselected.

Note:

The PLC evaluates this bit to interprete the channel status. During extended overstoring(between selection and termination), the channel status refers to the overstore ”channel”, notto the actual NC channel; i.e. during this time, a RESET, for example, acts only on theoverstore ”channel”. The overstore ”channel” is an inserted, fictitious channel. The originalchannel status is stored. Furthermore, the standard NC start interlocks should be active at theoverstore NC start.

Program start/end cycles off (SW 5 and higher) D 14.3

1 signal: The program control signal " No cycle call on program start/end" NCY (NoCycle) is active.

0 signal: This program control is not active.

Note:

For a detailed description see Installation Instructions, Section "NC Machine Data" MD 134*and MD 136*. See also DB 10 ... 15, D 14.3.

PSTEP, BRK, CLEAR (SW 3 and higher) D 14.2, D 14.1, D 14.0

1 signal: The relevant program modification• Program step (PSTEP)• Break point (BRK)• Clear (CLEAR)is active

0 signal: The program modification is not active

Note:

Decoding single block (DEC), break point (BRK) and program step (PSTEP) are alternativelyactive, i.e. according to the principle of ”one out of three”.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


4.3.3 Acknowledgements


BLOCK SEARCH WITH CALCULATION WITHOUT ERROR D 15.14

1 signal: BLOCK SEARCH WITH CALCULATION completed without errors.

0 signal: a) Error during BLOCK SEARCH WITH CALCULATIONb) BLOCK SEARCH WITH CALCULATION without error sets 0 signal

BL. SEARCH WITH CALC. AS FROM LAST MAIN BL. WITHOUT ERROR D 15.13

1 signal: BLOCK SEARCH WITH CALCULATION AS FROM LAST MAIN BLOCKcompleted without error.

0 signal: a) Error during BLOCK SEARCH WITH CALCULATION AS FROM LAST MAINBLOCK

b) BLOCK SEARCH WITH CALCULATION AS FROM LAST MAIN BLOCK isnot active.

Internal WAIT marker synchronization (SW 6 and higher) D 15.8

For more detailed information see Programming Guide 840C Section 7.2.

Note:

As from SW 5.4, NCK channels are not only synchronized via ”WAIT M” commands and thePLC (FX38 and FX39) but also NCK-internally.If MD bit 5003.1=1 is set, the ”WAIT M” commands are no longer output to the PLC; theNCK channels, however, are internally synchronized to the programmed ”WAIT” markers.If a ”WAIT” marker of all NCK channels concerned has been reached, the blocks aresynchronously changed in these channels in the next IPO cycle.The ”internal WAIT marker synchronization” is enabled via MD5003.1.

New functions

As long as an NCK channel is waiting for an NCK-internally synchronized WAIT marker, thechannel-specific interface signal ”internal WAIT marker synchronization: waiting for synchro-nization” (DB10, DL15.8) is set to 1. The interface signal is reset if the WAIT marker conditionis either fulfilled by the other NCK channels or if NC-STOP/RESET is present in the channel.

ERROR DURING BLOCK SEARCH WITH CALCULATION D 15.6

1 signal: Error during BLOCK SEARCH WITH CALCULATION.

0 signal: BLOCK SEARCH WITH CALCULATION completed without error.




ERROR DURING BLOCK SEARCH WITH CALC. AS FROM LAST MAIN BLOCK D 15.5

1 signal: Error during BLOCK SEARCH WITH CALCULATION AS FROM LAST MAINBLOCK.

0 signal: BLOCK SEARCH WITH CALCULATION AS FROM LAST MAIN BLOCKcompleted without error.

Signal chart

tc

1

4

5

2

3

7

tc

tc

6

6

8

1: BLOCK SEARCH signal via softkey2: NC START signal3: BLOCK SEARCH ACTIVE signal4: BLOCK SEARCH signal to NC channel5: BLOCK SEARCH WITHOUT ERROR signal or ERROR DURING BLOCK SEARCH6: BLOCK SEARCH signal is cancelled internally7: User cancels BLOCK SEARCH8: BLOCK SEARCH WITHOUT ERRORS or ERRORS DURING BLOCK SEARCH signals

cancelled internallytc: PLC cycle time

ESR monitoring is active D 15.1

1 signal: The monitoring functions for the EXTENDED STOP AND RETRACTION areactivated. If one of the programmed errors occurs, the NC activates theprogrammed reactions and the interface signal ESR RESPONSE IS TRIGGEREDis set.

0 signal: The retraction monitoring is switched off.

ESR monitoring is triggered D 15.0

1 signal: The EXTENDED STOP AND RETRACTION was triggered by an axis or spindlein this channel .

0 signal: No triggering of ESR response in this channel.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


4.3.4 Ready signals

4.3.4 Ready signals

NC START DISABLE D 16.15

1 signal: NC START must not be activated.

0 signal: NC START may be activated.

Notes:

• The signal must be transferred by the PLC user program to one bit of the NC STARTDISABLE signals if the DESELECT AUTOMATIC NC START DISABLE PLC machine datais set (PLC MD 6026.5).

• The signal is set in MDA mode and the overstore display for all channels of the selectedoperating mode group with the exception of the channel that has just been selected. NCSTART may then be effective only in the selected channel.

PROTECTION SPACE ADAPTION NOT POSSIBLE D 16.14

1 signal: Protection space adaptation is not possible if assignment "Protection space tochannel" is active (G181) and the selected plane (G16 to G19) cannot beuniquely assigned to the coordinates of the collision monitoring (no assignment inMD 3948*).

0 signal: Protection space adaptation is not necessary if the assignment "Protection spaceto channel" is deselected (G180).Protection space adaptation is possible if assignment "Protection space tochannel" is active (G181) and the selected planes (G16 to G19) can be uniquelyassigned to the coordinates of the collision monitoring.

NC ALARM WITH PROCESSING STOP D 16.13

1 signal: At least one channel-specific NC alarm is present which causes a channelprocessing stop.

0 signal: No NC alarm with the effect of causing a processing stop is currently active.

Note:

No sequence-related alarms are reported to the PLC.



4.3.4 Ready signals

NC START POSSIBLE D 16.12

1 signal: The NC sets the signal to "1" as soon as an NC Start request is accepted by theNCK channel.

0 signal: No acceptance of NC Start request by NCK channel.

Notes:

• The NC START POSSIBLE signal is valid only in the automatic modes.

• NC Start requests are generally required for program control purposes, e. g. for starting anNC part program, resuming a part program after NC stop or in single block mode, forstarting block search, TEACH IN/PLAYBACK or overstore. NC Start can also be effective,therefore, if the NCK channel is not in the reset state.

• NC Start is not permitted while a program or single block is being executed, during a blocksearch, or if an NC alarm with processing disable has been issued. NC Start requests arealso ignored if the mode group is not ready.

• From software version 1 onwards, the entire mode group is no longer disabled in the caseof alarms with channel-specific processing disable.

NCK CHANNEL IN RESET STATE D 16.11

1 signal: The signal is set to "1" as soon as the NCK channel is in the reset state, that iswhen processing is inactive.

0 signal: The signal is reset to "0" as soon as processing takes place in the NCK channel,e. g.• Execution of a program• Block search• TEACH IN or PLAY BACK active• Overstore active• etc.

Note:

The NCK CHANNEL IN RESET STATE signal is valid only in the automatic modes of the NC.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


4.3.4 Ready signals

OPERATING MODE GROUP READY D 16.9

1 signal: After Power On and build-up of all voltages.

0 signal: Mode group not ready. Reasons:a) Measuring circuit error or serious axis/spindle alarm triggeredb) Hardware faultc) Incorrect machine datac) Drive Ready terminal-dependent

Signal chart

1

2

3

1: Mains voltage2: MODE GROUP READY3: Fault message

Notes:

• If MODE GROUP READY changes to 0:– the feed drives and spindle drive are brought to a stop by active rapid braking (i.e. with

max. braking current), and– all signals transferred from the NC to the PLC are changed to the inactive state (reset

state).

• All commands given to the NC must be cancelled if MODE GROUP READY carries the 0signal.

• MODE GROUP READY does not change to "1" after the cause of the fault has beenremedied until the 1st channel of the MODE GROUP has been reset with RESET or untilthe NC is switched back on after disconnecting the power supply.

• All functions stored in the intermediate and main memories of the NC are deleted.

• Signal is output only in the 1st channel of a mode group.

NC ALARM D 16.8

1 signal: At least one channel-specific NC alarm (block-related) is present.

0 signal: No NC alarm present.



4.4 Output of auxiliary functions and block information

4.4 Output of auxiliary functions and block information

4.4.1 General

The M, S, T and H auxiliary functions and D and F block information are output to the interfacetogether with the respective modification signals. The modification signals indicate that thevalue in the relevant word is valid. The modification signals last for one PLC cycle.

The M, S, T and H auxiliary functions can be written with an extended address. If an auxiliaryfunction has been programmed with an extended address, this is output as well.The output sequence is: M WORD 1, M WORD 2, M WORD 3, S, T, H, D, F

Example:

M1=5 Stop for spindle 1M2=5 Stop for spindle 2

Example of output of several items of information programmed in one NC block:

Signal chart

S

M03

N 10 M03 S T H LF

T

H

tc

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

1: NC block with information in buffer memory2: Data transfer to main memory3: M modification signal4: S modification signal5: T modification signal6: H modification signal7: LAST INFORMATION signal

The following can be determined via machine data:

• Output of information before or at the beginning of the NC axis movement(NC MD 5003.2).

• Which information is output with block search (NC MD 546*)• Output to PLC.• Binary or BCD information output (NC MD 544*)• Rapid auxiliary functions


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


4.4.1 General

Signal chart

tc

tc

B

A1

2

3

1

2

3

A: Information output before axis movementB: Information output with axis movement1: Reading NC block into main memory2: Information at interface (word and modification signal; tc=PLC cycle time)3: TRAVEL COMMAND signal

In the case of M functions, decoded signals are output in addition to the words, always in bothstatic and dynamic form. Static signals are set once by the basic program after decoding.

The following M functions are decoded:

• Without extended address: M00 to M99 in channel-specific DB (DB 10-13)• With extended address: according to decoding list for all channels in DB 30

If an M function is not in the M00 to M99 range and not contained in the decoding list, the M word and "M NOT DECODED" are output. For the M00 to M99 range the extended addressis = 0.

4.4.2 Behaviour in different modes

BLOCK SEARCH mode

Three types of output can be selected via NC machine data:

• During block search, the auxiliary functions are neither stored nor output; (NC MD 546*.0)

• During block search, the programmed auxiliary functions are output immediatedly with themodification signal: (NC MD 546*.2 - NC MD 546*.7);



4.4.2 Behaviour in different modes

• During block search, the NC stores the last auxiliary function of an address in each case;after the NC start these stored information items are output together with the relevantmodification signals. Up to three M functions are stored and output provided that they wereprogrammed in one block and that there were no further M functions after this blockas far as the search block.

After reaching the preselected block, information can be stored manually.

AUTOMATIC/TEACH IN mode

After decoding of the information items in the NC, these are output to the interface togetherwith the relevant modification signal. The modification signal lasts for one PLC cycle. Theinformation words are retained until a new block programmed with M, S, T, H, D, F functionshas been decoded by the NC.

JOG, MDA, AUT, TEACH IN mode interrupted

Additional M, S, T, H, D and F functions can be stored manually. The auxiliary function withrelevant modification signal is not output to the interface until NC START is issued.

Signal chart

tc

M 29

1

2

3

1: NC START2: Auxiliary function e.g. M29 3: M modification signal (tc = PLC cycle time)

4.4.3 Description of information signals

M WORD 1, M WORD 2, M WORD 3, S, T, H, D, F MODIFICATION D17.8 to 17.15

1 signal: The M, S, T, H, D, or F information is output to the interface with a new value.

0 signal: The value of the relevant information is invalid.

Note:

The modification signals are valid for only one PLC cycle in each case.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



LAST INFORMATION D17.7

1 signal: The last information programmed in the NC block (M, S, T, D, H or F function) isavailable at the interface as a valid word with the relevant modification signal.

0 signal: The last information of the NC block is not yet available.

Note:

This signal, together with the output modification signals, is valid for one PLC cycle.

FAST AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS D17.6

1 signal: Through PLC operating system, a block is processed in the NC with one orseveral ”Fast auxiliary functions” and without ”Slow auxiliary functions”.

0 signal: Through PLC operating system following a PLC cycle.

M WORD 1, M WORD 2, M WORD 3 NOT DECODED D17.0 to 17.2

This signal, together with the relevant M modification signal, is valid for one PLC cycle.

1 signal: M WORD greater than 99 (extended address = 0) and for extended address > 0not contained in decoding list.

0 signal: M WORD less than 99 (extended address =0) and/or contained in decoding list.

STATIC M SIGNALS DR 18 to DR 30

The static signal bits are set by decoded M functions. They remain at "1" until reset by acommand in the PLC user program.

Up to three M signals can be set per PLC cycle and channel.

DYNAMIC M SIGNALS DL 18 to DL 30

Like the static signal bits, the dynamic M signal bits are set by decoded M functions, but theyremain at "1" for only one PLC cycle and are then reset by the PLC basic program. Up tothree dynamic signals can be output per PLC cycle and channel.


To switch on coolant by statically scanning a static M signal.To switch off coolant by resetting the static M signal with a dynamic M signal.




Signal chart

tc

1

2

3

4 5

1: M modification signal2: Dynamic M signal3: Static M signal (coolant ON)4: Static M signal set5: Static M signal reset by dynamic M signal with the user program within one PLC cycle

(tc=PLC cycle time)

M WORD 1, M WORD 2, M WORD 3 DW 32, 34, 36EXTENDED ADDRESS M WORD 1 TO 3 DW 31, 33, 35

Up to three M functions programmed in one NC block are made available at the same time assoon as the M modification signals are available.

Format: Fixed-point number, value range 0 to 9999Extended address: Fixed-point number, value range 0 to 99

Note:

With the functions M3, M4, M5 and M19, the spindle referred to by the M function isaddressed by means of the extended address. Otherwise it is generally recommended to relatethe M function to a specific channel by means of the extended address.


Decoding or evaluation of M functions that are not decoded as standard or according to thelist.

S WORD, EXTENDED ADDRESS S WORD DW 37 to 39

The S value programmed in the NC is made available as soon as an S modification signal isavailable.

Format: Fixed-point or BCD number, value range 0.1 to 999999Extended address: Fixed-point or BCD number, value range 0 to 99


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



Notes:

• If an S value is programmed that exceeds the selected value range, only the maximumvalue is output in each case. This also applies to the analog value output. The analogoutput can process values from 0.1 - 1600 / 1 - 16000 only (NC MD 520*.3).

• The spindle for which the S word is valid is programmed by means of theextended S address.


Gear stage selection from the PLC.

T WORD DW 40 to 42

The tool number (T No.) programmed in the NC is made available as soon as a T modificationsignal is available.

Format: Fixed-point or BCD number, value range 0 to 99999999Extended address: Fixed-point or BCD number, value range 0 to 99

Notes:

• The magazine from which the tool is to be taken is programmed by means of theextended T address.

• For the "Tool management" function blocks (FB package 1), the T word has to be outputas a fixed-point number.


Control of automatic tool selection.

H WORD DW 43 to 45

The block information programmed in the NC is made available as soon as an H modificationsignal is available.

Format: Fixed-point or BCD number, value range 0 to 99999999Extended address: Fixed-point or BCD number, value range 0 to 99

Note:

The H word is divided into groups by means of the extended H address.




Extended address(H group key)

Function

012345...

UnassignedActivation of tool wear / break monitorReservedSet values for wear / break monitorCompensation values for wear / break monitorUnassigned


Switching functions on the machine.

D WORD DW 46

The programmed D address is made available as soon as a D modification signal is available.

Format: Fixed-point or BCD number, value range 0 to 255

F WORD DW 47 to 49

The F word programmed in the NC is made available as soon as an F modification signal isavailable.

Format: Fixed-point or BCD number, value range 0 to 99999Extended address: Not in use at present


Amending the programmed F word with tool wear monitoring (adaptive control).

BLOCK SKIP SELECTED/1.../8 DW 51, bits 8 to 15

1 signal: ”Block skip” function selected0 signal: ”Block skip” function not selected

Note:

The BLOCK SKIP SELECTED/1.../8 signal must be transferred to the BLOCK SKIP/1.../8interface signal by the PLC user program. FG 78 can be used for this purpose.

PROGRAM COORDINATION DW 52 to 62

Program coordination is described in Section 4.5.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


4.4.4 T/H word routing


The function is activated by PLC MD 6029 bit 0.

The previously implemented output of the T/H words to the STORED BLOCK INFORMATIONin the source channel is also effected when the routing function is activated. The routing isexecuted additionally when the function is activated. The output of the T/H word to theSTORED BLOCK INFORMATION in the source channel takes place, however, only if thetarget DB is not already assigned with a routing operation.

An H word programmed in the same NC block is routed together with the T word in the sameway. (An H word on its own in an NC block is not routed, but only output to the STOREDBLOCK INFORMATION in the source channel).

For routing purposes the number is stated as an extended T address in the part program. Thechannel numbering ranges from 1 to 4, and from 1 to 6 as from SW 4.

COORDINATION ERROR DR 63.7

The COORDINATION ERROR bit is always set in the envisaged target channel DB, not in thesource channel DB.

1 signal: Set by PLC operating system in the event of a conflict:– If a T word is to be entered in the STORED BLOCK INFORMATION but the

T WORD VALID and/or H WORD VALID bit is still set.– If a T word is to be routed to DW 64 ... 66 but the T WORD VALID and/or H

WORD VALID bit is still set.

0 signal: – After POWER ON Reset– By user

Note:

The channel DB is disabled for further routing operations as long as the COORDINATIONERROR bit is set.

H WORD VALID DR 63.1

1 signal: Set by the PLC operating system if a routed H word and the extended H addresshave been entered in DW 67 ... 69.

0 signal: – After POWER ON Reset (cold restart only).– By user

The channel DB is disabled for further routing operations as long as the H WORD VALID bit isset.




COMMAND "SUPPRESS ROUTING" DL 63.7

1 signal: Set by the userRouting is suppressed in the target channel (target channel is the channel inwhich this bit is set)

0 signal: Set by the userRouting is possible in the target channel

MESSAGE "ROUTING SUPPRESSED” DR 63.6

1 signal: Set by the PLC operating system if PLC machine data bit 6029: bit 3= 0: Message in source channel= 1: Message in target channel

0 signal: – Set by user– POWER ON

T WORD VALID DR 63.0

1 signal: Set by the PLC operating system if a routed T word and the number of thesource DB have been entered in DW 64 ... 66.

0 signal: – After POWER ON Reset (cold restart)– By user

Note:

The channel DB is disabled for further routing operations as long as the T WORD VALID bit isset.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



NUMBER OF SOURCE CHANNEL DW 64

The PLC operating system enters the number of the channel in which the T word was trans-ferred by the NC. The number is valid only as long as the T WORD VALID and/or H WORDVALID bits are set.Value range: 1 ... 4, 1 ... 6 as from SW 4Format: 16-bit binary

Data word DW 64 is cleared only with COLD RESTART, not with POWER ON Reset.

ROUTED T WORD DW 65, DW 66

The PLC operating system enters the T word supplied by the NC. The T word is valid only aslong as the T WORD VALID bit = 1.

Format: As supplied from NC.

Note:

Data words DW 65 und DW 66 are cleared only with COLD RESTART, not with POWER ONReset.

ROUTED H WORD DW 67 to DW 69

The PLC operating system enters the extended H address and the H word supplied by the NC.This interface is operated only if a T word is routed in the same NC block. The information isvalid only as long as the H WORD VALID bit = 1.

Format: As supplied from NC.

Note:

Data words DW 67 to DW 69 are cleared only with COLD RESTART, not with POWER ONReset.



4.4.5 TEACH IN

4.4.5 TEACH IN

TEACH IN AXIS MARKING DW 70, DR 71, bit 0 ...5, DL 71 1)

DW 80, DR 81, bit 0 ...5, DL 81 2)

1 signal: The relevant axis (1 ... 30) was marked in TEACH IN mode on the operatorpanel.

0 signal: No axis was selected.

STORE TRAVERSED AXES DW 71, bit 7 1)

DW 81, bit 7 2)

1 signal: ”Store traversed axes only” (TEACH IN operating mode) was selected on theoperator panel. With the TRANSFER POSITION softkey, only the positions oftraversed axes are transferred.

0 signal: ”Store traversed axes only” was not selected. With ”Transfer Position” allselected axes are stored irrespective of whether they have been traversed or not.

TEACH IN AXIS MARKING/ DW 72, DW 73STORE TRAVERSED AXES (SIGNALS TO NCK CHANNEL) DW 82, DW 83 2)

The signals are transferred into the DB interface to the NCK using FB 78. Here,the signals can be manipulated via the PLC user program between the call of FB78 and the end of OB 1. If only FB 78 is called and no further logic operationsare configured, the signals are transmitted of 1:1.

The signals set by FB 78 can be reset by the user program or signals not set canbe overwritten.

1 signal: The relevant axis was marked in TEACH IN mode or the signal ”Store traversedaxes only” was set.

0 signal: No axis was marked for position transfer. The signal ”Store traversed axes only”is not set.

_______1) Up to SW 3

2) As from SW 4


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


4.5 Structure of program coordination

4.5 Structure of program coordination

The program coordination function permits the machine user to program plaintext commandsin the part program. The coordination commands are communicated from the NC through thePLC interface, i. e. the PLC becomes responsible for the entire coordination. The coordinationcommands used in the NC part program are described in the Programming Guide. Thefollowing sections only describe the signals of interface, machine data, setting data andstandard function blocks.

Note:

FX 38, 39 must be loaded and parameterized. See Section, PLC function blocks FX 38, FX 39.

As from SW3, coordination commands are not displayed in the message line.

4.5.1 Alarms

If the syntax is wrong, alarm 3200 is output.

3200 Program coordination - wrong syntax

Interrogation:

Effect:Explanation:

Remedy:

During execution in automatic/MDA(block-related/channel-specific)Processing interlock– Syntax error: Invalid command mnemonics– Invalid modification parameter,

illegal characters, too many parameters, missing para-meters or characters, area violation through parameters

Correction of faulty command

When the PLC gives a checkback signal indicating an error, alarm 3166 is output.

3166 Wrong program coordination

Interrogation:

Effect:Explanation:Remedy:

During execution in automatic/MDA(block-related/channel-specific)Alarm display (cancel alarm) and read-in disable for faulty channelAddressed channel not defined or enabled– Change channel addressing– Define or enable channel



4.5.2 NCK/PLC user interface

4.5.2 NCK/PLC user interface

The user interface is set up channel-specifically in data blocks DB 10 ... 13,DB 10 ... DB 15as from SW 4, DW 52 ... 62.

NC START DL 62, bit 0

1 signal: – Through function block

0 signal: – After POWER ON Reset– Through function block after one PLC cycle

READ-IN DISABLE DL 62, bit 1



ERROR (NC ALARM 3166) DL 62, bit 2



Data words DW 56 to 62 are used by function blocks FX 38 and FX 39.The data words DW 52 to DW 62 are internal signals and must not be overwritten by the user.

DETAILED ERROR CODING DW 61

Event Detailed error coding– FB 62 terminated with error 1– Not yet all programs terminated 2– Not yet all Wait M markers reached 3– The addressed channels are not enabled 4– Wrong command code 5– Start command for block search not enabled 6

END OF PROGRAM REACHED [WAIT-E] DW 62, bit 11

1 signal: – The programs started via coordination have been terminated.

0 signal: – No programs started, or programs are still executing.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


4.5.3 PLC function blocks FX 38, FX 39


Description

The function blocks FX 38 and FX 39 support the program coordination function in the NC.The function blocks FX 38 and FX 39 check the interface data blocks DB 10 to DB 13, DB 10to DB 15 as from SW 4 (DW 52 to DW 55) for a coordination command being present andevaluate the command.

With cold and warm restart, the whole user interface area for program coordination in thechannel data blocks (DW 52 ... DL 62) is deleted. At Reset, the buffer (DW 56 to DL 62) isdeleted thus allowing the NC part program to be restarted.

Supplementary data

Bib. No.: E88530-B 5638-A-50FBs to be loaded: NoneFX to be loaded: FX 38, FX 39DBs to be loaded: NoneDX to be loaded: NoneType of FX call: UnconditionalDBs to be entered: NoneDX to be entered: NoneError messages: Accu 1 (FX No.)=38

%1 Block FX 39 has not been loadedBlock length: TX 38 Length 112

TX 39 Length 452Order: FX 38 and FX 39 are components of PLC package 0

(basic functions)

Block call

a a a a a a a a a a a a a


















D, KF



















NSBY





FB: PRO-KO1

Signal description

NSBY Interface byteInterface byte in DB 36 for the initiation of a program with FB 62.




Program example:

OB1::BA FX 38

Name :PRO-K01NSBY :KF 5 Unassigned interface byte, e.g. "5"

::BE

Brief description

• The user must call the block FX 38 unconditionally in OB 1 (DO FX 38) and suppliesparameter NSBY. The block FX 39 must be loaded as well.

• Block FX 38 checks whether block FX 39 has been loaded. If not, the PLC goes intodefined stop with "1" in battery 2 (error number) and "38" in accu 1 (block number).

• If the addressed channels are to be started during block search in the same channel, thePLC machine data 6029.1 (DB 63, D 14.1 for PLC 1) must be set:

• Five coordination commands are available:– Start– Wait-E– Wait-M– Init MPF – Init SPF

• The user interface for program coordination is installed channel-specifically in data wordsDW 52 to DL 62 each of data blocks DB 10 to DB 13, and DB 10 to DB 15 as from SW 4.

• The coordination commands are present in the user interface for one PLC cycle. When thePLC-SP has received a coordination command from the NC, it sets a modification signal(D 52.8), which is reset in the next PLC cycle by the PLC-SP. The data in data words DW52 to DW 55 are valid only as long as the modification signal is "1".

• When cold or warm restart are carried out, the PLC system program clears the userinterface for program coordination. When a reset is carried out, the buffer DW 56 to DL 62is cleared by block FX 39. If an end identifier D 62.11 is present, it is maintained when areset is carried out.

• With each command via PLC machine data bits (DB 63), FX 39 checks whether theaddressed channels have been enabled. If not, the block sets D 62.10. The NC uses thisbit to give the NC alarm 3166 WRONG PROGRAM COORDINATION.

• Via the dynamic M signals M02, M17 or M30 the block checks whether the startedprograms are completed. If so, the end identification bit D 62.11 is set. This bit isinterrogated by the Wait-E command and reset when a start command for the relevantchannel is given.

• The coordination commands Init MPF, Init SPF and start commands are executed in thePLC cycle in which the modification signal is present. A prerequisite, however, is that apreceding data transmission with FB 62 has been completed without errors.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



• With command Wait-M and Wait-E, the buffer DW 56 to DW 59 is filled. FX 39 enters inDW 60 (channel actual value) which channels have reached the mark or end identifier. Ifthe channel actual value (DW 60) equals the channel actual value (DW 59), read-in disableis reset and the buffer cleared.

• When cold or warm restart are carried out the whole user interface for programcoordination is cleared by the PLC system program. When a reset is executed, the bufferDW 56 to DL 62 is cleared by block FX 39. If an end identifier (D 62.11) is present, it isretained.

• At present, the following error numbers exist (in DW 61 detailed error coding)

Event Reaction Detailed error– FB62 completed with errors Read-in disable 1– Not all programs have yet been completed None 2– Not all Wait-M marks have yet been reached None 3– The addressed channels are not enabled Read-in disable 4– Wrong command code None 5– Start command with block search not enabled None 6

END OF SECTION


10.94 5 Spindle/PLC Interface (DB 31)

5.1 General

5 Spindle/PLC Interface (DB 31)

5.1 General

The SINUMERIK 840C can control a maximum of six spindles. The interfaces of all spindlesare stored in data block 31. The spindle/PLC interface is set by PLC MD 6012 and PLC MD6014.

The programmed speed/cutting speed and the spindle M commands M03, M04, M05 and M19are evaluated in the NC. The extended NC address is used to determine which spindle theprogrammed values refer to.

Example:

S2=1000 Spindle 2 is to run at 1000 rev/minM2=5 Spindle 2 SPINDLE DISABLE

If no extended S address has been written, the S word is output to the spindle stated in DB 31DL k+2 under channel number.

Spindle control structure

PLC spindle controlNC MD

Set speed value

Oscillation speed (D k+2.6)

S - value

Spindle

number

DB 10, DL 3

Spindle 1 Encoder Spindle 2

NCchannel

1

S - value

Spindle

number

DB 13, 1)

DL 3

NCchannel

4 1)

Intermediate memoryS - value NC

S - value NC

Basic speed (D k+2.5)

Controller enable(D k+1.14)

Channel number (DL k+2)

All data words

in DB 31

NC MD

Basic speed Oscillation speed

Acceleration time constants(NC MD 419* - 426*)

_______1) As from SW 4: 6 channels


5 Spindle/PLC Interface (DB 31) 06.93

5.1 General

The pulses of all the spindles can be read by each NCK channel. Which channel interpretswhich spindle pulses is determined by means of the channel-specific SPINDLE NUMBERsignal. It is permissible for several channels to access the same spindle pulses at the sametime . This means, for instance, that on double slide lathes control can pass from channel 1 to,say, channel 2 at v = const. without hardware switching.The spindle-specific CHANNEL NUMBER signal is used to determine from which channel thespindle obtains set speed values (S word). If, for example, control passes from channel 1 tochannel 2 at v = const. on a double slide lathe, the spindle-specific CHANNEL NUMBERinterface signal must change from 1 to 2.A spindle can also be addressed from a channel in another mode group. In this case, note thatthe spindle is stopped only at the RESET in the mode group in which the spindle was defined(MD 453*). A channel reset request in the channel in which the spindle is addressed thusstops program execution and the sindle continues to run.Three values can be output to the drive as set speed value: S word of the NC, basic speedand oscillating speed. If the PLC SPINDLE CONTROL signal is set, no more new S wordscan be transferred by the NC program to the spindle and the operating mode of the spindlecannot be changed. In this mode, either the spindle's direction of rotation can be switchedover or the basic or oscillating speed can be selected as required.The allocation of the spindle number to the measuring circuit module is made via NC machinedata 400*. The spindle defined in the MD as spindle No. 1 is also the 1st spindle at theNC/PLC interface. The SPINDLE DISABLE signals can be allocated error/operationalmessages with selection made via PLC machine data (see Section 12, Display Programs forPLC Data and Messages).

Overview spindle allocation

DB 11 DL 3=2DB 10 DL 3=1

Spindle actual value bus

Spindle set value bus

DB 31DL K+2

SelectionSet valueK1 K2 K1 K2K1 K2

S1 S2 S3S1 S2 S3

Channel 1

G33G95G04 S ...G96

M3, M4M5, M19

S ...

Channel 2

G33G95G04 S ...G96

M3, M4M5, M19

S ...

PLC

M

S1

Mainspindle

M

S2

Mainspindle

M

S3

Aux.spindle

Actual valueselection DB 10...13 1)

(DL 3)



SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


5.1 General

The spindle declared as spindle 1 in the MD is also the 1st spindle at the NCK/PLC interface,that is to say it is assigned data words 0 ... 3, 24 and 25 in DB 31.

Generally speaking, the spindle control can operate in different spindle modes:

• Control mode Controlled operation with preset spindle speed and direction ofrotation

• Oscillation mode Controlled operation with preset motor speed and direction ofrotation

• Positioning mode "Oriented spindle stop"; the spindle is incorporated in positioncontrol

• C axis mode Spindle operated as closed-loop position-controlled rotary axis

• Following mode Spindle operates as a following spindle under position control

Notes:

• For C axis operation, the spindle is assigned an axis by means of machine data (MD 461*).If a C axis is assigned to the spindle by MD 461* the axis-specific signals are alsoevaluated.

Note in particular that the measuring circuit monitors for the axis can be switched off withthe PARKING AXIS signal so that the axis-specific measuring circuit monitors can besuppressed.

5.2 Signals from spindle

The K address is derived for the spindles as follows:

1st spindle K=0

2nd spindle K=4

3rd spindle K=8

4th spindle K=12

5th spindle K=16

6th spindle K=20




ACTUAL DIRECTION OF SPINDLE ROTATION CLOCKWISE DW K. bit 15

1 signal: Actual direction of rotation clockwise

0 signal: Actual direction of rotation counterclockwise

Notes:

• The signal is derived from the direction of rotation of the encoder. MD 520*, bit 1 SIGNCHANGE ACTUAL VALUE is taken into account.

• When the spindle is at a standstill, the signal corresponds to direction of rotationclockwise.

The PLC status signal, ACTUAL DIRECTION OF ROTATION CLOCKWISE is taken from thespindle speed actual value. This actual value is not available in the following cases:

• A spindle with encoder is operated above the frequency limit.

• A spindle does not have an encoder.

In the above cases, the speed setpoint is used to generate the status signal.

PROGRAMMED SPEED TOO HIGH DW K, bit 14

1 signal: The programmed speed or the speed calculated at constant cutting speed (G96)is too high.

0 signal: The programmed speed or the speed calculated at constant cutting speed (G96)lies below the permissible range.

Notes:

• Spindle speed override is taken into account when checking the limit values.

• The following limit values are taken into account in the check:

– MD 403* - MD 410* ”Maximum speed” for each gear stage– MD 451* ”Maximum spindle speed”– SE 401* ”Programmed spindle speed limit with G96”;

programmed with G92– SE 403* ”Programmed spindle speed limit”;

programmed with G26

The data cells can be overwritten by the PLC using FB 62 if required.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



Programmed speed too high

Signal chart

S=0 S=6000 S=2000

t

1

2

3

4

5

1: Speed limit of selected gear stage, e.g. 50002: Maximum chuck speed, e. g. 40003: Programmed S values in main memory4: PROGRAMMED SPEED TOO HIGH signal5: SPINDLE IN SET RANGE signal


The PROGRAMMED SPEED TOO HIGH signal can be used to interrupt further execution ofthe NC program and output a corresponding message.

SPINDLE IN SET RANGE DW K, bit 13

1 signal: Actual speed lies within a defined range round the set speed (set range).

0 signal: Actual speed outside set range.

Notes:

• The set speed is derived from the programmed speed or, in the case of constant cuttingspeed (G96), from the calculated speed, taking the speed override and speed limitingvalues into account (see PROGRAMMED SPEED TOO HIGH interface signal).

• The set range is determined by the set speed and the "Spindle speed tolerance" (MD 444*).

• Active monitoring only with speed greater than zero-speed range (MD 446*).


Enabling of axis movements, (e.g. by cancelling GENERAL FEED DISABLE) after a speedchange by setting a new S value or after changing gear.




SPINDLE POSITION REACHED DW K, bit 12

1 signal: Actual spindle position lies within a defined range (set range) round theprogrammed setpoint.

0 signal: Actual spindle position lies outside the defined range.

Signal chart

td

t

1

2

3

3

4

5

6

1: Actual spindle position2: Set position3: Positional tolerance4: Position control switched on5: SPINDLE POSITION REACHED signal6: ACKNOWLEDGE M19 signal (from PLC, td = delay time)

Notes:

• The signal is relevant only when the spindle operates in the positioning mode (e. g. M19).

• The set range is determined by the following data:– the set position– MD 443* "positional tolerance" with spindle positioning through NC or PLC– the positional limit in the user data DB with "M19 over several revolutions" from the

command channel

• In the event of overshooting beyond the set range (e.g. due to incorrect optimization of thespindle controller), the signal is cancelled.

• The ACKNOWLEDGE M 19 signal must not be given by the PLC until the spindle hassettled in position (e.g. after delay time td during which SPINDLE POSITION REACHEDhas been set constant).


Tool change enable on milling machines.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



SPINDLE STOPPED DW K, bit 11

1 signal: Actual speed in zero-speed range (machine data).

0 signal: Actual speed greater than zero-speed range.

Notes:

• The zero speed range is determined by MD 446* ZERO SPEED TOLERANCE.

• If the actual speed lies within the zero-speed range, the "Spindle in set range" function isnot monitored.


Enable for opening a guard.

SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZED DW K, bit 10

1 signal: The spindle is synchronized with the encoder, i. e. the encoder zero mark hasbeen recognized.

0 signal: The spindle is not synchronized with the encoder.

Notes:

• The position can be recorded only if the spindle is synchronized with the encoder.

• If the spindle is not synchronized with the encoder, it may be for one of the followingreasons:– The spindle does not have an encoder.– The zero mark has not yet been overrun following POWER ON.– A synchronization routine triggered by RESYNCHRONIZE SPINDLE has not been

completed yet.– Synchronism with the encoder lost owing to excessive speeds; resynchronization is

executed automatically when lower speeds are reached.

SPINDLE POSITIONING ACTIVE DW K, bit 9

1 signal: Spindle control operating in positioning mode.

0 signal: Spindle control not operating in positioning mode.

Notes:

• The positioning mode is selected by the NC command M19, the POSITION SPINDLEsignal or the M19 OVER SEVERAL REVOLUTIONS command channel function.

• The positioning mode is generally aborted by the ACKNOWLEDGE M19 signal.

• Spindle functions (resynchronization, oscillation, basic speed) are no longer possible whenspindle positioning is active.

Example:

Suppression of axis movements during positioning.




SPEED LIMIT EXCEEDED DW K, bit 8

1 signal: The actual spindle speed has exceeded the limits by more than the permittedtolerance.

0 signal: The actual spindle speed is below the limits.

Notes:

• The following limiting values are taken into account when checking:– MD 403* to 410* "Maximum speed" for each gear stage– MD 451* "Maximum chuck speed"– SD 401* "Programmable spindle speed limitation";

programmed with G26

• The permissible tolerance is determined by:– MD 445* "Maximum spindle speed tolerance"

• If the spindle exceeds one of the speed limits by more than the permitted tolerance, allspindles and axes of a mode group are brought to a stop and an alarm is given.

• The SPEED LIMIT EXCEEDED signal is modal and must be reset with RESET.

Signal chart

t

1

2

3

4

1: Preset maximum speed2: Permissible spindle speed tolerance3: SPEED LIMIT EXCEEDED signal4: RESET signal


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



CHANGE GEAR DW K, bit 7

1 signal: Request to PLC to change to new set gear stage.

0 signal: No gear stage change requested.

Notes:

• The signal is output if the programmed S value is outside the speed range of the currentactual gear stage and a new set gear stage could be determined.

The speed ranges are defined by:– MD 403* to 410* "Maximum speed" for each gear stage– MD 411* to 418* "Minimum speed" for each gear stage

• Once the gear change has been made, the signal has to be reset by the PLC userprogram and the new actual gear stage has to be entered in the interface.

• The speed ranges are checked only if a new S value has been specified. The PLC userprogram can therefore also acknowledge the gear change (reset CHANGE GEAR interfacesignal) without having changed the gear stage, if required.

• MD 521*, bit 5 "New S value after PLC acknowledgement" determines whether the spindleis to assume the set speed until the gear change has been acknowledged.

• If the gear change is triggered directly by the NC part program (M41 ... M48, decoding byPLC user program), the CHANGE GEAR interface signal cannot be evaluated until theLAST INFORMATION interface signal is also present.

• If the ”Automatic gear change selection” function is not used, i.e. there is no gearboxpresent or the gear stage is selected directly via M functions (M41 ...; 48), the ”gearchange” signal must be reset when the new actual gear stage has been entered in theinterface.

• The change limits are allowed to overlap.

• PLC-MD 6012 via DB63 DW 6 means spindle available.

• CHANGE GEAR is output only if the "Signal from/to spindle" PLC MD (PLC MD 6012) hasbeen set.

• The "CHANGE GEAR" and "SET GEAR STAGE 8" signals are set if a speed isprogrammed that is greater than the maximum speed of the "highest" gear stage.A C axis changeover is then not possible.The machine data for the maximum speed in the unused gear stages must therefore bewritten with "0". A spindle setpoint value is not output with G96 ”Constant cuttingvelocity”.




Signal chart

–

t

+

0

1

2

3

4

4

5 6

1: CHANGE GEAR signal2: Feedback signal from gear to PLC: "Gear engaged"3: Actual spindle motor speed4: Set value for oscillation speed5: Oscillation, change gear6: Gear engaged, accelerate spindle motor

Sequence:

• Controlled by the NC:– The new set gear stage is determined and output to the interface.– The CHANGE GEAR signal changes from 0 to 1.– When the ”Gear change” signal is present, spindle/C axis changeover is not possible

and the spindle setpoint speed is not updated when G96 (constant cutting velocity) isactive.

• Controlled by the PLC program:– Spindle motor decelerates to zero speed.– Motor accelerates to oscillating speed (OSCILLATION SPEED and SET DIRECTION

OF ROTATION CW).– Motor direction of rotation changes to facilitate gear engagement (SET DIRECTION OF

ROTATION CW).– The user program recognizes that the gear has engaged (e. g. by means of the "Gear

engaged" signal from the gear). The new actual gear stage must then be entered inthe interface (DW K+1, bit 0 to 2) and the CHANGE GEAR signal be reset.

• Controlled by the NC:– The spindle is enabled again and accelerated to the new speed.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



Example: Assignment of speed ranges to gear stages

OG3

OG8

OG7

OG2

OG6

OG5

OG4

OG1

UG3

UG4

UG5

UG6

UG7

UG8

UG2

UG1

G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7 G8

S-prog.

OG : Upper limit speed of gear stageUG : Lower limit speed of gear stageG1...G8: Gear stages 1-8S-prog: Programmed S value

SET GEAR STAGE DW K, bit 0 to 2

In the case of automatic gear stage selection by the NC, the SET GEAR STAGE is output incoded form to the PLC at the same time as CHANGE GEAR as follows:

Gear CodeC B A

12345678

0 0 00 0 10 1 00 1 11 0 01 0 11 1 01 1 1



5.3 Signals to spindle


CHANGE GAIN FACTOR K v DW K+1, bit 15

1 signal: For position control of the spindle in the positioning mode, the gain of the positioncontroller is calculated from the gain factor multiplied by the factor (which varieswith the gear stage) for the gain change (MD 469*).

0 signal: For position control of the spindle in the positioning mode, the gain of the positioncontroller is determined directly by the gain factor (which varies with the gearstage).

Notes:

• The individual factors are determined by machine data:– MD 435* to 442* "Gain factor" for the position controller (for 8 gear stages)– MD 469* "Factor for gain change"

• With some drive actuators, a change in the standardization of the analog set speeds in theactuator can achieve steadier zero speed behaviour of the spindle in conjunction withposition control. This change must be taken into account in the control by changing thegain factor.

• The standardization change in the drive actuator is made by a terminal signal. This signalmust always be set at the same time as the CHANGE GAIN FACTOR interface signal. Itis sensible to set the signals conditional on the SPINDLE STOPPED interface signal.

• The gain factor change must not be activated at higher speeds. The magnitude of thetransmitted set speeds must always be less than 10 V.

CONTROLLER ENABLE DW K+1, bit 14

1 signal: Speed controller for the spindle is enabled.0 signal: Effects rapid deceleration of the spindle with maximum braking current. At the

end of a time set by machine data (MD 447*), the interface to the drive isinterrupted. Only the actual values are retained (follow-up mode).

Notes:

• The following applies if positioning mode is selected by the NC or PLC:– If the signal is not set when the selection is made, the positioning operation is not

initiated until the signal has been set.– If the signal is cancelled during spindle positioning, the positioning operation is only

interrupted. It is resumed when the signal is set again.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



• The following applies if positioning mode is selected by the command channel:– If the signal is not set when the selection is made the position operation is not initiated

until the signal has been set.– If the signal is cancelled during spindle positioning, the positioning operation is only

interrupted. It is resumed whenn the signal is set again.

INPUT SET VALUE ZERO DW K+1, bit 13

1 signal: The current set speed value is overwritten with ZERO and thus effects spindlebraking in accordance with the ramp characteristic.

0 signal: No effect

Notes:

• The acceleration ramp is defined by machine data. The selection of the currently validmachine data is made with reference to the actual gear stages and the mode:

– In control mode, MD 419* to 426* "Acceleration time constant without position control"are used.

– In synchronous mode, MD 478* to 485* "Acceleration time constant with positioncontrol" are used.

• The set speed 0 is normally selected automatically at the end of the program or if theprogram is aborted. If this is suppressed by machine data (MD 521*, bit 6), the spindle canbe brought to a stop by the PLC user program with this signal or the SPINDLE RESETsignal.

• The programmed S value is lost when the INPUT SET VALUE ZERO signal is set.

• The positioning mode can still be selected (by NC, PLC or command channel) with thesignal set. The positioning routine is executed nevertheless.

SPINDLE OVERRIDE EFFECTIVE DW K+1, bit 12

1 signal: The spindle override (speed override) selected is taken into account when the setspeed values are defined.

0 signal: The spindle override values selected are not taken into account; the 100 %override value is stipulated.

Note:

The override value is generally selected with the switch on the machine control panel.


Using the spindle override effective signal, the spindle override switch on the machine controlpanel can be enabled while installing a new NC program.




SPINDLE OVERRIDE DW K+1, bit 8 to bit 11

The spindle (speed) override is taken into account when determining the set speeds for thespindle if the SPINDLE OVERRIDE ACTIVE signal is set. The override value determines thepercentage of the programmed set speed output to the spindle.

The override value is generally set with the switch on the machine control panel. Refer to thefollowing table for the assignment of switch positions to the percentage values and their code.

Position CodeD C B A

Override value in%

123456789

10111213141516

0 0 0 10 0 1 10 0 1 00 1 1 00 1 1 10 1 0 10 1 0 01 1 0 01 1 0 11 1 1 11 1 1 01 0 1 01 0 1 11 0 0 11 0 0 01 0 0 0

50556065707580859095

100105110115120120

Note:

The percentage values given in the table are standard values which are stored as machinedata. They can be altered if required.

SPINDLE RESET DW K+1, bit 5

1 signal: Stopping of spindle.

With MD 521*, bit 6 = 1 ("No abort at Reset or M02/M03") the spindle does not react to resetrequests from the NC, but to the SPINDLE RESET signal. The following preconditions must befulfilled:

– The channel to which the spindle is currently assigned by the PLC (DW K+2, bits 0 to 4) is in the reset state (e. g. after key reset).

– When the spindle is stopped, the currently valid acceleration time constant is takeninto account.

0 signal: No effect


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



Exceptions:

• Alarms that lead to cancellation of the OPERATING MODE GROUP READY signal alsocause the spindle to stop.

• If MD 520* bit 6 (M19 BEYOND RESET) is set, the spindle will abort its M19 function onlyvia ACKNOWLEDGE M19.

• The C AXIS OPERATION operating mode is not deselected by reset (also SPINDLE RE-SET).

NC MD 521* bit 6 set to "1" (spindle cannot be brought to a standstill by M30 and Reset)

OperatingMode

Reset key

PLC oscillation

speed/basicspeed

Spindlebehaviour

Spindle/resetDW K+1.5

Program inchannel

JOG – Selected Overwrittenwith oscillation

speed andbasic speed

Bit = ZERO Reset

JOG – Deselected Previousspeed active

Bit = ZERO Reset

JOG – – Spindlestopped

Bit = ONE Reset

JOG – Selected Spindlestopped

Bit = ONE Reset

JOG – Deselected Spindlestopped

Bit = ONE Reset

MDA/AUTO – – Selectedspeed active

Bit = ZERO Stop

MDA/AUTO – – Selected speed active

Bit = ONE Stop

MDA/AUTO In operation – Spindlestopped

Bit = ONE Reset

MDA/AUTO – Selected Overwrittenwith oscillation


Bit = ZERO Stop

MDA/AUTO – Deselected Previousspeed active

Bit = ZERO Stop

MDA/AUTO – Selected Overwrittenwith oscillation


Bit = ONE Stop

MDA/AUTO – Deselected Previousspeed active

Bit = ONE Stop

MDA/AUTO In operation Selected Spindlestopped

Bit = ONE Reset

MDA/AUTO In operation Deselected Spindlestopped

Bit = ONE Reset

MDA/AUTO In operation Selected Rotates withoscillation andbasic speed

Bit = ZERO Reset

MDA/AUTO In operation Deselected Spindlestopped

Bit = ZERO Reset




After SPINDLE RESET and SPINDLE STOPPED, M03/004 and Sxxx must be reselected.

If a requested spindle positioning is aborted by the PLC with SPINDLE RESET, a renewedspindle repositioning must be restarted by the PLC.

M19 is aborted with the reset key in MDA/AUTO mode even if the SPINDLE RESET FROMPLC bit is set to 0.

INVERT M03/M04 DW K+1, bit 4

1 signal: The set voltage sign for M03/M04 is inverted.

0 signal: No inversion

Note:

A positive voltage is output with M03 as a standard. Via MD 521*, bit 1 (SIGN CHANGESETPOINT) an adjustment to the machine is possible.

Example:

In mechanical back gear units (e.g. drilling heads), the direction of rotation is reversedmechanically by a gear mechanism. The correct direction of rotation can be obtained bymeans of the INVERT M03/M04 interface signal.

INITIATE C AXIS OPERATION DW K+1, bit 3

1 signal: The PLC user program has concluded the preparations to initiate C axisoperation. The spindle control can now switch to C axis operation.

0 signal: Switch to C axis operation disabled.

Notes:

• By means of this signal the PLC user program can delay the switch to C axis operationuntil the required preconditions have been satisfied. No block change takes place as longas the signal is not set.

• Examples of measures required to satisfy the preconditions for the switch:– Bring spindle to a stop– Engage correct gear stage– Preset axis-specific interface.

• Cancelling the signal does not abort C axis operation.

• Switch to C axis operation is not possible when PLC spindle control is active.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



10

1: Instant of decoding M function for selecting C axis operation.2: Measures taken by the PLC user program to prepare for C axis operation.3: INITIATE C AXIS OPERATION4: Block change

ACTUAL GEAR STAGE DW K+1, bit 0 to 2

A variable-speed gearbox connected between motor and spindle provides a large speed rangeat the spindle. The set speed determined by the S value always refers to the speed of thespindle and not to that of the motor. Therefore, the current gear stage has to be taken intoaccount when calculating the motor set speed value.

The PLC user program must therefore always output the correct actual gear stage to the NC.The following code is used.

Gear stageCode

CBit 2

BBit 1

ABit 0

12345678

00001111

00110011

01010101

Notes:

• Gear stage 1 is allocated to the lowest spindle speed range.

• If fewer than 8 gear stages are provided, codes for unavailable gear stages must not betransferred to the NC.

FEEDFORWARD CONTROL OFF DW K+2, bit 15

1 signal: The feedforward control is inactive. The active feedforward control parametersare cleared when the signal is set.

0 signal: The feedforward control becomes active. The feedforward control parametersdefined in the machine data are taken into account in the set value calculation.The feedforward control is always active when the control powers up, it is notdeactivated until the signal is set.




CHANNEL NUMBER DW K+2, bit 8 to 12

The PLC user program must assign one channel to each spindle from which it receives itssetpoint values. The channel numbers are encoded as follows:

If a spindle is switched as C axis in a channel, it should be switched off in the same channel.If the spindle is to be switched off in another channel, it must previously be assigned to therelevant channel.

Channel number

Code

EBit 12

DBit 11

CBit 10

BBit 9

ABit 8

01234

5 1)

6 1)

0000000

0000000

0000111

0011001

0101010

SET ROTATION CLOCKWISE DW K+2, bit 7

1 signal: The set voltage which has been parameterized to correspond to clockwiserotation is output.

0 signal: The set voltage which has been parameterized to correspond to counter-clockwise rotation is output.

Notes:

• The SET ROTATION CLOCKWISE signal is effective only in conjunction with the PLCSPINDLE CONTROL signal.

• The sign of the set voltage is parameterized by:

– INVERT M03/M04 signal– MD 521*, bit 1 "Sign change set value"

• The signal determines the direction of rotation in oscillating mode or in control mode withbasic speed (BASIC SPEED signal)

OSCILLATION SPEED DW K+2, bit 6

1 signal: Request for oscillation mode.


_______1) As from SW 4


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



Oscillation mode

n+

t

t1 t2

1

2

1: Motor oscillation speed2: SPINDLE SET ROTATION CW signal (t1 not equal to t2)

Notes:

• The signal is effective only if the PLC SPINDLE CONTROL signal is also set.

• The oscillation speed is determined by MD 450*. It refers not to the spindle speed but tothe motor speed (unit: %).

• The direction of rotation is determined by the SET ROTATION CW and INVERT M03/M04signals. MD 521*, bit 1 ("Setpoint sign change") is also taken into account.

• The speed override is disregarded.

• The programmed values (S value, direction of rotation) are reactivated when theOSCILLATION SPEED or PLC SPINDLE CONTROL signal is cancelled.

• The oscillation mode is not aborted by Reset.

• The acceleration time constants do not have any significance in oscillation mode.

Example:

Gear changing with oscillation of drive motor speed to facilitate gear engagement (seedescription of CHANGE GEAR signal).

BASIC SPEED DW K+2, bit 5

1 signal: A fixed basic speed is specified for the spindle.

0 signal: No effect




Notes:

• The signal is effective only when the PLC SPINDLE CONTROL signal is also set.

• The basic speed is defined by MD 449*. It is a spindle speed, which should be very slow.A change in this MD becomes effective immediately.

• The speed override is taken into account.

• The direction of rotation is defined by SET ROTATION CLOCKWISE and INVERTM03/M04 signals. Furthermore, MD 521, bit 1 ("Sign change set value") is taken intoaccount.

• If the BASIC SPEED or PLC SPINDLE CONTROL signal is again cancelled, the pro-grammed values (S value, direction of rotation) become active again.

• The setting of the basic speed is not aborted by reset.

• The applicable acceleration time constants are taken into account.


At the low basic speed, the spindle can be positioned manually.

POSITION SPINDLE DW K+2, bit 4

1 signal: Request for positioning mode.


Notes:

• The set spindle position is determined by MD 452*.

• If the spindle is stationary, the position is approached by the shortest path. The spindlerotates at the creep speed specified in MD 427* to 434*.

• If the spindle is not stationary at the time of the request, positioning is carried out with thedirection of rotation being retained.

• In the positioning mode, MD 478* to 485* "Acceleration time constant with position control"are used.

• The functions M03 or M04 stored on the NC are deleted by the POSITION SPINDLEsignal. The stored S value, however, is retained and becomes active again when theACKNOWLEDGE M19 signal is given and M03 or M04 is then programmed.

• Position spindle must not be selected as long as G96 (constant cutting speed) is active.


Positioning the spindle to the tool change position; a tool change can be programmed onlywith M06 without M19 if the PLC is activated on the basis of M06 POSITION SPINDLE.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



RESYNCHRONIZE SPINDLE D K+2, bit 3

1 signal: The spindle is resynchronized with the encoder.

0 signal: No effect

Note:

RESYNCHRONIZE SPINDLE is effective only in conjunction with PLC SPINDLE CONTROL.


Resynchronization of the encoder and spindle control when, for example, the encoder ischanged with the drilling head.

ACKNOWLEDGE M 19 D K+2, bit 2

1 signal: An M 19 in the NC is cancelled, i.e. the position control is interrupted.

0 signal: No effect

Note:

The ACKNOWLEDGE M 19 signal is effective only in conjunction with PLC SPINDLECONTROL. The M03, M04 auxiliary functions are equivalent to the ACKNOWLEDGE M 19PLC signal if they are activated by the program or by overstoring. POSITION SPINDLE mustbe acknowledged using this signal.

PLC SPINDLE CONTROL DW K+2, bit 0

1 signal: Enables PLC interface signals – SET ROTATION CLOCKWISE– OSCILLATING SPEED– BASIC SPEED– POSITION SPINDLE– SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION– ACKNOWLEDGE M19

0 signal: Spindle control by the NC or command channel.

Notes:

• If a new request is transmitted from the NC part program to the spindle, it does notbecome effective until the PLC SPINDLE CONTROL interface signal is cancelled.

• If several of the above-mentioned signals are present simultaneously, the followingpriorities (in descending order) apply:

– POSITION SPINDLE– OSCILLATION SPEED– BASIC SPEED




SPINDLE DISABLE DW K+3

1 signal: Causes the spindle to stop, the spindle speed being reduced according to theacceleration time constants (at least one signal = 1).

With spindle positioning by M 19 or POSITION SPINDLE, the positioning processis interrupted by setting the SPINDLE DISABLE signal.

0 signal: Effects spindle drive enable, the spindle being accelerated according to theacceleration time constants.

With spindle positioning selected by M 19 or by POSITION SPINDLE from thePLC, the positioning process is continued.

Notes:

1) If the spindle disable signal is given, set speed value ZERO is selected.

2) When the spindle is enabled again, the previous set speed value becomes effective.

3) Spindle disable is activated if at least one bit is set.

4) A message (error or operational message) can be allocated to any bit (see Section 12,Display Programs for PLC Data and Messages).

5) The acceleration time constants are stored in NC MD 419* without position control. In thepositioning mode, MD 478* to MD 485* are used.

Example:

C DB 31 ;Spindle-specific signals

L DR 0 ;Signals from spindle (VDI 1)T FY 200A F 200.7 ;Gear change request from spindle to PLC= F 203.0 ;Monitoring for maximum gear stage speed OffL FY 203T DL 50 ;Signals to spindle (VDI 2). Set ”Monitoring Off”AN F 200.7 ;Gear change request from spindle to PLCJC END.JU FB 123 ;Change gear stage.R F 200.7 ;Acknowledge gear change requestL FY 200T DR 0

END: BE


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


5.4 Signals from following spindle to PLC, DB 31 for the GI function

5.4 Signals from following spindle to PLC, DB 31 for the GI function 1)

Additional spindle-specific signals are provided in data block DB 31 for the ”Gear interpolation”functionality. These can be utilized when one of the spindles is used as a following spindle in aGI grouping. The following spindle is interlocked in follow-up mode against all requests fromthe system (except controller enable). An explanation of the ”Gear interpolation” function is tobe found in the Installation Instructions, Description of Functions.

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a aa a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

The address K is derived for the following spindles as follows:1st spindle K=02nd spindle K=43rd spindle K=84th spindle K=125th spindle K=166th spindle K=20

ACCELERATION LIMIT SYNCHRONOUS ACTIVE DW K+24, bit 14

1 signal: When the maximum acceleration limit of the following spindle is reached, thefollowing spindle can no longer follow the leading axes/spindles. The resultingpositional deviation to the leading axes/spindles is added up and subsequentlytraversed after the acceleration process. Positional synchronism will then be re-established.

0 signal: Any positional deviation to the leading axes/spindles possibly occurring duringacceleration of the following spindle is not taken into account. This means thatthe following spindle is no longer in positional synchronism with the leadingaxes/spindles.

Note:

The maximum permissible acceleration for the following spindle is specified in the”Acceleration time constant with position control” (NC MD 478*-485*).

ESR MONITORING IS ACTIVE 2) DW K+24, bit 13

1 signal: The monitoring functions for EXTENDED STOP AND RETRACTION areactivated. If one of the programmed errors occurs, the NC activates theprogrammed reactions and the interface signal ESR RESPONSE IS TRIGGEREDis set.

0 signal: The retraction monitoring is switched off.

_______1) As from SW 3

2) The ESR function is described in detail in the Installation Instructions, SW 5.




COMPENSATORY CONTROLLER ACTIVE DW K+24, bit 12

1 signal: The compensatory controller is switched on. The current partial actual values ofthe following axis and of the leading axes/spindles are checked underconsideration of the linking factors. Additive setpoint speeds are calculated fromthe deviations of the partial actual values and output to the following axis.

0 signal: The compensatory controller is switched off.

Note:

The compensatory controller serves to compensate for load disturbances. It increases thestiffness of the link.

FOLLOWING SPINDLE OVERLAY ACTIVE DW K+24, bit 10

1 signal: An additional traversing movement can be overlaid on the following spindle. Thisenable signal is also required for on-the-fly synchronization of the leading andfollowing drive. The overlay path is traversed at the M19 creep speed as speedoffset.

0 signal: The following spindle is not traversed with overlay at this moment.

SYNCHRONIZATION BUSY DW K+24, bit 9

1 signal: ”On-the-fly synchronization” was triggered via PLC or NC. The synchronizationprocess has not yet been completed, the synchronization positions have not yetbeen reached.

0 signal: ”On-the-fly synchronization” is currently not active.

Notes:

• The signal is reset by the system when the synchronization positions are reached.

• The SYNCHRONIZATION POSITION REACHED interface signal indicates when thesynchronization position has been reached.

LINK ACTIVE DW K+24, bit 8

1 signal: The spindle operates as a following spindle within an active GI grouping.

0 signal: The spindle is not involved in an active GI grouping as a following spindle.

Note:

Programming the linking factor ”0” causes the signal to be reset.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



CONTROLLED FOLLOW-UP MOTION OF FOLLOWING SPINDLE DW K+24, bit 6

1 signal: The following spindle follows up under control due to a fault. The set values forthe following spindle are derived from the actual values of the leadingaxis/spindle.

0 signal: The configured type of link between the following spindle and the leadingaxis/spindle is active.

MAXIMUM ACCELERATION DW K+24, bit 5

1 signal: The set value for acceleration of the following spindle is greater than themaximum value specified in NC MD 478*-485*. The following spindle traverses atmaximum acceleration, the positional deviation to the leading axes/spindlesincreases. Alarm 2060* ”Acceleration limit” is triggered.

0 signal: The current acceleration of the following spindle is less than the maximumacceleration.

Note:

The signal is relevant to the following spindle in synchronous operation.

MAXIMUM SPEED DW K+24, bit 4

1 signal: The setpoint speed of the following spindle is higher than the maximum speed.The following spindle rotates at maximum speed. The positional deviation to theleading axes/spindles increases leading to a loss of synchronism. Alarm 2059*”Speed limit” is triggered.

0 signal: The current speed is less than the maximum speed.

Notes:

• The maximum speed of the following spindle is determined by the minimum values of thefollowing data:– NC MD 403*-410* Maximum speed of gear stage– NC MD 451* Maximum chuck speed– SD 403* Programmed spindle speed limit (G26)– SD 401* Programmed spindle speed limit (G92)

• The signal is relevant to the following spindle in synchronous operation.

ACCELERATION WARNING THRESHOLD REACHED DW K+24, bit 3

1 signal: The acceleration of the following spindle has exceeded the warning threshold(NC MD 494*). Increasing acceleration still involves the risk of synchronism beingdisturbed between the leading axes/spindles and the following spindle.

0 signal: Acceleration is lower than the acceleration warning threshold.




Notes:

• The signal is automatically removed by the control as soon as the current accelerationdrops below 7/8 of the warning threshold.

• Monitoring can be deselected with NC MD 526* bit 3 ”Suppress acceleration limit”.

• The signal is significant for the following spindle in synchronous mode.

SPEED WARNING THRESHOLD REACHED DW K+24, bit 2

1 signal: The speed of the following spindle has exceeded the warning threshold (NC MD494*). The following spindle may now no longer be able to follow the leadingaxes/spindles, involving the risk that the synchronism between the leadingaxes/spindles and the following spindle will be disturbed.

0 signal: The speed is lower than the speed warning threshold.

Notes:

• The signal is automatically removed by the control as soon as the current speed dropsbelow 7/8 of the warning threshold.


SYNCHRONOUS MOTION FINE DW K+24, bit 1

1 signal: The positional deviation of the following spindle to all configured leading axes/spindles is less than the ”Synchronization fine” (NC MD 491*) tolerance band.

0 signal: The positional deviation of the following spindle to all configured leading axes/spindles is greater than the ”Synchronization fine” (NC MD 491*) tolerance band.

Notes:


• The tolerance band is determined by the offset angle between leading and followingspindle and the Synchronization fine (NC MD 491*) tolerance.

SYNCHRONOUS MOTION COARSE DW K+24, bit 0

1 signal: The positional deviation of the following spindle to all configured leadingaxes/spindles is less than the ”Synchronization coarse” (NC MD 492*) toleranceband.

0 signal: The positional deviation of the following spindle to all configured leadingaxes/spindles is greater than the ”Synchronization coarse” (NC MD 492*)tolerance band.

Notes:


• The tolerance band is determined by the offset angle between leading and followingspindle and the ”Synchronization coarse” (NC MD 492*) tolerance.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



SYNCHRONIZATION POSITION REACHED DW K+25, bit 14

1 signal: The synchronization process with ”On-the-fly synchronization” is completed, thefollowing spindle now traverses in positional synchronism with the synchronizationposition to the leading spindle.

0 signal: The synchronization position has not yet been reached.

Note:

The SYNCHRONIAZTION BUSY signal is reset when the synchronization position is reached.On-the-fly synchronization can be aborted with RESET as long as the SYNCHRONIZATIONBUSY signal is set. The link is activated nevertheless.

ESR RESPONSE IS TRIGGERED 2) DW K+25, bit 13

1 signal: This spindle has triggered the ”Extended stop and retraction”.

0 signal: No triggering of ESR response.

SPINDLE IS A FOLLOWING SPINDLE DW K+25, bit 7

1 signal: The spindle was configured as a following spindle in a GI grouping.

0 signal: The spindle was not configured as a following spindle in a GI grouping

Note:

The PLC can recognize from this signal if a GI grouping was defined for a spindle, even if thelink is not active.

ESR RESPONSE IS PROGRAMMED 1) 2) DW K+25, bit 5

1 signal: When ”Extended stop and retraction” has been programmed for this spindle viathe G commands (G422 to G426). With this signal, a response can be started viathe "ESR response enabled" interface signal.

The ESR function is described in the SINUMERIK 840C, SW 4 InstallationInstructions.

0 signal: No ESR response is programmed for this spindle.

_______1) As from SW 4

2) The ESR response is described in detail in the Installation Instructions, SW 4.




REQUEST LINK OFF DW K+25, bit 1

1 signal: The signal is set if a link is to be switched off (Source: part program, PLC orinput image), however, the conditions for a deactivation (e.g. INTERLOCK LINKOFF, PLC SPINDLE CONTROL signals) are not yet satisfied. Part program blockchange is halted until the conditions are met.

0 signal: No change of LINK ON status requested. The signal is also reset when the PLCSPINDLE CONTROL or INTERLOCK LINK ON signal is reset.

REQUEST LINK ON DW K+25, bit 0

1 signal: The signal is set if a link is to be switched on (Source: part program, PLC orinput image), however, the conditions for an activation (e.g. INTERLOCK LINKON signal) are not yet satisfied. Part program block change is halted until theconditions are met.

0 signal: No change of LINK OFF status requested. The signal is also reset when the PLCSPINDLE CONTROL or INTERLOCK LINK OFF signal is reset. The link will thenbecome active. If other conditions should have prevented the link from becomingactive, the conditions must first be satisfied and subsequently a new LINK ONmust be triggered.

Slave operation is active 1) DW K+49, bit 9

1 signal: Slave mode is switched on (see Installation Instructions, Section 12, FunctionDescription).

0 signal: The spindle in question is in normal mode.

C axis active DW K+49 bit 8

1 signal: The spindle is active as C axis.

0 signal: Spindle is active

_______1) As from SW 4.4


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


5.5 Signals from PLC to following spindle for GI function

5.5 Signals from PLC to following spindle for GI function 1)

ACTIVATE ESR MONITORING DW K+26, bit 13

0/1 edge: The emergency retraction monitoring for the following spindle is switched on.

Notes:

• The emergency retraction threshold is specified in NC MD 493*.• The ACTIVATE ESR MONITORING signal is set as check-back signal.• As from SW 4, errors leading to ESR responses can be programmed; the signal is not

restricted to MD 493*.

ON-THE-FLY SYNCHRONIZATION ON DW K+26, bit 9

0/1 edge: On-the-fly synchronization of the following spindle with all configured leadingaxes/spindles is triggered. A LINK ON signal is generated internally. TheSYNCHRONIZATION BUSY signal is set. This bit is cancelled again by thesystem when the synchronization positions are reached and theSYNCHRONIZATION POSITION REACHED signal is set.

LINK ON DW K+26, bit 8

0/1 edge: Activates the link of all configured axes/spindles with the following spindlewith the current linking factors.

Notes:

• This signal affects all configured leading axes/spindles. Selective linking via the PLC is notpossible. The linking factors must have been programmed in advance or derived from theGIQ data during power up.

• The LINK ACTIVE signal is set by way of acknowledgement.

DISABLE ESR MONITORING 2) DW K+26, bit 5

0/1 edge: The emergency retraction monitoring for the following spindle is switched off.

Note:

• The ACTIVATE ESR MONITORING signal is reset as check-back signal.• As from SW 4, errors leading to ESR responses can be programmed; the signal is not

restricted to MD 493*. • The monitoring function can also be switched on/off from PLC. If it is switched on from

PLC, it can also be switched off from PLC. If it is switched off from PLC, it is switched offfor all channels.

_______1) As from SW 3

2) The ESR response is described in detail in the Installation Instructions, SW 5.




LINK OFF DW K+26, bit 0

0/1 edge: Deactivates the link of all configured leading axes/spindles with the following axis.

Notes:

• This signal affects all configured leading axes/spindles. Selective delinking via the PLC isnot possible.

• The LINK ACTIVE signal is reset by way of acknowledgement.

CORRECT SYNCHRONISM DIFFERENCE DW K+27, bit 7

1 signal: The PLC signal "Correct synchronism difference" corrects the setpoint to thefollowing address by the synchronism error between the leading and followingaddresses so that the synchronism difference no longer results in a systemdeviation. Both the controller and drive must be enabled and the gearboxcoupling must be switched on while this signal is applied.

0 signal: Position and/or comensatory controller correct the synchronism error

Notes:

• This function is particularly important where synchronous spindle pairs are used. When theworkpiece is transferred by the following drive, an angle offset between the leading andfollowing drives can result for mechanical reasons when the chuck is closed. This offsetcannot be eliminated while the drives are coupled via the workpiece. This can be avoidedwith the signal CORRECT SYNCHRONISM DIFFERENCE.

• This signal should be activated:

– After closure of the mechanical coupling, if the power transmission is without slip.

– When teh drives are mechanically coupled and position control is acitvated.

• If both drives are mechanically coupled the signal must be canceled so that precisesynchronization is maintained.

ACCELERATION LIMIT SYNCHRONOUS DW K+27, bit 6

1 signal: The acceleration limit synchronous is activated.

0 signal: The acceleration limit synchronous is not activated.

Notes:

• The acceleration limit synchronous for the following spindle enables the following spindleto traverse in positional synchronism with the leading axes/spindles again afteraccelerations. Any positional deviations possibly occurring during acceleration are addedup and traversed after the acceleration phase.

• The ACCELERATION LIMIT SYNCHRONOUS ACTIVE signal is set as soon as theacceleration limit becomes active.

• The maximum acceleration of the following spindle is determined by the ”Acceleration timeconstant with position control” (NC MD 478*-485*).


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



ENABLE ESR RESPONSE 1) 2) DW K+27, bit 5

1 signal: With this static signal, the PLC can enable a programmed (signal: "ESRresponse is programmed" is set) ESR response. Without this signal, a spindlemovement is not possible (safety signal).

COMPENSATORY CONTROLLER ON DW K+27, bit 4

1 signal: The compensatory controller is activated from the PLC.

0 signal: The compensatory controller is not activated.

Notes:

• The compensatory controller serves to compensate for load disturbances. It increases thestiffness of the link.

• The COMPENSATORY CONTROLLER ACTIVE signal is set by way of acknowledgement.

ENABLE FOLLOWING SPINDLE OVERLAY DW K+27, bit 2

1 signal: An additional motion can be overlaid on the movement of the following spindlepredetermined by the leading axes/spindles. This overlaid movement isautomatically preset for on-the-fly synchronization to enable traversing to theprogrammed angular difference.

0 signal: No overlaid movement of the following spindle is possible.

Note:

Alarm 2058* ”Following spindle overlay not enabled” is output when an attempt is made totraverse the following axis with overlay without an enable signal given.

INTERLOCK LINK OFF DW K+27, bit 1

1 signal: The link between the following spindle and the leading axes/spindles cannot beswitched off.

0 signal: The link between the following spindle and the leading axes/spindles can beswitched off.

Notes:

• If this interlock signal was present when a LINK OFF signal was programmed, the link isnot switched off until this interlock signal is reset.

• Block change is interlocked as long as this signal is present and a link is to be switchedoff. The REQUEST LINK OFF signal is set.

_______1) As from SW 42) The ESR response is described in detail in the Installation Instructions, SW 5.




INTERLOCK LINK ON DW K+27, bit 0

1 signal: The link between the following spindle and the leading axes/spindles cannot beswitched on.

0 signal: The link between the following spindle and the leading axes/spindles can beswitched on.

Notes:

• If this interlock signal was present when a LINK ON signal was programmed, the link is notswitched on until this interlock signal is reset.

• Block change is interlocked as long as this signal is present and a link is to be switchedon. The REQUEST LINK ON signal is set.

• The signal has no influence on an active link.

The effects stated below apply in addition to the interface signals described:

SERVO ENABLE (spindles)

• The LINK ON status is retained when the SERVO ENABLE signal is removed with anactive GI link (operating leading/following drives). The drive is brought to a standstill. GImonitoring remains active.

• The link is not switched on if the SERVO ENABLE is not set when LINK ON is selected.The REQUEST LINK ON signal is set. For switching on the link, a new LINK ON requestmust be programmed after the SERVO ENABLE was set.

Disable spindle

• LINK ON is retained when DISABLE SPINDLE is set for a leading spindle. The spindle isbrought to a standstill. The servo enable remains active.

• The following spindle cannot be influenced via this signal.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


5.6 Interface signals for spindle/drive 611D (DB31)

5.6 Interface signals for spindle/drive 611D (DB31) 1)

Parking spindle DB 31, DW K+50, bit 11 1)

MSD and FDD:

1 signal: Spindle is in parked position.

0 signal: Spindle is not in parked position.

Notes:

• If a spindle is declared a PARKING SPINDLE, monitoring of the connection encoder measuring circuit module is switched off. No alarm is therefore triggered if this connectionis separated.

• The spindle/axis is resynchronized if the signal to the PARKING SPINDLE is removed.

Slave operation is active 3) DW K+50, bit 9

1 signal: Slave operation is activated (see Function description)

0 signal: The spindle in question is in normal mode

Gear stage monitoring off 1) DW K+50 2), bit 8

1 signal: The maximum gear stage speed is not taken into account in the monitoring of thespindle speed limit. It is therefore possible to switch from a higher gear stage to alower gear stage without stopping the spindle. Only monitoring of maximumchuck speed (MD 451*), maximum spindle speed (SWITCHING DEVICE 403*)and, if G 96 is acitvated, limitation to G 92 S is activated. The maximum gearstage speed (MD 403*) is no longer monitored.

_______1) As from SW 3

2) Spindle Address y

123456

485256606468




Parameter group "Position control" (bit 0 .. 2) 2) DW K+51, bit 0-2Parameter group "Speed ratio" (bit 0 .. 2) 2) DW K+51, bit 3-5

These three bits can be used to switch over in binary coded form between a maximum of 8parameter sets, e.g.:

001 =̂ Parameter set 1011 =̂ Parameter set 3 etc.

Notes:

• To ensure that the changeover for the spindle is executed via this interface signal,MD 522*, bit 4 "Switchover parameter groups separately" must be set. In this case, theinterface signals for the actual gear stage (DB 31, DW K+1, bit 0-2) are irrelevant. Thedisplay of the actual gear stage in the service screen is still updated in accordance withthe interface signals, but otherwise has no effect.

If the bit is not set, the PLC signals for the actual gear stage are used; the PLC signals forthe various parameter groups are not effective.

With spindle/C axis, MD 522*, bit 4 "Switchover parameter groups separately" influencesboth the changeover behavior of the spindle and of the C axis. "Switchover separately" ispermanently set for normal axes. C axes can be influenced via the spindle MD bit in sucha way that all parameter groups ("Position controller", "Speed ratio" and "Drive") areswitched over jointly via the interface of the "Position controller" parameter group.

• The "Parameter set changeover" function is described in the SINUMERIK 840C, SW 5Installation Instructions.

• Effective only with extended parameter set changeover NC MD 523*, 0.

_______1) As from SW 32) As from SW 43) As from SW 4.4


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



Parameter block (0), (1), (2) DW K+72, bit 0, 1, 2

MSD and FDD 1)

Confirmation of the currently active parameter set.

The 3 bits are always to be interpreted together as a binary number.

Motor selection bit 0 DW K+72, bit 3

MSD and FDD 1)

Confirmation of star-delta operation or changeover of motor.

1 signal: Delta operation or motor 2

0 signal: Star operation or motor 1


MSD and FDD 1)

Reserved for later applications.

Drive ready DW K+72, bit 5

MSD and FDD:

Drive ready message

1 signal: Drive ready

0 signal: Drive not ready– Enable terminals missing:

KL.663, submodule-specific pulse enableKL.64, central drive enableKL.63, central pulse enable

– Infeed/feedback hardware, summation error, Power on

Note:

• 611D machine data 1012 bit 2 "Drive ready"observe dependency of terminals

• Observe interface signal DB 29 DW 120 bit 5

_______1) FDD as from SW 4




Drive switched on DW K+72, bit 6

MSD and FDD:

1 signal: Drive switched on/drive has ramped-up

0 signal: Drive not switched on

Pulses are enabled DW K+72, bit 7

MSD and FDD:

Enable pulse confirmation

1 signal: All enable signals are present

0 signal: Pulse-controller enable missing, enable terminals not set,status class 1 error present, switch motor is active,P53 bit 13=1

Motor temperature prewarning DW K+72, bit 8

MSD and FDD:

ZK2 message, motor temperature exceeds the value in P063/P291 with MSD and in P1602with FDD. If the temperature remains too high, a status class 1 error (ZK1) is output after anelapse of the time set in P065 (MSD) or in P1603 (FDD).

FDD:

If a motor temperature=0 is measured, an interruption of the PTC motor thermistor isassumed and the bit is also set. A reaction to this situation is initiated via the PLC program. Inthis case, there will be no reaction in the drive. If the motor temperature=0 is still measuredafter the time set in P1603 has elapsed, the ZK1 Reset error (”Motor temperature N...”) isissued.

Heat sink temperature prewarning DW K+72, bit 9

MSD and FDD:

ZK2 message, heat sink temperature too high. If the temperature remains too high, a ZK1error is output after 20 seconds.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



User-programmable messages 1 to 6 DW K+72, bit 10 ... 15

MSD:

6 MSD-specific messages. The messages can be freely assigned to the 6 status bits viaP241/P246. The following messages are preset:

Message 1: Ramp-up phase endedMessage 2: M–D<M–dxMessage 3: n–act<n–minMessage 4: n–act<n–xMessage 5: n–act<n–setMessage 6: Variable message function 1

FDD:

The message assignments for feed drive are firmly specified:DW K+72, bit 10: freely programmable

bit 11: freely programmablebit 12: n–act<n–minbit 13: n–act<n–xbit 14: freely programmablebit 15: freely programmable

Travel request drive test DW K+73, bit 15

1 signal: Drive test requested (drive stationary) or active (drive operating). The signal isset as soon as a drive test was started and the parameter assignment has beenestablished to be faultless. The signal is removed at the end of the drive test assoon as the drive has been brought to a standstill and has resumed its formeroperating mode.

0 signal: Drive test not active

DC link voltage < Warning threshold (MD 1604) 1) DW K + 73, bit 0

ZK2 message, that the DC link voltage has fallen below the value determined in MD 1604.

MD 1604 is described in the SINUMERIK 840C, SW 4 Installation Instructions.





DC link voltage<Emergency retraction threshold (MD 1634)1) DW K+73, bit 1

ZK2 message, that the DC link voltage has fallen below the value determined in MD 1634 asemergency retraction threshold.

When the DC link voltage falls below the emergency retraction threshold, emergency retractionresponses are initiated which are defined in MD ZWK_NOTR_M. The machine data (MD) aredescribed in the SINUMERIK 840C, SW 4 Installation Instructions.

Emergency retraction or DC link generator active 1) DW K+73, bit 2

ZK2 message, that emergency retraction or DC link generator is active.

• If the voltage thresholds MD 1634 and MD 1631 in the infeed/regenerative-feedback unitare unequal and MD 1631 > MD 1634, generator operation starts without an emergencyretraction being initiated simultaneously for the infeed/regenerative-feedback unit axes.The emergency retraction threshold is thus recognized only when the generator axis is nolonger capable of supporting the DC link. In this case, emergency retraction is not carriedout due to the lack of energy. In order to prevent this, NC emergency retraction responsesmust be initiated on the other axes, when the actual speed of the generator axis has fallenbelow a minimum speed (MD 1635).

• In the case of a communication failure (failure of "sign-of-life”) of one axis, the other axesmust be treated by the NC in accordance with their operating mode. If, for example, theaxis that failed is an emergency retraction axis, it will perform an emergency retraction.Consequently, coupled axes must perform an emergency retraction controlled by the NC.

Conditions for switching on/off the ZK2 message "Generator active"






MD_U_GEN_OFF









MD_U_GEN_ON+

MD_U_GEN_HUB





MD_U_GEN_ON






"ZWK_GEN_AKTIV"

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

ZK2

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

UZWK600V

a aa aa aa a

t

a aa aa aa a

t


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



Generator speed < Minimum speedGenerator axis (MD 1635) 2) DW K+73, bit 3

ZK2 message, that the generator speed has fallen below the value of the minimum speed ofthe generator axis in MD 1635.

MD 1635 is described in the SINUMERIK 840C, SW 4, Installation Instructions.

Parameter set (0, 1, 2) DW K+74, bit 0, 1, 2

MSD and FDD 1)

The 3 bits are used to select one of the eight gear stages available and to activate theassociated parameter set. The 3 bits are always interpreted together as a binary number.

Motor selection bit 0 2) DW K+74, bit 3

MSD:

Request star-delta changeover or motor changeover.




MSD:

Reserved for later applications

Motor selection executed 1) DW K+74, bit 5

MSD:

This bit is used by the PLC to confirm changeover of the motor contactors for star/deltachangeover or motor changeover.




Disable integrator DW K+74, bit 6

MSD and FDD:

Disable integrator of speed controller

1 signal: Disable integrator

0 signal: Enable integrator

Pulse enable DW K+74, bit 7

MSD and FDD:

1 signal: Enable pulses (enable signal is only given if all other enable signals are present)

0 signal: Disable pulses

Ramp-function generator rapid stop DW K+74, bit 9

MSD:

1 signal: Specifies setpoint speed 0, braking without ramp-function generator ramp(see MD 522* bit 3)

Second torque limit DW K+74, bit 10

MSD:

Activates 2nd torque limit set in P041.


2) As from SW


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



Set speed smoothing DW K+74, bit 11

MSD:

Activates interpolation of the setpoint speed from the position controller cycle into the speedcontroller cycle.

Activates rounding of the setpoint speed parameterized via P019.

Function diagram of interpolation filter






N–set (k-1)

a aa aa aa a

0

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

XINT

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

XR

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

2 XR

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

3 XR

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

N–NRS

a a a a a a a a a a a




N–set (k)





N–set (k+1)

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a














XR = Position controller cycleXINT = Speed controller cycleN–set = Set value from NCN–NRS = Set value MSD internal

Motion enable drive test DW K+75, bit 15

MSD and FDD:

1 signal: PLC enable for drive test is present. The drive test (traversing movement) isstarted with NC Start.

0 signal: PLC enable missing. The drive test is aborted at NC Start, i.e. the travel requestis cancelled and the drive resumes its former status.If the drive test is already active (drive operating), the traversing movement isstopped and the drive subsequently resumes its former operating mode.

Note:

The effect of the signal depends on the parameterization of the drive test by the user.Selection can be made in the ”Function generator” and ”Measurement” installation functions ifthe ”Enable motion for drive test” enable signal is to be active:

1. Enable ”internal” without enable signal from PLC with NC Start.2. Enable through enable signal from PLC with NC Start.3. Enable through enable signal from PLC without NC.




A defined switching logic (time-controlled) for star to delta switching and vice versa isperformed using the “Star/delta switching” function block.

The function block is effective for digital main spindle drives only. Changeover is performed via2 separate contactors and is executed in 4 steps.

Step 1: Removal of the “Motor selection performed” interface signal and advising theswitching operation via motor selection bit 0.

Step 2: Contactor 1 (former status) is switched off as soon as the confirmation of “Pulsedisable” and the acknowledgement of the advised motor selection are availablefrom the drive.

Step 3: Contactor 2 (new status) is switched on after a specified waiting time.

Step 4: After another waiting time, completion of changeover is reported to the drive viathe “Motor selection performed” interface signal.

The function block must be called up separately for each spindle.

FX82 is used for this function.

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a





















































MSD/AM control

PLC 611D

Star/delta changeover request

Waiting for message Remove pulses

Pulse removed

Pulses removed message

Motor contactor 1 open Reload motor data

Wait until motor contactor 1 is open

Close motor contactor 2 Wait for message

“Contactor changeover

Wait until motor contactor 2 is closed completed”

Message “Contactor

changeover completed” Enable pulses

END OF SECTION


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)

09.95 6 Axis/PLC Interface (DB 32/DB 29)

6 Axis/PLC Interface (DB 32/DB 29)

General notes

The SINUMERIK 840C can control a maximum of 15 1) servo loops (total of axes and spindles= 15 2)). The interfaces of all spindles are stored in data block 32. The PLC axis interfaceis set axis-specific by means of PLC machine data (PLC MD 6016 to 6022). In the setting-upmodes, the axes cannot be influenced by the channel-specific GENERAL FEED DISABLEsignal. A feed disable can be effected only with the axis-specific FEED DISABLE signal.

In principle, each channel of an operating mode group can effect motion of all axes allocatedto the same operating mode group. However, the same axis may not be activated by severalchannels at the same time . In exceptional circumstances, certain axes can be disabled forcertain channels by means of NC MD.

The allocation of axis number servo loop module is made via NC machine data 200*.The allocation of axis number axis name is made via NC machine data 568*. The axisdefined in the MD as the 1st axis is also the 1st axis at the NCK/PLC interface.

The axis-specific FEED DISABLE signals can be allocated fault/operational messages withselection made via PLC machine data (refer to Section 12, Display Programs for PLC Data andMessages).

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a aa a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

The K addresses for the axes are as follows:1st axis K=0 10th axis K=362nd axis K=4 11th axis K=403rd axis K=8 12th axis K=444th axis K=12 13th axis K=485th axis K=16 14th axis K=526th axis K=20 15th axis K=567th axis K=24 .8th axis K=28 .9th axis K=32 .

30th axis K=116

_______1) As the TRANSMIT function requires fictitious axes, up to 30 interpolators are contained in the software

of the NC.

2) With SW 5 and higher up to 30 servo loops (sum of axes and spindles = 30).


6 Axis/PLC Interface (DB 32/DB 29) 04.96

6.1 Signals from axis


SPEED CONTROLLER ACTIVE DW K, bit 15

1 signal: Speed controller active.0 signal: Speed controller not active.

POSITION CONTROL ACTIVE DW K, bit 14

1 signal: The axis is in position control.0 signal: No position control, e.g. in the event of a servo loop fault.

Example:

Activate a holding brake on a vertical axis in the event of a position control failure.

Axis in set range DW K, bit 13

1 signal: The axis (ERA) is within the tolerance set in MD 1152* (see Installation GuideInstructions, Section 6).

REFERENCE POINT REACHED DW K, bit 12

1 signal: Reference point reached and axis synchronized.The signal is present until the power supply is switched off.

0 signal: a) Before synchronizing the axis after switching machine on.b) With *DECELERATION during repeated reference point approach.c) With the PARKING AXIS PLC signal present.d) After switching off the 611D drive electronic module

2000 units

± 9999 units

4

2

1

3

5 a aa aa a

a a a

a a a

a a a

6

1: *DECELERATION signal2: Measuring system zero mark signal3: Measuring system zero mark4: Zero mark plus 2000 units travel in the reference point approach direction5: Reference point in the range: zero mark plus (2000 units ± 9999 units ref. point shift)6: REFERENCE POINT REACHED signal


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



Notes:

• The reference point can be shifted by means of the "Reference point shift" machine datain the range ± 9999 units, referred to the 2000 units point (MD 244*).After reaching the reference point position, the actual value memory of the axis is set tothe reference point value (specified in machine data MD 240*) and the ”REFERENCEPOINT REACHED” signal is output.

• For each axis, NC MD 560*.4 can be used to determine whether the reference point hasto be reached for NC START.


Suppression of the start signal (NC START) if, for example, a parking axis has not beensynchronized when it is activated.

TRAVEL COMMAND +, – DW K, bit 11 and bit 10

AUT/MDA/TEACH IN mode

1 signal: If movement is to take place in the relevant axis direction, e.g. after transfer intothe main memory of a block containing a coordinate value for the axis.

0 signal: a) Block executedb) Axis disable presentc) Abort with RESET

1

2

3

4

5

1: READ-IN DISABLE signal2: Data transfer to main memory3: GENERAL FEED DISABLE signal4: TRAVEL COMMAND signal (e.g. X+)5: Block executed




JOG/INC mode

1 signal: Axis selected and direction key pressed.

0 signal: a) Direction key no longer pressed and interpolator output is 0.b) In the increment (INC) mode, after traverse with incremental feed.c) Abort with RESETd) On traverse with handwheel.

REF mode

1 signal: a) Approach to reference point without automatic direction recognition: pressingthe relevant direction key for approach to reference point.

b) Approach to reference point with automatic direction recognition: a directionkey is pressed.

0 signal: Reference point reached.

Note:

With axis clamping, continuous path operation is impossible if the clamp is not released untilthe travel command is given.


Clamp release, e.g. on rotary tables.

POSITION REACHED WITH EXACT STOP COARSE/FINE DW K, bit 8 and 9

AUT/MDA/TEACH IN mode

Exact stop coarse:

1 signal: a) The axis has reached the programmed set value up to the tolerance of thecoarse exact stop window (machine data MD 204*), or

b) is already within the fine exact stop window.

0 signal: The axis is outside the coarse exact stop window.

Exact stop fine:

1 signal: The axis has reached the programmed set value up to the tolerance of the fineexact stop window (machine data MD 208*).

0 signal: The axis is outside the fine exact stop window.

Note:

• The COARSE or FINE POSITION REACHED signals are also "1" if the AUTOMATICmode has been interrupted by RESET, an NC alarm or mode change (AUTINTERRUPTED).

• If the axis is moved with G01, the EXACT STOP COARSE signal is output only when theEXACT STOP FINE has also been reached.

Example:

Enabling tool change when the turret has reached the change position.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



JOG/INCR/REPOS mode

Exact stop coarse:

1 signal: a) The axis has reached the specified set value up to the tolerance of thecoarse exact stop window (machine data MD 204*), or

b) is already within the fine exact stop window; no direction key and nohandwheel has been operated, or handwheel has been operated and feedhold is active.

0 signal: The axis is outside the coarse exact stop window; a direction key or handwheelhas been operated.

Exact stop fine:

1 signal: The axis has reached the specified set value up to the tolerance of the fine exactstop window (machine data MD 208*); no direction key and no handwheel hasbeen operated, or handwheel has been operated and feed hold is active.

0 signal: The axis is outside the fine exact stop window; a direction key or handwheel hasbeen operated.

Slave operation is active 2) DW K, bit 7

1 signal: Slave mode is active (see function description).

0 signal: The spindle in question is in normal operation.

IKA warning limit exceeded 1) DW K, bit 6

1 signal: The IKA warning limit (MD 356*) was exceeded in positive or negative direction.

0 signal: The IKA warning limit was not exceeded.

IKA/TK velocity exceeded 1) DW K, bit 5

1 signal: The IKA/TK velocity set in machine data 1148* (axis-specific) was exceeded inone axis.

_______1) Only for IKA as compensation

2) SW 4.4 and higher




Rounding axis in position DW K, bit 4

0 signal: a) Axis has not yet reached reference pointb) Parking axisc) Follow-up mode for this axisd) Traverse command (+/–) for this axise) EMERGENCY OFF signalf) C axis in spindle operation

1 signal: Reference point reached and/or axis in rounding position (Coarse exact stopreached)

Note:

The ROUNDING AXIS IN POSITION interface signal is effective only in conjunction with NCMD 560* bit 2, ”Rounding to whole/half degrees” and bit 3 ”Rounding with rotary axes”.

Axis is in the reduction range 2) DW K, bit 3

0 signal: Following axis is not in the reduction range.

1 signal: Following axis is in the reduction range. The PLC can transmit a message on thebasis of the output signals.

NFAKAKT, travel against fixed stop active 1) DW K+120, bit 6

0 signal: Travel against fixed stop is not active

1 signal: Travel against fixed stop is active

This signal can be used for analog and digital drives.

NFESTANER, fixed stop reached 1) DW K+120, bit 7

0 signal: Fixed stop not reached

1 signal: Fixed stop reached

+/- Cam 1) DW K+120, bit 8...15

0 signal: No software cam active

1 signal: Confirmation to PLC indicating that software cam was reached

This signal can be used for analog and digital drives.

_______1) As from SW 3

2) As from SW 5.6


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


6.2 Signals to axis

6.2 Signals to axis

MIRRORING DW K+1, bit 15

Mirroring is possible for all axes. Version A or B can be selected via axis-specific machinedata.

0 signal: Mirroring not effective

1 signal: Version AMirroring of– programmed values– cutter radius compensation or tool nose radius compensation (G41, G42)– tool length compensation

No mirroring of– zero offset

1 signal: Version BMirroring of– programmed values– cutter radius compensation (G41, G42)

No mirroring of– zero offset– tool length compensation

Example 1, SINUMERIK 840C turning machine:

Mirroring of X axis, version A(Mirroring in the X axis causes the axis to be mirrored)

Mirroring in the X axis

Z+

X–

X+

Z–

1

2

1: normal: Machining behind the turning centre2: mirrored: Machining in front of the turning centre

Note:

Activate mirroring in the part program in progress is active only after G714 or G200.



6.2 Signals to axis

Example 2, SINUMERIK 840C turning machine:

Mirroring of the Z axis, version B(Mirroring in the Z axis causes the tool to be mirrored)

Mirroring in the Z axis

Z+

X–

X+

Z–

2 1

1: Normal machining2: Mirrored workpiece

Example 3, SINUMERIK 840C milling machine:

Mirroring in the main axis X, version B(Mirroring in the main axes X, Y, Z always causes the workpiece to be mirrored)

Mirroring e.g. in the X axis

Y–

X+

Y+

X–

2 1

1: Normal machining2: Workpiece mirrored in X


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


6.2 Signals to axis

FOLLOW-UP OPERATION DW K+1, bit 14

1 signal: NC position control loop open: no controller enable; the actual value is furtherupdated.

0 signal: Normal state; NC position control loops closed.

Notes:

• With the axis stationary, the 1 signal opens the position control loop.

• If the axis is in motion, the 1 signal effects rapid deceleration with maximum brakingcurrent, opens the position control loop after the time delay set by machine data hasexpired and sets an alarm. Then only the actual position value is retained.

• All axes moving with interpolation are stopped if FOLLOW-UP OPERATION is set for oneaxis . Axes with FOLLOW-UP OPERATION not set can be stopped only by selecting theset speed value ZERO. The following error of these axes is still eliminated.

• An alarm is output if FOLLOW-UP OPERATION is specified for an axis moving withinterpolation. Further execution of the NC program is then no longer possible.

• After cancellation of follow-up operation (0 signal), the axis does not have to beresynchronized (no approach to reference point) if the max. permissible speed of the axishas not been exceeded at any time.

• To avoid incorrect positioning, follow-up operation must be cancelled in the AUTmode only if the NC program is in the STOP state.

• If a rotary axis (C axis) is to be operated as a spindle, the axis-specific monitoring func-tions can be switched off by setting the FOLLOW-UP OPERATION and PARKING AXISSIGNALS. Setting of the PARKING AXIS signal also deletes the REFERENCE POINTREACHED signal.

If C axis operation is then selected again, the set values of the axis mut be updated.Reference point approach can be avoided.

Feed disable simultaneous axes DW K+1, bit 13

1 signal: The current speed setpoint value is overwritten with 0. As a result, the spindlebrakes according to the accelaration ramp.

0 signal: No effect. (See also DB 32 DW K+1, bit 13 "Input set value 0".

*DECELERATION REFERENCE POINT APPROACH DW K+1, bit 12

Operating mode REFERENCE POINT APPROACH only:

1/0 transition: Effects deceleration of the selected axis to the reference point creep speed(NC MD 284*).

0/1 transition: Effects traverse to the zero mark of the measuring system plus(2000 units travel±reference point offset).

_______* Signal is 0-active



6.2 Signals to axis

a) Reference point approach without automatic direction recognition

6

1

RZ

2

3

45

7

a aa aa a

a a a

a a a

a a a

1: Starting point for reference point approach2: Reference point approach speed3: Creep speed4: *DECELERATION signal5: Measuring system zero mark signal6: Actuating cam7: Limit switch

Sequence:

The Z axis must be located at the starting point, e. g. in the negative direction from thereference point. The operator presses the Z + key and the axis approaches the referencepoint. As soon as the actuating cam passes the limit switch, the *DECELERATION signalchanges from 1 to 0; the axis decelerates to creep speed. When the actuating cam hascleared the limit switch, the *DECELERATION signal changes from 0 to 1 and initiates theapproach to the next zero mark of the measuring system. As soon as the zero mark signalappears, the axis homes in to the reference point.

Peripheral condition:

The limit switch that issues the *DECELERATION signal should be a normally closed switch. Ifthe connection to the limit switch is interrupted, this can be recognized and actuation of theaxis movement prevented.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


6.2 Signals to axis

b) Reference point approach with automatic direction recognition

8

6

1

V

Z

2

3

45

7

a a a

a a aa a a

a a a

a a a

1: Starting point for reference point approach2: Reference point approach speed3: Creep speed4: *DECELERATION signal5: Measuring system zero mark signal6: Actuation cam7: Limit switch8: Traversing range end, traverse path limit

Sequence 1:

The Z axis must be located at the starting point, e.g. in the negative direction from thereference point. The operator presses the Z+ key declared as the starting key for referencepoint approach. The axis approaches the traversing range end at which the reference point islocated; the direction is recognized by *DECELERATION signal = 1. As soon as the actuatingcam passes the limit switch, the *DECELERATION signal changes from 1 to 0; the axisdecelerates to zero and then accelerates to creep speed in the opposite direction. When theactuating cam has cleared the limit switch, the *DECELERATION signal changes from 0 to 1and initiates the approach to the next zero mark of the measuring system. As soon as the zeromark signal appears, the axis homes in to the reference point.

Sequence 2:

If the axis is already located between the traversing range end and the reference point at thestart of the reference point approach (*DECELERATION signal = 0) and the Z+ key is thenpressed, the Z axis approaches the reference point in the negative direction at creep speed.



6.2 Signals to axis

Peripheral conditions:

• Because of the specific design of the actuating cam (length: from traversing range end toswitching point), this procedure is suitable only for reference points situated near thetraversing range end.

• The cam must not leave the limit switch from the switching point to the traversing rangeend (end of traverse path), i.e. the *DECELERATION signal remains at 0.

• The limit switch that issues the *DECELERATION signal should be a normally closedswitch. If the connection to the limit switch is interrupted (*DECELERATION signal = 0),the axis can accelerate only to creep speed.

• In the reference point approach mode, rapid traverse override is effective.

PARKING AXIS DW K+1, bit 11

1 signal: Axis in parking position.

0 signal: Axis is in position control.

Notes:

• If an axis is declared a PARKING AXIS, the monitoring of the connection between themeasuring sensor and the measuring circuit module is switched off. Therefore no alarm isgiven if this connection is cut (e.g. in order to remove the axis such as a rotary table fromthe machine).

• If the PARKING AXIS signal is removed, the axis has to be resynchronized. As from SW 4the actual value of the current position must be specified by means of PRESET.

CONTROLLER ENABLE DW K+1, bit 10

AUT/MDA mode

1 signal: Closes the position control loop of the relevant axis.

0 signal: 1. With the axis stationary, the position control loop is opened.2. If the axis is in motion, rapid deceleration is effected. The drive is brought to

a stop with maximum braking current and the position control loop openedafter the time delay set by machine data has expired.

3. All axes moving with interpolation are stopped if controller enable is cancelledfor one axis . Axes with CONTROLLER ENABLE still set can be stopped onlyby selecting the set speed value ZERO. The following error for these axes isreduced to zero.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


6.2 Signals to axis

Notes:

• If the controller enable signal is cancelled (e. g. in order to clamp the axis) and then setagain, the axis, which has possibly been forced out of position through mechanical orelectrical influences, is repositioned to the position it had when the controller enable signalwas cancelled.

• The controller enable signal is to follow the pulse enable signal. When switching off, thecontroller must first be disabled before the pulse enable signal is removed.

Setting-up modes:

1 signal: Effects closing of the position control circuit for the relevant axis.

0 signal: 1. With the axis stationary, the position control loop is opened.2. If the axis is in motion, rapid deceleration is effected.

Notes:

• A following error remaining after rapid deceleration remains stored and is eliminatedfollowing a renewed controller enable.

• An NC alarm is output if the controller enable is cancelled while an axis is in motion. Thealarm is also given when a last thread cutting block without G09 and then another axis isprogrammed, for which the controller enable signal is missing.

• During normal operation the controller enable signals must always be present for all axesto be moved with interpolation.

td

1

2

3

4

5

67

1: TRAVEL COMMAND signal (e.g. X+)2: X axis clamp3: CONTROLLER ENABLE X signal4: FEED DISABLE X signal5: *Controller disable X6: X axis in motion (td = delay time)7: td = delay time (NC MD 156 or 1224*)



6.2 Signals to axis

Sequence:

1) The axis travel command (e.g. X -) releases the clamp and enables the controller.

2) Control enable cancels controller disable.

3) As soon as the clamp is released, the feed enable signal is given and axis traversecommences.

4) If the travel command is removed, the axis stops and is clamped again; the feed enablesignal is cancelled.

5) After clamping, the controller enable signal is cancelled; the controller enable signal isoutput again after a delay time of td (machine data).

2nd SOFTWARE LIMIT SWITCH +/– DW K+1, bit 8 and 9

1 signal: 2nd software limit switch effective for +/- direction.

0 signal: 1st software switch effective.


Reduction of permissible traversing range with the tailstock swung in.

JOG +/– DW K+1, bit 6 and 7

1 signal: In the setting-up modes, the axis is moved in the preset direction.

0 signal: No effect

Notes:

• The axis traversing speed is determined by machine data (MD 288* for feedrate, MD 292*for rapid traverse) in accordance with the operating mode.

• If the plus (+) and minus (-) keys of an axis are pressed at the same time, no travelcommand is given.

• Per operating mode group, the maximum number of axes to be traversed simultaneouslyis equal to the number of channels belonging to the operating mode group. If severaldirection keys are pressed simultaneously, the time sequence might decide which keysare active.

• On the 840C M-version control, the PLC standard function block FB 79 can be used totransfer the DIRECTION KEYS and RAPID TRAVERSE OVERLAY to the axis-specificinterface in the PLC according to the position of the axis selector switch. FB 67 isavailable for this function on the 840C T version.

RAPID TRAVERSE OVERLAY DW K+1, bit 5

1 signal: While traversing in the JOG or REPOS setting-up modes via JOG +/, the rapidtraverse rate is selected.

0 signal: Traversing in JOG mode at the speed determined by machine data (MD 292*).


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


6.2 Signals to axis

FEEDRATE 1:100 DW K+1, bit 4

1 signal: The feedrate is stepped down by a factor of 100 in the setting-up modes.

0 signal: The feedrate determined by the NC MD for traversing in the jog mode (MD 299*)is effective.

Note:

FEEDRATE 1:100 is effective only in the setting-up modes. FEEDRATE 1:100 and thefeedrate override switch then have a multiplying effect. In the automatic modes, this function isactivated by M 36 and M 37.

AXIS DISABLE DW K+1, bit 3

1 signal: No set speed value is output to the relevant machine axis (axis disabled). Theposition control loop remains closed.

0 signal: Normal state.

Note:

• To avoid incorrect positioning, AXIS DISABLE must not be removed until after programend or abort.

• As from SW 5.7, no axis synchronization to the actual real axis actual value is performedwhen Axis disable is active.


Starting up a new NC program for the first time without axis traversing.

DYN. SW LIMIT SWITCH MONITORING PASSIVE 1) DW K+1, bit 2

1-signal: Dynamic SW limit switch monitoring is off.

0-signal: Dynamic SW limit switch monitoring is on.

HANDWHEEL 1, 2 ACTIVE DW K+1, bit 0 to 1

Selecting the handwheels assigns them to the axes.

1 signal: The handwheel corresponding to the bit effects axis traversing.

0 signal: The handwheel corresponding to the bit has no effect on the axis.

Notes:

• Each handwheel can be assigned to any axis.

• Each axis may be assigned to only one axis at a time.

• Only one handwheel per axis may be active, i. e. only one of the two bits DW K+1, 0 to1 may be set.

_____________1) As from SW 5.6



6.2 Signals to axis

TRAVEL LIMIT +, – DW K+2, bit 8 and 9

The interface control issues a TRAVEL LIMIT signal for both directions of each axis when atravel limit switch is actuated. The provision of these axis and direction-specific signal obviatesthe need for a retraction logic circuit in the interface control.

1 signal: Effects controlled approach or rapid deceleration with following error elimination.

0 signal: Normal state.

One of three braking methods applies when a travel limit switch is actuated:

a) Controlled approach

Initiated by the TRAVEL LIMIT signal. The NC brakes the axis in accordance with themachine data for acceleration.

b) Rapid deceleration with following error elimination

If the "Instant stop at limit switch" bit is set in the machine data (NC MD 5003.7 commonto all axes), set speed = 0 is output immediately after the LIMIT SWITCH signal.The position control loop remains closed and the following error is eliminated. The programdoes not have to be restarted.

c) Rapid deceleration with maximum braking current

If controller enable is refused at the same time as the LIMIT SWITCH signal is output, theposition control loop is opened; the drives are then normally brought to a stop withmaximum braking current. Any following error is automatically worked in. The program hasto be restarted.

Overview

a b

AA

max2mm

a

Foll. error. A

a

Machine set value with

limit switch signal

a = Machine position

b = Digital position

v

t

Digital speed setting

(position set value)

v

s

v

s

v

s

v

t

Position control loop

Activated by

open closed closed

Limit switch + controllerenable refusal

"Limit switch" + "instant stop at limit switch" bit

"Limit switch" signal

Braking method Rapid deceleration withmaximum braking current c)

Rapid deceleration withfollowing error elimination b)

Controlled approach a)

(Position control loopopened)

bb


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


6.2 Signals to axis

The position of the mechanical limit switch is at point A.The position of the software limit switch should be located before the mechanical limit switch.

Software limit switches

The software limit switches are active after the reference point has been approached.

a) Setting-up modes

The axis is braked before the software limit switch is reached so that the switch is nottripped.

b) Automatic

Before travel commands are output, a check is carried out at each NC start to determinewhether the software limit switch is tripped. If so, the block is not executed and an NCalarm is output.

Activate slave operation 2) DW K+2, bit 11

1 signal: Slave operation is activated (see function description).

2 signal: Axis in question is switched to normal operation.

MEASURING SYSTEM 1/2 1) DW K+2, bit 12

1 signal: The actual value of the 2nd measuring system is used.

0 signal: The actual value of the 1st measuring system is used.

Notes:

• For axes, the actual value assignment for the 1st measuring system is made in NC MD200*, for the 2nd measuring system the actual values are assigned in NC MD 1388*.

• For spindles in C axis operation, the actual value assignment for the 1st measuring systemis made in NC MD 200*, for the 2nd measuring system the actual values are assigned inNC MD 400*. The spindle encoder (NC MD 400*) is always used for the spindle modesand changeover of measuring systems is not possible.

• If a C axis is assigned to the spindle, all measuring system specific MDs must be enteredboth for the spindle and the axis.

• The actual value of the selected measuring system is used for all functions, particularly forposition control and for absolute value computation. The 1st measuring system (NC MD200*) is the reference system for axes and spindles in C axis operation and presets theaccuracy of position control.

• In the case of changeover of measuring systems the offset between the two actual valuesis immediately traversed. A tolerance band can be specified in MD 1216* which the offsetbetween the actual values must not exceed. If the offset is greater than this tolerance, nochangeover takes place and an alarm is triggered.

• Reference point approach is carried out with the measuring system selected by theMEASURING SYSTEM 1/2 signal.

_______1) As from SW 2

2) As from SW 4



6.2 Signals to axis

FEEDFORWARD CONTROL OFF 1) DW K+2, bit 12

1 signal: The feedforward control is inactive. The active feedforward control parameters arecleared when the signal is set.

0 signal: The feedforward control is activated. The feedforward control parameters definedin the machine data are taken into account in set value computation. Thefeedforward control is always active when the control powers up, it is notdeactivated until the signal is set.

SET REFERENCE DIMENSION 2) DW K+2, bit 14

“Set reference dimension” can be used to set an axis at any position to the “Axis referenced”status without an explicit referencing process.

1 signal: • Setting of the absolute system to the value of MD 240*• Enabling of LEC, IKA compensation• Enabling of SW limit switch monitoring• Setting of bit DB 32, DW k+0, bit 12, ”Reference point reached”

0 signal: Axis is not set to the "Axis referenced" status.

1

2

1

2

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a




Set reference dimension





Reference point reached

If the axis to be referenced is not stationary, the “Reference point reached” signal is not setand, in addition, the axis-specific RESET alarm MD 1028* “Unable to set reference dimension”is triggered. The “Set reference dimension” function can be initiated in all operating modes.

You will find a detailed description of the functions in the Installation Guide, Section 10(Installation of axis, spindle), in Section: Set reference dimension via PLC request (SW 4 andhigher).

Referencing without internal setpoint entry 2) DB 32, DW K+2, bit 13

1 signal: The NC waits for an external travel command to approach the reference point.Internal travel commands are suppressed.

Travelling is possible without enabling, e.g. for manual axes. In the case of amanual axis, the follow-up mode must be active.

0 signal: “Normal” referencing by the NC is active.

_______1) As from SW 2

2) As from SW 4


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


6.2 Signals to axis

FEED DISABLE DW K+3

Operating mode AUT/MDA

1 signal: 1. Effects feed disable of the relevant axis.2. Effects feed disable of all axes moving with interpolation if the feed

disable signal is given for one axis . In this event, all axes are brought to astandstill along the contour. Position control remains operative, i.e. thefollowing error is reduced to zero.

0 signal: No feed disable, if all signals in DW K+3 = 0.

1

2

3

4

5

6

1: Travel command (e.g. X+)2: Travel command (e.g. Z+)3: FEED DISABLE X signal4: FEED DISABLE Z signal5: X axis in motion6: Z axis in motion

Setting-up modes:

1 signal: Effects feed enable of the relevant axis.0 signal: Effects feed disable of the relevant axis.

Notes:

• Feed disable is activated if at least one bit has a 1 signal.

• A message (error or operational message) can be allocated to any bit (see Section 12).

• FEED DISABLE is also effective for G33 (NC alarm: thread cutting, hold).

_______1) As from SW 4



6.2 Signals to axis

Acknowledge for ”Travel against fixed stop” signal active 1) DW K+122, bit 0

1 signal: TRAVEL AGAINST FIXED STOP ACTIVE (DRK+120, bit 6) not acknowledged

0 signal: TRAVEL AGAINST FIXED STOP ACTIVE acknowledged

Acknowledge for ”Travel against fixed stop reached” signal ”, QFESTANER 1)

DW K+122, bit 1

Sensor signal for Travel against fixed stop reached 1), SFESTERRDL DW K+122,bit

The signal is active only if MD 1804*, bit 3=1.

1 signal: Fixed stop not reached

0 signal: Fixed stop reached

The acknowledge signals for the ”Travel against fixed stop” function are not evaluated whenusing digital axes. These signals being nevertheless present, we recommend to set them to 0signal when using digital drives.

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

tum








tum 10 ms 611 FDDtum 80 ms 611 MSM, 660 MSD

a aa aa aa aa a

1

a aa aa aa a

2

a aa aa aa a

3

a aa aa aa a

4

a aa aa aa a

5

a aa aa aa a

6

Signal chart: Select ”Travel against fixed stop” without switchover to current-controlledoperation

1: NFAFAKT: TRAVEL AGAINST FIXED STOP ACTIVE DR x, bit 6is set by the NC as soon as the FAF selection block (G221) is being processed. Thissignal remains at 1 until the FAF (G220) block is deselected. The PLC output PLCOUT96must be set as follows dependent on this signal.

NFAFAKT=0 PLCOUT96=0 (current limiting Off)NFAFAKT=1 PLCOUT96=1 (current limiting On)

_______1) As from SW 3


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


6.2 Signals to axis

2: NFESTANER: FIXED STOP REACHED DR x, bit 7is set by the NC after fixed stop reached has been recognized in the NC. This signalremains at 1 until deselection (G220 block) is made.

3: QFAFAKT: ACKNOWLEDGEMENT TRAVEL AGAINST FIXED STOP ACTIVEDL x+2, bit 0

The PLC acknowledge signal QFAFAKT must be set to 1 after the wait time tum. Axial feedtowards the programmed target position is not enabled by the NC until the acknowledgesignal is given.

4: QFESTANER: ACKNOWLEDGEMENT FIXED STOP REACHED DL x+2, bit 1The acknowledge signal must be set to 1 by the PLC after NFESTANER was set to 1 bythe NC. This signal must remain at 1 until NFESTANER=1. The QFESTANER=1 signalstatus terminates FAF selection in the NC and causes a block change.

5: PLCOUT96Selection of terminals 96 from the PLC

6: PLCOUT22Selection of terminal 22 from the PLC FAF=Travel against fixed stop

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

tum

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a








a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

tum

a aa aa aa a

1

a aa aa aa a

2

a aa aa aa a

3

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

4

a aa aa aa aa a

5

a aa aa aa aa a

6

Signal chart: Select ”Travel against fixed stop” with switchover to current-controlledoperation

1: NFAFAKT: TRAVEL AGAINST FIXED STOP ACTIVE DR x, bit 6is set by the NC as soon as the FAF selection block is being processed. This signalremains at 1 until FAF is deselected. The PLC must set the output PLCOUT96 dependenton the following signals.

2: NFESTANER: FIXED STOP REACHED DR x, bit 7is set to 1 by the NC after fixed stop reached has been recognized in the NC. This signalremains at 1 until FAF is deselected (G220).



6.2 Signals to axis


The PLC must set the QFAFAKT=1 acknowledge signal after the wait time tum (timeinterval between switching of PLCOUT96 and setting of QFAFAKT) has elapsed.QFAFAKT=1 enables in the NC the feed for the axis programmed in the (G221) selectionblock. QFAFAKT remains at 1 as long as NFAFAKT is set. See FAF deselection for thereset condition.

4: QFESTANER: ACKNOWLEDGEMENT FIXED STOP REACHED DL x+2, bit 1After switchover of the drive actuator to current-controlled operation (PLCOUT22=1,PLCOUT96=0), the PLC must set the QFESTANER acknowledge signal to 1. It causes ablock change (G221 block completed) in the NC. This signal remains active untildeselection is made. The reset conditions for QFESTANER can be seen from the FAFdeselection.

5: PLCOUT96:NFESTANER=0 + NFAFAKT=0 PLCOUT96=0 (current limiting not effective)NFESTANER=0 + NFAFAKT=1 PLCOUT96=1 (current limiting is effective)

The signal must be set to 0 by the PLC after current-controlled operation (PLCOUT22=1)was switched on and the time tum has elapsed.

6: PLCOUT22:must be set by the PLC as follows dependent on NFESTANER:NFESTANER=0 PLCOUT22=0 (current-controlled operation Off)NFESTANER=1 PLCOUT22=1 (current-controlled operation On)

a aa aa aa a

1

a aa aa aa a

2

a aa aa aa a

3

a aa aa aa a

4

a aa aa aa a

5

a aa aa aa aa a

6

Signal chart: Deselect ”Travel against fixed stop” without previous switchover tocurrent-controlled operation

1: NFAFAKT: TRAVEL AGAINST FIXED STOP ACTIVE DR x, bit 6is reset by the NC as soon as the FAF deselection block (G220) is beingprocessed.

2: NFESTANER: FIXED STOP REACHED DR x, bit 7is reset by the NC together with NFAFAKT as soon as the FAF deselectionblock (G220) is being processed.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


6.2 Signals to axis


must be set to 0 by the PLC after reset of PLCOUT96.

4: QFESTANER: ACKNOWLEDGEMENT FIXED STOP REACHED DL x+2, bit 1must be set to 0 by the PLC after reset of PLCOUT96 and an elapse of wait time tum.QFESATANER=0 effects activation of position control in the NC, compensation of the axisposition with the block preparation chain and the enable of axial feed in order to allow theretract position programmed in the deselection block to be approached.

5: PLCOUT96:The PLCOUT96 output must be set by the PLC after NFAFAKT was set to 0 by the NC.

Caution:

The switching back of PLCOUT96 must be performed dependent on NFAFAKT .

6. PLCOUT22.









a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

tum

a aa aa aa a

1

a aa aa aa a

2

a aa aa aa a

3

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

4

a aa aa aa a

5

a aa aa aa a

6

Signal chart: Deselect ”Travel against fixed stop” from current-controlled operation

Current setpoint: is set to 0 by the NC before NFAFAKT is reset.

1: NFAFAKT: TRAVEL AGAINST FIXED STOP ACTIVE DR x, bit 6is reset by the NC as soon as the FAF deselection block (G220) is being processed.

2: NFESTANER: FIXED STOP REACHED DR x, bit 7is reset by the NC together with NFAFAKT as soon as the FAF deselection block (G220) isbeing processed.


must be reset by the PLC after the NC has set the NFAFAKT signal to 0.



6.2 Signals to axis

4: QFESTANER: ACKNOWLEDGEMENT FIXED STOP REACHED DL x+2, bit 1must be set to 0 by the PLC after the reset of PLCOUT22 and an elapse of wait time tum.QFESATANER=0 effects activation of position control in the NC, compensation of the axisposition with the block preparation chain and the enable of axial feed in order to allow theretract position in the selection block to be approached.

5: PLCOUT96:

6: PLCOUT22:must be set to 0 by the PLC program after the reset of NFESTANER.

Select cam parameters1...4 1) DW K+123, bit 8...11

1 signal: One pair of cams (1 ... 4) is assigned to the axis. One pair of cams can always beassigned to one axis only via one bit of the PLC/NC interface, otherwise alarm 20is output.

0 signal: The axis is not assigned to the cam pair.As a result, the cam positions of one cam pair are invalid.

Actual parameter set number "Position control" (bit 0 .. 2) 2) DW K+123, bit 0-2Actual parameter set number "Speed ratio" (bit 0 .. 2) 2) DW K+123, bit 3-5

These three bits can be used to switch over in binary coded form between a maximum of 8parameter sets, e.g.:

001 =̂ Parameter set 1011 =̂ Parameter set 3 etc.

Note:

The ”Parameter set changeover” function is described in the SINUMERIK 840C, SW 4Installation Instructions.

6.2.1 Signals for endlessly turning rotary axis

Note:The signals are analog to the spindle-specific interface signals.

Axis in set range DWK bit 13

1 signal: The actual speed lies within a defined range round the set speed (set range).

0 signal: Actual speed outside set range.


3) SW 4 and higher


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


6.2 Signals to axis

Feed disable simultaneous axis DW K+1 bit 5

1 signal: The current set speed value is overwritten with 0 and thus effects axis braking inaccordance with the acceleration ramp.

0 signal: No effect

Note:

This signal for the rotary axis is similar to the spindle-specific interface signal: "Input set value0".

Axis reset DW K+1 bit 7

1 signal: Stopping of axis.The conditions of the "Spindle reset" do not apply. The reset is triggered whenthe signal is set.

0 signal: No effect

Reverse direction of rotation DW K+2 bit 6

1 signal: The sign defined for the set voltage is inverted.

0 signal: No effect

Note:

The signal is effective only during the program commands G103/G104; the "Commands areinverted".Reversal of the direction of rotation during the traversing movement is not possible with thissignal.

Override effective DW K+2 bit 5

1 signal: The set feedrate override (axis override) is effective.

0 signal: The set override values are not taken into account. The 100% value is alwaysstipulated.

Note:

The override is effective only with ”Endlessly turning rotary axis” and not with ”Simultaneousaxis”.



6.2.1 Signals for endlessly turning rotary axis

Axis-specific override DW K+2 bit 0...4

The feedrate override can be stipulated via the PLC as follows:

Position Code

E D C B A

Override value in %

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223

00000000000000011111111

00000001111111111111111

00011111111000000001111

01111000011110000111100

11001100110011001100110

012468

102030405060707580859095

100105110115120

2425262728293031

11111111

00000000

11110000

00111100

01100110

Note:

The axis-specific override is not effective for simulaneous axes.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


6.3 Signals from following axis to PLC, DB 29

6.3 Signals from following axis to PLC, DB 29 1)

Especially, for the "Gear Interpolation" functionality, additional axis-specific signals areprovided in this data block which can be used when one of the axes is used as a following axisin a GI grouping.An explanation of the "Gear Interpolation" function is to be found in the InstallationInstructions, Section Description of Functions.

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a aa a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

The K addresses for the following axes are:1st axis K=0 10th axis K=362nd axis K=4 11th axis K=403rd axis K=8 12th axis K=444th axis K=12 13th axis K=485th axis K=16 14th axis K=526th axis K=20 15th axis K=567th axis K=24 :8th axis K=28 :9th axis K=32 30th axis K=116

ACCELERATION LIMIT SYNCHRONOUS ACTIVE DW K, bit 14

1 signal: When the maximum acceleration limit of the following axis is reached, it can nolonger follow the leading axes/spindles. The resulting positional deviation to theleading axes/spindles is added up and subsequently traversed after theacceleration phase. Positional synchronism is then re-established.

0 signal: The positional deviation to the leading axes/spindles possibly occurring duringacceleration of the following axis is ignored. In such a case, the following axis isno longer position-synchronous to the leading axes/spindles.

ESR MONITORING IS ACTIVE 2) DW K, bit 13

1 signal: The monitoring functions for the EXTENDED STOP AND RETRACTION areactivated. If one of the programmed errors occurs, the NC activates theprogrammed reactions and the interface signal ESR RESPONSE IS TRIGGEREDis set.

0 signal: The retraction monitoring is not active.

_______1) As from SW 32) The ESR function is described in detail in the Installation Instructions, SW 5.




COMPENSATORY CONTROLLER ACTIVE DW K, bit 12

1 signal: The compensatory controller is active. The current actual part positions of thefollowing axis and the leading axes/spindles are checked under consideration ofthe linking factors. Additive set speeds are calculated from the deviations of theactual part positions and output to the following axis.

0 signal: The compensatory controller is not active.

Note:

The compensatory controller is used to compensate for load variations. It increases the rigidityof the link.

WAITING FOR POSITION-RELATED SWITCHING DW K, bit 11

1 signal: A defined (axis) position, where the synchronization is to be executed, isprogrammed in the part program.

0 signal: Synchronization has been carried out, or the function is not active.

FOLLOWING AXIS OVERLAY ACTIVE DW K, bit 10

1 signal: An additional traversing movement can be superimposed on the following axis.This enable is also required for on-the-fly synchronization of the leading andfollowing drive. With on-the-fly synchronization, the overlay path is traversed asspeed offset at incremental speed.

0 signal: The following axis cannot currently be traversed with overlay.

SYNCHRONIZATION BUSY DW K, bit 9

1 signal: "On-the-fly synchronization" was triggered via the PLC or NC. The synchronizingoperation has not yet been completed, the synchronous positions have not yetbeen reached.

0 signal: On-the-fly synchronization is currently not active.

Notes:

• The signal is reset as soon as the synchronous positions are reached.

• The SYNCHRONOUS POSITION REACHED interface signal indicates that thesynchronous position has been reached.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



LINK ACTIVE DW K, bit 8

1 signal: The link between at least 1 leading drive and the following axis is active.

0 signal: The link between the leading drive and the following axis is not active.

Note:

Programming of the linking factor "0" causes the signal to be reset.

CONTROLLED FOLLOW-UP MOTION OF FOLLOWING AXIS DW K, bit 6

1 signal: The following axis is under compensatory control due to a fault. As a result, theset values for the following axis are obtained from the actual values of the leadingaxis/spindle.

0 signal: The configured type of link between the following axis and the leadingaxis/spindle is active.

MAXIMUM ACCELERATION DW K, bit 5

1 signal: The set value for acceleration of the following axis is greater than the maximumvalues specified in NC MD 276*. The following axis traverses at maximumacceleration, the positional difference to the leading axes/spindles increases. Thealarm 1176* "Acceleration limit exceeded" is triggered.

0 signal: The current acceleration of the following axis is less than the maximumacceleration.

MAXIMUM VELOCITY DW K, bit 4

1 signal: The set velocity of the following axis is greater than the maximum velocityspecified in NC MD 280*. The following axis traverses at maximum velocity. Thepositional difference to the leading axes/spindles increases, synchronism is lost.Alarm 1172* "Velocity limit exceeded" is triggered.

0 signal: The current velocity is less than the maximum velocity.




ACCELERATION WARNING THRESHOLD REACHED DW K, bit 3

1 signal: The acceleration of the following axis has exceeded the warning threshold (NCMD 1448*). The synchronism between the leading axes/spindles and the followingaxis will be at risk if the acceleration is further increased.

0 signal: The acceleration is less than the acceleration warning threshold.

Notes:

• The signal is automatically removed by the control as soon as the current accelerationdrops below 7/8 of the warning threshold.

• Monitoring can be deselected by NC MD 1848* bit 3 "Suppression of acceleration limit".

VELOCITY WARNING THRESHOLD REACHED DW K, bit 2

1 signal: The velocity of the following axis has exceeded the warning threshold (NC MD1448*). This involves the risk that the following axis can no longer follow theleading axes/spindles and synchronism between the leading axes/spindles andthe following axis is lost.

0 signal: The velocity is less than the velocity warning threshold.

Note:

The signal is automatically removed by the control as soon as the current velocity drops below7/8 of the warning threshold.

SYNCHRONOUS OPERATION FINE DW K, bit 1

1 signal: The positional deviation of the following axis from all configured leadingaxes/spindles is less than the tolerance band "Synchronous operation fine" (NCMD1436*).

0 signal: The positional deviation of the following axis to all configured leadingaxes/spindles is greater than the tolerance band "Synchronous operation fine"(NC MD 1436*).

SYNCHRONOUS OPERATION COARSE DW K, bit 0

1 signal: The positional deviation of the following axis to all configured leadingaxes/spindles is less than the tolerance band "Synchronous operation coarse"(NC MD1440*).

0 signal: The positional deviation of the following axis to all configured leadingaxes/spindles is greater than the tolerance band "Synchronous operation coarse"(NC MD 1440*).


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



SYNCHRONOUS POSITION REACHED DW K+1, bit 14

1 signal: The synchronizing operation with ”On-the-fly synchronization” is complete.

0 signal: The synchronizing operation is not yet complete.

ESR RESPONSE IS TRIGGERED 2) DW K+1, bit 13

1 signal: The axis has triggered the ”Extended stop and retraction”.

0 signal: ESR response is not triggered.

AXIS IS A FOLLOWING AXIS DW K+1, bit 7

1 signal: The axis was configured as a following axis in a GI grouping.

0 signal: The axis was not configured as a following axis in a GI grouping.

Note:

The PLC can recognize from this signal whether a GI grouping was defined for an axis, even ifthe link is not active.

ESR RESPONSE IS PROGRAMMED 1) 2) DW K+1, bit 5

.1 signal: When an "Extended stop and retraction" has been programmed via the Gcommands (G422 to G426). With this signal, a response can be started via theinterface signal "ESR response enabled".

0 signal: An ESR response for this axis has not been programmed.


1 signal: This signal is set if a link is to be switched on (Source: part program, PLC orinput image), however, the conditions for activation (e.g. signal INTERLOCK LINKON) are not yet satisfied. Block change of the part program is halted as long asthese conditions are not met.

0 signal: No change of the LINK OFF status has been requested.

_______1) As from SW 4






1 signal: This signal is set if a link is to be switched on (Source: part program, PLC orinput image), however, the conditions for activation (e.g. signal INTERLOCK LINKON) are not yet satisfied. Block change of the part program is halted as long asthese conditions are not met.

0 signal: No change of the LINK OFF status has been requested.

Signals from PLC to following axis

ACTIVATE ESR MONITORING 1) DW K+2, bit 13

0/1 edge: Emergency retraction monitoring of the following axis is switched on.

Notes:

• The emergency retraction threshold is preset in NC MD 1444*.• The ACTIVATE ESR MONITORING signal is set as check-back signal.• As from SW 4, errors leading to ESR responses can be programmed; the signal is not

restricted to MD 1444*.

ON-THE-FLY SYNCHRONIZATION ON DW K+2, bit 9

0/1 edge: On-the-fly synchronization of the following axis with all configured leadingaxes/spindles is triggered. A LINK ON is internally generated. The signalSYNCHRONIZATION ACTIVE is set. This bit is removed by the system assoon as the synchronous positions are reached and the SYNCHRONOUSPOSITION REACHED signal is set.

LINK ON DW K+2, bit 8

0/1 edge: Activation of the link of all configured leading axes/spindles with the followingaxis with the current linking factors.

Notes:

• This signal is active for all configured leading axes/spindles. Selective coupling via thePLC is not possible. The linking factors must have been programmed in advance oradopted from the GIQ data during ramp-up.

• The LINK ACTIVE signal is set by way of acknowledgement.

DISABLE ESR MONITORING 1) DW K+2, bit 5

0/1 edge: Emergency retraction monitoring of the following axis is switched off.

Notes:

• The ACTIVATE ESR MONITORING signal is reset as check-back signal.• As from SW 4, errors leading to ESR responses can be programmed; the signal is not

restricted to MD 1444*._______1) The ESR function is described in detail in the Installation Instructions, SW 5.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



LINK OFF DW K+2, bit 0

0/1 edge: Deactivation of the link of all configured leading axes/spindles with thefollowing axis.

Notes:

• This signal is active for all configured leading axes/spindles. Selective decoupling via thePLC is not possible.

• The LINK ACTIVE signal is reset by way of acknowledgement.








CORRECT SYNCHRONISM DIFFERENCE DW K+3, bit 7

1 signal: The PLC signal "Correct synchronism differnce" corrects the setpoint to thefollowing address by the synchronism error between the leading and followingaddresses so that the synchronism difference no longer results in a systemdeviation. Both the controller and drive must be enabled and the gearbox couplingmust be switched on while this signals is applied.

0 signal: Position and/or compensatory controller correct the synchronism error.1

Notes:

• This function is particularly important where synchronous spindle pairs are used. When theworkpiece is transferred by the following drive, an angle offset between the leading andfollowing drives can result for mechanical reasons when the chuck is closed. This offsetcannot be eliminated while the drives are coupled via the workpiece. Involvement of aposition controller/compensatory controller would cuse a torque bias. This con be avoidedwith the signal CORRECT SYNCHRONISM DIFFERENCE.

• The signal schould be activated:

– After closure of the mechanical coupling, if the power transmission is without slip.

– When the drives are mechanically coupled and position control is activated.

• If both drives are mechanically coupled the signal must be canceled so that precisesynchronization is maintained.

ACCELERATION LIMIT SYNCHRONOUS DW K+3, bit 6

1 signal: The acceleration limit synchronous was activated.

0 signal: The acceleration limit synchronous was not activated.

Notes:

• The acceleration limit synchronous for the following axis ensures that the following axis willtraverse positionally synchronous to the leading axes/spindles after accelerations. Anypositional deviations possibly occurring during acceleration are added up and traversedafter the acceleration phase.

• The ACCELERATION LIMIT SYNCHRONOUS ACTIVE signal is set as soon theacceleration limit becomes active.




ENABLE ESR RESPONSE 1) 2) DW K+3, bit 5

1 signal: With this static signal, the PLC can enable a programmed ESR response (the"ESR response is programmed" signal). Axis movement is not possible withoutthis signal (safety signal).

Note:

• The axis monitoring function can also be switched on/off from PLC. If it isswitched on from PLC, it can also only be switched off from PLC. If it is switchedoff from PLC, it is switched off for all channels.

COMPENSATORY CONTROLLER ON DW K+3, bit 4

1 signal: The compensatory controller is activated from the PLC.

0 signal: The compensatory controller is not activated.

Notes:

• The compensatory controller serves to compensate for load variations. It increases therigidity of the link.

• The COMPENSATORY CONTROLLER ACTIVE signal is set by way of acknowledgement.

POSITION-RELATED SWITCHING ON DW K+2, bit 3

1 signal: Enabling of position-related switching.Synchronization can be carried out at the programmed (axis) position.

0 signal: The position-related switching is not active.

ENABLE FOLLOWING AXIS OVERLAY DW K+3, bit 2

1 signal: An additional motion can be overlaid on the movement of the following axispredetermined by the leading axes/spindles. This overlaid movement can bepredetermined via G91 in the part program, in JOG or INC or via the commandchannel functions, i.e. path dimension or division increment.

0 signal: No overlaid movement of the following axis is possible.

Notes:

• Alarm 1168* ”Following axis overlay not enabled” is triggered when an attempt is made totraverse the following axis with a overlaid movement without an enable.

• Following axis overlay is also effected with ”On-the-fly synchonization”.

_______1) As from SW 4



SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



INTERLOCK LINK OFF DW K+3, bit 1

1 signal: The link between the following axis and the leading axes/spindles cannot beswitched off.

0 signal: The link between the following axis and the leading axes/spindles can beswitched off.

Notes:

• If this interlock signal was present when a LINK OFF was programmed, the link is notswitched off until this interlock signal is reset.

• Block change is interlocked as long as this signal is present and a link is to be switchedoff. The REQUEST LINK OFF signal is set.

INTERLOCK LINK ON DW K+3, bit 0

1 signal: The link between the following axis and the leading axes/spindles cannot beswitched on.

0 signal: The link between the following axis and the leading axes/spindles can beswitched on.

Notes:

• If this interlock signal was present when a LINK ON was programmed, the link is notswitched on until this interlock signal is reset.

• Block change is interlocked as long as this signal is present and a link is to be switchedon. The REQUEST LINK ON signal is set.

• The signal has no effect on an active link.

The effects described below apply in additon to the interface signals:

CONTROLLER ENABLE (axes)

• The LINK ON state remains active when the CONTROLLER ENABLE is removed for thefollowing axis with an active GI link (operating leading/following drives). The drive is brakedto a standstill and a leading axis alarm ”Controller enable traversing axis rejected” isgenerated. The GI monitoring remains active.

• If CONTROLLER ENABLE is not set when selecting LINK ON, the link is not switched on.If selection of LINK ON was made from the part program, the NC block is simply skippedand the next NC block is executed. The REQUEST LINK ON signal is not set. Now, afterCONTROLLER ENABLE has been set, a LINK ON request must again be programmed forswitching on the link.

Feed disable

• If feed disable is active for a following axis, the leading axes and leading spindles whichare part of the GI grouping are also stopped.



6.3.1 Axis-specific 611D signals (DB 29)

6.3.1 Axis-specific 611D signals (DB 29)a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a







Parameter set (0), (1), (2) DW K+120, bit 0, 1, 2

MSD and FDD 1)

Confirmation of the currently active parameter set.

The 3 bits must always be jointly interpreted as a binary number.









MSD and FDD 1)

Confirmation of star/delta operation or motor switchover


0 signal: Start operation or motor 1









MSD and FDD 1)

Reserved for future applications








Drive ready DW K+120, bit 5

MSD and FDD:

Ready indication from drive

1 signal: Drive ready for operation

0 signal: Drive not ready- Enable terminals missing:

KL.663, module-specific pulse enableKL. 64, central drive enableKL. 63, central pulse enable

- Infeed/feedback hardware, summation error, Power on

Note:

• 611D machine data 1012 bit 2 "Drive ready"observe dependency of terminals

• Observe interface signal DB 29 DW 120 bit 5



SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)










Drive switched on DW K+120, bit 6

MSD and FDD:

1 signal: Drive switched on/drive has ramped up

0 signal: Drive not switched on








Pulses are enabled DW K+120, bit 7

MSD and FDD:

Enable pulse confirmation

1 signal: All enable signals are present

0 signal: Pulse/controller enable missing, enable terminals not set,status class 1 error present, motor switchover active.P53 bit 13 = 1








Motor temperature prewarning DW K+120, bit 8

MSD and FDD:

ZK2 message, motor temperature exceeds the value in P063/P291 with MSD and in P1602with FDD. If the temperature remains too high, a status class 1 error (ZK1) is output after thetime set in P065 (MSD) or P1603 (FDD) has elapsed.

FDD:

If a motor temperature = 0 is measured, an interruption of the PTC motor thermistor isassumed and the bit is also set. A reaction to this situation is initiated via the PLC program. Inthis case, there will be no reaction in the drive. If the motor temperature = 0 is still measuredafter the time set in P1603 has elapsed, the ZK1 reset error ("Motor temperature N...") isissued.








Heat sink temperature prewarning DW K+120, bit 9

MSD and FDD:

ZK2 message, heat sink temperature too high. If the temperature remains too high, a ZK1error is output after 20 seconds.











User-programmable messages 1 to 6 DW K+120, bit 10 ... 15

MSD:

6 MSD-specific messages. The messages can be freely assigned to the 6 status bits viaP241/P246. The following messages are present:

Message 1: Ramp-up phase endedMessage 2: M–d < M–dxMessage 3: n–act < n–minMessage 4: n–act < n–xMessage 5: n–act = n–setMessage 6: Variable message function 1

FDD:

The message assignments for FDD are firmly specified:DW K+72, bit 10: freely programmable

bit 11: freely programmablebit 12: n–act < n–minbit 13: n–act < n–xbit 14: freely programmablebit 15: freely programmable








DC link voltage < Warning threshold (MD 1604) 1) DW K+121, bit 0

ZK2 message that the DC link voltage has fallen below the value determined in MD 1604.









link voltage < Emergency retraction threshold (MD 1634) 1) DW K+121, bit 1

ZK2 message that the DC link voltage has fallen below the value determined in MD 1634 asthe emergency retraction threshold.

When the DC link voltage falls below the emergency retraction threshold, emergency retractionresponses are initiated which are defined in MD 1636. The machine data (MD) are describedin the SINUMERIK 840C, SW 4, Installation Instructions

_______1) As from SW 4


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)










Emergency retraction or DC link generator active1) DW K+121, bit 2

ZK2 message that emergency retraction or DC link generator is active.

• If the voltage thresholds MD 1634 and MD 1631 in the infeed/regenerative feedback unitare not equal and MD 1631 MD 1634, generator operation starts without an emergencyretraction being initiated simultaneously for the infeed/regenerative feedback unit axes. Theemergency retraction threshold is thus recognized only when the generator axis is nolonger capable of supporting the DC link. In this case, emergency retraction is not carriedout due the lack of power. In order to prevent this, NC emergency retraction responsesmust be initiated on the other axes when the actual speed of the generator axis falls belowa minimum speed (MD 1635).

• In the case of a communication failure (sign-of-life failure) of a particular axis, the otheraxes must be treated by the NC in accordance with their operating mode. If, for example,the axis that has failed is an emergency retraction axis it will perform an emergencyretraction. Consequently, coupled axes must perform an emergency retraction controlledby the NC.

Conditions for switching on/off the ZK2 message "Generator active"

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

MD 1633

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

MD 1631+

MD 1632

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

MD 1631





"ZWK_GEN_AKTIV"

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

ZK2

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

UZWK600V

a aa a

a aa a

ta a

a aa a

a a

t

_______1) As from SW 4




Generator operation (operating mode 6)

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

MD 1633

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

MD 1630

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

MD 1631

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

600V

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

Time

a a a a a a a a a a a a





MD 1631+MD 1632

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

MD 1634

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

280V

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

Time





"ZWK_GEN_AKTIV"

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

ZK2

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

Time

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

nGen




DC link voltage

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

Speed

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

Speedsetpoint




Operating mode6

Generator operationOFF

Generator operationON

Ramp upby NC

Speed actual value











Generator speed < Minimum speedGenerator axis (MD 1635 1) DW K+121, bit 3

ZK2 message that the generator speed has fallen below the value of the minimum speed ofthe generator axis in MD 1635.


_______1) As from SW 4


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)










Motion request drive test DW K+121, bit 15

1 signal: Drive test requested (drive stationary) or active (drive in motion). The signal is setas soon as the drive test is started and parameters set are known to be correct.The signal is reset as soon as the drive test is terminated and the drive has beendecelerated and resumed its former operating mode.

0 signal: Drive test not active








Parameter set (0, 1, 2) DW K+122, bit 0, 1, 2

MSD and FDD 2)

The 3 bits are used to select one of the eight available gear stages and to activate theassociated parameter set. The 3 bits are always interpreted jointly as a binary number.









MSD:

Request start/delta or motor switchover



_______1) As from SW 4

2) FDD as from SW 4












MSD:

Reserved for future applications








Motor selection performed 1) DW K+122, bit 5

FDD:

With this bit the PLC confirms switchover of motor contactors for star/delta changeover ormotor switchover.








Integrator disable DW K+122, bit 6

MSD and FDD:

Disable integrator of speed controller

1 signal: Disable integrator

0 signal: Enable integrator








Pulse enable DW K+122, bit 7

MSD and FDD:

1 signal: Enable pulses (only enabled if all other enable signals are present)

0 signal: Disable pulses








Ramp-function generator rapid stop DW K+122, bit 9

MSD:

1 signal: Specifies speed setpoint 0, braking without ramp-function generator ramp(see MD 522* bit 3)








Second torque limit DW K+122, bit 10

MSD:

Activates 2nd torque limit set in P041

_______1) As from SW 4


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)










Set speed smoothing DW K+122, bit 11

MSD:

Activates interpolation of the setpoint speed from the position controller cycle into the speedcontroller cycle.

Activates rounding of the setpoint speed parameterized with P019.

Function diagram of interpolation filter

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a





N–soll (k-1)

a aa a

a aa a

0

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

XINT

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

XR

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

2 XR

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

3 XR

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

N–NRS





N–soll (k)





N–soll (k+1)















XR = Position controller cycleXINT = Speed controller cycleN–soll = Set value from NCN–NRS = Set value MSD internal








Motion enable drive test DW K+123, bit 15

MSD and FDD:

1 signal: PLC enable for drive test is present. The drive test (traversing movement) isstarted with NC Start.

0 signal: PLC enable missing. The drive test is aborted on NC Start, i.e. the travel requestis canceled and the drive resumes its former status.If the drive test is already active (drive in motion), the traversing movement isstopped and the drive subsequently resumes its former operating mode.

Note:

The effect of the signal depends on the parameterization of the drive test by the user.Selection can be made in the "Function generator" and "Measurement" installation functions ifthe "Enable motion for drive test" enable signal is to be active:

1. Enable "internal" without enable signal from PLC with NC Start.2. Enable through enable signal from PLC and with NC Start.3. Enable with enable signal from PLC without NC.



6.4 Structure of M decoding list (DB 30)


For decoding the M functions with extended address, one data block per channel must becompiled as a decoding list. A maximum of 64 M words can be decoded by list per NCchannel. Also, the function has to be selected via PLC machine data (PLC MD 6009).

Decoding list contents

1st value

2nd value

64thvalue

Channel Decoding lists

123456

DB 80DB 81DB 82DB 83DB 84 1)

DB 85 1)

Ext. M addr. M address

0 - 99(KF)

0 - 999(KF)

DW 0 DW 1

DW 3 DW 4

Definitionof

DW No.in DB 30

0 - 63(KY)

Definitionof

Bit No.in DB 30

0 - 7(KY)

stat. bit

DL 2 DR 2

DL 5 DR 5

DW 190 DW 191 DL 192 DR 192

_______1) As from SW 4


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



Notes:

1) The bit No. refers to the static signal. The dynamic signal (bit address in DL) is addressedautomatically.

2) The M addresses must be stored in ascending order, i.e. first all M addresses withextended address 1, then extended address 2 etc. Within a group (extended address), theM addresses must also be addressed in ascending order (see example for decoded Mfunction).

3) The decoding list may be compiled with 6, 12, 24, 48, 96 or 192 data words only. If thenumber of M functions lies between the stated values, round up to the next permissiblenumber and fill up the remaining data words with zero.

Example:

For 9 M functions, the DB must be set up with 48 DWs.

Number ofM functions

Number of DWs indecoding list

1 M function2 M functions4 M functions8 M functions

16 M functions32 M functions64 M functions

6612244896192

Example for decoded M function:

An extended M address is programmed in the NC as follows:

N 100 ... M2=8 ... LF

In the decoding list belonging to the channel (e.g. DB 80 for channel 1), an allocation is madeto a bit in DB 30 for each extended M address provided by the user. The allocation isdetermined by the user in 3 data words.

Decoded M function:

M2= 8 SETS D 5.3M2= 15 SETS D 5.5M3= 10 SETS D 20.5M3= 61 SETS D 21.6

Structure of decoding list:

-1. ER.ADR 0 : KF = +00002;-1. M-ADR 1 : KF = +00008;-1. BIT-AD 2 : KY = 005,003;-2. ER-ADR 3 : KF = +00002;-2. M-ADR 4 : KF = +00015;-2. BIT-AD 5 : KY = 005,005;-3. ER-ADR 6 : KF = +00003;-3. M-ADR 7 : KF = +00010;-3. BIT-AD 8 : KY = 020,005;-4. ER-ADR 9 : KF = +00003;-4. M-ADR 10 : KF = +00061;-4. BIT-AD 11 : KY = 021,006;




Example for extended M addresses:

Synchronization of the machine (channel 1) and loader (channel 3) by means of M functionswith extended address.

All M functions effecting read-in disable for channel 1 are output in one byte.All M functions effecting read-in disable for channel 3 are output in one byte.

Synchronization of machine and loader by means of M signals

DB 82

PB 30

PB 10DB 80

DB 30M signals accordingto list

Programchannel 1

Programchannel 3

Decoding listchannel 1

Decoding listchannel 3

Signals forchannel 1

.

.

.N5 M3=80

.

.

.

.

.

.N20 M1=79

.

.

.

Operatingprogram

Signals forchannel 3

Channel 1

Channel 3

Use of M functions with extended addresses:

The following M functions must not be used with M functions with extended addresses:

M00 Programmed StopM01 Conditional StopM02 End of programM03 Clockwise spindle rotationM04 Counter clockwise spindle rotationM05 Spindle StopM17 End of subroutineM19 Position spindleM30 End of programM36 Feed 1:100M37 Feed 1:1

END OF SECTION


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)

10.94 7 Data Transfer PLC/NC (DB 36)

7.1 General

7 Data Transfer PLC/NC (DB 36)

7.1 General

Data transfer can be initiated by either the NC or the PLC.

In the case of NC initiative, the transfer is triggered via commands in cycle language CL 800;all locations in the PLC can be read and written. The data are stored in R parameters in theNC or transferred from R parameters to the PLC.

Structure of data transfer NCK/PLC

PLC initiative:reading andwriting of NCdata

ReadNCdata

Data

NC initiative:reading andwriting of PLCdata via @commands

DataFB 61


















Data

Data type

Command

DB

PLC data

PLCoperatingsystem

Link RAM

DataRead/writecommand

Data driver

Read/write

PLC data

Cycles

PLC status

@ com-

mands

NCinitiative

PLCinitiative

Command

Data type

Data

FB 62

Write NCdata
















NC data

Data





NCK PLC

MMC

With data transfer activated by the PLC, the following NC data can be read/written:

– Machine data – External set values– Setting data – Program data– Tool offsets – Program selection– Zero offsets – R parameters– Actual values – NC alarms– Softkey functions– Write NC blocks


7 Data Transfer PLC/NC (DB 36) 10.94

7.1 General

Note:

As from SW 4 of SINUMERIK 840C, the "Flexible memory configuration" function enablesoperator intervention in the memory configuration.

Modifications can thus be programmed in the following area (see "Installation Instructions SW 4"):

1. User data• Part programs• UMS data• IKA data• R parameters• Tool data

2. Drive software

3. Number of axis-specific measured values

4. Number of block buffers in the block memory.

7.1.1 Machine data (MD)

The values stored in the machine data are determined when installing and starting up themachine and are normally not altered again.

If machine data are altered (e.g. to achieve optimization), note that alterations do not generallytake effect immediately but only, for example, after a reset; refer to the MD list for exactinformation. The machine data are divided into NC and PLC machine data. Within each ofthese groups, they are divided up into MD words and MD bits:

Machine data words:

Group AreaCL 800 word FBparameterization

Machinedata NC

General

Channel-specificAxis-specific 1Spindle-specificAxis-specific 2

0 – 999

1000 – 19992000 – 39994000 – 49991100 –14519

MDN <Word>


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)

08.96 7 Datenübergabe PLC/NC (DB 36)

7.1.1 Maschinendaten (MD)

Machine data bits:

Group AreaCL 800 word FBparameterization

Machinedata NC

General

Channel-specificAxis-specific 1Spindle-specificLeadscrew errorcompensationAxis-specific 2

5000 – 5199

5400 – 5599 5600 – 5999 5200 – 5399 6000 – 9699

1800 – 1900

MDNBI <Byte><Bit>

MDNBY <Byte>

Note:

The @ command allocations are to be found in the ”SINUMERIK 840C Programming Guide”

7.1.2 Tool offsets

Depending on the structure of the TO memory, between 204 and max. 819 1) tool offsetblocks can be stored in the NC for the active tools. They can be divided into areas whichcorrespond to the tool magazines or turrets on the machine via machine data (NC MD 13, 210 - 226).

204(819) 1)

D 1...

D n

D 1...

D n

D 1...

D n

Chan-nel TO area Offset

1

2

1

1

1

TO area 1

TO area 2

.

.

.

TO area n

3

4

2

4

52)

62)

52)

62)

_______1) As from SW 4, flexible memory configuration and thus modification of the TO memory is possible (see

Installation Instructions)

2) As from SW 4



7.1.2 Tool offsets

The individual TO areas are structured as follows:

D 1

D 2

D n

T No.PO

TypeP1

GeometryP2 P3 P4

Wear 1)

P5 P6 P7

See textP8 P9

D 1

D 2

D n

N. c.P10

MiscellaneousP11 . . . . . . . . . . P15

N. c.=Nextcutting edge

The significance of P memories P0 to P4 and P10/P11 is fixed, whereas columns P11 to P15can be assigned in accordance with the specific machine (e.g. service life, quantity,permissible cutting force).

As standard, the contents of P memories P5 to P7 are taken into account as wear. Thisfunction can be deactivated with machine data 5007.6. The P memories P8 and P9 can bedeclared as additional tool offset memories by machine data (MD 5007.3) and thus also betaken into account. Alternatively, they can be assigned by the user.

The number of P memories is determined by machine data. The minimum number is 10, thusgiving a total of 409 (819)2) one-edged tools.

The number of tools can be calculated by the following formula:(32.768) 2)

n = INT ( ––––––––– )P · 4

where n = No. of tool cutting edges16384 = Available TO memory in bytesP = No. of P memories (MD 13)

(Width of P memory 4 bytes)

Assignment of columns P0 to P11 of the TO areas:

P0: T No. with 8 decadesP1: Type with 2 decades. With reference to the type, the tools are divided into the

following groups:

Type 1 ... 9: Tools with X, Z and radius compensation, e.g. lathe tools.Type 10 ... 19: Tools with length compensation, e.g. drills.Type 20 ... 29: Tools with length and radius compensation, e.g. end-milling cutters.Type 30 ... 39: Tools with 2x length and 1x radius compensation, e.g. angular milling

cutters._______1) Default setting

2) As from SW 4, flexible memory configuration and thus modification of the TO memory is possible (seeInstallation Instructions)


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


7.1.2 Tool offsets

Decade 100 determines in which direction of the selected compensation plane the offsets areto be effective.

P2 ... P9: Assignment depends on type, as follows:(P8/P9 only with MD 5007.3=”1”)

Type Geometry

P2 P3 P4

1 ... 910 ... 1920 ... 2930 ... 39

Length 1LengthLengthLength 1

Length 2------

Length 2

Radius---

RadiusRadius

Type Wear 1)

P5 P6 P7

Base dimension 2)

P8 P9

1 ... 910 ... 1920 ... 2930 ... 39


Length 2------

Length 2

------

RadiusRadius


Length 2------

Length 2

Depending on these machine data, the values P2/P5/P8, P3/P6/P9 and P4/P7 are added on.

P10: With multi-edged tools (e.g. recessing tools), the D No. for the next cutting edge isstated (0 = no text cutting edge). With the last cutting edge, reference is made tothe address of the 1st cutting edge, but with a minus sign.

Examples for assignment of tool offsets

Lathe tools

1. Lathe tool: Assignment of offset memory:

Dn

T No.

P0

Type

P1

Geometry

P2 P3 P4

100 1..9 X Z R

Wearor unassigned

P5 P6 P7

Addit. TO orunassigned

P8 P9

D no.n.c.

P10

Service life etc.

P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 ... P32

X Z - X Z SZ ST

SL= Service lifeQty= QuantityD No. n.c.= D No. of next cutting edge of the same tool

_______1) Standard setting (MD 5007.6)2) Activated by MD 5007.3 otherwise unassigned



7.1.2 Tool offsets

Programming: Tool call: T 100 (Dn)::

2. Recessing tool: Assignment of offset memory:

Dn

Dm

T No.

P0

Type

P1

Geometry

P2 P3 P4

100 1..9 X1 Z1 R1

100 1..9 X2 Z2 R2

Dn

Dm

Wearor unassigned

P5 P6 P7

Addit. orunassigned

P8 P9

D nr.n.c.

P10

Service life etc.

P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 ... P32

X1 Z1 - X Z m 0 SZ ST

X2 Z2 - X Z 0 n - -

Programming: Tool call: T 100 (Dn) (e.g. for left cutting edge)::Dm (e.g. for right cutting edge)

7.1.3 R parametersThe NC CPU has channel-oriented R parameters for each channel. In addition, central Rparameters common to all channels are stored in the static RAM.

The channel-oriented and central R parameters are differentiated by the R parameteraddresses.

Local, global, transfer R parameters and pointers are available for each channel. To ensurethat cycles compiled at various locations can operate smoothly together, the R parameters aredefined for the individual tasks as follows:

Address 1) Designation Effect

0 - 49

50 - 99

100 - 149

150 - 699

Transfer R parameters

Local R parameter pointers

Global R parametersdeclared channel-dependent

Global R parameters de-clared channel-independent

Channel-oriented Rparameters

700 - 999 Central R parameters

1000 - 1299 Additional central R paramtrs

10000 - 10019 ASCII R parameters (seeOperator's Guide SINUME-RIK 840C, SectionR parmtrs)

Reserved for the function"Select part program forediting".

Note:

ASCII R parametersWhen an MDA input image is selected, the PLC cannot write an ASCII block. FB 62 isacknowledged negatively with an error message. In the case of an error, bit 7 "error value 1 -value 3" of the corresponding interface signal is set in DB 36._______1) As from SW 4, flexible memory configuration is possible; selection of the local and central R parameters

can change. This function is described in detail in the Installation Instructions.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


7.1.3 R-ParameterR parameters

Transfer R parameters:

These are used to transfer values between subroutines. They must be provided with thedesired values before calling a subroutine.

Local R parameters:

These are valid only within a subroutine. When a subroutine is called, the contents of the Rparameters required in the subroutine for local variables are saved at the start of thesubroutine and uploaded again at the end. This means that the original value is present in the”local” R parameters again after returning to the program from which the call was made. Bysaving and uploading the ”local” R parameters, the same parameters can be used repeatedly.

Pointers:

R parameters as pointers are used primarily for indirect data field addressing. The commanddoes not contain the address of the line out of which something is to be read or into whichsomething is to be entered, but the address of an R parameter containing the address of theline.

Examples:

a) Direct addressing of an R parameter

R50

R67

0

Transfer

V

R67

=R50

The addresses of both R parameters are contained in the command.

b) Indirect addressing of an R parameter

R60

R67

0

Transfer

V

R5060R67

=R50



7.1.3 R parameters

The address of the R parameter whose contents are to be read out is located in the cell towhich the 2nd operand of the command points.

Since pointers belong to the group of local variables, they are also saved and uploaded. Theycan therefore be used for multiple assignments.

Global R parameters

These retain their validity over all program levels. They can therefore be used to exchangeinformation between all subroutines of a single channel .

For declaration purposes, global R parameters are divided into channel-dependent declared(R100 - R149) and channel-independent declared (R150 - R199 ) R parameters.

R parameters R100 - R149 can be declared differently for each channel, whereas Rparameters R150 - R199 can be declared jointly for several channels.

Subroutines that run only on one specific channel (e.g. machine-dependent cycles), therefore,use the R parameters between R100 and R149. All programs that run on several channels(e.g. standard cycles) use the R parameters R150 - R199.

Central R parameters:

The central parameters are R parameters and common to all channels. These R parametersonly exist once but can be read and written from all channels.

7.1.4 Zero offsets

The zero offsets and tool offsets are calculated for each NC axis as follows:

Machineactual value

Programmed orexternal position

DRF offset

PRESEToffset

Total of alloffsets

Adjustable ZOsG54/G55/G56/G57

Programmable ZOsG58/G59

External ZOs

Tool offsets

Machine-oriented actual

value

+–

–

–

Differencebetween thetwo positions:distance to go

Workpiece-oriented actual

value


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


7.2.1 Structure with example

7.2 Data transfer PLC initiative


Data can be exchanged between the PLC and NC via data channels.

2 function blocks for activating the transfer of data are available in the system program:Read NC data (FB 61) and write NC data (FB 62).

Structure of data transfer PLC initiative

FB61 NCD-LESLInkRAM

Ope-

rating

system

FIFOjobs

Data

channel

NC/PLC

PLC

Initiative

LES

NSBY

ANZ

DTY

WER

ZFPN

ZIEL

User

program

PLC

DB 36

Status-

data

transfer

DB n

Data

The function blocks enter the parameters for data transfer (data type, data source, datadestination) in an internal interface. The interface is a first-in first-out (FIFO) register with amaximum capacity of 8 jobs. Even when several jobs are involved, this ensures that they areexecuted in the correct sequence.

Each job must still be allocated an interface byte indicating the status of data transfer (DB 36,DW 0 - DL 32 corresponds to 65 interface bytes). Data transfer can be checked and branchescan be implemented in the user program according to these acknowledgements.




Principal signal paths, data transfer NC/PLC

Value 1 - Number

Value 3 formatended assigned busy

FIFO

assigned

Data

transfer

requested

Data transferended

2

1

11

READ(FB 61)

Data transferassigned

1 FB internal implementation2 User implementation

Assignment of status byte at interface (DB 36)

Data transferError Access

disabled

If data transfer is initiated at FB 61 at the READ input, for example, the DATA TRANSFERASSIGNED signal is immediately output at the interface. Since this signal remains present untilthe end of data transfer, it can be used to effect read-in disable, for instance. When datatransfer has ended, the DATA TRANSFER ENDED signal is output; this signal is not reset untilthe user cancels the READ signal at the FB.

In order to reduce the load on the PLC program caused by repeated calls of the FB 61/62function blocks, they can be called either unconditionally or conditionally.

The advantage of an unconditional block call is that the FB can be easily initialized. However,in the inactive state of data transfer, approx. 0.2 ms of the PLC cycle are taken up by theblock change and some logic operations.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



Signal paths with unconditional block call

9

8

7

7

7 7

7

7

7

tD

1

2

3

4

5

6

8

9

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

tc

1: READ/WRITE2: DAA TRANSFER REQUESTED3: FIFO ASSIGNED4: DATA TRANSFER BUSY5: DATA TRANSFER ASSIGNED6: DATA TRANSFER ENDED and (possibly) error7: Signal change by FB8: Signal change by user9: Signal change by FB; omitted if FIFO not yet fulltD: Assignment of internal interface by data transfertc: PLC cycle time




Alternatively, the FBs can also be called conditionally; i.e. the FBs have to be processed onlyuntil the job has been transferred to the job buffer (FIFO). This is indicated by the DATATRANSFER BUSY signal. In the inactive state of data transfer, only approx. 0.008 ms of thePLC cycle are taken up.

Signal path with conditional block call

10

9

7

7

tc

1

2

3

4

5

6

8

7

7

7

tc

10

tD

1: READ/WRITE2: DATA TRANSFER REQUESTED3: FIFO ASSIGNED4: DATA TRANSFER BUSY5: DATA TRANSFER ASSIGNED6: DATA TRANSFER ENDED and (possibly) error7: Signal change by FB8: Signal change by user9: User no longer calling block

10: Signal change by FB; omitted if FIFO not yet fulltc: PLC cycle timetD: Assignment of internal interface by data transfer

If the function blocks are incorrectly parameterized (e.g. data source in the PLC unknown), thePLC branches into the stop loop. The number of the interface byte and an error ID are storedin ACCU2 of the interrupt stack.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



Parameterization of FB 61 for reading the ”machine-oriented actual axis value” of the 3rd axis

FB 61 NCD-LESE

Language notation<CL 800><VAR> =ACPM<WERT> <VAR>: R parameter addressR30 =ACPM 3 ACPM: Machine-oriented

actual axis position<WERT>: Axis No.

PLC

F150.0 – LESE16 – NSBY1 – ANZ

AC – DTY1PM – DTY2

– DTY33 – WER 10 – WER 20 – WER 3

B0 – ZFPN150 – DBZI10 – DWZI

DB – TYZI

Function:

Actual value of axis 3 istransferred in DB 150 into DW 10and 11(BCD number without decimalpoint)

In the case of data transfer by the PLC, the number format is converted according toparameter ZFPN of FBs 61 and 62. In principle, the following number formats are possible:

Parameter ZFPN Format Destination/source in PLC DBs

BIF.B.

Bit patternFixed-point number 32 bitsBCD number with sign anddecimal point

DR nDW n, DW n+1DW n, DW n+1, DW n+2




NC/PLC data transfer, format conversion with fixed-point representation in the PLC

DW n+1

DW n

»ZFPN«

Formatconversion

R parameter cell NC PLC data words(fixed-point, 32 bit)

1 2 3 4 . 5 6 7 8Bit 31 Bit 16

Bit 15 Bit 0

Parameter»ZFPN« PLC value

F 0 1 2 3 4F 1 1 2 3 4F 2 1 2 3 4 5F 3 1 2 3 4 5 6

• •

• •

• •

For further information on parameterization of FB61 and FB62, refer to the description offunction macros.

7.2.2 Description of job-specific interface signals

DATA TRANSFER REQUESTED D 0.8, D 0.0 to DL 32

1 signal: FB READ or WRITE signal is 1.

0 signal: a) With 0 1 edge of data transfer ended or fault during data transfer signal.b) READ or WRITE signal is 0.

FIFO ASSIGNED D 0.9, D 0.1 to DL 32

1 signal: Job cannot be entered in FIFO at the moment. With READ and WRITE = 1,repeated attempts are made until successful.

0 signal: No effect


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


7.2.2 Description of job-specific interface signals

DATA TRANSFER BUSY D 0.10, D 0.2 to DL 32

1 signal: Job entered in buffer or job being executed.0 signal: After 1 signal, if DATA TRANSFER ENDED is 0.

DATA TRANSFER ASSIGNED D 0.11, D 0.3 to DL 32

1 signal: FIFO ASSIGNED and DATA TRANSFER BUSY signals are 1.0 signal: No effect.

Example of application:Actuation of READ-IN DISABLE during data transfer.

DATA TRANSFER ENDED D 0.12, D 0.4 to DL 32

1 signal: Job completed with or without NC error message.0 signal: After 1 signal, if READ or WRITE is 0 at FB 61/62.

NUMBER FORMAT ERROR D 0.14, D 0.6 to DL 32

1 signal: Job completed with NC error message. The number format FB parameter isinadmissible (e.g. an actual axis value is read as a bit pattern).

0 signal: After 1 signal only if READ/WRITE signal is again 0.

ACCESS DISABLED D 0.13, D 0.5 to DL 32

1 signal: The job is rejected as the interface is assigned or access to the data field is notpossible.


Note:The job is rejected if, for example, one tries to preselect a program number via FB 62 and thechannel in question is not in the reset state.

VALUE 1 - VALUE 3 ERROR D 0.15, D 0.7 to DL 32

1 signal: Job completed with NC error message. The VALUE 1 - VALUE 3 FB parameterscannot be interpreted by the NC (e.g. a non-existent machine data is addressed).

0 signal: After 1 signal only if READ/WRITE signal is again 0.



7.3 Data transfer NC initiative

7.3 Data transfer NC initiative

PLC data can be accessed directly by the NC. The NC requests or supplies data via aninterface; data transfer takes place via the PLC operating system.

NC initiative: Read and write PLC data using @ commandsa a a a a a a a a a a a






Data

Data type

Command

PLC data

PLCoperatingsystem

Link RAM

DataRead/writecommand

Data driver

Read/write PLC data

Cycles PLCstatus @commands

NCinitiative











a a a a a a a a a a a aData

NC PLC

MMC

PLC data for the NC CPU can be read and written using @ commands in the cycle language CL 800.

Appropriate commands are available for data types E, A, M, T, Z, D (see CL 800 documenta-tion). Data from the PLC are written in R parameters by the @ command; data to the PLCmust be entered in an R parameter before calling the @ command. This function permits datato be exchanged between the PLC and NC cycles without a PLC user program; the usermerely has to reserve certain data storage areas (e.g. a data block) in the PLC for datatransfer purposes.

Note:

In the event of major data storage areas being altered in the PLC by an NC program, users arerecommended to set a strobe bit in the PLC after completing the data transfer. This obviatesthe need for time-consuming comparisons of data fields to identify alterations. Certain bits canbe set in the PLC as strobes via @ commands; M functions can also be used.

END OF SECTION


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)

04.96 8 Control of Data Transfer (DB 37)

8.1 Description of interface signals

8 Control of Data Transfer (DB 37)

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a aa a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

As from software version 3, the data transfer through the RS232C (V.24)can be controlled via DB 37.

8.1 Description of interface signals

FTR IN PROGRESS D 0.12

1 signal: The signal "FTR in progress" (File Transfer in progress) is only set if a filetransfer has been requested by the user (via DB 37 or "Computer link filetransfer" display).

0 signal: No File Transfer in progress

FTR ACTIVE: D 0.13

1 signal: File transfer between computer link and NCK is active

0 signal: No file transfer active

8.2 Signals for PLC initiative data transfer

• The data transfer between MMC and NCK and also between RS232C (V.24) and MMC ispossible in both directions.

• Exclusively workpieces and data files of workpieces are transferred from the LOCALdirectory. The data files must have the established tape identifiers TOA1, ZOA1, MPF ...as file names. (TEA and PCF are not possible!)

• For channel-specific data (e.g. RPA4), data type and channel number must be stored intwo different data words (e.g. RPA4 DW 2: RPA, DL6: 4).

• For transfer, a channel number must always be written (1 - 6).

• Jobs with wrong parameters, e.g. non-existent program number, are not executed and willbe acknowledged with an error message (see error code).

• A workpiece name must always be specified.

• Note: In the case of data transfer via DB 37, the keyswitch position (access rights) is notscanned.

• For data transfer through RS232C (V.24), the interface parameters set in the operatorinterface (see SINUMERIK 840C Operator's Guide, ”Services” Section) apply.

• Workpieces or individual workpiece files can be transferred in PC and punch tape (LS)format.

• Direct transfer between RS232C (V.24) and NCK is not possible.


8 Control of Data Transfer (DB 37) 10.94


DATA START INPUT D 1.8

1 signal: Start of data transfer from MMC to NCK or from RS232C (V.24) to MMC

0 signal: By the user at:a) TRANSFER ENDEDb) ERROR DURING DATA TRANSFER

Notes:

• After the start of data input, data must be available at the interface within the set time(device setting) or else the monitor will respond.

• All parameters must be assigned before activating data transfer.

• When a name is specified for a data file, only this data file of the workpiece is transferred.

• The workpiece is stored under MMC data management.

DATA START OUTPUT D 1.9

1 signal: Start of data transfer from NCK to MMC or from MMC to RS232C (V.24)

0 signal: By the user at:a) TRANSFER ENDEDb) ERROR DURING DATA TRANSFER

Notes:

• Several data files of one type can be transferred, as MPF [from, to] or SPF [from, to].

• All parameters must be assigned before activating data output.

DATA TRANSFER ENDED D 1.0

1 signal: After recognition of the end criterion of data input/output

0 signal: a) No effectb) After the 1 signal if the– DATA START INPUT– DATA START OUTPUTsignals are 0– after one cycle


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



ERROR DURING DATA TRANSFER D 1.1

1 signal: After incorrect data input/output

0 signal: After the 1 signal if the– DATA START INPUT– DATA START OUTPUT– ABORTsignals are 0

Note:

The error message can be triggered by:

a) Missing or erroneous data at data inputb) Incorrect data type at data outputc) By transmitting several data files without waiting for the acknowledgement signal between

the data filesd) Wrong assignment of the function (e.g. wrong channel number or wrong device number)

Signal charts:

4

31

2

Data input/output

1. Data start output or input2. TRANSFER ENDED or ERROR DURING DATA TRANSFER3. User cancels signal 14. PLC operating system cancels signal 2




DATA TYPE DW 2, DW 3INITIAL NUMBER DW 4END NUMBER DW 5CHANNEL NUMBER DL 6

The following table shows which initial number, end number and channel number is assignedto the individual data words.

Data type

(DW 2-3, KC)Significance

Initial no.

(DW 4, KF)

End no.

(DW 5, KF)

Channel no.

(DL 6, KF)

Table 1: Permitted data types with areas

”MPF” Main programs 0 9999 –

”SPF” Subroutines 1 9999 –

”TOA” Tool offsets TOA area 0 819 1) 1 – 4

”ZOA” Zero offsets(G54 -G57)

Angle of rotation

–

–

–

–

0

1 – 6

”RPA” R parametersCentral

Channel-specific

700

0

1299 1)

699 1)

0

1 – 6

”SEA1” NC setting data 0 9999 –

”SEA4” Cycle setting data 0 999 1 – 6

”JOB” Workpiece list – – 1 – 6

”IKA1” IKA ratio number 1–32 1–32 –

”IKA2” Curve pointer 1–32 1–32 –

”IKA3” Curve values 1–16000 1) 1–16000 1) –

Note:

• The ASCII characters DATA TYPE FOR DATA OUTPUT must be entered left-justified.

• The data type "JOB" is only possible for data transfer from the hard disk to the NCK andRS232C (V.24). It triggers the generation of a "workpiece list" in which the data to betransferred to the NCK can be defined. If no workpiece list is available, all the data in thespecified directory are transferred.

_______1) As from SW 4, the "Flexible memory configuration" function can be used to program a modification in the

memory areas, depending on the NCK CPU used. You can thus shift the initial and end numbers of the

memory areas. Observe the following when entering the end number:

maximum values R parameters 9999

TOA 1638

IKA3 65535


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



Example:

Output of part programs 10 to 20...C DB 37L KCMPT DW 2L KCFT DW 3L KF 10T DW 4L KF 20T DW 5SU D 1.9...selected workpiece is not available for transfer from MMC to NCK

Error code DW 7

Error code(hexadecimal) Error

03 General error (e.g. diskette is not inserted)

04 The RS232C (V.24) interface is disabled (through WOP or PG-SW)

40 The selected workpiece is not available for transfer from MMC to NCK

4F Several data files have been transmitted without waiting for anacknowledgement signal

44 The function has been incorrectly defined, e.g. – wrong channel number– wrong device number

Device for data transfer DW 8Device number DW 9

It is possible to set a device for data transfer.

The following values can be entered:

DW 8Device type Device in plaintext DW 9

Device numbers

0Hard disk in MMC area(workpiece name DW 10 - DW 15 must be entered)

–

2RS232C (V.24) hard disk(specification of workpiece name)

1st to 3rd interfacenumber

5 Computer link - file transfer –

All errors occurring in data transfer NCK MMC are output in the form of dialog boxes.




Workpiece name DW 10 to DW 15

Here the workpiece name can be entered in ASCII code in string form (max. length 8 bytes). Itdefines a directory (workpiece) with which the specified data are transferred. The workpiecename is completed with the end identifier 0H.

For a more accurate specification of the JOB data type, it is absolute necessary to add theworkpiece name. For the workpiece name, a maximum of 8 characters are entered left-justified. The specification is made in KC format.

The workpiece name is always a subdirectory of the directory LOCAL.

Indicate: Read in data into NCK DL 29

Bit 0 = 1 Read part programs into the NCKBit 1 = 1 Read program data into the NCKBit 2 = 1 Read workpiece list into the NCKBit 3 = 1 Read circular buffer into the NCKBit 0-3 = 0 No significance

Indicate: Read data out of NCK DR 29

Bit 0 = 1 Read part programs from the NCK into the device defined in DW 8Bit 1 = 1 Read program data from the NCK into the device defined in DW 8 Bit 0-1 = 0 No significance

Indicate the disabling of data for reading in DL 30

Bit 0 = 1 Part programs disabled for reading in dataBit 1 = 1 Program data disabled for reading in dataBit 2 = 1 Workpiece disabled for reading in dataBit 3 = 1 Circular buffer disabled for reading in dataBit 0-3 = 0 No significance

Indicate the disabling of data for reading out DR 30

Bit 0 = 1 Part programs disabled for reading out dataBit 1 = 1 Program data disabled for reading out dataBit 0-1 = 0 No significance


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


8.2 Description of job-specific interface signals

Disable reading in of data DL 31

Bit 0 = 1 Part programs disabled for reading inBit 1 = 1 Program data disabled for reading inBit 2 = 1 Workpiece list disabled for reading inBit 3 = 1 Circular buffer disabled for reading inBit 0-3 = 0 No significance

Disable the reading out of data DR 31

Bit 0 = 1 Part programs disabled for reading outBit 1 = 1 Program data disabled for reading outBit 0-1 = 0 No significance

END OF SECTION


03.95 9 Operator Panel Interface (DB 40)

9 Operator Panel Interface (DB 40)

SINUMERIK 14” colour monitor with NC keypad


9 Operator Panel Interface (DB 40) 11.92

9.1 Key signals from operator panel

9.1 Key signals from operator panel

Note:

The operator panel key symbols are not transferred to the PLC with acknowledgement control(except for configured softkey function numbers).

The PLC operating system updates the key image in DB 40 once at the start of the PLC cycle.

If the key is pressed for less than the duration of one PLC cycle, the key signal is not updatedin DB 40.

STATIC KEY SIGNALS D 0.6 to D 0.0

1 signal: Key pressed

0 signal: Key not pressed

Note:

If several keys are pressed at the same time, only the key that was pressed first will have anyeffect.

DYNAMIC KEY SIGNALS DW 0, DL 3 to DL 6


0 signal: – Key not pressed– After one PLC cycle

Note:

If several keys are pressed at the same time, only the key that was pressed first will have anyeffect.

9.1.1 Operating mode group (BAG)

OPERATING MODE GROUP DR 7

The display on the screen can be changed to a specific operating mode by pressing theOPERATING MODE GROUP key or, in the case of SINUMERIK 840C, selecting OPERATINGMODE GROUP in the machine window. The number of the operating mode group valid for thedisplay is output as a binary number.

When the control is switched on, 0 is output; that is not the operating mode group that isobtained automatically after the control has run up.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


9.1.1 Operating mode group (BAG)


If only one machine control panel is available, operating mode specific signals (e.g. operatingmodes) can be routed accordingly by the OPERATING MODE GROUP switch.

9.1.2 Softkey function signals

The user can program both displays and softkey menus at the NC programming terminal inorder to adapt operation to a specific machine. To permit this, a signal uniquely assigned tothe softkey must be output to the PLC after the softkey is pressed. The NC programmingterminal can then be used to allocate a FUNCTION NUMBER to any configured softkey.

When the softkey is pressed, this FUNCTION NUMBER is output to the PLC. The outputSOFTKEY FUNCTION NUMBERS in the range 0 - 255 are decoded by the PLC program likethe M functions; i.e. a static and a dynamic bit are output.

Function signals

DB 40

Operatingsystem

Functionsignalsdynamic/static,menu no.

Functionnumber list

Userprogram

PLC

Allocated function number

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

14 15












a a a a a a a a a a aa a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a





















MENUE

NUMBER

COOL-

ANT ON

COOL-

ANT OFF

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

MOTOR

ON

Softkey-controlled machine operation can thus be accomplished using the SOFTKEYFUNCTION NUMBERS.

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a aa a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

Note that machine protection regulations prohibit softkey operation frominitiating any movements.Only keys protected against accidental

operation may be used to perform movements (e.g. customer keys onthe machine control panel).




The following figure shows the logic structure of the sequences of motion with softkey functionsignals. For example, if the COOLANT ON is to be initiated with function number 14 and COO-LANT OFF is to be initiated with function number 15, the PLC operating system sets the staticsignal (DB 40, D 9.6) and the dynamic signal (DB 40, D 9.14) for number 15 when the COO-LANT ON signal has been pressed. With the dynamic signal, the store must be made ready forthe counter command (COOLANT OFF). The store state is transferred to the output store withthe activation key. To ensure that the preselection stores are effective only for as long as therelevant display is on the screen, all preselection bits are cancelled when the display is dese-lected (page = menu number change).

Logic structure for interpretation of a function number

1

1

1

S R

Q

1

1

S R

Q

1

&

S R

Q

F 15 dyn.D 9.15

F 14 dyn.D 9.14

Menu No. change(D 104.1)

F 15 stat.D 9.7

F 14 stat.D 9.6

Activate functionProtected key e.g. key 1 of thecustomer keys on the machinecontrol panel(D100.7)

CoolantON( A 1.1)

Coolant pump

All data bits in DB 40

Signals set by PLC operating system1

&


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



Relevant PLC program in a statement list:

.

.

.C DB 40

L DW 9 Function signals 8-15T FW 224 Load

L DL 100 Dynamic signals customer keysT FY 226 Load 1 - 8

L DL 104.1 Menu number changeT FY 227 Load

A F 224.6 Coolant on, dynamicO F 227.1 Coolant off, staticR F 225.7

A F 224.7O F 227.1 Coolant off, dynamicR F 225.6 Coolant on, static

A F 226.7A F 225.6 Function COOLANT ONS Q 1.1 Activate

A F 226.7A F 225.7 Function COOLANT OFFR Q 1.1 Activate

.

.

.

The user can also send back the number of a dialog text line and a function result (to DB 40),both referring to the function number of the pressed softkey. The dialog text line numberand/or function result must be entered in the same PLC cycle in which the softkey functionnumber is made available in DB 40/DR 49.

In this way, dialog texts can be displayed at the operator panel and/or subsequent menusstated that also have to be generated via a programming workstation.

If a softkey with configured softkey function number is pressed on the operator panel, thissoftkey function number (DW 41) is transferred and a strobe bit (DB 40/D 49.14)) set to ”1” inDB 40.

The user can now obtain the function number and send back a function result (DL 50) and adialog text number (DR 50) to DB 40 in the same PLC cycle; these are declared valid bymeans of an acknowledgement bit (DB 40/D 49.15).




DYNAMIC FUNCTION SIGNALS DL 8 to DL 39

1 signal: Configured softkey operated0 signal: After one PLC cycle

STATIC FUNCTION SIGNALS DR 8 to DR 39

1 signal: Configured softkey operated0 signal: By user

Note:

SOFTKEY FUNCTION NUMBERS 0 - 255 are decoded and transferred to DB 40 withacknowledgement control.

SOFTKEY FUNCTION NUMBER CHANGE D 40.0

1 signal: FUNCTION NUMBER changed0 signal: After one PLC cycle

SOFTKEY FUNCTION NUMBER DW 41

SOFTKEY FUNCTION NUMBER of the last softkey operated with a softkey function number. Asoftkey FUNCTION NUMBER is valid only during FUNCTION NUMBER CHANGE. A 16-bitfixed-point number is output. Only the numbers 0 - 255 are decoded.

The SOFTKEY FUNCTION NUMBERS must be input with the NC programming workstation.

Note:

Some softkey function numbers are assigned by the PLC operating system for display andoperation purposes:

F No. Function

F000

F001

F002 Display Message group Channel 1






F00A Display Messages spindle

F00B Display Messages axes

F00C Display Messages PLC


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



Example:

Indexed call of blocks following softkey operation:..

A DB 40P D 40.0B DW 41SPB PB0

F100

Statically anddynamically

decoded

Function No.available only

in absoluteform

(Not statically

/ dynamically

decoded)

User /Manufacturer

SIEMENS

SIEMENS

Function number

Dec. Hex. Reserved for

0 0000

255256

40964097

61440

0FFF0100

0FFF1000

EFFFF000

F0FFF100

FFFF

F13FF140F141

} Reserved for Package 3 (operation for tool management)

} Reserved for contour calculators and technology computers



9.2 Display dialog line

9.2 Display dialog line

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT FUNCTION RESULT VALID D 49.15

1 signal: FUNCTION RESULT (DL 50) and DIALOG TEXT NUMBER (DR 50) valid

0 signal: Otherwise

STROBE FUNCTION NUMBER VALID D 49.14

1 signal: A softkey with configured function number has been operated at the operatorpanel.

0 signal: Otherwise

FUNCTION NUMBER DR 49FUNCTION RESULT DL 50DIALOG TEXT NUMBER DR 50

Transfer of data to NC.

9.3 Menu selection interface

The PLC can interrupt the present menu tree structure and insert a menu itself via a newinterface in DB 40 (not in start-up mode).

Menu insertions are only possible in the MACHINE and PARAMETER operating areas.

When the RECALL key is pressed the inserted menu (ENTRY MENU EM) is replaced on thescreen by the previous menu (EXIT MENU XM).

The menu selection functions should only be performed if the MMC is ready. MMC Ready canbe scanned in F22.0.

The EMs and XMs can be located in the system and user areas.

Description of the specification of exit menus via the PLC:

The PLC is also able to specify a new XM which is displayed instead of the previous XM whenthe RECALL key is pressed.

Care should be taken that the new XM is located in the same area (machine/data) as theoriginal XM. If this is not the case, it can happen in conjunction with the function ”no basicimage with change from the data to the machine area, or with operating mode /operating modegroup change” that the new XM is identified as the basic image of the machine area whenchanging into the machine area. In this way the rigid separation between machine and dataarea is avoided. The regular basic image is selected by SHIFT RECALL in this case.

As many insertions as required can be made from the PLC. The original exit menu is obtained,however, with RECALL.

The SPECIAL RECALL function can be used to prevent a return to the original XM. Bypressing the recall key, the SPECIAL RECALL bit is made available to the user for one PLCcycle in DB 40.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



Description of the function ”No basic display when changing from Data area toMachine area, or with operating mode/operating mode group change”

An additional function, NO BASIC DISPLAY WHEN CHANGING FROM DATA AREA TOMACHINE AREA, OR WITH OPERATING MODE OR OPERATING MODE GROUP CHANGE,is available to the PLC to prevent the relevant basic display from appearing in the event of amode or mode group change. The same holds true for a change from the data to the machinearea. If this function is activated before a mode or mode group change or before a change tothe data area, the menu selected is stored when exiting the machine area of the operatingmode for reactivation after returning to the machine area of the same operating mode. If thesignal is not set, the stored menus are cleared in the event of a mode or mode group change.If the signal is set when leaving the machine area and in addition a menu is displayed by thePLC, this menu is not stored as the basic menu. Data area menus can only be stored usingthe data area key.

The INPUT, EDIT AND CANCEL keys can be independently disabled or enabled with individualbits.

Besides menu changes, the PLC is also able to execute channel and mode group changes.Independent mode group or channel changes (without menu insertion) can be effected.

The MENU STACK RESET function deletes all stored insertions. This function can betriggered by the PLC or by the operator (SHIFT RECALL). The active mode group number atthe interface is transferred to the PLC. This is no longer the mode group key code, but theactual mode group number. The activated NC channel at the operator panel is also reported tothe PLC.

Menu insertion by PLC and return to exit menu

Return via RECALL key or PLC signal

Menu insertion

by PLC








Basic displayJOG

XM = Exit menu

EM = Entry menu

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

EM

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

XM









Basic displayAUTO




Menu insertion by PLC with specification of a new RECALL menu












Operatorcontrolledcontinuation

Original return path

Menu insertion by PLC

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a







New exit menufrom PLC








Basic displayAUTO









Basic displayJOG

XM = Exit menu

EM = Entry menu

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

XM

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

XM

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

EM

List of normal menu blocks up to SW 3

MB NUMBER: MENU BLOCK DESIGNATION

MB 001 :MB 002 :MB 003 :MB 004 :MB 005 :MB 006 :MB 007 :MB 008 :MB 009 :MB 010 :MB 012 :MB 013 :MB 014 :MB 015 :MB 017 :MB 018 :MB 019 :

PARAMETER basic displayTEACH IN : Preset : HelpMDA : Preset : HelpJOG : Preset : HelpDB : PP : Tool offsets Geo+BaseAUTOMATIC : Basic display with current blockAUTOMATIC : OverstoreAUTOMATIC : Preset DRFAUTOMATIC : Program controlAUTOMATIC : etc. Block searchDPL : AUT : Program modification : ETCAUTOMATIC : Preset : HelpAUTOMATIC : Block search : HelpJOG : OverstoreJOG : HandwheelMDA : Basic displayMDA : Overstore


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)




MB 020 :MB 021 :MB 022 :MB 023 :MB 024 :MB 025 :MB 026 :MB 028 :MB 029 :MB 030 :MB 031 :MB 032 :MB 033 :MB 034 :MB 035 :MB 036 :MB 037 :MB 038 :MB 039 :MB 040 :MB 041 :MB 042 :MB 043 :MB 044 :MB 045 :MB 046 :MB 047 :MB 048 :MB 049 :MB 050 :MB 051 :MB 052 :MB 053 :MB 054 :MB 055 :MB 056 :MB 057 :MB 058 :MB 059 :MB 060 :MB 061 :MB 062 :MB 063 :MB 064 :MB 065 :MB 066 :MB 067 :MB 068 :MB 069 :

TEACH IN : Basic display : HelpMDA : Program controlTEACH IN : Basic displayTEACH IN : OverstoreDPL : AUTOMATIC : Basic display : ETC : Block searchTEACH IN : Program controlDB : Data In/Out : Set devices, further interfacesTEACH IN : Basic display : HelpDPL : AUTOMATIC : Program modification : ETC : Block searchDB : PP : Tool offsets, wearDB : Diagnostics: Start-up: NC MD: Rows of bits: Chan.-spec. bits 1DB : PP : Zero offsetDB : PP : Angle of rotationDB : PP : PlaneDB : PP : R parameter centralDB : PP : R parameter channel-specificDB : Diagn. : Start-up : NC MD : Rows of bits : Axis-specific bits 1DB : SD : Axial bitsDB : SD : General bitsDB : SD : Cycle data : System dataDB : SD : Cycle data : System bitsDB : SD : Cycle data : User dataDB : SD : Cycle data : User bitsDB : Setting data : Spindle dataDB : Data In/Out : Interface 1DB : Data In/Out : Set devicesDB : Diagn.: Start-up: NC MD: Rows of bits: Channel-specific bits 2DB : ProgrammingDB : Programming : Overview main programDB : Programming : Overview subroutineAUT : Program modification : ETCDB : Diagn. : Start-up : NC MD : Rows of bits : Axis-specific bits 2DB : Diagnostics : PLC error messagesDB : Diagnostics : Cycle alarmsDB : Diagnostics : PLC operational messagesDB : Diagnostics : Start-up : NC MD : Rows of bits :Comp. flagsDB : Diagnostics : PLC messages groups : SpindleDB : Diagnostics : PLC messages groups : AxisDB : Diagnostics : PLC messages groups : OtherDB : Programming : Overview main program: HelpDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : OverviewAUT : Program modification : ETC : Block searchDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : IW : KHDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : IW : KFDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : IW : KTDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : IW : KCDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : QW : KMAUT : Program modification : ETC : Block search : HelpDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : QW : KH





MB 070 :MB 071 :MB 072 :MB 073 :MB 074 :MB 075 :MB 076 :MB 077 :MB 078 :MB 079 :MB 080 :MB 081 :MB 082 :MB 083 :MB 084 :MB 085 :MB 086 :MB 087 :MB 088 :MB 089 :MB 090 :MB 091 :MB 092 :MB 093 :MB 094 :MB 095 :MB 096 :MB 097 :MB 098 :MB 099 :MB 100 :MB 101 :MB 102 :MB 103 :MB 104 :MB 105 :MB 106 :MB 107 :MB 108 :MB 109 :MB 110 :MB 111 :MB 112 :MB 113 :MB 114 :MB 115 :MB 116 :MB 117 :MB 118 :MB 119 :MB 120 :

DB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : QW : KFDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : QW : KTDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : QW : KCDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : FW : KMDB : Programming : Overview PLC textsDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : FW : KHDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : FW : KFDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : FW : KTDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : FW : KCDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : DBDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : DB : DW : KMDB : Programming : Overview subroutines : HelpDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : DB : DW : KHDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : DB : DW : KFDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : DB : DW : KTDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : DB : DW : KCDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : DB : DD parallel : KHTEACH IN : Program modification : ETC : (Block search with calcul.)DB : Diagnostics : Start-up : NC MD : Channel memory dataDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : DXDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : DX : DW : KMDB : Programming : M functions : HelpDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : DX : DW : KHDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : DX : DW : KFDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : DX : DW : KTDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : DX : DW : KCDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : DX : DD parallel : KHDB : Programming : G functions G groups 1 and 2 : HelpTEA : PB : ETC : (Block search with calculation) : InfoDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : ZDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : TJOG : INC variableDB : SD : Spindle data : ETCDB : Diagnostics : NC alarmsDB : Diagnostics : Start-up : NC MD : General dataDB : SD : General data : ETCDB : Diagnostics : Start-up : NC MD : Channel dataDB : Diagnostics : Start-up : NC MD : Axial data 1DB : Diagnostics : Start-up : NC MD : Axial data 2DB : Diagnostics : Start-up : NC MD : Spindle dataDB : Programming : G functions G groups 3 to 7 : HelpDB : Diagnostics : Start-up : NC MD : Display dataDB : Diagnostics : Start-up : NC MD : Rows of bits : General bitsDB : Diagnostics : Start-up : NC MD : Rows of bits : Spin.-spec. bitsDPLANZ AUTOMATIC : Basic displayDB : Diagnostics : Start-up : PLC MD : Sytem dataDB : Programming : G functions G groups 8 to 12 : HelpDB : Diagnostics : Start-up : PLC MD : FB dataDB : Diagnostics : Start-up : PLC MD : User dataDB : Diagnostics : Start-up : PLC MD : Sytem bitsDB : Diagnostics : Start-up : PLC MD : FB bits


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)




MB 121 :MB 122 :MB 123 :MB 124 :MB 125 :MB 126 :MB 127 :MB 128 :MB 129 :MB 130 :MB 131 :MB 132 :MB 133 :MB 134 :MB 135 :MB 136 :MB 137 :MB 138 :MB 139 :MB 140 :MB 141 :MB 142 :MB 143 :MB 144 :MB 145 :MB 146 :MB 147 :MB 148 :MB 149 :MB 150 :MB 151 :MB 152 :MB 153 :MB 154 :MB 155 :MB 156 :MB 157 :MB 158 :MB 159 :MB 160 :MB 161 :MB 162 :MB 163 :MB 164 :MB 165 :MB 166 :MB 167 :MB 168 :MB 169 :MB 170 :MB 171 :

DB : Diagnostics : Start-up : PLC MD : User bitsDB : Diagnostics : Start-up : Cycle MD : User data channelDB : SD : General bits : ETCDB : Diagnostics : Start-up : Cycle MD : User bits channelDB : Diagnostics : Start-up : Cycle MD : User data centralDB : Diagnostics : Start-up : Cycle MD : User bits centralDB : SD : Scale : ETCDB : Diagnostics : Start-up : Cycle MD : System data channelDB : Diagnostics : Start-up : Cycle MD : System bits channelDB : Diagnostics : Start-up : Cycle MD : System data centralDB : Diagnostics : Start-up : Cycle MD : System bits centralDB : Setting data: Working area limitationDB : Setting data: General dataDB : Diagnostics : NC alarmsDB : Diagnostics : PLC message groups : channelDB : Diagnostics : Service displays : Axes and spindles 1-4DB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : IW : KMDB : Data in/out : Interface 2DPLANZ AUTOMATIC : OverstoreDPLANZ AUTOMATIC : Program modificationDB : Programming : G functions G groups 13 and 14 : HelpDPLANZ AUTOMATIC : Current blockJOG : Basic displayJOG : Reference point approachDB : Programming : Support : PlaneDB : Programming : Support : Plane : Plane G16DB : Setting data : ScaleDB : Diagnostics : Service displays : Axes and spindles 5-8DB : Diagnostics : Service displays : Single axis 1-4DB : Diagnostics : Service displays : Spindles individuallyDB : Diagnostics : Service displays : NC informationDB : Diagnostics : SA : Single axis : Drift compensation axes 5-11DB : Diagnostics : SA : Single axis : Drift compensation axes 12-18DB : Diagnostics : Service displays : PLC error detectionDPL : AUT : PB : ETC : Block search : HelpDB : Diagnostics : Service displays : Axes 9-16DB : Diagnostics : Service displays : Axes 17-24DB : Diagnostics : Service displays : Axes 25-30DB : Setting data : Start angleDB : Diagnostics : Service displays : UMS informationAUTOMATIC : Basic display : ETCAUTOMATIC : Overstore : ETC DB : SD : Axial bits : ETCDB : SD : Spindle data : Start angle : ETCTEACH IN : ETC : Block search with calculationTEACH IN : ETC : Block search with calculationAUTOMATIC : Block search : HelpAUTOMATIC : Block search : HelpDB : Programming : Help : G function G groups 15-19DB : SD : General bits : HelpDB : SD : Axial bits : Help





MB 172 :MB 173 :MB 174 :MB 175 :MB 176 :MB 177 :MB 178 :MB 179 :MB 180 :MB 181 :MB 182 :MB 183 :MB 184 :MB 186 :MB 187 :MB 188 :MB 189 :MB 190 :MB 191 :MB 192 :MB 193 :MB 194 : MB 196 :MB 197 :MB 199 :MB 200 :MB 201 :MB 203 :MB 204 :MB 205 :MB 207 :MB 208 :MB 209 :MB 210 :MB 211 : MB 212 :MB 213 :MB 214 :MB 215 :MB 216 : MB 217 :MB 218 :MB 219 :MB 220 :MB 221 :MB 222 :MB 223 :MB 238 :MB 239 :MB 243 :MB 244 :

DB : Programming : Overview PLC texts : HelpDPLANZ JOG : Basic displayDPLANZ JOG : OverstoreDPLANZ JOG : INC-variableDPLANZ AUTOMATIC : Current G functionDPLANZ JOG : Reference point approachedDB : Programming : Help : G function G groups 21 and 22Finish threading/setting-upDPL AUTOMATIC basic display : ETC block searchDPL AUTOMATIC overstore : ETC block searchDPL AUTOMATIC current block ETC : Block searchAUTOMATIC overstore ETC : Block searchAUTOMATIC correction block ETC : Block searchAUTOMATIC current block ETC : Block searchTEACH IN : Basic display : ETCDB : SD : General data : ETC : Axis/spindle converterAUTOMATIC : Block search : HelpAUTOMATIC : Block search : HelpAUTOMATIC : Block search : HelpAUTOMATIC : Block search : HelpJOG : Finish threading/setting-upAUTOMATIC : Preset DRFDPLANZ : JOG : Finish threading/setting-upDPLANZ : AUTOMATIC : Preset DRFDPLANZ : AUTOMATIC : Preset : HelpDPLANZ : AUTOMATIC : Correction block : ETC : Block searchDPLANZ : AUTOMATIC : Block search : HelpDPLANZ : AUTOMATIC : Basic display : ETCDPLANZ : AUTOMATIC : Overstore : ETCDPLANZ : AUTOMATIC : G functions : ETCDPLANZ : AUTOMATIC : Auxiliary functions : ETCDB : Diagnostics : SA : Drift compensation axes 19-25DB : Diagnostics : SA : Drift compensation axes 26-30ETC for tool offsets GEO+BASEETC for tool offsets wearETC for zero offsetETC for angle of rotationETC for PLANEETC for R parameters channel-specificETC for R parameters centralChannel-specific ASCII R parameterChannel-specific ASCII R parameterChannel-specific ASCII R parameterChannel-specific ASCII R parameterChannel-specific ASCII R parameterChannel-specific ASCII R parameterChannel-specific ASCII R parameterSetting data : ETCDB : Setting data : Axis/spindle converterDB : SD : Spindle data : ETC : Axis/spindle converterDB : SD : General bits : ETC : Axis/spindle converter


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)




MB 245 :MB 246 :MB 247 :MB 248 :MB 249 :

DB : SD : Scale : ETC : Axis/spindle converterDB : SD : Axial bits : ETC : Axis/spindle converterDB : SD : Spindle data : Start angle : ETC : Axis/spindle converterM : AUT GB : Program editingM : DPL.AUT GB : Program editing

List of start-up menu blocks up to SW 3


MB 001 :MB 002 :MB 003 :MB 004 :MB 005 :MB 006 :MB 007 :MB 008 :MB 009 :MB 011 :MB 012 :MB 013 :MB 014 :MB 015 :MB 016 :MB 017 :MB 018 :MB 019 :MB 020 :MB 021 :MB 022 :MB 023 :MB 024 :MB 025 :MB 026 :MB 027 :MB 028 :MB 029 :MB 030 :MB 031 :MB 032 :MB 033 :MB 034 :MB 035 :MB 036 :MB 037 :MB 038 :MB 039 :MB 040 :MB 041 :

DB : Diagnostics : NC MD : Display file : ETCUZ : Data In/Out : Interface 1UZ : Data In/Out : Set devicesUZ : Diagnostics : IBN : NC MD : Rows of bits : Channel bits 2UZ : Initialize NC dataUZ : Delete/load machine dataUZ : Set display designUZ : NC alarmsUZ : Data In/Out : Interface 2Overall reset branch : Data I/O : Set devices, further interfacesDB : Diagnostics : Start-up : NC MD : Axial data 1 : etc.DB : Diagnostics : Start-up : NC MD : Axial data 2 : etc.DB : Diagnostics : Start-up : NC MD : Spindle data : etc.UZ : Overall resetUZ : PLC functionsUZ : Overall resetUZ : DB : Diagnostics : Start-up : NC MD : General dataUZ : DB : Diagnostics : Start-up : NC MD : Channel dataUZ : DB : Diagnostics : Start-up : NC MD : Axial data 1UZ : DB : Diagnostics : Start-up : NC MD : Axial data 2UZ : DB : Diagnostics : Start-up : NC MD : Spindle dataUnassignedUZ : DB : Diagnostics : Start-up : NC MD : Bit rows : General bitsUZ : DB : Diagnostics : Start-up : NC MD : Bit rows : Channel bits 1UZ : DB : Diagnostics : Start-up : NC MD : Bit rows : Axial bits 1UZ : DB : Diagnostics : Start-up : NC MD : Bit rows : Axial bits 2UZ : DB : Diagnostics : Start-up : NC MD : Bit rows : Spindle bitsUZ : DB : Diagnostics : Start-up : NC MD : Bit rows : Comp. flagsUZ : DB : Diagnostics : Start-up : MD : PLC : System dataUZ : DB : Diagnostics : Start-up : MD : PLC : FB dataUZ : DB : Diagnostics : Start-up : MD : PLC : User dataUZ : DB : Diagnostics : Start-up : MD : PLC : System bitsUZ : DB : Diagnostics : Start-up : MD : PLC : FB bitsUZ : DB : Diagnostics : Start-up : MD : PLC : FB User bitsUZ : DB : Diagnostics : Start-up : MD : Cycles : User data channelUZ : DB : Diagnostics : Start-up : MD : Cycles : User bits channelUZ : DB : Diagnostics : Start-up : MD : Cycles : User data centralUZ : DB : Diagnostics : Start-up : MD : Cycles : User bits centralDB : Diagnostics : Start-up : NC MD : Channel memory dataUZ : DB : Diagnostics : Start-up : MD : Cycles : Sys. data channel





MB 042 :MB 043 :MB 044 :MB 045 :

UZ : DB : Diagnostics : Start-up : MD : Cycles : Sys. bits channelUZ : DB : Diagnostics : Start-up : MD : Cycles : Sys. data centralUZ : DB : Diagnostics : Start-up : MD : Cycles : System bits centralDB : Diagnostics : Start-up : NC MD : Channel data : etc.

List of menu blocks as from SW 4


MB 001* :MB 002 :MB 003 :MB 004 :MB 005 :MB 006 :MB 007 :MB 008 :MB 009 :MB 010 :MB 011 :MB 012 :MB 013 :MB 014 :MB 015 :MB 016 :MB 017 :MB 018 :MB 019 :MB 020 :MB 021 :MB 022 :MB 023 :MB 024 :MB 025 :MB 026 :

MB 027 :MB 028 :MB 029 :MB 030 :MB 031 :MB 032 :MB 033 :MB 034 :MB 035 :MB 036 :MB 037 :MB 038 :MB 039 :MB 040 :MB 041 :

DB : Root menuDB : Parameter : SD : Scale : Position measuring signalsDB : Parameter : SD : Scale : Spindle data : Position meas. signalsDB : Parameter : SD : Gen. data : Position measuring signalsDB : PP : Tool offsets Geo + BaseAUTOMATIC : Basic display with current blockAUTOMATIC : OverstoreAUTOMATIC : Preset DRFAUTOMATIC : Program controlAUTOMATIC : etc. Block searchTEA : Block-by-block teachingDPL : AUT : Program control : ETCAUTOMATIC : Preset : HelpAUTOMATIC : Block search : HelpJOG : OverstoreTEACH IN : Overstore : ETC : Block searchJOG : HandwheelMDA : Basic displayMDA : OverstoreTEACH IN : Overstore : HelpMDA : Program controlTEACH IN : Basic displayTEACH IN : OverstoreDPL AUTOMATIC : Basic display : ETC : Block searchTEACH IN : Program controlDiagnostics : SA : NC SA : Axis individually : ETC : Driftcompensation axisTEACH IN : ETC : Block searchTEACH IN : Basic display : HelpDPL : Automatic : Program control : ETC : Block searchDB : PP : Tool offsets, wearDB : Diagn. : Start-up : NC MD : Rows of bits : Chan.-spec. bits 1DB : PP : Zero offsetDB : PP : Angle of rotationDB : PP : PlaneDB : PP : R parameter centralDB : PP : P parameter channel-specificDB : Diagnostics : Start-up : NC MD : Rows of bits : Axis-spec. bits 1DB : SD : Axial bitsDB : SD : General bitsDB : SD : Cycle data : System dataDB : SD : Cycle data : System bits


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)




MB 042 :MB 043 :MB 044 :MB 045 :MB 046 :MB 047 :MB 048* :MB 049 :MB 050 :MB 051 :MB 052 :MB 053 :MB 054 :MB 055 :MB 056 :MB 057 :

MB 058 :

MB 059 :

MB 060 :MB 061 :MB 062 :MB 063 :MB 064 :MB 065 :MB 066 :MB 067 :MB 068 :MB 069 :MB 070 :MB 071 :MB 072 :MB 073 :MB 074 :MB 075 :MB 076 :MB 077 :MB 078 :MB 079 :MB 080 :MB 081 :MB 082 :MB 083 :MB 084 :MB 085 :MB 086 :MB 087 :MB 088 :MB 089 :

DB : SD : Cycle data : User dataDB : SD : Cycle data : User bitsDB : Setting data : Spindle dataDiagnostics: SA : NC SA : Axis ind. : ETC : Drift comp. axes 5-8Diagnostics: SA : NC SA : Axis ind. : ETC : Drift comp. axes 9-12DB : Diagn. : Start-up : NC MD : Rows of bits : Chan.-spec. bits 2DB : ProgrammingDB : Programming : Overview main programDB : Programming : NCK : Editing : StoringAUT program control ETCDB : Diagnostics : Start-up : NC MD : Rows of bits : Axis-spec. bits 2Diagnostics: SA : NC SA : Axis ind. : ETC : Drift comp. axes 13-16Diagnostics: SA : NC SA : Axis ind. : ETC : Drift comp. axes 17-23Diagn. : SA : NC SA : Ax 5-8 and sp 5+6 : ETC : Drift comp. axesDB : Diagnostics: Start-up : NC MD : Rows of bits : Comp. flagsDiagn.: SA : NC SA : Ax 5-8 and sp 5+6 : ETC : Drift comp. axes9-12Diagn.: SA : NC SA : Ax 5-8 and sp 5+6 : ETC : Drift comp. axes13-16Diagn.: SA : NC SA : Ax 5-8 and sp 5+6 : ETC : Drift comp. axes17-23DB : Programming : HelpDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : OverviewAUT : Program control : ETC : Block searchDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : IW : KHDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : IW : KFDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : IW : KTDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : IW : KCDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : QW : KMAUT : Program control : ETC : Block search : HelpDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : QW : KHDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : QW : KFDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : QW : KTDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : QW : KCDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : FW : KMDB : Programming : NC editing : Editor settingsDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : FW : KHDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : FW : KFDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : FW : KTDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : FW : KCDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : DBDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : DB : DW : KMDB : Programming : Overview subroutines : HelpDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : DB : DW : KHDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : DB : DW : KFDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : DB : DW : KTDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : DB : DW : KCDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : DX : DD parallel : KHDB : Parameter : SD : Sp. data : Start angle : Position meas. signalsDB : Diagnostics : Start-up : NC MD : Channel memory dataDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : DX





MB 090 :MB 091 :MB 092 :MB 093 :MB 094 :MB 095 :MB 096 :MB 097 :MB 098 :MB 099 :MB 100 :MB 101 :MB 102 :MB 103 :MB 104 :MB 105 :MB 106 :MB 107 :MB 108 :MB 109 :MB 110 :MB 111 :MB 112 :MB 113 :MB 114 :MB 115 :MB 116 :MB 117 :MB 118 :MB 119 :MB 120 :MB 121 :MB 122 :MB 123 :MB 124 :MB 125 :MB 126:MB 127 :MB 128 :MB 129 :MB 130 :MB 131 :MB 132 :MB 133 :MB 134 :

MB 135 :MB 136 :MB 137 :MB 138 :MB 139 :

DB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : DX : DW : KMDB : Programming : NC editor help : HelpDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : DX : DW : KHDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : DX : DW : KFDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : DX : DW : KTDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : DX : DW : KCDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : DX : DD parallel : KHDB : Programming : G functions G groups 1 and 2 : HelpDB : Programm. help : ContinueDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : CDB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : TJOG : INC variableNC info (for MMC)PLC display : NC machine dataMachine data : General dataPLC statusDB : Diagnostics : Start-up : NC MD : Channel data 1DB : Diagnostics : Start-up : NC MD : Axial data 1DB : Diagnostics : Start-up : NC MD : Axial data 2DB : Diagnostics : Start-up : NC MD : Spindle data 1DB : Programming : G functions G groups 3 to 6 : HelpTEACH IN : MDA modeDB : Diagnostics : Start-up : NC MD : Rows of bits : General bitsDB : Diagnostics : Start-up : NC MD : Rows of bits : Spindle-sp. bitsDPLANZ AUTOMATIC : Basic display with current blockDB : Diagnostics : Start-up : PLC MD : System dataDB : Programming : G functions G gr. 8 to 12 : HelpDB : Diagnostics : Start-up : PLC MD : FB dataDB : Diagnostics : Start-up : PLC MD : User dataDB : Diagnostics : Start-up : PLC MD : System bitsDB : Diagnostics : Start-up : PLC MD : FB bitsDB : Diagnostics : Start-up : PLC MD : User bitsDB : Diagnostics : Start-up : Cycle MD : User data channelDPL_AUT : GB : ETC : SSDB : Diagnostics : Start-up : Cycle MD : User bits channelDB : Diagnostics : Start-up : Cycle MD : User data centralDB : Diagnostics : Start-up : Cycle MD : User bits centralDiagnostics : Service display : NC service : Axes and spindles 1-4DB : Diagnostics : Start-up : Cycle MD : System data channelDB : Diagnostics : Start-up : Cycle MD : System bits channelDB : Diagnostics : Start-up : Cycle MD : System data centralDB : Diagnostics : Start-up : Cycle MD : System bits centralDB : Setting data : Working area limitationDB : Setting data : General dataDiagnostics : SA : NC SA : Ax 5-8 and 5+6 : ETC : Drift comp. ax24+30Diagnostics : SA : NC SA : Ax 9-16 : ETC : Drift comp. axes 13-16Diagnostics : SA : NC SA : Ax 9-16 : ETC : Drift comp. axes 17-23DB : Diagnostics : SA : PLC status : IW : KMDB : Programming : NCKDPLANZ AUTOMATIC : Overstore


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)




MB 140 :MB 141 :MB 142 :MB 143 :MB 144 :MB 145 :MB 146 :MB 147 :MB 148 :MB 149 :MB 150 :MB 151 :MB 152 :MB 153 :MB 154 :MB 155 :MB 156 :MB 157 :MB 158 :MB 159 :MB 160 :MB 161 :MB 162 :MB 163 :MB 164 :MB 165 :MB 166 :MB 167 :MB 168 :MB 169 :MB 170 :MB 171 :MB 172 :MB 173:MB 174 :MB 175 :MB 176 :MB 177 :MB 178 :MB 179 :MB 180 :MB 181 :MB 182 :MB 183 :MB 184 :MB 185 :MB 186 :MB 187 :MB 188 :MB 189 :MB 190 :

DPLANZ AUTOMATIC : Program controlDB : Programming : G functions G gr. 13 and 14 : HelpDPLANZ AUTOMATIC : Help functionsJOG : Basic displayJOG : Reference point approachDB : Programming : Support : PlaneDB : Programming : Support : Plane : Plane G16DB : Setting data : ScaleDiagnostics : SA : NC SA : Further axes 5-8 : Spindles 5+6Diagnostics : Service display : NC service : Axis individuallyDiagnostics : Service display : NC service : Spindle individuallyDiagnostics : SA : NC SA : Ax 9-16 : ETC : Drift comp. ax 24-30Diagnostics : SA : NC SA : Ax 1-4 and sp 1-4 : ETC : Drift comp. axDiagnostics : SA : NC SA : Ax and sp : ETC : Drift comp. axes 5-8M : TEACH IN : Program editing : Block searchDPL : AUT : PB : ETC : SS : HelpDiagnostics : SA : NC SA : Further axes 9-16Diagnostics : SA : NC SA : Ax and sp. : ETC : Drift comp. axes 17-23M : AUT : PP edit.: SSDB : Setting data : Start angleDiagnostics : SA : NC SA : Ax and sp : ETC : Drift comp. axes 24-30Automatic : Basic display : ETCAutomatic : Overstore : ETCUMS infoDB : SD : Spindle data : Start angle : ETCTEACH IN : Overstore : ETCDiagnostics : SA : NC SA : Ax individually : ETC : Drift comp. ax 24-30AUTOMATIC : Block search : HelpJOG : .. : Finish threading : Setting-upDB : Programming : Help : G funct. G gr. 15-19DB : SD : General bits : HelpDB : SD : Axial bits : HelpJOG : .. : Finish threading : Setting-upDPLANZ JOG : Basic displayDPLANZ JOG : OverstoreDPLANZ JOG : INC variableDPLANZ AUTOMATIC : Current G functionsDPLANZ JOG : Reference point approachedDPL_AUT : Overstore : ETC : SSFinish threading : Setting-upDPL AUTOMATIC Basic display : ETC block searchDPL AUTOMATIC Overstore : ETC block searchDPL AUTOMATIC Current block ETC : Block searchAUTOMATIC Overstore ETC : Block searchDPL_JOG : .. : ETCDB : Program. : Overview subrout. : Help : HelpDB : Data In/Out : File transfer with computer linkTEACH IN : ETCMachine data initial display for Windows solutionDPL_JOG : .. : ETCAUTOMATIC : Block search : Help





MB 191 :MB 192 :MB 193 :MB 194 :MB 195 :MB 196 :MB 197 :MB 198 :MB 199 :MB 200 :MB 201 :MB 202 :MB 203 :MB 204 :MB 205 :MB 206 :MB 207 :MB 208 :MB 209 :MB 210 :MB 211 :MB 212 :MB 213 :MB 214 :MB 215 :MB 216 :MB 217 :MB 218 :MB 219 :MB 220 :MB 221 :MB 222:MB 223 :MB 224 :MB 225 :MB 226 :MB 227 :

MB 228 :

MB 229 :MB 230 :MB 231 :MB 232 :MB 233 :MB 234 :MB 235 :MB 236 :MB 237 :MB 238 :MB 239 :

AUTOMATIC : Block search : HelpAUTOMATIC : Block search : HelpDB : PP : Tool offsets : Geometry (new tool offset)DB : Program. : NC editor help : Help : Cursor keysDB : PP : Tool offset : Basis and wear (new tool offset)ETC for GEO and basis, wear (new tool offset)DPLANZ : AUTOMATIC : Preset DRFTEA : Block-by-block teaching. Setting block formatDPLANZ : Automatic : Preset : HelpETC for GEO and basis, wear (new tool offset)DB : PP : Plane (new tool offset)DPL_JOG : .. : ETCDPLANZ Automatic : Basic display : ETCDPLANZ Automatic : Overstore : ETCDPLANZ Automatic : G functions : ETCDPL_JOG : .. : Finish threading : Setting-upDPLANZ : Automatic : Help functions : ETCDiagnostics : SA : NC SA : Ax and sp : ETC : Drift comp. axes 9-12Diagnostics : SA : NC SA : Ax and sp : ETC : Drift comp. axes 13-16ETC for GEO + BASISDPL_AUT : PB : ETC : SSDPL_AUT : GF : ETC : SSDPL_AUT : HF : ETC : SSM : AUT : PP edit. : SSDB : Programming : Help : G functions group 7DB : Programming : Help : G functions groups 20, 24-27Channel-spec. ASCII R parameterM : TEACH IN : ETC : SS : PBM : TEACH IN : UeS : ETC : SS : PBM : TEACH IN : ETC : PK : SS : PBM : AUT : PP edit. : SS : PBM : DPLAUT : PK : SS : PBM : AUT : SS : HLPM : DPLAUT : SS : HLPParam. : Diagn. : SA : NotebookParameter : Diagnostics : SA : Notebook : Notebook SiemensParameter : Diagnostics : SA : Notebook : Noteb. Siemens :Progr.disp.Parameter : Diagnostics : SA : Notebook : Noteb. Siemens :Progr.disp.ETC for JOG : Overstore (finish thread./setting-up)ETC for JOG : INC variable (finish thread./setting-up)ETC for JOG : Basic display (finish thread./setting-up)ETC for DPLANZ JOG : Basic display (finish thread./setting-up)ETC for DPLANZ JOG : Overstore (finish thread./setting-up)ETC for DPLANZ JOG INC variable (finish thread./setting-up)DPL_JOG : .. : Finish threading : Setting-upDPL_JOG : .. : Finish threading : Setting-upTEACH IN : MDA mode : Program controlSetting data ETCAxis/spindle converter


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)




MB 240 :MB 241 :MB 242 :MB 243 :MB 244 :MB 245 :MB 246 :MB 247 :MB 248 :MB 249 :MB 250 :MB 251 :MB 252 :MB 253 :MB 254 :MB 255 :MB 256 :MB 257 :MB 258 :MB 259 :MB 260 :MB 261 :MB 262 :MB 263 :MB 264 :MB 265 :MB 266 :MB 267:MB 268 :MB 269 :MB 270 :MB 271 :MB 272 :MB 273 :MB 274 :MB 275 :MB 276 :MB 277 :MB 278 :MB 279 :MB 280 :MB 281 :MB 282 :MB 283 :MB 284 :MB 285 :MB 286 :MB 287 :MB 288 :MB 289 :

Editing display for test only, later MB048!!!TEACH IN : Edit modeTEACH IN : Edit mode : Setting block formatDB : Progr. : Help : Continue : ContinueDB : Progr. : Help : Cont. : Cont. : Cont.DB : Progr. : Help : Cont. : Cont. : Cont. : Cont.DB : Progr. : Help : Cont. : Cont. : Cont. : Cont. : Cont.DB : DS : Spindle data : Start angle : ETC : Axis/spindle converterM : AUT GB : Programm. editingM : DPL.AUT GB : Programm. editingDB : Parameter : SD : Position measuring signalsAUT : GB : ETC : Search : Program controlDB : Parameter : SD : ETC : Fixed stopSetting data : ETC : Gear interpolationTEACH IN : ETC : Program editingM : DPL.AUT GB : Programm. editing : ETCAUT : Program editing : ETCTEACH IN : Edit mode : ETCTEACH IN : Block-by-block teaching : ETCTEACH IN : ETC : Progr. editing : ETCDB : Programming : ETCAUT : PB : ETC : SS : Program controlMDA : Basic display : ETCMDA GB : ETC : F/S on-lineTEACH IN GB : ETC : F/S on-lineMachine data : General data 1DPLAUT : Overstore : Prog. : Selecting jobMachine data : General data 2AUT : Overst. : ETC : SS : Program controlMachine data : Channel data 2Machine data : Channel data 2 (to channel-spec. bits 2)DPL AUT : Program control : Selecting prog./jobAutomatic : ETC : Axis-spec. G functionsTEA : ETC : Axis-spec. G functionsMDA basic display : ETC : Axis-spec. G functionsMachine data : Channel data : Bit listsMachine data : Spindle data : Spindle data 2Machine data : General bits 1Machine data : General data 1 : Rows of bitsDB : Programm. : NC editor help : M funct. : HelpMachine data : General data 2 : Rows of bitsMachine data : Axial data : Axial data 3MD : Axial data : Axial data 4MD : Axial data : Axial data 3 : Rows of bitsMD : Axial data : Axial data 4 : Rows of bitsMD : Spindle data : Spindle data 2 : Rows of bitsDB : Programming : NCK : SaveDB : Programming : NCK : CopyAUT : Selecting prog./jobAUT : Overstore : Selecting prog./job





MB 290 :MB 291 :MB 292 :MB 293 :MB 294 :MB 295 :MB 296 :MB 297 :MB 298 :MB 299 :MB 300 :MB 301 :MB 302 :MB 303 :MB 304 :MB 305 :MB 306 :MB 307 :MB 308 :MB 309 :MB 310 :MB 311 :MB 312 :MB 313 :MB 314:MB 315 :MB 316 :MB 317 :MB 318 :MB 319 :MB 320 :MB 321 :MB 322 :MB 323 :MB 324 :MB 325 :MB 326 :MB 327 :MB 328 :

MB 329 :MB 330 :MB 331 :MB 332 :MB 333 :MB 334 :MB 335 :MB 336 :MB 337 :

AUT : Program control : Selecting prog./jobAUT : Program editing : SaveTEACH IN : ETC : Program editing : SaveTEACH IN : Overstore : ETC : SaveTEACH IN : ETC : SaveDPL : AUT GB : Program editing : SaveTEACH IN : Selecting programDPL AUT Basic display with current block : Selecting prog./jobDPL AUT : Help functions : Selecting prog./jobDPL AUT : Current G functions : Selecting prog./jobTEACH IN : Overstore : Selecting programDPL AUT : Basic display : ETC : Axis-specific G functionsDPL JOG : Basic display : ETC : Axis-specific G functionsJOG basic display : ETC : Axis-specific G functionsTEACH IN : Basic display : Help : ContinueTEACH IN : Overstore : Help : ContinueAUT GB : ETC : Ext. overst.:AUT GB : ETC : Ext. overst.: ETCAUT GB : ETC : Ext. overst.: Program controlAUT GB : ETC : Ext. overst.: ETC : Axis-specific G funct.JOG GB : ETC : F/S on-lineTI GB : ETC : Ext. overst.TI GB : ETC : Ext. overst. : ETCTI GB : ETC : Ext. overst. : Program controlAUT GB : ETC : F/S on-lineTI GB : ETC : Ext. overst. : ETC : Axis-spec. G funct.JOG GB : ETC : Ext. overstoringJOG GB : ETC : Ext. overstoring : ETCJOG GB : ETC : Ext. overstoring : Program controlDPLAUT GB : ETC : F/S on-lineJOG GB : ETC : Ext. overstoring : ETC : Axis-spec. G funct.DPL JOG : ETC : Ext. overst.DPL JOG : ETC : Ext. overst. : Program controlDPL JOG GB : ETC : F/S on-lineDPL JOG : ETC : Ext. overst. : ETC : Axis-spec. G funct.DPL JOG : ETC : Ext. overst. : ETCDPL AUT : ETC : Ext. overst.DPL AUT : ETC : Ext. overst. : Program controlDB : Prog. : Continue : Continue : Continue : Continue : Continue :Continue : ContinueDPL AUT : ETC : Ext. overst. : ETCDPL AUT : ETC : Ext. overst. : ETC : Axis-spec. G funct.AUT GB : ETC : Stop/retractDPL AUT GB : ETC : Stop/retractJOG GB : ETC : Stop/retractJOG DPL GB : ETC : Stop/retractTEA GB : ETC : Stop/retractTEA GM : ETC : ETCMDA GM : ETC : Stop/retract


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



Menus can also be inserted by softkey, in the same way as by the PLC. This menu insertionfacility is configured with the softkey function number, but the menu being inserted does nothave to be integrated in the normal operating sequence tree. The menu that is to be insertedcan take the form of an isolated menu or it may be a menu integrated in another menu tree.As is the case with PLC insertion, any number of insertions can be made.

Mixed insertions are still possible. There are two distinct cases. In the first case (if the PLChas not set any priority) up to 2 insertions can be active: one from the PLC and one bysoftkey. Any attempt to make a further insertion, either from the PLC or by softkey, is abortedand results in a fault message. In the second instance (PLC has set priority before the firstPLC insertion) an inserted PLC menu (with priority) can be masked by a softkey menu, but thePLC is nevertheless able to insert additional menus.

Any user menus (UMS menus) can be specified as new mode basic menus by means of NCmachine data (NC MD). These MD become effective with Power On. If the MD value is = 0,the normal system basic menu is displayed in the relevant operating mode.

The following NC MDs are effective for the modes stated below:

MD Mode

228 User menu for MDA229 User menu for JOG230 User menu for TEACH IN231 User menu for AUTOMATIC232 User menu for JOG/REFPOINT

Note:

Menus can thus be inserted at practically any time anywhere in the normal operator tree.Menus that otherwise occur in the REPOS function, for example, can also be inserted in theAUTOMATIC mode. The permanently configured tree structure can be abandoned at will.Impractical menu sequences may result in this connection, especially in the case of insertionswith mode and mode group changes. As far as menu insertions are concerned, it is up to thePLC user program to ensure that the operating sequences are sensible. No checking ormonitoring can be implemented by the system program.



9.3.1 Softkey function calls DB 59


The following section explains the softkey functions that are triggered via the PLC. The basicdescription of the softkey functions can be found in the WS 800A User's Guide.

The principle of the softkey calls is explained by means of the "Extended overstorage"function. This description is followed by a table with the possible SK function calls.

The "Extended overstorage" function can be selected as follows:

Fct.No.

Softkey function Parameter Number Error messages

251 Selection of extendedoverstorage

Channelnumber

1 3 General data error (internal error)10 Interrupt program38 Overstorage active61 Error in menu tree (DB data

length exceeded) (wrong numberof parameters)

86 Option not existing138 Function disabled (operating

mode)205 Function disabled - already active

(only for selection via PLC)

165 Deselection ofextended overstorage

Channelnumber

1 3 General data error (internal error)61 Error in menu tree (DB data

length exceeded) (wrong numberof parameters)

86 Option not existing138 Function disabled (operating

mode)139 Finish extended overstorage (NC

Start disabled)

Channel number: 1 to 6 corresponding channel0 corresponds to channel selected

Function selection is executed via the interface of the menu selection (DB 40). The functionand the supply parameters are in DB 59, starting with a data word that can be specified by theuser in DB 40. The number of the dialog text that would be displayed if this function waswrongly programmed is entered as an error acknowledgement in DB 59. All parameters mustbe entered in KF format.

The sequence in the PLC is as follows:

Action Acknowledgement

Write ASCII block "Function executed" in DB 40, DR 51, bit 0

Start selecting function DB 36 "Data transfer ended"

Specify NC Start Channel status: "Program executing" waiting for "Programinterrupted" or "Reset of NC" at M17/M30

Start deselecting function "Function executed" in DB 40, DR 51, bit 0


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)










PLC DB 40/DB 59 selection fct. no. 251or"Extended overstorage" softkey

1

2

3

4

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a







PLC DB 40/DB 59 deselection fct. no. 165or"Extended overstorage" recall






FB 62 data group78 "Write ASCII block"

DB 36 "Data transfer ended"





Write block






Menu selection

1

2

3

4





NC Start signal





NC Stop signal

Mode Channel status Possible action PLC ASCIIinput

AUTOMATIC,JOG, TEACH IN

Active

Reset

NC Stop

Program stop

No extended overstorage possible

Extended overstorage



Possible

Possible

Possible

Possible

Extendedoverstorage

Active

Reset

NC Stop

Program stop

No ending possibleNo simple overstorage possible

Ending possibleNo simple overstorage possible



Not allowed

Possible

Not allowed

Not allowed

Simpleoverstorage

Irrelevant No extended overstorage possible Possible

MDA Irrelevant No extended overstorage possible Not allowed




9.3.1.1 Overview of softkey function calls from PLC

Fct.No.

Softkey function Parameter Number Messages

1 Delete password ––– ––– After calling of the function No., thepassword is deleted.

2 Hardware reset ––– ––– Triggering of a hardware reset.

29 Edit operator guidancemacro

––– ––– Values accepted

40 Read actual value atplayback

1 Parameter

1:

Store position

2:

Generate block

1 According to the parameter, a partprogram block is generated or a stringwith the actual value of the axis isinserted in the part program at thecursor position.

88 Triggering: Driftcompensation Servo

1 Parameter

Enable axis,

enter MD

(MD 2720ff)

1 Triggering of drift compensation andentering of drift compensation in MD2720 to 2749 (corresponding to axisselected under "Parameter").

165 Deselection Extendedoverstorage Main level

1 Parameter

0:

Current channel

1 ... 6:

Channel no.

1 Deselection is allowed only from themain level of the overstorage menutree. Deselection is possible only when"Extended overstorage" is active andthe corresponding channel is in theReset or Stop state.

248 EnableJOG/handwheel inTeach-in

––– Teach-in allowed in master channelonly.

249 Block searchReset pointer topreselection pointer

1 Parameter

(specification of

channel)

0/-1:

Current channel

-2:

All channels

1 ... 6: Channel

1 Copy the reset pointer to thepreselection pointer.

251 Extended overstorage 1 Parameter

0:

Current channel

1 ...6: Channel

1 –––


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



9.3.1.2 Messages of softkey function calls

ERROR MESSAGE DW x

Error No. Text

3457

101213171819232728384852545660616566676971727374757677787981828386

101105108132138141

General data errorsFormat errorProgram no. not allowedProgram preselection not allowedInterrupt programProgram not availableMDA channel assignedMDA memory overflowProgram erase-protectedProgram already availablePreselect programCycle disableStop axesOverstorage activeFormat errorAxis not in this mode group"Operator guidance macro block" too longValues acceptedOnly possible after "RESET"Wrong supplyWrong axis specifiedPlease initiate NC Reset, NC Start disabled!Drift compensation data errorIllegal data typeEditing not allowedMarking allowed in the present planeWrong G functionTool number not allowedKeyswitch missingProgram preselection forbidden (mode)NC Start enabledChannel number illegalProgram being enteredProgram being editedProgram being read-out, compared or editedPlease check access rightsOption not availableName not allowedFunction disabledOnly possible with "Program stop"JOG : Handwheel disabledFunction disabled (mode)PLC overstore active - function disabled



9.3.2 Signals from PLC to NCK


START SIGNAL FROM USER D 51.8

1 signal: The user sets this signal after entering• a function number/job number and• a menu number or• a mode group number or• a channel numberin the NC-PLC interface.

0 signal: By the user after receiving• a positive acknowledgement for menu selection• or after a negative acknowledgement (error).

Acknowledgements

INSERTIONS EXECUTED D 51.0

1 signal: By the PLC operating system if a menu selection requested by the user has beenexecuted.

0 signal: By the PLC operating system after the user has confirmed the acknowledgementby resetting the START SIGNAL.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



ERROR D 51.1

1 signal: By the PLC operating system if the user has entered an illegal menu number orfunction number in the user interface.

0 signal: By the PLC operating system after the user has confirmed the acknowledgementby resetting the START SIGNAL.

Error messages during menu insertions

Negative acknowledgements are output to the PLC in the event of the following errors:

• If the entry menu (EM) is not configured.

• If entry menu = exit menu (EM = XM).

• Insertion attempts by the PLC from a start-up menu.

• If a user memory submodule (UMS) menu has been selected but no UMS is available.(MD 5015 bit 6 = 0)

• If, in the case of mixed insertions (PLC and softkey already active), the PLC wishes tospecify a new XM but has not yet implemented the first insertion. Priority is ignored in thiscase.

• If, in the case of mixed insertions, no priority has been set and the PLC attempts to inserta second menu.

• In the event of RECALL by the PLC while SPECIAL RECALL is requested.

• In the event of a mode group change if the mode group is not defined.

• In the event of a channel change if the channel in the mode group is not defined.

INSERTION ALREADY ACTIVE D 51.2

1 signal: By the PLC operating system if several PLCs attempt to execute an insertion atthe same time in a single cycle.

0 signal: By the PLC operating system after the user has confirmed the acknowledgementby resetting the “Start” signal.

OWN INSERTION ACTIVE D 51.6

1 signal: By the PLC operating system if the first insertion was implemented without anyerrors. The PLC is therefore in the first insertion menu at least.

0 signal: By the PLC operating system if no own PLC insertion is active.




JOB NUMBER/FUNCTION NUMBER DW 52

The PLC can select the desired function here:Job number Meaning(Hexadecimal)

0: No request1: Insert menu from system area (plus mode group and channel)2: Insert menu from system area (plus mode group and channel)3: New exit menu in system area4: New exit menu in user area5: Execute recall6: Request priority for PLC7: Deselect priority for PLC (incl. ”special recall”)8: Request ”special recall” + priority9: Deselect ”special recall” (priority remains)0A: No basic display when changing from the data to the machine area0B: No basic display when changing from the data to the machine area0C: Execute mode group change0D: Execute channel change0E: Initiate menu stack reset0F: Activate dialog text10: Deactivate dialog text11: PLC softkey functions (extended overstore)

MENU NUMBER/DIALOG TEXT NUMBER DW 53

Here the user specifies the desired menu number/dialog text number to be inserted (seeuser's guide: WS 800 A configuring software). If no text is available the function is notexecuted. Whether alarm or dialog is effected is determined by the evaluation in the messageblock (MASTER CONTROL/MESSAGE TEXT).

With function no. 11 (PLC softkey functions), the DW address of the record is entered here inDB 59.

MODE GROUP NUMBER DL 54

Here the user specifies the desired mode group number.

CHANNEL NUMBER DR 54

Here the user specifies the desired channel number.

SOFTWARE COMPONENT DW 54

The software component is only relevant for the alarm concept.

The software component contains the address of the submodule that is to process the dialogtext. You enter here the value 503H. Other entries are possible for future applications and forOEM configurations, but these have no effect.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



KEY LOCK TO NC (EDIT, INPUT, CANCEL) D 55.10 to D 55.8

1 signal: Disables relevant key for operator.

0 signal: Enables relevant key for operator.

Each key can be disabled or enabled individually. These disable and enable signals are nottransferred from the PLC operating system to the NC cyclically, but only if the ”Request forkey lock” bit is set to 1.

REQUEST FOR KEY LOCK D 55.15

1 signal: The key lock bits (Input, Edit, Cancel) are transferred to the NC.

0 signal: The key lock bits are not transferred to the NC.

Note:

If a PLC has executed a menu insertion, it is also able systematically to disable or enable theInput, Edit or Cancel keys. If no insertion is activated, the user can request KEY LOCK.

9.3.3 Signals from the NC to the PLC

SPEZIAL RECALL D 56.8

1 signal: The PLC operating sytem sets this signal to “1” for one PLC cycle if the PLChas requested the special recall from the NC before the first menu insertion (seejob number) and then inserted menus, and the recall key is operated. Thisspecial recall means that on operating the recall key, a menu is inserted whichmust be specified by the PLC, and not the previous menu. The user must thenspecify the desired “Recall menu” at the interface and activate with the specialrecall key.

0 signal: After one PLC cycle with special recall set, otherwise no significance.

DISPLAYED CHANNEL NO. DR 56

The number of the channel displayed at the operator panel is updated by the PLC operatingsystem every PLC cycle.



9.4 Cursor data to PLC


The current cursor position on the NC screen is transferred to the PLC.

The field definitions of the data indicated in the field are transferred. Users are familiar withthese field definitions from the WS 800 Planning Guide:

• Data group• Data type• Data number• Data block number (for PLC data)

These parameters are referred to as ”cursor data” in the following.

Note:

The contents of the field indicated by the cursor are not transferred.The PLC can monitor the actual cursor position in all display types of both the standard anduser areas.

Functional procedure

The cursor data are transferred to the user interface only if a change occurs.

CURSOR DW 57 to DW 63

List of cursor data

Designation: • Data group base• Data type base• DB/DX number base• DW number base• Data group pointer• Data type pointer• DB/DX number pointer• DW number pointer• Block number


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



Meaning of cursor data when transferred to the PLC

Extended inputdisplay (indirect

addressing)

List display(table)

Static display(input display)

Address ofNC/PLC data

With base datanumber


Effective datanumber



Base address:Data groupData typeData numberData block*

Address ofpointer

containing the

offset datanumber

(can be omitted)

Pointer address:Data groupData typeData numberData block*

Display type

Cursor data

Extended tabledisplay (relativeblock numbering)

Extended tabledisplay (absoluteblock numbering)





Relative blocknumber

Absolute blocknumber

= Effective datanumber

Block number:= Line number in atable

Further display types

PP processing display Cursor data same as static display

Text display PP list display No cursor providedGraphic simulation

Configuring - Operation

The ”Cursor position to PLC” function is a system function that does not require any additionalconfiguring by the operator.

The user must decide how to use the data made available at the user interface. To do so, it isnecessary to know the field definitions (identifiers for data group, type, number...) which areused for the configuring of displays.

To use this function it is therefore absolutely essential to be familiar with the WS 800APlanning Guide.

_______*) Only with display of PLC data



9.5 User key signals


Caution:

The operator panel key codes (not the machine control panel) are not reported to the PLC ifthe “MMC area active” signal = 1.

DYNAMIC SIGNALS DL 100, DL 101


0 signal: - Key not pressed- After a PLC cycle

Note:

Several keys can be pressed at the same time.

STATIC SIGNALS DR 100, DR 101


0 signal: Key not pressed

Note:

Several keys can be pressed at the same time.

LEDS DW 102

1 signal: Corresponding LED on

0 signal: LED not on

KEY HEXADECIMAL CODE DW 103

In the case of the SINUMERIK 840, the key signals are output in the KEY HEXADECIMALCODE byte.

FLEXOS CODE DW 109

The Flexos code is transferred 1:1 from the NC PLC interface to DW 109.

DL: ASCII codeDR: Status byte

The following allocations apply:

NCK AREA IN FOREGROUND (SW 5 and higher) DW 104


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



Keyno.

Status byte

ASCIIcode

Status byte

ASCIIcode

1 A a 41h 61h 00h 41h 04h 61h

2 B b 42h 62h 00h 42h 04h 62h

3 C c 43h 63h 00h 43h 04h 63h

4 D d 44h 64h 00h 44h 04h 64h

5 E e 45h 65h 00h 45h 04h 65h

6 F f 46h 66h 00h 46h 04h 66h

7 G g 47h 67h 00h 47h 04h 67h

8 H h 48h 68h 00h 48h 04h 68h

9 I i 49h 69h 00h 49h 04h 69h

10 J j 4ah 6ah 00h 4ah 04h 6ah

11 K k 4bh 6bh 00h 4bh 04h 6bh

12 L l 4ch 6ch 00h 4ch 04h 6ch

13 M m 4dh 6dh 00h 4dh 04h 6dh

14 N n 4eh 6eh 00h 4eh 04h 6eh

15 O o 4fh 6fh 00h 4fh 04h 6fh

16 P p 50h 70h 00h 50h 04h 70h

17 Q q 51h 71h 00h 51h 04h 71h

18 R r 52h 72h 00h 52h 04h 72h

19 S s 53h 73h 00h 53h 04h 73h

20 T t 54h 74h 00h 54h 04h 74h

21 U u 55h 75h 00h 55h 04h 75h

23 V v 56h 76h 00h 56h 04h 76h

24 W w 57h 77h 00h 57h 04h 77h

25 X x 58h 78h 00h 58h 04h 78h

26 Y y 59h 79h 00h 59h 04h 79h

27 Z z 5ah 7ah 00h 5ah 04h 7ah

28 BLANK _ 20h 5fh 00h 20h 04h 5fh

29 7 ( 37h 28h 00h 37h 04h 28h

30 8 ) 38h 29h 00h 38h 04h 29h

31 9 : 39h 3ah 00h 39h 04h 3ah

32 / ” 2fh 22h 00h 2fh 04h 22h

33 % LF 25h 0ah 00h 25h 04h 0ah

Key Key code

Operator panel

KYRU II code FLEXOS 16-bit character set

Normal ShiftShiftStatus

byte 44h

NormalStatus

byte 40h




Keyno.

Status byte

ASCIIcode

Status byte

ASCIIcode

34 ALT \ 9dh 9eh 20h 00h 24h 00h

35 88h b8h 14h 01h 14h 01h

36 4 [ 34h 5bh 00h 34h 04h 5bh

37 5 ] 35h 5dh 00h 35h 04h 5dh

38 6 ? 36h 3fh 00h 36h 04h 3fh

39 * ' 2ah 27h 00h 2ah 04h 27h

40 9bh 9ch 10h 0ch 14h 0ch

41 99h c9h 14h 0bh 14h 0bh

42 free 9ah cah 00h 1bh 04h 1bh

43 1 < 31h 3ch 00h 31h 04h 3ch

44 2 > 32h 3eh 00h 32h 04h 3eh

45 3 ! 33h 21h 00h 33h 04h 21h

46 - ^ 2dh 5eh 00h 2dh 04h 5eh

47 Home free a8h cbh 20h 18h 24h 18h

48 Cursorup

free 97h c7h 20h 10h 24h 10h

49 Page up free 93h c3h 20h 14h 24h 14h

50 = @ 3dh 40h 00h 3dh 04h 40h

51 0 ; 30h 3bh 00h 30h 04h 3bh

52 . +/- 2eh 8dh 00h 2eh 24h 44h

53 + , 2bh 2ch 00h 2bh 04h 2ch

54 Cursorleft

free 95h c5h 20h 12h 24h 12h

55 free 92h c2h 20h 1ah 24h 1ah

56 Cursor right

free 96h c6h 20h 13h 24h 13h

57 free 91h c1h 00h 08h 04h 08h

58 free 90h c0h 20h 0ah 24h 0ah

59 free 8fh bfh 20h 09h 24h 09h

60 free 8eh beh 00h 0dh 04h 0dh

61 End free a9h cch 20h 08h 24h 08h

62 Cursordown

free 98h c8h 20h 11h 24h 11h

Key Key code

Operator panel

NormalStatus

byte 40h



byte 44h

i i

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



Keyno.

Status byte

ASCIIcode

Status byte

ASCIIcode

63 Pagedown

free 94h c4h 20h 15h 24h 15h

64 free free aah abh 20h 00h 24h 00h

65 8bh bbh 10h 01h 10h 01h

66 Recall Specialrecall

87h 8ah 10h 02h 14h 02h

67 Soft-key 1

Soft-key 8

80h b0h 10h 03h 14h 03h

68 Soft-key 2

Soft-key 9

81h b1h 10h 04h 14h 04h

69 Soft-key 3

Soft-key 10

82h b2h 10h 05h 14h 05h

70 Soft-key 4

Soft-key 11

83h b3h 10h 06h 14h 06h

71 Soft-key 5

Soft-key 12

84h b4h 10h 07h 14h 07h

72 Soft-key 6

Soft-key 13

85h b5h 10h 08h 14h 08h

73 Soft-key 7

Soft-key 14

86h b6h 10h 09h 14h 09h

74 Etc. free 89h b9h 10h 0ah 14h 0ah

75 8ch bch 10h 0bh 10h 0bh

76 Soft-key 8

Soft-key 8

d0h e0h 14h 03h 14h 03h

77 Soft-key 9

Soft-key 9

d1h e1h 14h 04h 14h 04h

78 Soft-key 10

Soft-key 10

d2h e2h 14h 05h 14h 05h

79 Soft-key 11

Soft-key 11

d3h e3h 14h 06h 14h 06h

80 Soft-key 12

Soft-key 12

d4h e4h 14h 07h 14h 07h

81 Soft-key 13

Soft-key 13

d5h e5h 14h 08h 14h 08h

82 Soft-key 14

Soft-key 14

d6h e6h 14h 09h 14h 09h

Key Key code

Operator panel

NormalStatus

byte 40h



byte 44h

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

M

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

M




Keyno.

Status byte

ASCIIcode

Status byte

ASCIIcode

1 ` ~ 01h 01h 00h 60h 04h 7eh

2 1 ! 02h 02h 00h 31h 04h 21h

3 2 @ 03h 03h 00h 32h 04h 40h

4 3 # 04h 04h 00h 33h 04h 23h

5 4 $ 05h 05h 00h 34h 04h 24h

6 5 % 06h 06h 00h 35h 04h 25h

7 6 ^ 07h 07h 00h 36h 04h 5eh

8 7 & 08h 08h 00h 37h 04h 26h

9 8 * 09h 09h 00h 38h 04h 2ah

10 9 ( 0ah 0ah 00h 39h 04h 28h

11 0 ) 0bh 0bh 00h 30h 04h 29h

12 - _ 0ch 0ch 00h 2dh 04h 5fh

13 = + 0dh 0dh 00h 3dh 04h 2bh

15Backspace

free 0fh 0fh 00h 08h 04h 08h

16 Tab free 10h 10h 00h 09h 04h 09h

17 q Q 11h 11h 00h 71h 04h 51h

18 w W 12h 12h 00h 77h 04h 57h

19 e E 13h 13h 00h 65h 04h 45h

20 r R 14h 14h 00h 72h 04h 52h

21 t T 15h 15h 00h 74h 04h 54h

22 y Y 16h 16h 00h 79h 04h 59h

23 u U 17h 17h 00h 75h 04h 55h

24 i I 18h 18h 00h 69h 04h 49h

25 o O 19h 19h 00h 6fh 04h 4fh

26 p P 1ah 1ah 00h 70h 04h 50h

27 [ { 1bh 1bh 00h 5bh 04h 7bh

28 ] } 1ch 1ch 00h 5dh 04h 7dh

29 \ | 1dh 1dh 00h 5ch 04h 7ch

30 CapsLock

CapsLock

1eh 1eh 30h 00h 34h 00h

31 a A 1fh 1fh 00h 61h 04h 41h

Key Scan code

Full keyboard

NormalStatus

byte 60h



byte 64h


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



Keyno.

Statusbyte

ASCIIcode

Statusbyte

ASCIIcode

32 s S 20h 20h 00h 73h 04h 53h

33 d D 21h 21h 00h 64h 04h 44h

34 f F 22h 22h 00h 66h 04h 46h

35 g G 23h 23h 00h 67h 04h 47h

36 h H 24h 24h 00h 68h 04h 48h

37 j J 25h 25h 00h 6ah 04h 4ah

38 k K 26h 26h 00h 6bh 04h 4bh

39 l L 27h 27h 00h 6ch 04h 4ch

40 ; : 28h 28h 00h 3bh 04h 3ah

41 ' ” 29h 29h 00h 27h 04h 22h

43Enter

free 2bh 2bh 00h 0dh 04h 0dh

46 z Z 2eh 2eh 00h 7ah 04h 5ah

47 x X 2fh 2fh 00h 78h 04h 58h

48 c C 30h 30h 00h 63h 04h 43h

49 v V 31h 31h 00h 76h 04h 56h

50 b B 32h 32h 00h 62h 04h 42h

51 n N 33h 33h 00h 6eh 04h 4eh

52 m M 34h 34h 00h 6dh 04h 4dh

53 , < 35h 35h 00h 2ch 04h 3ch

54 . > 36h 36h 00h 2eh 04h 3eh

55 / ? 37h 37h 00h 2fh 04h 3fh

61 Blank free 3dh 3dh 00h 20h 04h 20h

75Insert

free 4bh 4bh 20h 09h 24h 09h

76Delete

free 4ch 4ch 20h 0ah 24h 0ah

79 CursorLeft

free 4fh 4fh 20h 12h 24h 12h

80 Home free 50h 50h 20h 18h 24h 18h

81 End free 51h 51h 20h 08h 24h 08h

83 Cursorup

free 53h 53h 20h 10h 24h 10h

Key Scan code

Full keyboard

NormalStatus

byte 60h



byte 64h

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a




a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

Keyno.

Statusbyte

ASCIIcode

Statusbyte

ASCIIcode

84 Cursordown

free 54h 54h 20h 11h 24h 11h

85 Pageup

free 55h 55h 20h 14h 24h 14h

86 Pagedown

free 56h 56h 20h 15h 24h 15h

89 Cursorright

free 59h 59h 20h 13h 24h 13h

90 NumLock

NumLock

5ah 5ah 30h 03h 34h 03h

91 Home 7 5bh 5bh 20h 18h 24h 37h

92 Cursorleft

4 5ch 5ch 20h 12h 24h 34h

93 End 1 5dh 5dh 20h 08h 24h 31h

95 Divide free 5fh 5fh 20h 45h 24h 45h

96 Cursorup

8 60h 60h 20h 10h 24h 38h

97 5 61h 61h 20h 1ah 24h 35h

98 Cursordown 2 62h 62h 20h 11h 24h 32h

99Insert

0 63h 63h 20h 09h 24h 30h

100 Multi-ply

free 64h 64h 20h 46h 24h 46h

101 Pageup

9 65h 65h 20h 14h 24h 39h

102 Cursorright

6 66h 66h 20h 13h 24h 36h

103 Pagedown

3 67h 67h 20h 15h 24h 33h

104Delete

Period 68h 68h 20h 0ah 24h 43h

105 Minus free 69h 69h 20h 42h 24h 42h

106 Plus +/- 6ah 6ah 20h 44h 24h 44h

108 Enter = 6ch 6ch 20h 40h 24h 47h

110Esc.

free 6eh 6eh 00h 1bh 04h 1bh

Key Scan code

Full keyboard

NormalStatus

byte 60h



byte 64h

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



Keyno.

Statusbyte

ASCIIcode

Statusbyte

ASCIIcode

112F1 F1

70h 70h 10h 01h 14h 01h

113 F2(Recall)

F2(Specialrecall)

71h 71h 10h 02h 14h 02h

114F3(Soft-key 1)

F3(Soft-key 8)

72h 72h 10h 03h 14h 03h

115F4(Soft-key 2)

F4(Soft-key 9)

73h 73h 10h 04h 14h 04h

116F5(Soft-key 3)

F5(Soft-key 10)

74h 74h 10h 05h 14h 05h

117F6(Soft-key 4)

F6(Soft-key 11)

75h 75h 10h 06h 14h 06h

118F7(Soft-key 5)

F7(Soft-key 12)

76h 76h 10h 07h 14h 07h

119F8(Soft-key 6)

F8(Soft-key 13)

77h 77h 10h 08h 14h 08h

120F9(Soft-key 7)

F9(Soft-key 14)

78h 78h 10h 09h 14h 09h

121 F10Etc.

free 79h 79h 10h 0ah 14h 0ah

122F11 F11

7ah 7ah 10h 0bh 14h 0bh

123 F12 F127bh 7bh 10h 0ch 14h 0ch

124 Prt. Scr. free 7ch 7ch 20h 04h 24h 04h

125 Scrolllock

free 7dh 7dh 20h 02h 24h 02h

126 Break free 7eh 7eh 20h 05h 24h 05h

Key Scan code

Full keyboard

NormalStatus

byte 60h



byte 64h

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

M i




MMC area active D 104.5

1 Signal: One MMC area is active, menu number in DW 105 invalid.

0 Signal: NCK area is active, menu number in DW 105 valid.

DATA AND MACHINE AREAS D 104.4

1 Signal: Machine area selected.

0 Signal: Data area selected.

START-UP MENU D 104.2

1 signal: The binary number entered in the MENU NUMBER byte refers to a menu fromthe start-up menu tree.


Note:

The start-up menu can be selected in two ways:

• By pressing the START-UP key and entering the password.• By switching on the NC with selector switch position 5 on the interface CPU.

MENU NUMBER CHANGE D 104.1

1 signal: The binary number entered in the MENU NUMBER byte has changed.

0 signal: No change.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)

10.94 9. Operator Panel Interface (DB 40)


USER MENU D 104.0

1 signal: The binary number entered in the MENU NUMBER byte refers to a menu fromthe user menu tree.

0 signal: The binary number entered in the MENU NUMBER byte refers to a menu fromthe user menu tree if the START-UP MENU is 0.

MENU NUMBER DW 105

The texts for the 7 softkeys are referred to as menus. Each block of 7 has a separate MENUNUMBER. The MENU NUMBER of the current menu is output to the PLC. The menu type isindicated by additional bits (START-UP MENU, USER MENU).(See User's Guide: Configuring Software WS 800A).

Value range: 1 - 255Numerical format: binary, 8 BIT


For activating programs which, for example, evaluate function signals.

END OF SECTION


04.96 10 Command Channel (DB 41)

10.1 General

10 Command Channel (DB 41)

10.1 General

The PLC user program can initiate functions in the NC using the command channel. As aresult, net data are transferred to the NC (e. g. speed, acceleration time constant). The formatof the net data depends on the relevant NC function.

The command channel consists of up to 8 user interfaces (abbreviation: UI) which are all setup in DB 41. The number of user interfaces of the command channel to be processed by thePLC operating system are defined in the PLC machine data.

Number of UIs: MD 033 value range: 0...8

Structure of DB 41

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

User interface

Address m 13 20 27 34 41 48 55

0:DB1:DX

Bit







Dataword

Reserved

Error number

No. of command channnel function

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Request bits of user interface

Error bits of user interface

Reserved

No. of net data DB/DX

No. of data word in net data DB/DX

No. of data word in target DB/DX for IKA data

Detailed error coding with error 200*

No. of target DB/DX for IKA data

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

DL a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

DR

6

2 3 4 5 6 7 81

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

DW 0

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

DW 1

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

DW 2

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

DW 3

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

DW 4

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

DW 5

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

DW m






DW m+1





DW m+2





DW m+3





DW m+4





DW m+5





DW m+6

1415 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0:DB1:DX

* As from SW 4.4, see Section 10.7


10 Command Channel (DB 41) 11.92

10.2 Signals in the command channel header

10.2 Signals in the command channel header

The request and error bits of the individual user interfaces are situated in the commandchannel header. Via the command channel, the PLC can initiate different functions in the NCat the same time (provided that they are not mutually exclusive).

Precondition:

On initiating different UI functions simultaneously, each function in a separate channel (max. 4UIs at the same time).

REQUEST BITS USER INTERFACE 1-8 DR 0

1 signal: From the user, after the following have been entered in the relevant user interface:

– the appropriate net data in the net data DB– the function number– the DB number– the DW number.

0 signal: From the PLC operating system, if the initiated function has been properlyconcluded. If there is an error, the error bit of the relevant user interface is also setto ”1”. In this case, an error code is stored in the user interface.

ERROR BITS USER INTERFACE 1-8 DR 1

1 signal: From the PLC operating system, if an error has resulted in abort of the initiatedfunction. To permit more precise error analysis, an error number (see error list) isalso entered in the relevant user interface.

0 signal: The signal must be acknowledged (reset) by the PLC user program.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


10.3 User interface signals


FUNCTION NUMBER DW m

The function number for the required function is entered in the DWm:

Function Function number

Specified path dimension static 1

Division increment 2

S external 3

M19 tsr 1) (incremental spindle position) 5

Transformation 6

Coupled motion 7

Read IKA data 10

Write IKA data 11

Travel against fixed stop 12

ERROR NUMBER DW m+1

The error code is entered in DWm+1 by the PLC operating system if the function has notbeen properly ended. The error number is valid if, after the request bit has been reset by thePLC operating system, the error bit of the user interface has changed to 1 signal (also seeexample on the next pages showing the signal path).

The error code entered is described in the Section ''Error codes, general errors'' or in theSection ''Error codes, function-related''.

DB/DX DW m+2, bit 15

1 signal: The data block in which the net data are stored is a type DX block.

0 signal: The data block is a type DB block.

SOURCE DB/DX NUMBER DR m+2

The entry in DR m+2 states the number of the data block in which the net data for the NCfunctions are stored. The type of the data block may be DB or DX which is specified in theDB/DX signal (DW m+2, bit 15).

DATA WORD NUMBER IN THE SOURCE DB/DX DW m+3

The entry in DW m+3 states the number of the 1st data word of the net data in the sourceDB.




Signal path when starting a command channel function

(a)

Time axis

(a) From user, the request bit must not be set until all other entries arevalid.

UI =User interface

Request bit in thecommand channel header

Net data entry in sourceDB

Specify address of netdata DB in the UI

Enter function number inUI

t

(a)

(a)

(a)


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



Signal path on abort of a command channel function due to error

(b)

(b)

Time axis

(a) From PLC user program(b) From PLC operating system

UI =User interface

Request bit incommand channelheader

Error bit in UIheader

Error number in UIvalid

t

(a)




Time response when starting an NC function via the command channel

Request bitDB 41 DR 0

Responsetime PLCmax. 20 ms

Functionstart 3-10msdepen-ding onNC CPUloadMessage ”Function

executed” (1)

Responsetime NC datatransfermax. 20 ms

(b)(a)

Time axis

(a) From user(b) From PLC operating system

(1) Internal signals, no significance foruser

Strobe to NC (1)

Action bitcommandchannel (1)

Function active (1)

t


Responsetime NCmax. 20 ms


Functionduration


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


10.4 Net data for command channel

10.4 Net data for command channel

The net data are set up by the PLC user program in a data block of the user. The address ofthe net data is specified in the user interface (DB/DX, SOURCE DB, SOURCE DW).

10.4.1 Net data of the path dimension function

Function number 1 (DW m in the user interface)

All values are entered in fixed-point format (binary with sign).

Overview of net data for path dimension function

Length in words: 6

Bit 15DL DR

Bit 0

DW x

DW x+1

DW x+2

DW x+3

DW x+4

DW x+5

DW x+6

Channel number Axis number

± Position

G68 G94/95

G90/91

SourceDB/DX

Axis feedrate

In the case offeedrate with G95,the ”Thread cuttingand revolutionalfeedrate” optionmust be available.

Data Unit Limits

Channel number – 1...4 1)

Axis number – 1...30

Position Unit inputresolution

SW limit switch+SW limit switch –

Feedrate (G94)

Feedrate (G95)

0.001 mm/min0.0001 inch/min

0.001 mm/rev0.0001 inch/rev

MD 280*:Max. axial speed

Preparatoryfunction

– Bit 8: 0: G901: G91

Bit 9: 0: G941: G95

Bit 10: 1: G680: G01




10.4.2 Net data for DIVISION function

10.4.2 Net data for DIVISION function

Function number 2 (DW m in the user interface)

All values are fixed-point format (binary with sign).

Overview of net date for path dimension function

Length in words: 5

Bit 15

DL DR

Bit 0

DW x

DW x+1

DW x+2

DW x+3

DW x+4

DW x+5

Channel number Axis number

± Division number

G68 G90/91

SourceDB/DX

Axis feedrate

Reserved

Data Unit Limits

Channel number – 1...4 1)

Axis number – 1... 30

Division number – G90/G68: NoneG91: None

Feedrate 0.01 degree/min0.01 mm/min0.001 inch/min

MD 280*: Max. axial speed

Preparatoryfunction

– Bit 8: 0 G901 G91

Bit 9: 0 no G681 G68



SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


10.4.3 Net data for S EXTERNAL function


Function number 3

If the S EXTERNAL function is programmed, the spindle operates under control. Speed anddirection of rotation can be specified in net data. The net data for this function must be enteredin the net data DB in the following format.

Spindle speed (higher-order portion)

DW x+1

DW x1)

Spindle number

DW x+2

DW x+3

Bit 15 . . . . . . 9 8 7 . . . . . . . . . 3 2 1 0

M3M4M5S

USETRSET

Spindle speed (lower-order portion)

Length of net data in words: 4

DW x+4

Meaning of parameters

LENGTH OF NET DATA IN WORDS DW x

Here, the number ”4” (KF) is entered (DW x+1 ... DW x+4)

SPINDLE NUMBER DL x+1

The entry in DL x+1 gives the number of the spindle that is to be controlled.Permissible values: 1 to 6

S DR x+1, bit 3

If this bit is set, the programmed setpoint speed is accepted.

M5 DR x+1, bit 2

If this bit is set, the spindle is stopped.

_______1) x=̂Number of data word in net data DB.




M3, M4 DR x+1, bit 0 and 1

These bits define the direction of the spindle rotation. Only one of these two bits can be set.

SPINDLE SPEED DW x+2, DW x+3

The above DWs are used to enter the desired speed. The limiting value for spindle speed are:

• max. 30 000 rev/min with encoder• max. 99 999 rev/min without encoder

The significance of the entry is defined with MD 520*, bit 3:

• MD 520*, bit 3 = 0: Speed in rev/min• MD 520*, bit 3 = 1: Speed in 0.1 rev/min

RSET DW x+4, bit 9

If the bit is set, the USET bit is reset in the NC. The NC commands are then no longerdisabled.

The RSET and USET bits must not be set at the same time.

USET DW x+4, bit 8

If the bit is not set, the spindle responds to commands from the NC and command channel. Ifboth commands are present at the same time, the command channel takes priority. The NCcommands are lost.

If the bit is set, the spindle responds to commands from the command channel only.

Requests for the spindle function arriving from the NC are stored and activated immediately assoon as the USET changeover is reset.

The RSET and USET bits must not be set at the same time.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


10.4.4 Net data for the M19 tsr function (incremental spindle positioning)

10.4.4 Net data for the M19 tsr function (incremental spindlepositioning)

Function number 5

If the ”M19 tsr incremental spindle positioning” function is programmed, the spindle operatesin positioning mode.

The spindle is not moved to an absolute position but by a specified (”incremental”) path thatmay exceed one revolution. Absolute positioning through several revolutions is not possible.With absolute positioning, traversing is not carried out through several revolutions but viamodulo. The direction can be preset with hex input. The movement starts from the point thespindle was positioned to before.

All data required for positioning operation are transferred in the net data DB. The net data forthe function must be entered in the net data DB in the following for:

Overview of net data for the M19tsr function

DW x

DW x+1

Length of net data in words: 8

Spindle numberSpindle position

absolute/incremental 1)

Spindle/feedrateoverride

Override active

DW x+2

DW x+3

DW x+4

DW x+5

DW x+6

DW x+7

DW x+8

Spindle speed (higher-order portion)

Spindle speed (lower-order portion)

Incremental path (higher-order portion)

Incremental path (lower-order portion)

Acceleration time constant

Servo gain (KV) factor

Position window

x= Number of data word in the net data DB that contains the first function parameter



The value entered in DW x for the ”M19tsr incremental spindle positioning” function is 8.

SPINDLE NUMBER DL x+1

The number of the spindle to be positioned is entered in DL x+1.Permissible values: 1 to 6

_______1) As from SW 3


10 KCommand Channel (DB 41) 12.93


OVERRIDE ACTIVE DR x+1, bit 0

If the bit is set, the override is taken into account according to DR x+1, bit 1 whendetermining the maximum speed during positioning.

SPINDLE/FEEDRATE OVERRIDE ACTIVE DR x+1, bit 1

Bit = 0: Spindle override activeBit = 1: Feedrate override active

Precondition: DR x+1, bit 0, Override active is set.

ABSOLUTE INCREMENTAL SPINDLE POSITIONING * DR x+1, bit 2

Bit = 0: Incremental spindle positioningBit = 1: Absolute spindle positioning

When using absolute spindle positioning with M19 from the command channel, the spindle canbe positioned several times to different positions. If the spindle is not synchronized for absolutespindle positioning from the command channel, the spindle is first synchronized before thespecified position is approached.

SPINDLE SPEED DW x+2, DW x+3

The required speed is entered in DW x+2, DW x+3. The limiting value for spindle speed is 30 000 rev/min, because an encoder must be provided at the spindle for positioning operation.

MD 520*, bit 3 defines the significance of the entry:

MD 520*, bit 3=0: Speed in rev/minMD 520*, bit 3=1: Speed in 0.1 rev/min

SPINDLE PATH DW x+4, DW x+5

The incremental path to be traversed by the spindle is entered in DW x+4, DW x+5. The signof the value defines the direction of rotation.

Value range: –99 999 999...99 999 999Unit: 0.01 degree

ACCELERATION TIME CONSTANT DW x+6

The acceleration to become active for acceleration and deceleration during the positioningoperation is defined in DW x+6. The acceleration time constant refers to the maximum speed(MD 403*) of the current gear stage.

Value range: 0...16 000Unit: 1 ms

_______* As from SW 3


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



SERVO GAIN (KV) FACTOR DW x+7

The gain to be used for positioning control during the position operation is entered in DW x+7.

Value range: 0...10 000Unit: Servo gain 1=1666

POSITION WINDOW DW x+8

The SPINDLE POSITION REACHED signal is set, when the spindle position is located in theposition window. An attempt is nevertheless made to attain the position with the highestpossible accuracy, even if the signal has already been set.

Value range: 1...720 000Unit: Position control resolution

Notes:

• Each spindle is allocated to a channel in DB 31. The feedrate override in this channel isevaluated if the FEEDRATE OVERRIDE ACTIVE bit is set.

• The specified spindle path is converted internally. This can result in an overrun. Thefunction is not executed in this case and a relevant error number is entered in the userinterface.

• After starting the command channel, a change of the speed limit in the setting data isineffective. The change becomes effective after restarting the command channel.

Example of application

Positioning of spindle heads whose drives must rotate through several revolutions as a resultof transmission ratios used.

• A spindle for which M19tsr has been requested via the command channel cannot executeany other command channel functions until the function M19tsr has been ended or aborted(refer to REQUEST and ERROR BITS in the command channel header).

10.4.5 Net data for the transformation function

Function number 6

Overview of net data for the transformation function

Transformation type (G function)

Length in words: 2

DW x+1

DW x

Channel number

DW x+2

Bit 15 Bit 0DL DRSource DB/DX

LENGTH IN WORDS DW x

Length of net data for the transformation function. Value 2 is entered in this case.



10.4.5 Net data for the transformation function

TRANSFORMATION TYPE DW x+2

The required G function is entered here right-justified as a 3-place BCD value and higher.

Example for G231:

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a


a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a0



a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a2



a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a3



a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a1

DL DR

DW x+2

The upper 4 bits in DL x+2 are therefore always 0.

Value range (permissible G functions):

G130, G131, G133, G135,G230, G231, G233, G235,G330, G331, G333, G335.

CHANNEL NUMBER DL x+1

Number of NC channel, value range 1 to 4.

10.4.6 Net data for coupled motion function

Function number 7 (DWn in user interface)

The source DB/DX and data words (DWx) are addressed in DW m+2 and DW m+3 by thesecond part of the user interface. Nearly all values are in fixed-point format (binary with sign).

Overview of net data for coupled motion function

Channel number: 1 to 16

Channel number

Coupled motion combination (G function)

0=AUT

1=JOG

Bit 15

DW x+1

DW x

DW x+2

Bit 0

DL DR

The 3-place G function (G150 to G159) is entered in the coupled motion combination as a BCDvalue.

The input of the G function in DW x+2 is executed as follows:

DW x+2 0 1 5 = G1522

Source DB/DX

Length in words: 2

0000000

0 0 0 0


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


10.4.6 Net data for coupled motion function

Automatic:

If a coupled motion combination G150 ... G159 programmed in AUTOMATIC is to beoverwritten by the command channel, there are two possibilities to do this:

1. • Mode change from AUTO JOG– Specify new G function via the command channel, e. g. from AUTO=G152 to

command channel=G151,e. g. start path dimension from command channel, G151 is active

2. • Program @714 in the AUTOMATIC program after each programmed coupled motioncombination G150 ... G159

• Operate NC Stop• Start coupled motion via command channel, e. g. AUTO=G152,

Command Channel=G151• Command Channel G151 is active after Start

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a aa a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

Only NC Stop without @714 causes e. g. G152 to remain active and G151

(Command Channel) to become active in the part program later on!

LENGTH IN WORDS DW x

Length of net data from coupled motion function, value 2 entered in DW x.

CHENNEL NUMBER DL x+1

Number of NC channel, value range: 1 to 4.

BA DR x+1, bit 0

1 signal: Jog

0 signal: Automatic

COUPLED MOTION COMBINATION DW x+2

The G function for the desired coupled motion combination is entered in DW x+2 as a 3-placeBCD number right-justified (the upper 4 bits of DL x+2 are always 0).

Value range: Corresponding to G150...G159.



10.4.7 Net data of the ”Temperature compensation” function

10.4.7 Net data of the ”Temperature compensation” function 1)

Function number 9
























DW x

DW x+1

Length of net data in words (7)

Axis number (1-30)Activation flags

U A

































DW x+2

DW x+3

DW x+4

DW x+5

DW x+6

DW x+7

High

Low

High

Low

High

Low





Absolute temperature compensation value KTKabs





Reference point P0

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a



a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aCoefficient tan ß



Enter value 7 for function number 9 ”Temperature compensation”.

AXIS NUMBER DW x+1, DL

Number of axis for which temperature compensation is to become active.

ACTIVATION FLAGS DW x+1, DR

These flags are used to select the temperature compensation procedure to be used (also bothprocedure, if possible).

Bit U: 1 - Position-independent temperature compensation active0 - Position-independent temperature compensation not active

Bit A: 1 - Position-independent temperature compensation active0 - Position-independent temperature compensation not active

_______1) As from SW 3


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


10.4.7 Net data of the ”Temperature compensation” function

Absolute temperature compensation value DW x+2, x+3

Enter position-independent compensation value

Coefficient tan ß DW x+4, DW x+5

Enter position-dependent coefficient tan ß

Reference point P 0 DW x+6, DW x+7

Enter reference point for position-dependent temperature compensation.

Data format:

The parameters are to be assigned in the net data block with the following data format:

Axis No. : Single accuracy, values from 1 to 30

KTKabs : In units (MS) with signMax. 3FFF:FFFFH or +/– 1.073.741.823

P0 : In units (MS) with signMax. 3FFF:FFFFH or +/– 1.073.741.823

tan ß : With sign, significance 2-31, values from –1 to +1

The following table gives an example of the data format of tan ß:

ß tan ß (tan ß) * (231–1)(dec.)

(tan ß) * (231–1)(dec.)

0 0 0 0000:0000

30 0.5777 1.239.850.262 49E6:9D16

45 1 2.147.483.647 7FFF:FFFF

–30 –0.577 –1.239.850.262 B619:62EA

–45 –1 –2.147.483.647 8000:0001

Note on data transfer:

When the command channel is triggered and no command channel error occurs, the data arealways transferred even if the addressed axis is currently active.

This may lead to reduced quality of workpiece surface finish due to abrupt set value variations.Transfer must, however, also be possible with active axes in order to be able to influence thecompensation behaviour during long-lasting traversing blocks.Data transfer can be controlled by the user with the aid of the axis-specific NC/PLC interface.


10 Command Channel (DB 41 09.95

10.4.8 Net data of ”Read/write IKA data” function

10.4.8 Net data of ”Read/write IKA data” function 1)

General notes

Transfer of the IKA data from the PLC via the command channel is triggered by the commandchannel number 10/11. The data can be both read (function number 10) and written (functionnumber 11). Data transfer via the command channel functions is considerably faster thantransfer with the FB61 and FB62 function blocks.

When performing the ”Read IKA data via command channel” function, the length and dataspecifications are entered in the net data DB/DX by the PLC user program. The PLC operatingsystem enters the number of the words read and the supplied NC data in the target DB/DX.

The net data DB/DX and the target DB/DX may be identical. The length specification isreplaced by the number of words read.

When performing the ”Write IKA data via command channel” function, the length specification,the data specification and the actual data are entered in the net data DB/DX by the PLC userprogram.

• Read IKA data (Fct. No. 10)

A net data DB is parameterized from the PLC to trigger the function. The number of thenet data DB and of the first data word "DWx" are stored in DB41 under "DWm + 2/ DWm + 3". Net data DB with data specification for triggering function:

















DW x

DW x+1

DW x+2










DL DR

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Length of net data in words (optional)

Channel number (=0) 1 number of IKA ratios 2

Data group identifier (=03) Daa type (=0)


















DW x+3

DW x+4

DW x+5

No. of 1st IKA ratio

Increment (No. 2nd - No. 1st IKA conf.)

Numerical format (=0) Dimension identifier (= 0)

The length of the words only refers to the data specification (in this case 5).

_______1) As from SW 3


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)

09.95 10 Command Channel (DB 41


The target DB with initial number "DW4" must also be specified in DB41 under "DWm + 4/ DWm + 5" . The data to be read are then transferred to that DB with thefollowing structure (target DB after function has been executed):












DW y

DW y+1a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a








DL DR

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Length in words

Flags K P R B







































DW y+4

DW y+5

DW y+6

DW y+7

DW y+8

DW y+9

DW y+10

Weighting factor

Input variable offset (High)

Input variable offset (Low)

Input variable modulo value (High)

Input variable modulo value (Low)

Reserved

Reserved












DW y+2

DW y+3

Reserved Number of curve

Output variable Input variable







DW y+11

DW y+1

Flags K P R B













DW y+12

DW y+13









































DW y+14

DW y+15

DW y+16

DW y+17

DW y+18

DW y+19

DW y+20

Weighting factor





Reserved

Reserved

Notes:

– The number of IKA configurations (blocks) to be transferred with each function call islimited to 2.

– The length in words indicates the number of user data read (here maximum 20).




• Write IKA data (Fct. No. 11)

A net data DB is parameterized from the PLC to trigger the function. The number of thenet data DB and of the first data word "DWx" are stored in DB41 under"DWm+2/DWm+3”. The user data must be stored in the net data DB directly behind thedata specification (DW x + 1 to DW x + 5).

Net data DB with data specification and the data to be written:



































DW x+9

DW x+10

DW x+11

DW x+12

DW x+13

DW x+14

DW x+15

Weighting factor





Reserved

Reserved











DW x+7

DW x+8













DW x+17

DW x+18





































DW x+19

DW x+20

DW x+21

DW x+22

DW x+23

DW x+24

DW x+25

Weighting factor





Reserved

Reserved

















DW x

DW x+1

DW x+2








DL DR15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Length in words (compulsory)

Channel number (=0) 1 number of IKA ratios 2

Data group identifier (=03) Data type (=0)







DW x+6 Flags K P R B
















DW x+3

DW x+4

DW x+5

No. of 1st IKA ratio

Increment (No. 2nd - No. 1st IKA conf.)

Numerical format (=0) Dimension identifier (=0)







DW x+16 Flags K P R B

Notes:

– The word length always refers to the entire range of the data specification and theuser data (max. 25).

– The number of IKA relations (blocks) to be transferred per function call is limited to 2.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)

09.95 10 Command Channel (DB 41



Length of net data in words DW x

Enter 5 for the ”Read IKA data” function.Enter 5+number of words to be written for the ”Write IKA data” function.

15: For one IKA configuration25: For two IKA configuration

Input in KF format

Channel number DW x+1, DL

Enter 0 because the IKA data are not channel-specific data.

Number of IKA configurations DW x+1, DR

Number of data blocks to be transferred with each function call (maximum 2).Input in KF format.

Data group identifier DW x+2, DL

Enter the value 03HEX for the ”Read/write IKA data” function.

Data type DW x+2, DR

Enter value 0 for the ”Read/write IKA data” function.

No. of 1st IKA configuration DW x+3

Enter the start element of a data group as from which data blocks are to be entered in KFformat (1 ... 32).

Increment DW x+4, DR

Enter the difference between the 2nd and 1st IKA configuration.When transferring the 3rd and 7th IKA configuration, 4 is entered, for example.

Numerical format/dimension identifier DW x+5, DL, DR

Enter value 0 for the ”Read/write IKA data” function.





FLAG K (Correct input value)DW x+6, bit 3

1 signal: Recompensate the compensation value (compensated actual value)

0 signal: No recompensation of compensation value (uncompensated actual value)

FLAG P (Negative direction)DW x+6, bit 2

1 signal: Compensation active for negative direction.

0 signal: Compensation active for positive direction.

FLAG R (Direction-dependent)DW x+6, bit 1

1 signal: Compensation performed dependent on direction.

0 signal: Compensation performed independent of direction.

FLAG B (Configuration active)DW x+6, bit 0

1 signal: IKA data are active

0 signal: IKA data are not active

NUMBER OF CURVE DR x+7DR y+2

The control curves are required for calculating the IKA values. A control curve establishes theinterrelationship between the input and output values.

Enter the number of the control curve.

Value range: 1 to 32

The start and end pointer of a control curve is stored under the curve number.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



OUTPUT VARIABLE DL x+8DL y+3

The absolute machine position of a compensation axis can be influenced according to theposition of a basic axis. Enter the number of the axis to be compensated.


INPUT VARIABLE DR x+7DR y+3

Number of the axis the position of which has an influence on the actual position of thecompensation axis.


WEIGHTING FACTOR DW x+9DW y+4

In addition, the compensation value can be influenced by a weighting factor. Using theweighting factor, the influence of the tool weight, for example, can be included withoutchanging the error curve.

Value range: –16000 to +16000

INPUT VARIABLE OFFSET DW x+10, DW x+11DW y+5, DW y+6

The reference position of the axis at which IKA compensation is not necessary. A control camcan be shifted towards the input variable using OFFSET INPUT VARIABLE.

Value range: –99.999.999 to +99.999.999

Unit: units (MS) of input variable with sign




Notes:

• The IKA data are also transferred to the NC when the output variable is active. This maylead to a reduced surface finish of the workpiece due to abrupt set value variations.Transfer must, however, also be possible with active axes in order to be able to transferthe correction values of the overrun points of the input variable during long-lastingtraversing blocks.

• Controlled data transfer is possible by utilizing the signals in the axis-specific NC PLCinterface.

• When changing the measuring system, the IKA value must remain constant in order toavoid jumps.

• The IKA data are not cleared at POWER ON.

• The IKA function can also be used as leadscrew error compensation by selecting the sameaxis as input and output variable. Contrary to leadscrew error compensation, the intervalsbetween the compensation points may be variable with IKA.

MODULO VALUE DW x+12, DW x+13DW y+7, DW y+8

Enter the value for the cyclic use of the control curve. A control curve once specified can bearbitrarily shifted towards the input variable by shifting the input variable P0.

For cyclic control curves (e.g. rotary axes) the curve of one cycle only (modulo value M, e.g.M=360.000) is used. The input value for the curve is therefore modified by the modulo.

Value range: +/–99.999.999 units

Entry for linear axis: 0

Note:

The data are always transferred when the command channel is triggered and no commandchannel error occurs even if the addressed axis is currently active.

This may result in reduced quality of workpiece surface finish due to abrupt set valuevariations. Transfer must, however, also be possible with active axes in order to enable thecorrection values of the overrun points of the input variable to be transferred during long-lasting traversing blocks.

Controlled data transfer can be performed by utilizing the axis-specific NC PLC interface.

Does not apply for extended IKA.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


10.4.9 Net data of ”Travel against fixed stop” function

10.4.9 Net data of ”Travel against fixed stop” function 1)

Function number 12a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a











DW x

DW x+1a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a








DL DR

Length in words (7)

Channel No.. Axis No.












DW x+2

DW x+3(+/–)Target/retract position







DW x+7 Clamping torque




















DW x+4

DW x+5

DW x+6

Axis feed

G 90G 91 G 221 G 220

Date Format Weighting Unit Limits

Channel No. FXP 1 2 E 0 -------------- 1 ... 4

Axis No. FXP 1 2 E 0 -------------- 1 ... 30

Target/retractposition

FXP 4 2 E 0 Units = inputresolution

SW limit switch+SW limit switch –

Axis feed FXP 4 2 E 0 0,001 mm/min MD 280x: Max. axialvelocity

DW x+6 FXP 1 Flags -------------- Bit 8 = 0: G 90Bit 8 = 1: G 91Bit 1 = 1: G 220Bit 2 = 1: G 221

Clampingtorque

FXP 2 2 E 0 0.1 % of max.drive torque

0 ... 1000

*U = Units = input resolution

_______1) As from SW 3





Length of net data in words DW x

Enter value 7 for function number 12 ”Travel against fixed stop”.

Channel number DW x+1, DL

Enter the number of the channel in which the function is to be selected or deselected.

Axis number DW x+1, DR

Number of axis that is to travel against the fixed stop or for which the function is to bedeselected.

Target/retract position DW x+2, DW x+3

a) Select ”Travel against fixed stop”:The target position for selecting ”Travel against fixed stop” must be specified.

b) Deselect ”Travel against fixed stop”:Retract position when deselecting ”Travel against fixed stop”.The specification of a retract position is not compulsory. Specify value ”0” and select G91if the axis is not to approach a retract position.

Axial feed DW x+4, DW x+5

a) Select ”Travel against fixed stop”:The axial feed must be specified because travel against fixed stop is performed with G01.

b) Deselect ”Travel against fixed stop”:The axial feed must be specified when a retract position is given.

G 90, G 91, G 01, G XX, G 220, G 221 DW x+6

Bit 8 = 0: G 90 (Absolute traversing of axis)Bit 8 = 1: G 91 (Incremental traversing of axis)Bit 1 = 1: Function G220 (Deselect ”Travel against fixed stop”)Bit 2 = 1: Function G221 (Select ”Travel against fixed stop”)


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



Clamping torque DW x+7

The clamping torque is given in 0.1 % of the maximum drive current (maximum transistorcurrent of power section). When specifiying a clamping torque via the command channel netdata, clamping torque SD 320* is transferred.

If no clamping torque is specified in the net data (value 0) when selecting the ”Travel againstfixed stop” function, the value set in SD 320* becomes valid.

Note:

• For maximum current see selection table of power sections.• Specification of clamping torque via MD (1144*) or programming (G221).



10.5 Error codes, general errors

10.5 Error codes, general errors

Errornumber 1) Error meaning

1 Incorrect channel number or channel not availableValid values: 1...4 2)

2 Incorrect spindle number or spindle not availableValid values: 1...6

3 Incorrect function numberValid values: 1, 2, 3, 6, 7

4 Function active

5 Insufficient data

6 Source DB/DX missing

7 1st stated DW not in source DB/DX

8 Stated length for DB/DX too great

9 Stated length for command channel too great

10 Reservedfor reading data: Target DB/DX missing

11 Reservedfor reading data: Target DB/DX too short

12 ReservedAxis number incorrect or axis missing

13 Function number 4 is incorrect

_______1) Data format: Fixed-point decimal

2) As from SW 4: 6 channels


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


10.6 Error codes, function-related

10.6 Error codes, function-related

10.6.1 Errors, function 1, path dimension, static

Errornumber

Meaning

100(64H)

Axis number illegal for this mode group or NC channel

101(65H)

Incorrect mode

102(66H)

Channel already busy

103(67H)

No NC stop state(safety function for AUTOMATIC)

104(68H)

No NC stop state or no read-in enable(without safety function for AUTOMATIC)

105(69H)

Axis already active in another channel

106(6AH)

Net data length illegal for relevant function

107(6BH)

Illegal net data

108(6CH)

Option not available

109(6DH)

(not used)

110(6EH)

Block search active

200(C8H)

Abort by: Reset, mode change, emergency stop, warm restart, controllerdisable, NC alarms, follow-up operation, parking axis, coupled motion,Transmit, position behind SW limit switch etc.(Detailed error coding, see Section 10.7 Detailed error coding withcommand channel error number 200)

Note:

Valid for SW 3.9, channel-specific NC-MD 144* and as from SW 4.4, DB41, DL m + 6.



10.6.2 Errors with function 2, division increment

10.6.2 Errors with function 2, division increment

Errornumber

Meaning

100(64H)

Axis number illegal for this mode group or NC channel

101(65H)

Incorrect mode

102(66H)

Channel already busy

103(67H)

No NC stop state(safety function for AUTOMATIC)

104(68H)

No NC stop state or no read-in enable(without safety function for AUTOMATIC)

105(69H)

Axis already active in another channel

106(6AH)

Net data length not equal to 5

107(6BH)

Illegal net data

108(6CH)

Option not available

109(6DH)

Incorrect division value, i.e. division value>No. of divisions (G90), divisionNo. too great for rotary axes, C axis not an indexing axis (G91)

110(6EH)

Block search active

200(C8H)

Abort by: Reset, mode change, emergency stop, warm restart, controllerdisable, NC alarms, follow-up operation, parking axis, coupled motion,Transmit, position behind SW limit switch etc.(Detailed error coding, see Section 10.7 Detailed error coding withcommand channel error number 200)


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


10.6.3 Errors with function 3, S external

10.6.3 Errors with function 3, S external

Errornumber

Meaning

100(64H)

Programmed speed too great

101

(65H)

M19 active at function start



10.6.4 Errors with function 5, M19 tsr

10.6.4 Errors with function 5, M19 tsr

Errornumber

Meaning

100(64H)

Set value not equal to 0 at function start

101(65H)

M19 active at function start

102(66H)

PLC spindle control active at function start

After Power On, if default value for net data length is 0

103(67H)

Option M19 not available

104(68H)

Execution of function aborted by:

– Emergency Stop– Servo hardware error– Key reset– Reset in ”spindle channel” (M17/M30)– PLC spindle reset– PLC spindle control– Operating mode group alarm

105(69H)

Spindle not synchronized at function start

106(6AH)

No controller enable at function start

109(6DH)

Spindle operates in C axis mode at function start

110(6EH)

Violation of value range with ”Spindle speed” parameter

111(6FH)

Violation of value range with ”Incremental path” parameterPath < 231 ·100 · position control resolution

112(70H)

Violation of value range Kv factor

113(71H) Violation of value range with ”Acceleration time constant” parameter

114(72H)

Violation of value range with ”Position window” parameter


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


10.6.5 Errors with function 6, transformation

10.6.5 Errors with function 6, transformation

The error number is composed as follows:

Error number:

Error type

Value range: G130 ... G138, G230 ... G238,G330 ... G338

xxx

G function currently active in channel

n

Error number: 100 ... 32788 (fixed-point decimal)64 ... 7FFF (HEX)

Error num-ber (HEX)

Meaning

n xxx

1130H Illegal G function

2130 ... 2138H

2230 ... 2238H

2330 ... 2338H

G function not permitted in channel

3132H

3232H

3332H

Coordinates cannot be reproduced

4130 ... 4138H

4230 ... 4238H

4330 ... 4338H

Selection/deselection not permitted in mode

5130 ... 5138H

5230 ... 5238H

5330 ... 5338H

Axes of transformation grouping assigned

6130 ... 6138H

6230 ... 6238H

6330 ... 6338H

Log abort via RESET(key, mode change)

7130 ... 7138H

7230 ... 7238H

7330 ... 7338H

Undefined transformation

8130 ... 8138H

8230 ... 8238H

8330 ... 8338H

Transformation selection at zero (turning centre)



10.6.6 Errors with function 7, coupled motion

10.6.6 Errors with function 7, coupled motion

Error number

Meaning

100(64H)

Incorrect G function number

101(65H)

Incorrect identifier AUTOMATIC/JOG

102(66H)

Channel is not the master channel of the mode group(relevant only for JOG mode)


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


10.6.7 Errors with function 9, temperature compensation

10.6.7 Errors with function 9, temperature compensation 1)

Errornumber

Error meaning

12(CH)

Incorrect axis No. or axis not available

100(64H)

Incorrect length in words

101(65H)

Option bit not set

102(66H)

Illegal absolute temperature compensation value

103(67H)

Illegal reference point P0

_______1) As from SW 3



10.6.8 Errors with function 10/11, ”Read/write IKA data”

10.6.8 Errors with function 10/11, ”Read/write IKA data” 1)

Errornumber

Error meaning

100(64H)

General data error

101(65H)

Illegal data group identifier

102(66H)

Illegal data number

103(67H)

Illegal number of IKA ratio

_______1) As from SW 3


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


10.6.9 Errors with function 12, travel against fixed stop


Error number Error meaning

100 (64H) Axis No. illegal for this mode group or illegal for this channel. Fictitious axis

101 (65H) Incorrect NC operating mode for ”Travel against fixed stop”.(Permissible modes are AUT, MDA, INC, JOG, REPOS)

102 (66H) Channel busy/channel not in Reset status

103 (67H) No NC Stop status

104 (68H) No read-in disable

105 (69H) Axis already active in other channel

106 (6AH) Illegal net data length

107 (6BH) Illegal net data

108 (6CH) Option not available

109 (6DH) G220 ineffective since axis is not on the fixed stop

110 (6EH) Block search active

111 (6FH) Axis cannot travel against fixed stop

112 (70H) Abort on account of coupled motion/transformation

200 (C8H) ”Travel against fixed stop” abort by Reset. Mode change, warm restart,servo disable, NC alarms, follow-up mode, parking axis *)(Detailed error coding, see Section 10.7 Detailed error coding withcommand channel error number 200)

201 (C9H) Fixed stop not reached: No fixed stop was set between the start positionand the programmed target position

_______*) Error 200 is issued only until ”Fixed stop reached” status




Note:

Error 107 ”Illegal net data” is output with:

• No channel specified

• No axis specified

• Invalid channel number

• Incorrect input value for target/retract position

• Incorrect input value for feed

• Incorrect input value for clamping torque

• The retract position is not a multiple of the rounding position with one rounding axis

• FAF was already active for this axis (FAF=Travel against fixed stop)

10.7 Detailed error coding with command channel error number 200

Applies for SW 4.4 and higher: DB 41, DW m+6 (see Section 10.1, General)

Errornumber 3) Meaning

1 1) NC start disable because of emergency stop, mode change, key reset,set-up disableNC start disable or active machine setting data alteration.

2 Mode group not ready4 Channel is processing a reset request5 Error in transformation6 Position behind SW limit switch8 Abort by emergency stop, controller disable, parking axis, follow-up

operation or mode group not ready10 Abort by software limit switch, working area limitation, hardware limit

switch or DAC limitation11 Abort by mode change or reset13 Travel to fixed stop aborted by reset

14 2) Mode group disable because of machine setting data alteration15 2) Mode group disable because of mode change16 2) Mode group disable because of key reset17 2) Mode group disable because of set-up disable18 2) Mode group disable because of NC start disable

Note:

NC MD 5008.3=1: the command channel error 200 with error precision coding 14-18 issuppressed and the command channel is internally started after resetting the mode groupdisable.

END OF SECTION

_______1) SW 4.4 only

2) As from SW 5

3) Data format: Fixed-point decimal


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)

09.95 11 Communication Area NC/PLC Interface (DB 48)

11.1 Signals to NCK

11 Communication Area NC/PLC Interface(DB 48)

11.1 Signals to NCK

STATUS WRITE DISABLE D 0.15

1 signal: PLC data cannot be edited in the "PLC status" display.

0 signal: No significance

The machine manufacturer can use this bit to prevent the machine operator from modifyingdata in the PLC via the "PLC status" display.

KEYSWITCH D 0.2, D 0.14, D 0.1, D 0.0

Switch position Removal position Function

Position 0DB 48 D 0.2

- Data are displayed only


0+1 key 1black

Generate, edit, delete and transfer workpiecedata


0+1+2 key2green

Generate, edit, delete and transfer interfacedata, archive lists and setting data

PositionDB 48 D 0.0

0+1+2+3 key 3red

The system is loaded with the Siemens MMCstandard data (not the SIEMENS UMS) duringramp-up after power-on-reset. After powerOFF/ON only the SIEMENS BEDCONF isloaded. Caution: Use for start-up and serviceonly! After ramp-up with key switch 3, the userbranch is protected by a password.

Notes:

• The KEYSWITCH signal can be set either by the KEYSWITCH on the machine controlpanel or by the PLC user program.

• Only one keyswitch bit may be set at a time. If several bits are set, these are invalid andthe signal for position 3 is set.


11 Communication Area NC/PLC Interface (DB 48) 09.95

11.1 Signals to NCK

Screen saver for monitor (via PLC with operator panel interlock)

General interface NC/PLC, signals from/to NC (DB 48)

SCREEN DARK D 0.13

1 signal: Screen darkened by user.

0 signal: Screen brighteneda) by PLC operating system after cold start and warm restartb) by user.

OPERATOR PANEL DISABLE 1) D 0.12

1 signal: Operator panel disabled by user.

0 signal: Operator panel not disableda) by PLC operating system after cold start and warm restart orb) by user.

Note:

The operator panel(s) is/are only disabled for the NC. The PLC can interpret the operatorpanel keys even when in disable state.

CYCLE DISABLE D 0.11

1 signal: Protected cycles (manufacturer's fixed subroutines) cannot be input, altered,displayed or output.

0 signal: Access to the protected cycles is possible.

Note:

• In case servicing work should become necessary, a program capable of removing thecycle disable should be provided.

• The cycle execution rate is not influenced by CYCLE DISABLE.• As from SW3, the cycles are stored on the hard disk (MMC) separately according to

Siemens and user cycles in the path: NCK/data/SPF. The cycles can be loaded into theNCK when powering up using the job list of the workpiece STANDARD. These cycles canbe disabled by ”Cycle disable”.

_______1) Applies to NCK menus only.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


11.1 Signals to NCK

CONTROL WITHOUT OPERATOR PANEL D 0.10

The CONTROL WITHOUT OPERATOR PANEL function is selected via the PLC and allowsthe connection from the operator panel to the RS232 (V.24) of the MMC-CPU to be interruptedduring operation.

The control must always be started up from the operator panel.

1 signal: CONTROL WITHOUT OPERATOR PANEL is selected.

0 signal: Control with operator panel

Notes:

• If the bit CONTROL WITHOUT OPERATOR PANEL is set, the PLC user program mustinterrogate the switch position both in start-up (OB 20) and cyclic operation (OB 1) andenter the position in DB 48, D 0.10.

• The control can only be switched on/off, if the control has been started up from theoperator panel.

• The precondition for disconnecting the operator panel is that the NC/PLC has already beenstarted up from the operator panel and that the PLC function CONTROL WITHOUTOPERATOR PANEL (NC/PLC interface signal) has been selected prior to switching off.



11.1 Signals to NCK

WARM RESTART D 0.8

1 signal: Activate a warm restart in the NC.

0 signal: No effect

Notes on application:

If any of the following are altered during machine operation:• channel allocation to an operating mode group• axis allocation to an operating mode group• spindle allocation to an operating mode group

an NC warm restart has to be initiated after overwriting the machine data. Following the warmrestart, the changes take effect for the NC and can be accessed by the program.

Notes:

• The number of NC axes or spindles must not be altered via warm restart (not evenindirectly by removing a mode group in which axes are defined).

• A warm restart is activated only if the NC is in the reset state.

• No NC start signal may be given in any NC channel during a warm restart.

• Neither the axis and spindle-specific NC/PLC interfaces nor the NC/PLC interface forEMERGENCY STOP signals are processed while the function is being executed.

• Position control of the axes remains operative during the warm restart.

• The ”M 19 active” spindle position control is cancelled.

• If the function is requested again during the warm restart, the request is ignored.Moreover, it is not activated after the current function has been completed.

1

2

3

4

1. Warm restart request by setting the WARM RESTART signal at the user interface.2. Initiate the RESET state of all operating mode groups or channels (by user).3. The warm restart function is executed in the NC.4. The WARM RESTART ENDED signal is output to the interface.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


11.1 Signals to NCK

Transfer cam values 1) D 0.7

1 signal: The cam positions deposited in the setting data are transferred by this setactivation signal.

0 signal: The cam positions are not transferred.

Transfercam values DR 0 : bit 7

Cam valuestransferred DR 1 : bit 7

a=user, p=PLC operating system

p

a

p

a

Cam/axis assignment activated 1) D 0.6

1 signal: The assignment between axis and cam pair preset in DB 32 DL x+3 istransferred into the PLC. The cam positions are valid for the entire period ofactivation. The cam assignments can be modified or deselected also while axesare traversing, initiation is possible at any time.

0 signal: The cam assignment is not transferred into the PLC.

Activateassignment DR 0 : bit 6

Assignmentactivated DR 1 : bit 6


p

a

p

a

PLC trigger signal, Trace 1 ... 4 (SW 6 and higher) DR 2.0 ... 3

Recording starts when trace signal changes from 0 to 1 (edge).The 4 trace signals are permanently assigned to the 4 trace buffers.

Note:

You will find a detailed description of the trace function in Section 9 of the Installation Guide,under Servo Trace




11.1 Signals to NCK












Collision monitoring off (SW 6 and higher)) DW 4.0-1DW 4.0-15DW 6.0...15

1 signal: If a protection space is not to be monitored, the PLC can switch off collisionmonitoring of specific protection spaces.








Enable for "Freeze IKA" (SW 6 and higher) DW 8 bit 4

This signal allows simultaneous enabling of the output value of several IKAs.

1 signal: The IKA-specific signals "Freeze IKA" (DW k bit 4) are enabled with this signal.The IKA-specific processing performed (freeze or unfreeze) depends on the stateof the IKA-specific signal (DW k bit 4 -> "Request: Freeze IKA[=1] or Request:Unfreeze IKA[=0].

CAUTION: The 0/1 edge is the point in time when several "frozen" IKAs are"enabled" simultaneously. Of course, several IKAs can be "frozen"simultaneously with the 0/1 edge.

0 signal: The IKA-specific processing performed (freeze or unfreeze) depends on the stateof the IKA-specific signal (DW k bit 4 -> Freeze IKA[=1] or Unfreeze IKA[=1]at the time of the 0/1 edge of signal DW 8 bit 4. This is not changed until signalDW 8 bit 4 changes to 1 so that the conditions for a "1 signal" again apply whichallow IKA-specific processing to change.








Switch off IKA (SW 6 and higher) DW k bit 0

0/1edge: IKA is switched off

Note:

The IKA selected (in "k") is changed from IKA state "switched on" (corresponds to type 1,2 or3 of data type 37) to state "switched off" (corresponds to type 0 of data type 37).








Switch on IKA (SW 6 and higher) DW k bit 1

0/1 edge: IKA is switched on

Note:

The IKA selected in "k" is changed from IKA state "switched off" (corresponds to type 0 ofdata type 37) to state "switched on" (corresponds to type 1, 2 or 3 of data type 37), oncondition, however, that the IKA relationship configuration is correct and complete. If a changein state is not possible because the configuration is either not correct or not complete, an errorsignal (DW k+1 bit 2) is returned to the PLC.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


11.1 Signals to NCK








Acknowledge error signal returned (SW 6 and higher) DW k bit 2

1 signal: The error signal returned (DW k + 1 bit 2) is acknowledged. DW k + 1 bit 2 iscanceled. Error return signals are acknowledged as long as this signal is "1".

0 signal: No acknowledgment

Note:

If the signal is permanently "1", no error signals are returned to the PLC!








Request: Freeze/Unfreeze IKA (SW 6 and higher) DW k bit 4

1 signal: This signal merely sets the request for IKA "freeze".The request is enabled with the common IKA enable signal (DW 8 bit 4, see thedescription there).

0 signal: This signal merely sets the request for IKA "unfreeze".The request is enabled with the common IKA enable signal (DW 8 bit 4, see thedescription there). With "unfreeze" the output value of the IKA relationship isupdated according to its configuration and current parameters. If statusinformation has been received in the meantime, the last information to have beenreceived is processed.

Note:

Only the output IKA value is frozen. This value is held constant during the "freeze phase". Anystatus requests recognized in the meantime are executed, however, the output value is notchanged. It is therefore still possible to switch a frozen IKA on or off. This can be executed bythe PLC or by any of the other known method used to switch the IKA (programming,operation).

Assignment IKA No. –> Address K

IKA No. Address K IKA No. Address K123456789

10111213141516

10121416182022242628303234363840

17181920212223242526272829303132

42444648505254565860626466687072



11.2 Signals from NCK


NC modifies cam values 1) DR 1.5

1 signal: Message indicating that the cam setting data were modified. The modification canbe made e.g. with FB 61/62 or by operator intervention. The message can beevaluated for monitoring functions.

0 signal: No modification of cam setting data.

Cam/axis assignment activated 1) DR 1.6

1 signal: Confirmation signal indicating that the assignment of axis and cam pair wastransferred to the PLC.

0 signal: The axis/cam pair assignment was not transferred to the PLC.

Activateassignment DR 0 : bit 6

Assignmentactivated DR 1 : bit 6


p

a

p

a

Cam values transferred 1) DR 1.7

1 signal: Confirmation signal indicating that the cam values (setting data) were transferred.

0 signal: The cam values were not transferred to the PLC.

_______1) As from SW 3


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



WARM RESTART ENDED D 1.0

1 signal: The warm restart function has been completed without error or interrupted withNC alarms 70 and 80 due to an error.

0 signal: The warm restart function is active or no warm restart function has beenactivated.

Note:

If an error occurs during transfer of the machine data that can be edited for the warm restartfunction, the NC outputs alarms 70 and 80. At the same time, the OPERATING MODEGROUP READY signal is cancelled and the WARM RESTART ENDED signal set.

In such cases, the system control can be made operational again only by correcting themachine data and subsequently executing POWER ON RESET.

The WARM RESTART ENDED signal is present for one PLC cycle only.

Screen dark (SW 5 and higher) D 1.13

1 signal: "Screen is dark" message either via MMC or from PLC.

0 signal: "Screen is lit" signal










Protection spaces collision (SW 6 and higher) D 5.0 - 15D 7.0 - 15

1 signal: If two protection spaces collide with each other the PLC is informed separatelyfor each protection space








IKA is switched off (SW 6 and higher) D k+1 bit 0

1 signal: IKA is switched off. This corresponds to type definition 0 of "internal state of IKA"according to data type 37.

0 signal: IKA is not switched off.

Note:

A change in state is generated with signal DW k bit 0 and all other available types of IKAcontrol used until now.








IKA is switched on (SW 6 and higher) D k+1 bit 1

1 signal: IKA is switched on. The corresponds to type definition 1, 2 or 3 of "internal stateof IKA" according to data type 37.

0 signal: IKA is not switched on.

Note:

A change in state is generated with signal DW k bit 1 and all other available types of IKAcontrol used until now.











Error signal returned (SW 6 and higher) D k+1 bit 2

1 signal: An IKA state change is not possible because the configuration is either incorrector incomplete.

0 signal: No error signal returned.

Note:

The error return signal is acknowledged with DW k bit 2 = 1.CAUTION: It is recommended that this acknowledgment (DW k DR it 3) is not given until oneof the bits 0 to 3 on the output side has changed, i.e. after the relevant response. Error signalsare only returned for the new requests from the PLC (DW k bit 0 or bit 1).








IKA in intermediate state (SW 6 and higher) D k+1 bit 3

1 signal: The IKA is in a temporary intermediate state. This corresponds to all typedefinitions greater than/equal to 4 of the "internal state of the IKA" according todata type 37.

0 signal: No intermediate state

Note:

A change in state is generated with signal DW k bit 0 and bit 1 and all other available types ofIKA control used until now.








IKA is frozen (SW 6 and higher) D k+1 bit 4

1 signal: IKA is frozen. The output value remains constant.

CAUTION: The state "IKA is frozen" is not "internal state of IKA" according todata type 37.

0 signal: IKA is unfrozen (normal mode)

Note:

A change in state is generated with the help of signals DW 8 bit 4 and DW k bit 4.








Output limitation maximum (SW 6 and higher) D k+1 bit 5

1 signal: The IKA output value is limited by the value defined under "Output limitmaximum" (data type 31).

0 signal: No limitation of the output value by "output limitation maximum".


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)










Output limitation minimum (SW 6 and higher) D k+1 bit 6

1 signal: The IKA output value is limited by the value defined under "Output limitminimum" (data type 32).

0 signal: No limitation of the output value by "output limitation minimum".








Change limitation output (SW 6 and higher) D k+1 bit 7

1 signal: A change in the IKA output value is limited by the value defined under "Changelimitation output" (data type 34).

0 signal: No limitation on changes to the output value.

Example:

The output values of IKA1 and IKA2 are to be enabled simultaneously. This is to be achievedwith the help of the function "Freeze".It is assumed that the IKAs have already been configured correctly and completely byoperation or programming and that they are now deactivated.

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

3)





DW 13 bit 1





DW 12 bit 1






DW 13 bit 4





DW 12 bit 4





DW 11 bit 1





DW 10 bit 1





DW 10 bit 4





DW 11 bit 4





DW 8 bit 4

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

1)





Enable "Freeze IKA"





Freeze IKA1






IKA1 is frozen





Switch on IKA1





IKA1 is on





Freeze IKA2






IKA2 is frozen





Switch on IKA2





IKA2 is on





Simultaneous enabling of the output value of two IKAs

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

4)

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a













1) Differing length of switch-on delay of IKA 12) Differing length of switch-on delay of IKA 23) Freezing starts4) Unfreezing of output value starts

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

2)














Protection zone adaptation active (from SW 6.3) D 75.0-15D 77.0-15

The ”Protection zone adaptation active” signal is set protection-zone-specifically as soon as aprotection zone adaptation is effective, i.e. the protection zone dimensions become larger thanthe dimensions specified in the machine data.

A protection zone adaptation can become effective either by the automatic protection zoneadaptation to the active tool (G181 and D number) and /or by the protection-zone-specificsetting data for the additive protection zone adaptation.

A differentiation at the PLC interface is not possible.










Reduction area Off (from SW 6.3) D 74.0-15D 76.0-15

This function is selected protection-zone-specifically.

Note:

For further information, refer to the Description of Functions, Section 12.

END OF SECTION


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)

12.93 12 Display Programs for PLC Data and Messages up to Software Version 2

12.1 Structure of display programs

12 Display Programs for PLC Data andMessages up to Software Version 2


Data from the NC and PLC can be displayed on the screen.

The following PLC displays are included in the 840C SW1 and 2 System as standard:• Status display• Error messages• Operational messages• Message group displays

Structure of display programs in the DIAGNOSIS area

PLC-

ALARM

Channel

NC

alarms

Cycle

alarms

PLC error

message

PLC oper.

message

PLC mess.

groups

Service

displays

NC

DIAGNOSIS

NC

start-up

OtherSpindle Axes


12 Display Programs for PLC Data and Messages up to Software Version 2 12.93


Structure of the display programs SINUMERIK 840C, standard control

PLCNCK

UMS

DisplayTextsMenus

Datainput/output

Data driveroperatingsystem

Datadriver

NCdata

Operator panel

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a aa a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a aa a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a aa aa a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

PLCdata

MMC Displays

Programming workstation

In addition to the standard displays, any other displays required can be compiled on the NCprogramming terminal and added to the NC menu tree. These displays can access any NCand PLC data.

No function blocks have to be loaded in the PLC for the required data transfers; these areexecuted by the PLC operating system (cf. Section 7.3 ''Data transfer NC initiative'').However, function blocks FB 17, FB 45 - FB 51 and FB 54 - FB 59 (FB package 0) are neededfor message displays. They must simply be loaded in the control and called in the userprogram.

The necessary ”Display descriptions” can be stored in the User Memory Submodule area ofthe MMC (UMS).


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


12.1.1 Configuring of message texts in alarm lines and dialog boxes up to SW 2

12.1.1 Configuring of message texts in alarm lines and dialog boxes upto SW 2

Message and alarm texts can be displayed either via PCF files and package 4 or with the newmessage concept, e.g. the dialog box principle. This message concept is based on a messagedescription in the MELDATTR and MELDTEXT files in the DIAGNOSIS/PC DATA/MASTERCONTROL area. The texts can be configured for output in the alarm line or in a dialog box.

With the dialog boxes a mechanism is introduced allowing messages and alarms to bedisplayed on the MMC from the PLC. The texts can be stored by the user himself in theMELDTEXT file in the DIAGNOSIS/PC DATA/MASTER CONTROL on the MMC.

Alarm line and dialog boxes can only display one message at a time, i.e. the one taking thehighest priority, and are operated according to type via the softkey menu. The descriptions ofthe dialog boxes are contained in the data management and operating sections of the relevantMMC areas.

The texts are faded in and deselected via the DB 40 interface block. The control mechanism(start, acknowledgements etc.) is the same as for menu insertions.

12.1.1.1 Signal descriptions DB 40

DW 52: Function ident. number:0Fh: ”Select dialog text”, the dialog text is inserted by the MMC10h: ”Deselect dialog text”, the dialog text is deselected

DW 54: Software component:The software component is the address of the area that is to process the dialog text.You enter in DW54 the value 503H. Other entries are possible, but have nosignificance yet.

The entry in DW 54 is significant for OEM and internal events only.

DW 53: Message number:A message must be defined in the MELDATTR file on the MMC under the specifiedmessage number. The MMC system message descriptions can be copied from theSIEMENS branch and edited.




12.1.1.2 Configuring of alarm attributes

An alarm description is provided for every text to determine whether the alaram is to appear inthe alarm line or in a dialog box. The MELDATTR file provided in the DIAGNOSIS area underPC DATA/MASTER CONTROL is composed as follows:

Number of alarm line descriptions (2 bytes)

Alarm line description number (2 bytes)Foreground colour of the alarm or message text (1 byte)Background colour of the alarm or message text (1 byte)Foreground colour of the information text (1 byte)Background colour of the information text (1 byte)Text number (2 bytes)

Number of dialog box descriptions (2 bytes)

Dialog box description number (2 bytes)Dialog box name (8 bytes)Addressee (2 bytes)Qualification (2 bytes)Acknowledgement mode (2 bytes)

Number of alarm descriptions (4 bytes)

Alarm number (4 bytes)Priority (2 bytes)Alarm type (1 byte) (e.g. channel Reset, general Reset, Cancel, PLC alarm, PLC message, ...)Kind of alarm (1 byte) (in alarm line, in dialog box alarm class)Alarm line description/dialog box description number (2 bytes)Text number (2 bytes)

The MELDATTR file is displayed as follows:

3

0 75 76 75 76 3

1 77 78 77 78 4

2 79 80 79 80 5

7

0 bed_dia1 100 1 200

1 bed_dia2 100 1 200

2 bed_dia0 100 1 200

3 bed_dia1 300 1 200

4 bed_dia1 4 1 200

5 bed_dia1 5 1 200

6 bed_dia1 2 1 200

100000 50 0 1 0 1 10

100001 310 3 1 0 1 11

102000 310 3 1 1 3 12

102010 310 3 1 1 3 13

102011 1000 5 1 1 3 14

102012 1000 5 1 1 3 15

103000 100 0 1 0 1 16

103001 100 0 1 0 1 17


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



The attributes for the alarm line displays are set as follows:

3 Number of defined schemes0 75 76 75 76 3

1 77 78 77 78 4

2 79 80 79 80 5 Scheme definition

Example:

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

0






Scheme number

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

75

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

76

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

75

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

76a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

3

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a




Text colour for alarm or message text, possible values: valid colour index





Background colour for alarm window, possible values: valid colour index

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a




Text colour for information text (erase condition), possible values: valid colour index

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a




Background colour for information window, possible values: valid colour index

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a





Number of information text for erase condition, in MELDTEXT file

The attributes describe the behaviour and the display format of all alarms. Language-dependent texts are not contained in the description.

12.1.1.3 Configuring of dialog boxe

If an alarm is to appear in a dialog box, an alarm text and a dialog box description must beconfigured.

For dialog box description the following definition is to be found in the MELDATTR file, forinstance:

7 Number of the defined schemes0 bed_dia1 100 1 200

1 bed_dia2 100 1 200

2 bed_dia0 100 1 200

3 bed_dia1 300 1 200

4 bed_dia1 4 1 200

5 bed_dia1 5 1 200

6 bed_dia1 2 1 200 Scheme definition




Example:a aa aa aa a

4





Scheme number for identification





bed_dia1

a aa aa aa a

4

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

1

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

200

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a























Display description file in which the operator interface of the dialog is described,possible values:bed_dia0 = Dialog box with empty softkey menu, the message must be

acknowledged by an MMC applicationbed_dia1 = Dialog box with OK softkey for acknowledging the messagebed_dia2 = Dialog box with fade-out and OK softkey for fading out the dialog box

without acknowledgement and for the purpose of acknowledgement

















Address of the operating area, in which the dialog box is displayed, possiblevalues:0 = MACHINE, 1 = PARAMETER, 2 = PROGRAM, 4 = SERVICES, 5 = DIAGNOSIS 8 = PLC, 9 = NCK alarms, 10 = NCK programming,100 = in all areas 300 = in the active area

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a

















Reaction, possible values:1= The dialog box is displayed, if the operating area addressed for the

dialog box is active2= The operating area addressed for the dialog box is selected. If this area

is already active, the reaction is the same as in the case of ”1”.












Acknowledgement mode, possible values:100 = The message is acknowledged by an MMC application200 = The message can be acknowledged by the operator

Note:

The PLC does not receive a signal as to whether the OK or hide softkey has been pressed.

Message descriptions according to the following pattern:





100001

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a




Message number (unique), values: 0 ... 2147483647

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

310

a aa aa aa a

3

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

1

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

11

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a










Message type, values: 0 ... 255, 0 = POWER ON alarm, 1 = RESET alarm, 2 = CANCEL alarm, 3 = PLC alarm, 4 = PLC message, 5 = NCK alarm

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a













Kind of message, values: 0 = alarm line, reference in scheme definition alarm line1 = dialog box, reference in schemedefinition dialog box

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a





Scheme number, values: 0 ... number of schemes

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a







Message text number, values: 0 ... 2147483647,Reference in the MELDTEXT

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a








Priority of message, values: 0 ... 32000 (the smaller the number the higher the priority)

a aa aa aa a

1

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

1


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



12.1.1.4 Creating the text file

The MELDTEXT file for different languages is provided in the DIAGNOSIS area under PCDATA/MASTER CONTROL. If the ASCII files MELDATTR and MELDTEXT have beengenerated and/or edited in the user branch in the MMC area DIAGNOSIS via the softkeyfunction PRESET, these data are loaded during the next power-up. In the MELDTEXT file,alarm and message texts can be added or the existing alarm and message texts can beoverwritten using the ASCII editor. The texts are assigned via the message text number. If theconfiguring files in total cannot be interpreted, the files from the SIEMENS branch are loadedand an error message is issued.

The MELDTEXT file is composed as follows:

0 ””1 ””2 ”Info text 0”3 ”Info text 2”4 ”Info text 3”5 ””6 ””7 ””8 ””9 ””10 ”Access error file <%s>!”11 ”Connection to keyboard faulty !”12 ”Directory does not exist on harddisk”13 ”Configuring error”14 ”Data selector: Picture configured wrongly”15 ”Data selector Incorrect dictionary addresses”16 ”DUAL PORT RAM error!”17 ”add_cmd_evs OARG_ERROR!”18 ”add_cmd_evs unspecified error no. !”19 ”add_waitgo error!”20 ”add_ft_evs OARG_ERROR!”21 ”add_ft_evs unspecified error no. !”22 ”ack_fct unexpected NCK acknowledgement !”23 ”ack_fct response buffer overwritten !”24 ”ack_key response buffer overwritten !”

Notes:

• The message texts must be numbered in ascending order starting with ”0”.

• Gaps in numbering are not allowed.

• The file must not contain any empty lines.

• Unassigned text lines (gaps) must be filled with quotation marks and LF.

• The attributes of the PLC alarms (starting with alarm number 6000) are entered in theMELDATTR file as from address 206.000.

• The texts available in different languages are stored in the MELDTEXT file. The Englishtexts, for instance, are contained in the MMC/SIEMENS/MASTER CONTROL/ENGLISHdirectory.

• The information texts (error clear condition) must be created before the alarm texts.

• If the existing SIEMENS standard messages in the user branch are to be overwritten,make sure that the variable %s is available in different texts. This variable generates a texton output of the message and can also be overwritten or deleted.




12.1.1.5 Possibilities of dialog box configuring

In the MELDATTR file, among others, the operator interface of the dialog is configured. Thereare 3 possibilities to do this:

bed_dia0 = Dialog box with empty softkey menubed_dia1 = Dialog box with OK softkey for acknowledging the messagebed_dia2 = Dialog box with HIDE and OK softkey for hiding the dialog box without

acknowledgement or for acknowledgement.

Dialog box with OK softkey

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a








a aa a

a aa a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a aa a

a a a a

a a a aOKa aa a






a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a



DIAGNOSTICSa a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

PROGRAMa a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

MACHINE a a a a a a a a a a a



SERVICESa a a a a a a a a a a a


a a a a a a a a a a a aPARAMETER

Protect NC / NC source

47 ORD 1 WRONG TO ASSIGNMENT LISTS





a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a aa a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a aa a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a





NC source

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

from/to

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a





Channel No./TO area





NbubblPC Bubbl





SPF part program

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

0

a aa aa aa aa a

1





III

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

0

110110 No access to SPF0

12.1.1.6 Example of dialog box configuring

By way of example, a dialog box with the message 6001: ”CLOSE SAFETY DOOR!” is to becreated. The dialog box is to be displayed in the MACHINE operating area only and is to causefeed disable of the axes.

Note!

This is merely an example to explain the procedure for configuring dialog boxes. Interlocks,safety regulations etc. for alarm processing are not dealt with.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



PLC user program:

FB 220Network 1Name: Dialog

:::C DB 40:L KH0000 (Reset start signal for dialog box output):T DW 51:C DB 10:A I 7.0 (Error condition):= D 6.9 (Feed disable):JC=F001:C DB 40:L KH000F (Select dialog text)T DW 52:L KH0803:T DW 54 (Load software component):L KF+6001:T DW 53 (Load message number):L KH0100:T DW 51 (Set start signal for dialog box output)

F001 ::::BE

Entry in the MELDATTR file

80 bed_dia1 100 1 2001 bed_dia2 100 1 2002 bed_dia0 100 1 2003 bed_dia1 300 1 2004 bed_dia1 4 1 2005 bed_dia1 5 1 2006 bed_dia1 2 1 2007 bed_dia1 0 1 200

Message can be acknowledged by operator

Dialog box is displayed only if operating area (in this case MACHINE)is active

Dialog box is displayed in the MACHINE area

Dialog box with OK softkey for acknowledgement

Scheme number...




...130018206001 310 3 4 1 7 204

Message text number in MELDTEXT file

Scheme number

Kind of message = dialog box

Message class

Message type: PLC interrupt

Priority

Message number (6001)

Entry in the MELDTEXT file203 ...204 ”CLOSE SAFETY DOOR” LF

12.2 PLC status display

Any PLC variables (I, Q, M, T, Z, DW) can be displayed and altered using the PLC statusdisplay. The states can be displayed as a word or single bit. In the case of word display, thecontents can be displayed bit by bit, as a fixed-point number, or as a hexadecimal number.The variables to be displayed are selected via the operator panel keyboard.

Operation:

See SINUMERIK 840C Operator's Guide.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


12.3 Messages

12.3 Messages 1)

To display messages on the SINUMERIK 840, the function blocks for message display (FBpackage 0) must be loaded in the PLC and called in the user program. As they occur, NC andPLC messages are displayed in the alarm line of the NC screen (line 2) when the display isenabled by an interface signal (Section 12.4, ''Interface message signals DB 58'').If several messages are present at the same time, only the one with the highest priority,according to the following list, is displayed.

• NC alarm• PLC error message• PLC operational message• NC message

Messages not appearing in the alarm line can be displayed on the screen by operating theappropriate softkeys or paged through in the message line by setting the PAGE DISPLAY INMESSAGE LINE bit (in the user program, e.g. with clock frequency or keys ”Page ” and”Page ”, DB 40, DL 3).

A differentiation is made between three types of display:

• PLC error messages• PLC operational messages• PLC message groups

Several bit fields are available for storing the messages:

• Channel-specific (DB 10-13, DW 6-11) (active channels only)• Spindle-specific (DB 31, DW K+3)• Axis-specific (DB 32, DW K+3)• PLC-specific (DB 58, DW 1 ... 32)

The bit fields are allocated a dual function

a) Actuation of NC functions (e.g. feed disable)b) Actuation of messages


FBPLC-MD

DW 11

DW 10

NC Startdisable

General feeddisable

DBm

DW 6

General feeddisable and read-in disable

Read-in disable

DW 7

DW 8

DW 9

1

1

&

NC Start

General feeddisable interface

Read-in enableInterface

NC Startinterface

Scan messages

Buffermemoryoperationalmessages

Buffermemoryerrormessages


PLC-MD

Bytes foroperationalmessages

_______1) SW 1 and 2



12.3 Messages

The bit fields of inactive channels can also be used to initiate error and operational messages.The channels that are to be used additionally must be defined by the user by means of thePLC MD 6030.

• PLC error messages (PLC MD 6032 - 6039), (PLC MD 6080 ... 6083, expansion) or• PLC operational messages (PLC MD 6040-6047), (PLC MD 6084 ... 6087, expansion)

can be allocated byte by byte in the bit fields (see Section 12.3.4, ''Bit fields for messages'')by means of PLC machine data.

In addition, all the set bits of a bit field can be displayed by means of the bit field-specificmessage group display.

The bits of the bit fields that have not been declared as error or operational messages by thePLC machine data can also be shown in plain text in these displays.

The message texts must be created on the NC workstation (Section 12.3.6, ''PLC machinedata for messages''). They are stored in the user memory submodule.

Basic information on the monitor display, SINUMERIK 840C, standard control








a aa a





FINISHTHREAD SET-UP

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

OVER-STORE

a aa a

a aa a

a a a

a a a

X 0.000 0.000

Y 0.000 0.000

Z 0.000 0.000





Actual value REPOS offset





INCVARIABLE









DIAGNOSISa a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a


a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a




SERVICES a aa aa a




PARAMETER

JOG

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a








Mode gr. :1Channel :1

% 0 N 0

L 0 P 0 N 0

L 0 P 0 N 0

L 0 P 0 N 0

Program pointer

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a



Act. value Override Position Setpoint Auxiliary functions:

F= 0.00 0% F= 0.00M

S 1= 0 100% 0.000 S = 0

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a








T = M =D = M =H = M =




G-Funktionen

A B C D E F

H I J

G

K L

CLOSE DOOR!!!




18:36

a a a a a a

a a a a a a


a a a a a a


a a a a a a

a a a a a a

PROGRAM RESET


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


12.3 Messages

A: Operating modesB: Alarm textC: Display of operating areasD: Channel status display of program modificationE: Clock, information text (error clear condition)F: Icon fieldG: Mode group and channel numberH: Dialog textI: NC displays, texts, input screen formsJ: Softkey menuK: Dialog box displayL: Input line

After the control has been turned on, the display for operating mode group 1 and channel 1 isthe default.

12.3.1 Error messages

On the SINUMERIK 840C, up to SW 2, a distinction is made between error and operationalmessages.

In the user program, the criteria representing a machine error, for example, are tested. Theresults of this ”error detection” are stored in data blocks at defined locations (Section 12.3.4,''Bit fields for messages''); i.e. the bit permanently allocated to an error remains set at 1 for aslong as the error exists.

Which bytes within the

• channel-specific (DB 10-13, DW 6-11)• spindle-specific (DB 31, DW K+3)• axis-specific (DB 32, DW K+3)• PLC-specific (DB 58, DW 1 ... 32)

bit fields of the SCAN ERROR MESSAGES function block (FB 57, FB package 0) are to beanalyzed for the occurrence of a new error is determined with the following PLC machine data(example for PLC):

6032 ... 33 (error messages to NC channel)6034 (error messages to spindle)6035 (error messages to axis)6036 ... 39 (error messages DB 58)6080 ... 83 (error messages DB 58, expansion)

If a bit changes from 0 to 1, the number (each bit is assigned a unique number, Section12.3.4, ''Bit fields for messages'') is entered in the buffer memory for error messages. Aninternal record is also kept of the fact that the error has been detected and entered in thebuffer memory (DB acknowledgement signals). Error messages are retained in the buffermemory until cancelled by ACKNOWLEDGE ERROR MESSAGE (DB 58 D0.9) (by the userprogram) or until the power supply is disconnected.



12.3.2 Operational messages

12.3.2 Operational messages

The program and data structure is identical to that for error messages.

Which bytes within the

• channel-specific (DB 10-13, DW 6-11)• spindle-specific (DB 31 DW K+3)• axis-specific (DB 32 DW K+3)• PLC-specific (DB 58 DW 1 ... 32)

bit fields of the OPERATIONAL MESSAGES INTERROGATION function block (FB package 0)are to be analyzed for the occurrence of a new error is determined with the following PLCmachine data (example for PLC):

6040 ... 41 (operational messages to NC channel)6042 (operational messages to spindle)6043 (operational messages to axis)6044 ... 47 (operational messages DB 58)6084 ... 87 (operational messages DB 58, expansion)

If a bit changes from 0 to 1, the corresponding numbers are entered in a separate buffermemory. In contrast to the error messages, however, not only the incoming but also theoutgoing messages are detected, so that only current messages are entered in the buffermemory.

Acquisition and display of messages

Acknow.signals

FB

PLC

DB

DBs

PB message acquisition PLC MD

UMS

NCK

List of bytesfor errormessages

Messagetexts

UE . . .= - FMUE . . .= - BM

Bytes formessages

PLC-MD

Scanmessages

List of bytesfor op.messages

Buffermemory

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

MMC Displays


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


12.3.3 Message groups

12.3.3 Message groups

Not only error and operational messages but also message groups can be displayed. All thebits of the listed bit field are designated as message groups. To activate the display ofmessage groups, FB 56 and FB 59 (FB package 0) have to be loaded in the control.

The following message groups are available on the SINUMERIK 840C:

Message group Message number Bit field

Channels 6000 - 6395 DB 10, DW 6-11DB 13, DW 6-11

Spindles 8000 - 8075 DB 31, DW 3, 7, 11, 15, 19, 23

Axis 8200 - 8435 DB 32, DW 3,7,11,15,19, 23,27,DW 31, 35, 39, 43, 47,DW 51, 55, 59, 63, 67,DW 71, 75, 79, 83, 87,DW 91, 95

PLC 9000 - 9497 DB 58 DW 1 - DL 32

If the display of a message group is selected, each set bit is allocated a message irrespectiveof whether the MD error message, the MD operational message or neither of the two is set.


Display of messages during operation that are not to be displayed in the message line (line 2of the screen), e.g. GENERAL FEED DISABLE during a tool change.

This results in the following display possiblities:

PLC-MDShown in message

line

Shown in display

PLC alarm PLC messagePLC message

group

Error messageOperat. message–

xx

xx

xxx



12.3.4 Bit fields for messages


While acquiring error and operational messages through

• FB 57 (scan error messages)• FB 58 (scan operational messages)• FB 59 (scan message groups)

the following data words of the interface DBs are interpreted. Each bit is assigned a uniqueerror number which is shown in the corresponding displays in addition to the message text.The texts have to be input at the NC programming terminal (Section 12.3.6, '' PLC machinedata for messages''). If no text has been entered, only the message number is displayed.

Table of error numbers and bit fields:

Message number Bit field

Channel 1Channel 2Channel 3Channel 4

6000 - 60956100 - 61956200 - 62956300 - 6395

DB 10, DW 6 - DW 11DB 11, DW 6 - DW 11DB 12, DW 6 - DW 11DB 13, DW 6 - DW 11

Spindle 1Spindle 2Spindle 3Spindle 4Spindle 5Spindle 6

8000 - 80158020 - 80358040 - 80558060 - 80758080 - 80958100 - 8115

DB 31, DW 3DB 31, DW 7DB 31, DW 11DB 31, DW 15DB 31, DW 19DB 31, DW 23

Address K048

121620

Axis 1Axis 2Axis 3Axis 4Axis 5Axis 6Axis 7Axis 8Axis 9Axis 10Axis 11Axis 12Axis 13Axis 14Axis 15Axis 16Axis 17Axis 18Axis 19Axis 20Axis 21Axis 22Axis 23Axis 24Axis 25Axis 26Axis 27Axis 28Axis 29Axis 30

8200 - 82158220 - 82358240 - 82558260 - 82758280 - 82958300 - 83158320 - 83358340 - 83558360 - 83758380 - 83958400 - 84158420 - 84358440 - 84558460 - 84758480 - 84958500 - 85158520 - 85358540 - 85558560 - 85758580 - 85958600 - 86158620 - 86358640 - 86558660 - 86758680 - 86958700 - 87158720 - 87358740 - 87558760 - 87758780 - 8795

DB 32, DW 3DB 32, DW 7DB 32, DW 11DB 32, DW 15DB 32, DW 19DB 32, DW 23DB 32, DW 27DB 32, DW 31DB 32, DW 35DB 32, DW 39DB 32, DW 43DB 32, DW 47DB 32, DW 51DB 32, DW 55DB 32, DW 59DB 32, DW 63DB 32, DW 67DB 32, DW 71DB 32, DW 75DB 32, DW 79DB 32, DW 83DB 32, DW 87DB 32, DW 91DB 32, DW 95DB 32, DW 99DB 32, DW 103DB 32, DW 107DB 32, DW 111DB 32, DW 115DB 32, DW 119

048

12162024283236404448525660646872768084889296

100104108112116

PLC 9000 - 9497 DB 58, DW 1 - DL 32


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



Bit fields for channel-specific messages (DB 10...DB 13) 1)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DL 6m+7 m+6 m+5 m+4 m+3 m+2 m+1 m+0

DR 6m+15 m+14 m+13 m+12 m+11 m+10 m+9 m+8

DL 7m+23 m+22 m+21 m+20 m+19 m+18 m+17 m+16

DR 7m+31 m+30 m+29 m+28 m+27 m+26 m+25 m+24

DL 8m+39 m+38 m+37 m+36 m+35 m+34 m+33 m+32

DR 8m+47 m+46 m+45 m+44 m+43 m+42 m+41 m+40

DL 9m+55 m+54 m+53 m+52 m+51 m+50 m+4 m+48

DR 9m+63 m+62 m+61 m+60 m+59 m+58 m+57 m+56

DL 10m+71 m+70 m+69 m+68 m+67 m+66 m+65 m+64

DR 10m+79 m+78 m+77 m+76 m+75 m+74 m+73 m+72

DL 11m+87 m+86 m+85 m+84 m+83 m+82 m+81 m+80

DR 11m+95 m+94 m+93 m+92 m+91 m+90 m+89 m+88

Signals to NC channel


15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8


G e n e r a l f e e d d i s a b l e a n d r e a d - i n d i s a b l e








N C S t a r t d i s a b l e

N C S t a r t d i s a b l e

_______1) As from SW 4: 6 channels (DB 10 ... DB 15)




Bit fields for spindle-specific messages (DB 31)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DL k+3 n+7 n+6 n+5 n+4 n+3 n+2 n+1 n+0

DR k+3 n+15 n+14 n+13 n+12 n+11 n+10 n+9 n+8

Signals to spindle

Sp i n d l e d i s a b l e

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Sp i n d l e d i s a b l e

Spindle Address K Message text address n PLC MD for processing

123456

048

121620

800080208040806080809000

6012.06012.16012.26012.36012.46012.5

Bit field for axis-specific messages (DB 32)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.Byte No.

DL k+3 n+7 n+6 n+5 n+4 n+3 n+2 n+1 n+0

DR k+3 n+15 n+14 n+13 n+12 n+11 n+10 n+9 n+8

Signals to axis

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8



Axis Address K Message text address n PLC MD for processing

123456789

101112

.

.

.30

048

121620242832364044

.

.

.116

820082208240826082808300832083408360838084008420

.

.

.8780

6016.06016.16016.26016.36016.46016.56016.66016.76017.06017.16017.26017.3

.

.

.6019.6


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


12.3.5 Assigned areas for messages

12.3.5 Assigned areas for messages

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.

Byte No.

DL 19007 9006 9005 9004 9003 9002 9001 9000

DR 19015 9014 9013 9012 9011 9010 9009 9008

DL 29023 9022 9021 9020 9019 9018 9017 9016

DR 29031 9030 9029 9028 9027 9026 9025 9024

Emergency stop to NC

Message

Message

Message

Message

Bit field for general messages (DB 58, Section 2.9, PLC messages)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit No.

Byte No.

DL 9039 9038 9037 9036 9035 9034 9033 9032

DR 9047 9046 9045 9044 9043 9042 9041 9040

DL 9055 9054 9053 9052 9051 9050 9049 9048

Messages

Message

...

DL 9081 9080 9079 9078 9077 9076 9075 9074

DR 9089 9088 9087 9086 9085 9084 9083 9082

DL 9097 9096 9095 9094 9093 9092 9091 9090

Message

Message

Message

Message

Message



12.3.6 PLC machine data for messages


PLC machine data are used to determine whether a message byte of the stated bit fields is tobe treated as an error or operational message.

By way of example, the following figure shows the structure for the display of channel-specificmessages.


FBPLC MD

DW 11

DW 10

NC Start disable

General feeddisable

DBm

DW 6

General feeddisable and read-in disable

Read-in disable

DW 7

DW 8

DW 9

1

1

&

NC Start

General feeddisable interface

Read-in enableinterface

NC Startinterface

Scanmessages

Buffermemoryoperationalmessages

Buffermemoryerrormesssges


PLC MD

Bytes foroperationalmessages

If a message is not to be displayed as either an error or operational message, display is stillpossible via PLC MESSAGE GROUP (Section 12.3.3, Message groups). Message bytes canbe treated in accordance with the following settings:

PLC machine data for errormessages

Structure of all channels

Structure of all spindlesStructure of all axesStructure of general messages

60326033603460356036 ... 60396080 ... 6083 expansion

PLC machine data for operationalmessages



60406041604260436044 ... 60476084 ... 6087 expansion


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



Example:

Setting channel-specific messages for NC channels (DB 10 - 13) of the PLC

Inter-facebyte

Functions Message No. Message type PLC MD

DL 6

DR 6

General feed disable 6000 ... 6007

6008 ... 6015

Error messages 6032.0

DL 7

DR 7

DL 8

DR 8

General feed disable

and

read-in disable

6016 ... 6023

6024 ... 6031

6032 ... 6039

6040 ... 6047

Oper. messages

Error messages

6040.2

6032.4

DL 9

DR 9

DL 10

DR 10

Read-in disable 6048 ... 6055

6056 ... 6063

6064 ... 6071

6072 ... 6079

Oper. messages

Error messages

6040.7

6033.1

DL 11

DR 11

NC Start disable 6080 ... 6087

6086 ... 6095

Error messages 6033.2



12.3.7 Creating message texts on the WS800A workstation

12.3.7 Creating message texts on the WS800A workstation 1)

Each message number can be allocated a text with the WS800A workstation. For furtherdetails, refer to the WS800A User's Guide.

Texts are stored in the user memory submodule (UMS).

12.3.8 Creating PCF files 1)

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a aa a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

As from SW 3 all alarm texts are managed by the MMC. The previously

used PCF files are no longer used. A WS800 tool is offered to generate

two alarm configuration files from a file

containing a UMS with alarm texts.

The display of PCF files is enabled using the NC machine data bit 5199.4.

NC MD 5199.4=0 No display of PCF files.NC MD 5199.4=1 Display of PCF files active.

Which PCF file is used for displaying PLC alarm texts is defined in NC setting data 5 (PLCalarm text file) in the ”General data” setting data area. The value range is 0 to 9999. Negativeor larger entries cause the same response as a non-existent PCF file. A change of the settingdata takes effect immediately (without RESET) not, however, within one display constructioncycle. If the PCF file is available, the corresponding PLC alarm text (if any) from the customeruser interface submodule is displayed. If the PCF file does not exist and an alarm text is notavailable in the customer user interface submodule either, the alarm number is output withouttext. Changeover between the various PCF files (% PCF 0 ... % PCF 9999) is possible via thePLC program or operator input, e. g. in order to support different languages. Separate alarmtext files are additionally available for the various PLC statuses, i. e. the complete alarmnumber area. The PCF files are stored in the part program memory. The texts are enteredeither directly via the operator panel keyboard or an external editor.

Input or reading-in of PCF files is possible only in set-up mode, i. e. only after the passwordhas been entered. A PCF file is edited in the same way as a part program. % PCF 0 ... % PCF 9999 can be used as program names. The following is to be used:

%PCF1 LFN6000 (Alarm text 1) LFN6001 (Alarm text 2) LF...M30 LF

_______1) SW 1 and SW 2 only


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


12.3.9 Loading and saving PCF files

12.3.9 Loading and saving PCF files 1)

PCF files like part programs can be edited in the NCK area (PARAMETER) or in the MMC area(DIAGNOSIS). Please note the following:

1. If PCF files are created in the NCK area with the PARAMETER/PROGRAMMING softkey,they must then be saved on hard disk (MMC), as otherwise the data will be lost onswitching off.

2. If PCF files are edited in the MMC area using the DIAGNOSIS/PLC DATA softkey, the datais stored on the hard disk after editing by using the SAVE softkey function. In the CONFIGfiles you define which PLC directory (e.g. ENGLISH) is to be loaded into the NCK whenthe control powers up.

To edit and save PCF files, you must create a directory called LANGUAGE under the PLCpath, if it does not already exist. To do this, press softkeys SERVICES thenMANAGEMENT, then NEW.

_______1) SW 1 and SW 2 only




Please carry out the following sequence of operations (an exact description is given in the840C Operator's Guide).

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a






























-WOPNCPLCServicesOperationLOCALGLOBAL





..Data





..GERMAN

TEA 1 55378 28.8.92













Services








Load NC








Save NC








Data in/out

















Management

















New









Edit








a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a







a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a








Copy








a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a








Delete






Data







Name






ok

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a





Please enter name






ENGLISH

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

and

You have now created a directory in which you can store alarm texts and message texts (e.g.in English) as PCF data.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



You can now load PCF files from the NCK area into the created language directory in the harddisk memory using the DIAGNOSIS/STORE function.

If you want to edit a PCF file with the ASCII editor in the DIAGNOSIS branch, you first openthe file (e.g PCF 1) in the directory. You open the file in the SERVICES area. You page in thedirectories until you reach the opened language directory and then open the PCF file in this di-rectory with the softkey function NEW. You return to the DIAGNOSIS area to continue editing.

12.3.10 Example 2)

The error message 6000 SAFETY DOOR OPEN is to be displayed via PCF files. Dependingon the input signal I7.6, the error, and data the same time, GENERAL FEEDRATE DISABLE isto be initated.

1. For message display, the relevant function blocks (FB package 0) must be loaded into thePLC and called in the user program. Suggestion:

a) In the cold restart branch of the user (OB 20):

:: JU FB45 Initial setting EM & OM

Name : GST-FMBM:

b) In the cyclic program part of the user:

:: JU FB48 EM & OM auxiliary signals

Name : FMBM:HSG:

:: JU FB57 Interrogate EM1)

Name : EM-ABFR:

:: JU FB58 Interrogate OM1)

Name : OM-ABFR:

:: JU FB59 Interrogate MG 1)

Name : MG-ABFR:

:: JU FB17 PLC status channel

Name : STATUS:

_______1) Call FBs only if the relevant function is required.

2) SW 1 and SW 2 only



12.3.10 Example

2. Processing the control signals (DB 58)

In order to implement the display of message texts in the message line, the relevant bitsmust be set in the DB 58. Suggestion:

:

C DB 58

A M01

=D0.13 Display of error messages in message line=D0.12 Display of operational messages in message line:

Paging through of several message texts must also be generated by the user program.Suggestion:

:

C DB 40

A D3.0 PAGING BACKWARDS keyO D3.1 PAGING FORWARDS keyC DB 58 Paging of display in message line=D0.11

:

PLC error messages must be acknowledged via the PLC user program, i. e. the messagein the display must be cleared after the cause of error has been removed. Suggestion:

:

C DB 40

A D4.2 ACKNOWLEDGE ALARM keyC DB 58 Acknowledge PLC error messages=D0.9

:

3. Inclusion of error condition:

Example:

:

A I7.6

C DB 10

=D6.8 Message 6000 and GENERAL FEEDRATE DISABLEtriggering to NC channel

4. Setting the necessary machine data

The relevant message bytes can be additionally interpreted as error or operationalmessages. In the example given, message 6000 is to act as an error message. To achievethis, the PLC machine data 6032.0=1 must be set. NC machine data 5199.4=1 must beset to activate display of the PCF files.

5. Creating the PCF files

The error message text is to be stored in % PCF 3, i. e. setting data 5 (General data)must be set to the value 3.

Example:

:

%PCF3

N6000 (SAFETY DOOR OPEN) L FM30 L F:


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


12.3.10 Example

Creating PCF files (not SW 3)

Machine Parameter Program Services Diagnosis

Part programm %PCF 3

AUTOMATIC Program resetMode : 1Channel : 1

N6000 ( SAFETY DOOR OPEN ) LFN8000 ( NO SPINDLE ENABLE ) LFN8200 ( NO AXIS ENABLE ) LFN9000 ( MIN OIL LEVEL ) LFM30 LF

Generate

block no.

Support PLC text

overview

Main prog.

overview

Subroutine

overview

Cycle

overview

Select

program

12.4 Interface message signals DB 58

For a description of the signals see Section 13.3.The following signals apply only up to SW 2:

DISPLAY IN MESSAGE LINE ERROR MESSAGES D 0.13

1 signal: The first error message of the buffer memory for error messages is entered inthe message line (line 2 of the screen).

0 signal: No error messages are entered in the message line (line 2 of the screen).

DISPLAY IN MESSAGE LINE OPERATIONAL MESSAGES D 0.12

1 signal: The first operational message of the buffer memory for operational messages isentered in the message line (line 2 of the screen).

0 signal: No operational messages are entered in the message line (line 2 of the screen).

Note:

If the display bits for error and operational messages are set, the error messages have ahigher priority. Even if the display in the message line is not selected, current error andoperational messages are still shown in the displays selected by softkeys.

END OF SECTION


09.95 13 Display of PLC Alarms, Messages and Dialogs as from SW3

13.1 Definitions

13 Display of PLC Alarms, Messages andDialogs as from SW 3

The MMC is the master for the entire alarm concept as from SW3, i.e. all alarms, messagesand dialogs (also the ones from the PLC) are managed by the MMC. All modifications to besignalled are collected (mailbox principle) via the Package 0 functions and signalled to theMMC.

13.1 Definitions

In the SINUMERIK 840C Software Versions 1 and 2 PLC error and operational messages,NCK alarms, MMC warnings and NCK comments were displayed and managed separately. Asfrom Software Version 3 the terminology was changed, the only terms now used being alarms,messages and dialogs.

Message:(operational message)

• Display only• The message disappears when the triggering signal is reset• Display in the message line and in the DIAGNOSIS area of the alarm/message display

Alarm:(error message)

• Triggers additionally a reaction in the NC (e.g. NC STOP, read-in disable)• Must be acknowledged by operator intervention (Cancel, Power on etc.)• Display in the message line and in the DIAGNOSIS area of the alarm/message display

Dialogs:

• Provides the possibility of configuring operating instructions• Both acknowledgement and reaction can be configured by the machine manufacturer• Display as a dialog box and in the DIAGNOSIS area of the alarm/message display

Alarms, messages and dialogs are no longer displayed via PCF files. The description ofmessages, alarms and dialogs now takes place via the MELDATTR and MELDTEXT files onlyin the DIAGNOSIS/START-UP/PC-DATA area in the MMC. You will find file MELDATTR in theMaster Control directory and the file MELDTEXT in the Master Control\[language] directory.


13 Display of PLC Alarms, Messages and Dialogs as from SW 3 09.95

13.1 Definitions









a aa aa a

a aa aa a

a aa aa a

a a a

a a a

a a a

X 0.000 0.000

Y 0.000 0.000

Z 0.000 0.000





Act. value REPOS offset








DIAGNOSISa a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a


a a a a a a a a a a



SERVICES a aa a

a aa a



PARAMETER

JOG PROGRAM RESET









Mode gr. :1Channel :1

% 0 N 0

L 0 P 0 N 0

L 0 P 0 N 0

L 0 P 0 N 0

Program pointer

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a



a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aAct. value Override Position Setpoint Auxiliary functions:

F= 0.00 0% F= 0.00M

S 1= 0 100% 0.000 S = 0










T = M =D = M =H = M =




G-Funktionen6000 CLOSE DOOR !!!





18:36

a a a a a a

a a a a a a


a a a a a a


a a a a a a

a a a a a a





Dialog box





Alarm line

8200 X-drive not ready to operate

Different types of dialog box can be configured:

• Dialog box with blank softkey bar• Dialog box with OK softkey• Dialog box with HIDE and OK softkey• Dialog box with ABORT and OK softkey

13.2 Interface signals for alarms and messages

The precondition is that the FB package 0 (as from Version 20) has been loaded. Whencollecting alarms and messages via

• scan FB 57 alarms (error messages)• scan FB 58 messages (operational messages)

The following data words of the interface DBs are evaluated. A unique alarm/message numberis assigned to each bit. This number is displayed together with the alarm/message.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)

03.95 13 Display of PLC Alarms, Messages and Dialogs as from SW 3


Alarm/Message number

Bit field

Channel 1Channel 2Channel 3Channel 4Channel 5 1)

Channel 6 1)

6000 - 60956100 - 61956200 - 62956300 - 63956400 - 64956500 - 6595

DB 10, DW 6 - DW 11DB 11, DW 6 - DW 11DB 12, DW 6 - DW 11DB 13, DW 6 - DW 11DB 14, DW 6 - DW 11DB 15, DW 6 - DW 11

Spindle 1Spindle 2Spindle 3Spindle 4Spindle 5Spindle 6

8000 - 80158020 - 80358040 - 80558060 - 80758080 - 80958100 - 8115

DB 31, DW 3DB 31, DW 7DB 31, DW 11DB 31, DW 15DB 31, DW 19DB 31, DW 23

Address K048

121620

Axis 1Axis 2Axis 3Axis 4Axis 5Axis 6Axis 7Axis 8Axis 9Axis 10Axis 11Axis 12Axis 13Axis 14Axis 15Axis 16Axis 17Axis 18Axis 19Axis 20Axis 21Axis 22Axis 23Axis 24Axis 25Axis 26Axis 27Axis 28Axis 29Axis 30

8200 - 82158220 - 82358240 - 82558260 - 82758280 - 82958300 - 83158320 - 83358340 - 83558360 - 83758380 - 83958400 - 84158420 - 84358440 - 84558460 - 84758480 - 84958500 - 85158520 - 85358540 - 85558560 - 85758580 - 85958600 - 86158620 - 86358640 - 86558660 - 86758680 - 86958700 - 87158720 - 87358740 - 87558760 - 87758780 - 8795

DB 32, DW 3DB 32, DW 7DB 32, DW 11DB 32, DW 15DB 32, DW 19DB 32, DW 23DB 32, DW 27DB 32, DW 31DB 32, DW 35DB 32, DW 39DB 32, DW 43DB 32, DW 47DB 32, DW 51DB 32, DW 55DB 32, DW 59DB 32, DW 63DB 32, DW 67DB 32, DW 71DB 32, DW 75DB 32, DW 79DB 32, DW 83DB 32, DW 87DB 32, DW 91DB 32, DW 95DB 32, DW 99DB 32, DW 103DB 32, DW 107DB 32, DW 111DB 32, DW 115DB 32, DW 119

048

12162024283236404448525660646872768084889296

100104108112116

PLC 9000 - 9497 DB 58, DW 1 - DL 32

Note:

The alarm or message-triggering signal should be present for a period of several cycles. Analarm/message which is present for a short time only may possibly not be recognized by theMMC because the MMC and the PLC operate asynchonously.

_______1) As from SW 4




The decision whether a selected text number is to be displayed as an alarm or as a messageis made via PLC machine data:

PLC machine data for alarms(error messages)


Structure of all spindlesStructure of all axesStructure of general alarms

60326033603460356036 ... 6039

PLC machine data for messages(operational messages)



60406041604260436044 ... 6047

Example:

Setting of channel-specific alarms/messages for NC channels (DB 10 ... DB 13) 1) of the PLC.

Inter-facebyte

Functions Message No. Type of message PLC MD

DL 6

DR 6

Overall feed disable 6000 ... 6007

6008 ... 6015

Alarm 6032.0

DL 7

DR 7

DL 8

DR 8

Overall feed disable

and

read-in disable

6016 ... 6023

6024 ... 6031

6032 ... 6039

6040 ... 6047

Message

Alarm

6040.2

6032.4

DL 9

DR 9

DL 10

DR 10

Read-in disable 6048 ... 6055

6056 ... 6063

6064 ... 6071

6072 ... 6079

Message

Alarm

6040.7

6033.1

DL 11

DR 11

6080 ... 6087

6086 ... 6095

Alarm 6033.2

______1) As from SW 4, DB 10 ... DB 15


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



The following processing must be performed in the PLC user program:

Call structure in OB20:

.

.

.JU FB 45...

Call structure in OB1:

.

.

.JU FB 48 – always to be called (if alarms or messages are desired)EMOM: MMC –JU FB 57 – for alarms onlyFM-ABFRJU FB 58 – for messages onlyBM-ABFR...

For software version 3, FB 39 must be loaded in addition (this is no longer necessary, ifpackage 0 as from version 21 is used).

Further blocks to be called do not exist.

13.3 Interface message signals B 58

ACKNOWLEDGE NC EMERGENCY STOP D 0.15

1 signal: EMERGENCY STOP acknowledged to the NC

0 signal: No effect

Note:

1. ACKNOWLEDGE NC EMERGENCY STOP affects all NC channels when NC INEMERGENCY STOP STATE is present.

2. ACKNOWLEDGE NC EMERGENCY STOP is transferred to the NC with the RESET key.

DISPLAY IN MESSAGE LINE ERROR MESSAGES (UP TO SW 2) D 0.13

See Section 12 for description

DISPLAY IN MESSAGE LINE ERROR MESSAGES (UP TO SW 2) D 0.12

See Section 12 for description




PAGE DISPLAY IN MESSAGE LINE D 0.11

1 signal: With each 0 1 transition, the address of the buffer memory for the display in themessage line is increased by 1. This enables all current messages to bedisplayed in the message line as well.If the DISPLAY IN MESSAGE LINE FOR ERROR MESSAGES and DISPLAY INMESSAGE LINE FOR OPERATIONAL MESSAGES signals are set, only errormessages are paged through.A 1 0 transition of these signals resets the pointer.

0 signal: No paging in the message line

As from SW 3:

1 signal: The active alarms and messages are paged at intervals of 2 seconds. Pagingapplies to all alarms of all components (MMC, NCK, PLC).

0 signal: Paging is interrupted, the last alarm displayed in the message line remains.

DISPLAY of top priority alarm in message line 1) D 0.10

1 signal: The alarm/message with the highest priority is displayed. As a result, bit 0.11 isnot effective, i.e. paging is not active.

0 signal: The ”Page” function, bit 0.11, is active.

ACKNOWLEDGE PLC ERROR MESSAGE D 0.9

0 signal: No effect

1 signal: 0 1 transitionThe buffer memory for PLC error messages is erased. The dynamic signal of theACKNOWLEDGE ALARMS key (DB 40, D4.10) can be issued in this connection.

_______1) As from SW 3


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



NC IN EMERGENCY STOP STATE D 0.7

1 signal: After EMERGENCY STOP TO NC

0 signal: After ACKNOWLEDGE EMERGENCY STOP

PLC EMERGENCY STOP MESSAGE D 0.2

1 signal: At least one EMERGENCY STOP TO NC signal is present


PLC ERROR MESSAGE (as from SW3, PLC alarm) D 0.1

1 signal: At least one signal defined by machine data as an error message is entered inthe buffer memory.

0 signal: No effect

Note:

Several PLC cycles (max. 31) can be executed between the bit being set and entry beingmade in the buffer memory. The duration depends on how many bytes have been defined aserror messages by PLC machine data.

PLC OPERATIONAL MESSAGES (as from SW3, PLC messages) D 0.0

1 signal: At least one signal defined by machine data as an operational message isentered in the buffer memory.

0 signal: No effect

Note:

Several PLC cycles (max. 31) can be executed between the bit being set and entry beingmade in the buffer memory. The duration depends on how many bytes have been defined asoperational messages by PLC machine data.

Examples of application:

1. Activation of an indicator lamp in the event of EMERGENCY STOP or errors2. Interlocks in the interface module should an error occur.




EMERGENCY STOP TO NC DW 1, DW 2

1 signal: a) EMERGENCY STOP reported to the NC. The removal of all signals must bereported to the NC with ACKNOWLEDGE EMERGENCY STOP.

b) EMERGENCY STOP is entered into the buffer memory for error and/oroperational messages if the relevant PLC machine data is set.

0 signal: a) No EMERGENCY STOP reported to the NCb) EMERGENCY STOP is removed from the buffer memory for messages if the

relevant PLC machine data is set.Note:

1. The 1 signal effects rapid braking of the feed drives and spindle drive with max. brakingcurrent.After expiry of the time set by machine data, the position control loops are opened and theNC assumes follow-up operation. This ensures that the actual position values are retainedeven in the EMERGENCY STOP state of the control.

2. The controllers for the feed and spindle drives should remain connected to the power untilthe braking procedure has been completed.

3. If the NC was not disconnected from the power supply in the EMERGENCY STOP state,the axes do not have to be resynchronized (no approach to reference point) after theEMERGENCY STOP state has been removed.

MESSAGES DW 3 to DL 32

1 signal: Entry in the buffer memory for error and/or operational messages if the relevantPLC machine data is set.

0 signal: Removal from the buffer memory for operational messages if the relevant PLCmachine data is set.The buffer memory for error messages is erased by ACKNOWLEDGE PLCERROR MESSAGES.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


13.3.1 Interface signals for dialogs

13.3.1 Interface signals for dialogs

Here, a comparatively simple mechanism for creating dialog texts is introduced to replace thetime-consuming configuring of PLC dialogs via the WS800 NC workstation. Display is likewiseeffected via the MMC as message line or dialog box.

The range from 200.000 to 209.999 is reserved in the message attribute file for the dialognumber.

PLC dialogs are addressed via the following data words of DB40:

DW 52: Function ID number0FH: ”Select dialog text”, the dialog text is inserted by the MMC10H: ”Deselect dialog text”, the dialog text is deselected

DW 54: Software componentThe software component is the address of the area that is to process the dialog text.

Enter the value 503H in DW 54. Other entries are possible. These are only relevant to OEMand internal processes.

DW 53: Dialog numberA message in the MELDATTR file must be defined on the MMC under this number.Entry: 0 to 9999 (The MMC adds automatically the value 200.000).

D 51.8: Strobe signalThe information is passed on to the MMC by setting this signal.

13.4 Configuring alarm/message/dialog texts and attributes

Each alarm/message/dialog is described in the data management of the MMC with alarmattribute and language-dependent texts. The files

• MELDATTR• MELDTEXT

are provided for this purpose.

13.4.1 Defining display attributes by means of the MELDATTR file

The MELDATTR file contains all parameters describing the alarms/messages/dialogs.The MELDATTR file is provided in the MMC data management in the Siemens branch in theMASTER CONTROL/MELDATTR directory and consists of:

• Alarm line descriptions determining the appearance of the alarm line.• Dialog box descriptions determining the appearance of an alarm in a dialog box.• Alarm descriptions giving a detailed description of each individual alarm.

Alarm line descriptions

Alarm line description numberForeground colour of alarm of message textBackground colour of alarm of message textForeground colour of information textBackground colour of information textText number




Dialog box descriptions

Dialog box description numberDisplay description fileAddresseeResponseAcknowledgement mode

Alarm descriptions

Alarm numberPriorityAlarm type (specified by operating system)Alarm classKind of alarm (0: alarm line, 1: dialog box)Alarm line description/dialog box description numberText number

The MELDATTR file is in the Siemens branch could look like this:

6 Quantity 0 ...0 79 80 79 80 0


















1 75 76 75 76 1

2 75 76 75 76 2

3 75 76 75 76 3

4 75 76 75 76 4

5 77 78 77 78 5




a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aAlarm line description

12 Quantity 0 ...

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a







































0 bed_dia1 300 1 200

1 bed_dia3 300 1 200

2 bed_dia1 300 1 200

3 bed_dia1 300 1 200

4 bed_dia1 5 1 200

5 bed_dia1 300 1 200

6 bed_dia1 2 1 200

7 bed_dia0 3 1 100

8 bed_dia1 3 1 200

9 bed_dia1 13 1 200

10 bed_dia0 13 1 100

11 bed_dia1 12 1 200





Dialog box description

0 1000 3 1 0 0 0














1 210 2 0 0 0 10

2 210 2 0 0 0 11

3 210 2 0 0 0 12

4 10 0 0 0 0 13






Alarm description

The attributes for the alarm line displays are set as follows:

3 Number of defined alarm line descriptions0 75 76 75 76 3

1 77 78 77 78 4

2 79 80 79 80 5 Schematics definition3 75 76 75 76 3

4 75 76 75 76 4

5 77 78 77 78 5


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



Example:

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

0





Alarm line description number

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

75

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

76

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

75

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

76

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

3





Text colour for alarm or message text, possible values: valid colour index






Background colour for alarm window, possible values: valid colour index





Text colour for information text (erase condition), possible values: valid colour index





Background colour for information window, possible values: valid colour index





Number of information text for erase condition, in MELDTEXT file

Note:

It is possible to assign each alarm/message its own alarm line description. A possibleapplication would be, for example, the distinction of alarm/message by color in conjunctionwith a certain error source (e.g. axis alarms = red, spindle alarms = green, etc.). Thefollowing four colors can be used for configuring of the MELDATTR file:

75 Red77 Brown79 White

86, 76, 78 Black

If further colors are requested, these can be configured via the color setting files(POCOLLI, NECOLLI, etc.) (see SINUMERIK 840C Installation Instructions, section ”MMCArea Diagnosis”).

Furthermore, each alarm can be assigned its own error erase condition (displayed in thedisplay field of the clock, such as Cancel or Reset). The erase condition can be displayedonly for the alarms/messages that are output in the alarm line. Dialog boxes areacknowledged via the OK softkey or via a PLC application.

The MELDATTR file contains, for example, the following definition for the dialog boxdescription :

12 Number of defined dialog box descriptions0 bed_dia1 100 1 200

1 bed_dia2 100 1 200

2 bed_dia0 100 1 200

3 bed_dia1 300 1 200

4 bed_dia1 4 1 200

5 bed_dia1 5 1 200

6 bed_dia1 2 1 200 Schematics definition7 bed_dia0 3 1 100

8 bed_dia1 3 1 200

9 bed_dia1 13 1 200

10 bed_dia0 13 1 100

11 bed_dia1 12 1 200

You can use the alarm line and dialog box descriptions defined by the standard software. Inaddition to the schematics definitions available, the user can enter his own definitions.




The following must be observed:

• The actual schematics definitions are preceded by the number of available alarm lines ordialog box descriptions (in the example 6 and 12). If you change the number of schematicsdefinitions for alarm lines or dialog boxes, this entry must be corrected accordingly.

• The serial numbering of the schematics definition (bed_dia...) must be flush with theschematics definition of the Siemens branch. Example: No. of the last schematicsdefinition in the Siemens branch is 22, the first user definition must then have No. 23.

• With SW5.4 and higher, the user schematics definitions can be numbered beginning withzero in ascending order as in the Siemens branch. The system adapts them automaticallyto the Siemens branch. If a user intends to overwrite a definition of the Siemens branch -until now, this was only possible by allocating the same number in the unser branch - theID "W" must be added as last parameter to the dialog box definition. The sum ofschematics definitions in the Siemens and user branches is limited to 100 (No. 0 to No.99).

• The sequence

1. Number of defined alarm line descriptions2. Schematics definitions for alarm lines3. Number of defined dialog box descriptions4. Schematics definitions for dialog boxes5. Alarm description

must always be observed.

Example of a dialog box description:

a aa aa aa aa a

4





Dialog box description number for identification






bed_dia1

a aa aa aa aa a

4

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

1

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

200



























Display description file in which the user interface of the dialog is described, possiblevalues:bed_dia0 = Dialog box with blank softkey bar, the message must be

acknowledged from an MMC applicationbed_dia1 = Dialog box with OK softkey for acknowledging the messagebed_dia2 = Dialog box with hide and OK softkey for hiding the dialog box without

acknowledgement and for acknowledgementbed_dia3 = Dialog box with ABORT and OK softkeys



























Address of the operating area in which the dialog box is displayed, possiblevalues:0 = MACHINE, 1 = PARAMETER, 2 = PROGRAM, 3 = SIMULATION4 = SERVICES, 5 = DIAGNOSIS, 6 = OEM, 7 = graphical programming system8 = PLC, 9 = NCK alarms, 10 = NCK programming,11 = PG software, 12 = Machine data dialog13 = Drive installation and start-up,100 = in all areas, 300 = in the active area


















Reaction, possible values:1= The dialog box is displayed when the operating area addressed to the

dialog box is active2= The operating area addressed to the dialog box is selected. If this area

is already active, then the reaction is the same as for ”1”.











Acknowledge mode, possible values: 100, 200This entry is reserved for future applications, but one of the possiblevalues must be entered.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



The message descriptions are given below in accordance with the following sample:

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

100001





Message number (unique), values: 0 ... 2147483647

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

310

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

3

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

1

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

11

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a














Alarm type, values: 0 ... 255, this entry is defined internally by the operating system andcan be modified only via OEM, i.e. if you enter your own values here,these are ignored. Enter any value between 0 and 255.















Message type, values: 0 = Alarm line, reference inschematics definition alarm line

1 = Dialog box, reference inschematics definition dialog box

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a




Schematics number, values: 0 ... number of schematics









Message text number, values: 0 ... 2147483647,Reference in the MELDTEXT file











Message class, values: 0 ... 255, 0 = NCK, 1 = SYSTEM/MASTER CONTROL, 2 = SERVICES, 3 = DIAGNOSIS, 4=PROGRAM, 5=Simulation, 6=OEM, 7=Drives

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a








Priority of the message, values: 0 ... 32000 (the higher the number, the higher thepriority)

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

1

a aa aa aa a

1

13.4.2 Generating a MELDATTR user file

After loading of the standard software (initial startup), the MELDATTR file exists only in theSiemens (standard) branch. The data of the Siemens branch can not be edited. A MELDATTRfile must therefore first be generated in the user branch.

Operator input sequences:

1. Set the password.

2. Select the MELDATTR file in the Siemens branchOperate the following softkeys in succession






Diagnostics






Startup






PC data



13.4.2 Generating a MELDATTR user file

You are offered two directories:

• Startup/Standard/PC data Siemens• Startup/Standard/PC data user

With the HOME key, you switch to the Startup/Standard/PC dataSiemens directory

The active window is marked in color (yellow frame)

Set the cursor to the MASTER CONTROL directory and

acknowledge with the INPUT key.

Set the cursor to the MELDATTR file.

3. Copying MELDATTR into the user branch

Press the DEFAULT softkey and the MELDATTR file is copiedinto the user branch.






Default

With the HOME key you switch over to the user branch and findthe MELDATTR file under the MASTER CONTROL directory.This file can be processed there.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


13.4.3 Configuring the attributes of the PLC user alarms/messages/dialogs


Prerequisite:

A MELDATTR file has been generated in the Control/User/PC data/Control directory.a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a aa a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

After control ON/OFF, the sum is formed of the individual attribute filesin the Siemens and user branches. If the same schematics and message

numbers are configured in both files, the definitions from the userbranch are always applicable. If the Siemens alarms are not to bechanged, make sure that the MELDATTR files do not overlap in the

Siemens and user branches.

The following procedure is conceivable:

1. With the EDIT softkey, you open the MELDATTR file in the user branch.

2. With the CUT editor key, you delete the complete contents of the file.

3. Enter the following data:

0 LF (Line 1)0 LF (Line 2)G000 350 0 0 0 3 10 LF (Line 3)...

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a




G037 350 0 0 0 3 47 LF (Line n)






Text No. in MELDTEXT





Fehler (Cancel) (Meldung: 0)

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

Priority





Alarm Number

By entering 0 in the 1st and 2nd lines, you ensure that the alarm line and dialog boxdescriptions of the Siemens branch are used. If you wish to define your own schematics, enterthe following data, for example:

1 LF (Line 1)6 76 75 79 76 5 (Line 2)





Number of the text for the cancel condition in the MELDTEXT file





Black background for the text of the cancel condition

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a




White text of the cancel condition (display in the clock field)

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a




Red text background for alarm/message/dialog





Black text for alarm/message/dialog





Serial number




1 LF (Line 3)12 bed_dia1 0 1 100 (Line 4)









Dialog box is displayed only, when the MACHINE operating areais active

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a




Dialog box is displayed only in the MACHINE operating area





Dialog box with OK softkey for acknowledging





Serial numbera a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a







Entry important for OEM applications only(you must enter 100 or 200)

The alarm numbers must be in ascending sequence; gaps are permissible. A single LF is notallowed in the last line. Empty lines are not allowed.

Notes:

• PLC alarm/message numbers: 6000-9997PLC dialogs: 200000-209999

• Alarm/message numbers, alarm line description numbers and dialog description numbersmust be sorted in ascending sequence. Gaps in the numbering are allowed, but no emptylines.

• Caution: The file ends with the last description; a single LF is not allowed in the last line!

• Priority

The smaller the number, the higher the priority.

The parameters are used as follows:

Area Alarm type Standard value

0 - 10101 - 200201 - 300301 - 500

Power-OnResetCancelPLC alarm/message

10110210350

• Alarm typeIn the case of PLC alarms, this entry has no meaning. the alarm acknowledgement isconfigured in the PLC program. The relevant information (Reset, Cancel, etc.) must thenbe assigned to the alarm in the attributed file.

• Alarm class

This parameter is only used for limiting the alarms that are entered in the alarm log.

In the MASTER CONTROL/CONFIG file it is configured which alarms/messages areentered in alarm log 1 and 2. With the alarm class it is then decided in which alarm log therespective alarm is to be displayed.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



• Alarm lines number/dialog box description number

Depending on the type of alarm, this allows reference to the alarm line or dialog boxdescription that defines the appearance of the display.

If alarm type=0 (display in alarm line) and alarm line description number=zero(schematics number) then the following relationships apply:

Alarm type Alarm line description

NCK commentsPower-OnResetCancelPLC alarmMessageDiagnosis

0123455

In this case the alarm type supplied from the operating system for the alarm/message isevaluated and the respective alarm line description number is used in accordance with thetable. The alarm line description number 0 is not used, but instead the relationships givenin the table are used. For a PLC alarm, this means that if alarm type 0 and schematics 0have been configured, the alarm is output automatically with schematics definition serialno. 4.

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a aa a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

The alarm line description 0 itself describes the appearance of the NCKcomments (comments from the part program) and the display field of the

time/alarm cancel condition.

• Text number

Number of the alarm text configured in the language-dependent file MELDTEXT.

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a aa a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a aThe MELDATTR file always refers to the MELDTEXT file in the samebranch (user or Siemens). If there is no MELDTEXT file in the userbranch, the definitions are invalid and only the standard definitions

(Siemens) are used.

• If the alarm configuration is missing, only the alarm number is displayed.



13.4.4 Important notes on the configuration of dialog boxes

13.4.4 Important notes on the configuration of dialog boxesa a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a aa a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

Alarms must not be put into the display via dialog boxes by pressing theOK softkey. The OK softkey simply acknowledges the display of an

alarm/message without checking whether the error condition of the PLCis still set. If alarms are to be displayed with the help of a dialog box, theuse of a dialog box with a blank softkey list is recommended. This dialogbox can be deleted only by means of the PLC program. It must be notedthat with this type of dialog box, a blank softkey bar is displayed which

means that the softkeys cannot be operated.

Effect of the OK and HIDE softkeys:

Whether a dialog box is again displayed after pressing of the OK and HIDE softkeys, dependson the type of configuration:

• Display of the dialog box in all areas (entry 100 in schematics definition):The dialog box disappears from the display after OK or HIDE.

HIDE:

The message is still displayed as active in the overview "Current alarms/messages" in theoperating area DIAGNOSIS.

OK:

The message no longer appears in the display "Current alarms/messages"

• Display of the dialog box in only one operating area. The dialog box is unhidden, when theoperating area is selected again.

Note:

The PLC does not receive a signal as to whether the OK or HIDE softkey has been pressed.

13.4.5 The MELDTEXT file

The texts of all alarms/messages/dialogs are stored in the MELDTEXT file. MELDTEXT isstored in language-dependent form in the MASTER CONTROL directory of the Siemensbranch.

The German texts are stored in the directory Siemens/Master Control/German/MELDTEXT; theEnglish texts are stored in the directory Siemens/Master Control/English/MELDTEXT, etc.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


13.4.6 Generating a MELDTEXT user file

13.4.6 Generating a MELDTEXT user file

After loading of the standard software (initial startup), the MELDTEXT file exists only in theSiemens (standard) branch. By means of the DEFAULT function, you copy the MELDTEXT fileinto the user branch. The operator actions are described in the section "Generating aMELDATTR user file".

0 ""

1 " Power on"

2 " Reset"

3 " Cancel"

4 ""

5 ""

6 ""

7 ""

8 ""

9 ""

10 "ORD./.4 Battery: data loss at Power Off!”

11 "ORD./.4 Overtemperature”

12 "ORD./.4 Fan failure”

13 "ORD./.4 System of units not allowed”

14 "ORD./.4 Power failure protection/data loss”

15 "ORD./.4 Start-up due to system error”

16 "ORD./.4 15V-low voltage”

17 "ORD./.4 Wrong axis/spindle assignment”

18 "ORD./.4 Undervoltage on secondary side”

19 "ORD./.4 Cam activation wrong”

20 "./.2./.3 Part program block > 120 char. V.24”

21 "./.2./.3 Data input disabled V.24”

22 "./.2./.3 Block > 254 char. V.24”

23 "./.2./.3 Part program memory overflow V.24”

24 "./.2./.3 No more part program input V.24”



13.4.7 Configuring the message texts for the PLC alarms/messages/dialogs

13.4.7 Configuring the message texts for the PLC alarms/messages/dialogs

The MELDTEXT file copied into the user branch by means of the DEFAULT function, containsall texts for the alarms/messages/dialogs as well as the texts of the cancel conditions of theSiemens operating system.You cut the texts of the Siemens alarms/messages/dialogs, i.e. youmaintain lines 1 to 10 and add your own information texts, if necessary.

If there are text files in the user area, the search is executed first in the user area, when amessage output is triggered. If there is no file in the user area, the Siemens branch isaccessed. It must therefore be ensured, that the first message number is larger than or equalto 10. In the range between 0 and 9, there are the info texts for the cancel conditions.

Procedure:

Delete the contents of the MELDTEXT file starting with line 10, i.e. maintain text no. 0-9. Fromline 10 on, you enter your own texts:

0 ""

1 "Power on"

2 "Reset"

3 "Cancel"

4 ""

5 ""

6 ""

7 ""

8 ""

9 ""

10 "Text for alarm 6000" LF11 "Text for alarm 6001" LF...47 "Text for alarm 6037" LF

When configuring the MELDTEXT file, you must observe the following rules.

• It is mandatory, to enter the error cancel conditions prior to the actual texts of thealarms/messages/dialogs.

• The text must be contained in quotation marks.

• The message texts must be numbered in ascending sequence beginning at ”0”.

• There must be no gaps in the numbering.

• There must be no blank lines in the file.

• Text lines that are not used (gaps) must contain quotation marks and LF.

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a aa a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

On completion of the MELDATTR and MELDTEXT files, the control must

be switched off and on. Date/time must be set correctly before editing.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


13.4.8 Number of text characters

13.4.8 Number of text characters

The maximum number of characters for the texts is defined as follows:

• Dialog boxes

The dialog boxes can be displayed only in a single line with a maximum of 53 characters(including number, blank, formattings).

• Alarm lines

The alarms can be output in one or two lines. The setting whether the text is output in 1 or2 lines is defined in the CONFIG file via BANZLINESMZ_DEF (see SINUMERIK 840CInstallation Instructions).

1-line texts can have a maximum of 54 characters, 2-line texts can have a maximum of67 characters per line, including the message/alarm/dialog number, blanks and formattings.

In 2-line texts, a word of up to max. 8 digits can be wrapped to the new line. A wrapposition can be defined by a blank or by the character string %_ (percent and under-score). The character string %_ is not output.

In the texts, formattings can be used that are replaced when output by a text, e.g. %a1 isreplaced by the corresponding axis or spindle name (see section "Formattings"). If formattingsare used in the text, an exact definition of a wrap position for 2-line alarms is not possible, asthe text that is used for formatting can have different length. A remedy can be the definition ofa variable wrap, that can be as follows:


















.

.

.8352 Hydraulic oil of the %a1 axis, minimum reached

Please refill oil!...

By inserting the blanks, you define a variable wrap. Blanks are not set at the 1st position ofthe 2nd line.

Note:

If the maximum permissible number of characters of the texts is exceeded, the odd charactersare cut in the display.

13.4.9 Formattings in the text

In texts of the MELDTEXT file, formattings can be included. These formattings replace a text,i.e. a message text can be used for a variety of cases (e.g. for several axes etc.).

The following formattings for PLC alarms/messages/dialogs are possible:

%1 Axis and spindle number%a1 Axis and spindle names (from machine data definition)%2 Channel number

The formatting %a1, for example, is replaced by the axis that has caused the error in eachcase (e.g. x, y, z etc.). On the PLC side, it is simply necessary to set the corresponding axis-specific interface signals (e.g. for spindle 1 DB 31, DW 3, see Table in section "Interfacesignals for alarms and messages").The operating system then automatically effects the entries(in this example, the axis designation from the machine data).



13.4.9 Formattings in the text

Example:

8000 "<%a1>-drive not ready to operate"

Caution!

The characters used in the formattings must be allowed for in the maximum character lengthof the texts.

13.5 Important notes

• Make sure that the MELDATTR files in the Siemens and user branches do not overlap. Ifthe same message and schematics numbers are used in the user branch and in theSiemens branch, the data in the user branch will be effective.

• The text numbering of the MELDTEXT file may be the same in the user and Siemensbranches. The MELDATTR file always refers to the text number of the MELDTEXT file inthe same branch. If the text number specified in the attribute file does not exist in the userbranch, an error message is output and the complete alarm/message configurations fromthe SIEMENS branch are taken.

• The keyswitch positions have no effect on the message blocks MELDTEXT andMELDATTR, i.e. the files from the Siemens and user branches are always used (even inposition 3).

• As from SW3, the displayed alarm cancel class of the ”EMERGENCY STOP” alarm that itis in the display can be overwritten.

If, for example, acknowledgement of ”EMERGENCY STOP” is acknowleged with the userprogram in the PLC by means of the Reset key, the machine manufacturer can modifypresetting of the MELDATTR and MELDTEXT files in such a way that the alarm cancelclass of the ”RESET” text is displayed.

• If the configuration data in the user branch cannot be interpreted, the data is loaded fromthe Siemens branch and an error message is output.

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a aa a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a aFor configuring alarms, use only dialog boxes with an empty softkey bar.

The OK and HIDE softkeys acknowledge the text without scanning forthe error condition to be eliminated. The two files MELDTEXT and

MELDATTR must always be available in the user branch. If only one ofthe two files is copied to the user branch, this file is not evaluated and

only the files of the Siemens branch are effective.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


13.6 Conversion program ALT840C

13.6 Conversion program ALT840C

From SW 3 of SINUMERIK 840C, the alarm/message/dialog texts are only in the MMC; textscan no longer be displayed via PCF files.

To convert the texts from PCF format to MMC format, there is the conversion programALT840C in WS800A software version 4.1. With this program, two files are generated for eachalarm text file:

MELDATTR.080MELDTEXT.081

You can also convert several files, but only these two files are generated.

Afterwards, you transfer the files in the PC format into the SINUMERIK 840C. For this purpose,you require the software PCIN, V3.0 and higher. A file with the extension ".col" and thefollowing specifications is generated (the following is an example; further files can becontained).

C:\WS800\Example\D\MELDATTR.80>/MMC.001/USER.005/REG.051/MELDATTR.080;C:\WS800\Example\D\MELDTEXT.81>/MMC.001/USER.005/REG.051/GERMAN.008/

MELDTEXT.081;

Generation of this file is described in the User's Guide PCIN, as from V3.0.

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a aa a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

When generating the files MELDATTR and MELDTEXT in the MMC, thecurrent date and time must be set both on the MMC and, if required, on

the external PC by means of PCIN, V3.0 and higher.

13.7 Example for alarm configuration, SW 3

A PLC alarm 6005 with the text ”Lubricating oil minimum” is to be output. At the same time,”Feedrate disable total” is triggered. The alarm is to be output in the message line. CANCEL isdefined as cancel condition.

1. Creation of the MELDATTR/MELDTEXT files

1 LF (Line 1) Number of schematics definitions in the user branch6 75 76 79 76 3 LF (Line 2) New schematics, the definitions 0 to 5 are used from

the Siemens branch0 (Line 3) No dialog box definition6005 350 0 0 0 10 (Line 4) 1st message description with text number 106006 350 0 0 0 11

6007 350 0 0 0 12...




Schematics 6 defines:

75 ... Text colour for the alarm: red76 ... Background colour for alarm window: black79 ... Text colour for cancel condition: white76 ... Background colour for cancel condition: black 3 ... Number of cancel text (CANCEL) in the MELDTEXT file

.

.

.

The message description defines:

6005 ... Alarm number 350 ... Priority (the smaller the number, the higher the priority) 0 ... Alarm type, entry has no meaning 0 ... Message class; it must be defined in the CONFIG file in which alarm log the

alarm is entered 0 ... Display of alarm in the message line 15 ... In the MELDTEXT file, the alarm text is given under this number

The MELDTEXT file is configured as follows:

0 ""

1 "Power on"

2 "Reset"

3 "Cancel"

"

"

"

"

10 "Lubricating oil minimum” . . .

2. Machine data

Sets the PLC machine data 6032.0 = 1. This defines that the alarm 6005 is output asalarm (not as message), i.e. the alarm text must be acknowledged after eliminating theerror condition by a PLC application.

Call OB20:: JU FB45 Initiation block

Name :initiation .

.

.Call OB1:

.

.

.JU FB48 - must always be called (provided alarms or messages

are required)Name :FMBM: MMC -

JU FB57 - only for alarmsName :FM-ABFR

JU FB58 - only for messagesName :BM-ABFR


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)



Processing in the PB:

:

A I14.4 Input signal ”Lubricating oil minimum”C DB 10

=D6.13 Message 6005C DB 40

A D4.2 Cancel keyC DB 58

=D0.9 Acknowledgement:

Note:

If the alarm is to be output in a dialog box, the following data must be configured:

1. Message type = 1

2. A schematics description for the dialog box must be defined, e.g.

:

12 bed_dia0 0 1 200

bed_dia0 Dialog box with empty softkey bar 0 Dialog box is displayed in the MACHINE area 1 Dialog box is displayed when the MACHINE area is active 200 Acknowledgement mode, entry has no meaning

All other configurations are identical with the configuration example.

Use only dialog boxes with an empty softkey bar for alarm configurations.

The OK and HIDE softkeys acknowledge the text without scanning for the error condition to beeliminated.

13.8 Generating of an info text file for the alarms and messages

From SW3, the SINUMERIK 840C offers the possibility to enter informations on the alarms andmessages. Under the directory MMC.001/USER.005/REG.051/GERMAN.008, there is the fileMELDINFO.128. In this file, you can enter help texts to the alarms and messages configured.

This can be carried out either via direct writing with the ASCII editor in the diagnosis area orvia reading of the ASCII file over the V24 (RS232C) interface (in PC format with PCIN, as fromV3.0).

In the alarm display, the complete info file is loaded by means of the Help key. The individualinfo text can be selected via page and search functions.

END OF SECTION


11.92 14 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD)

14 PLC Machine Data (PLC-MD)

A distinction is made between PLC MD words and bits in the PLC machine data. PLC machinedata can be input and altered at the NC operator panel in the same way as the NC machinedata.

In the PLC, the machine data are transferred to defined data blocks. The following figureprovides an overview of the relevant machine data and the data blocks in which they arestored.

Overview of PLC machine data and bits (see Section PLC machine data)

39

0DB 60

4000

2000

0

NCK

MD ADDR. MD WORDS

Operatingsystem

Function blocks

User

8000

7000

6000

MD ADDR. MD BITS

Operatingsystem

Function blocks

User

Cold restart

PLC

Operatingsystem

99

0DB 61

Functionblocks

49

0DB 62

User

WORDS

39

0DB 63

Operatingsystem

24

0DB 64

Functionblocks

24

0DB 65

User

BITS

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a aa a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

A description of the PLC machine data is to be found in the

Installation Guide Instructions (IA)!

END OF SECTION


06.93 15 Data Blocks Installed for Users (DB 66 ... DB 71)

15 Data Blocks Installed for Users(DB 66 ... DB 71)

In the SINUMERIK System 800, data blocks 66 ... 71 are reserved for user data, of which thefollowing are available for SINUMERIK 840C.

• DB 66 Icon selection in the MMC*• DB 67 Internal machine control panel*• DB 68 User data words (64 words)• DB 71 User data bits (16 data words = 256 bits)

The PLC operating system automatically sets up the relevant data blocks in the RAM when thecontrol is switched on for the first time. The user data cannot be accessed via the NC screenas a standard, since each user data should be provided with plaintext in order to facilitate theoperator's task.

Relevant displays can be compiled at the NC programming workstation. User data arerecommended for the data that are to be used by the PLC and, in some circumstances, by theNC as well. This is advantageous because user data can also be read by NC cycles viacommands in the CL 800 language.

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a aa a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

A description of the user data is to be found in the

Installation Guide Instructions (IA).


Depending on the actual machine configuration, the PLC program can be modified by themachine operator by means of user data.

In contrast to the PLC machine data, the user data do not enable options, but adapt the PLCprogram to actual operating conditions.

Example:

1. Determination of two clamping pressures by means of PLC machine data. The lowerclamping pressure, for example, is enabled by means of user data.

2. Setting up the waiting time of a loading gripper after clamping.

_______* As from SW 2

END OF SECTION


08.96 16 Alphabetical List of Signal Names

16 Alphabetical List of Signal Names

NameInterface

Signal Descr.

Control element

Signal Descr.

AAcknowledgement function result valid 2.7.2 9.2Activate slave operation 2.5.2.5 5.6Activate slave operation 2.5.3 6.2Actual direction of rotation clockwise 2.5.2.1 5.2Actual gear stage 2.5.2.2 5.3Actual parameter set number "Position control 2.5.2.5 5.6Actual parameter set number "Speed ratio" 2.5.2.5 5.6Alarms and messages (DB58) 2.9 12Area 2.7.5 9.5Axis lock 2.5.3 6.2Axis is in the reduction range 2.5.3 6.1Axis-specific 611D signals 2.5.1.5 5.6

BBasic setting 2.4 3.1Basic speed 2.5.2.2 5.3Battery alarm 2.4 3.5Block number 2.7.4 9.4Block search 2.5.1.1 4.2.3Block search with calculation 2.5.1.2 4.3.1Block search with calculationas from last main block

2.5.1.1 4.2.3

Block search with calculationas from last main block (softkey)

2.5.1.2 4.3.2

Block search with calculation (softkey) 2.5.1.2 4.3.2Block search with calculation without errors 2.5.1.2 4.3.2Block search with calculationas from last main block without errors

2.5.1.2 4.3.3

BRK, select BREAK 2.5.1.1 4.2.3BRK, BREAK selected 2.5.1.2 4.3.2

CC axis active 2.5.2.3 5.4Channel number (DB 37) 2.6.2 8.2Channel number (spindle) 2.5.2.2 5.3Channel number, software component (1...4) 2.7.3 9.3CLR, select CLEAR 2.5.1.1 4.2.3CLR, CLEAR selected 2.5.1.2 4.3.2Command channel 2.7.6 10.1/10.2Compensation block 2.7.1 9.1Computer link 1, 2 2.4 3.4Configuration DB 2.4.2.1 IAConstant cutting speed, G96 2.5.1.2 4.3.1Control key group 2.7.1 9.1Control of data transfer (DB37) 2.6.2 8Control without operator panel 2.8.1 11.1Conventional +/– 2.5.3 6.2Coordination error 2.5.1.3 4.4.4CPU failure 2.4 3.5Current OB no. 2.4 3.1Current restart 2.4 3.1


16 Alphabetical List of Signal Names 08.96

NameInterface

Signal Descr.

Control element

Signal Descr.

Cursor (DB 40) 2.7.4 9.4Cursor data 2.7.1 9.1Cycle disable 2.8.1 11.1Cycle times 2.4.1 3.6

DData group base (cursor data) 2.7.4 9.4Data group cursor (cursor data) 2.7.4 9.4Data start input/output 2.6.2 8.2Data transfer areas 2.4.22 IAData transfer assigned 2.6.1 7.2.2Data transfer busy 2.6.1 7.2.2Data transfer ended 2.6.1 7.2.2Data transfer ended 2.6.2 8.2Data transfer PLC/NC (DB 36) 2.6.1 7.2.2Data type base (cursor data) 2.7.4 9.4Data type cursor (cursor data) 2.7.4 9.4Data type data output 2.6.2 8.2DB/DX number base (cursor data) 2.7.4 9.4DB/DX number cursor (cursor data) 2.7.4 9.4Decoding list M signals 2.3Deceleration reference point approach 2.5.3 6.2DEC single block 2.5.1.1 4.2.3DEC single block selected 2.5.1.2 4.3.2Delete distance to go 2.5.1.1 4.2.3Delete number of subroutine passes 2.5.1.1 4.2.3Deletet error coding 2.4.1 3.6Diagnostics DB 2.4.1 3.6Dialog boxes 2.7.3 12.1.1Dialog text number 2.7.2 9.2Display in message line operational messages 2.9 12.4Display in message line page 2.9 12.4Display in message line error messages 2.9 12.4Displayed channel number 1 ... 6 2.7.3 9.3.3D modification 2.5.1.3 4.4.3DMP configuring 2.11 2.11DRF 2.5.1.1 4.2.1DRF selected 2.5.1.2 4.3.2Dry-run feedrate 2.5.1.1 4.2.3Dry-run feedrate selected 2.5.1.2 4.3.2D word 2.5.1.3 4.4.3DW number base (cursor data) 2.7.4 9.4DW number cursor 2.7.4 9.4Dynamic function signals 2.7.1 9.1Dynamic key signals 2.7.1 9.1Dynamic key signals 2.7.1 9.1Dynamic M signals 2.5.1.3 4.4.3Dynamic M signals (DB 30) 2.5.1.4 4.6Dynamic signals (user) 2.7.5 9.5Dynamic SW limit switch monitoring passive 2.5.3 6.2


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


NameInterface

Signal Descr.

Control element

Signal Descr.

EEnd limitation+/ – 2.5.3 6.2End number 2.6.2 8.2Emergency stop to NC messages 2.9 12.4Error acknowledgement (DB 40) 2.7.3 9.3Error bits 1. ... 8. (DB 41) 2.7.6 10.1Error during block search with calculation 2.5.1.2 4.3.3Error during block search with calcualtionas from last main block

2.5.1.2 4.3.3

Error during data transfer 2.6.2 8.2Error number 2.7.6 10.2Error number format 2.6.1 7.2.2Error value 1 ... value 3 2.6.1 7.2.2ESR monitoring active 2.5.1.2 4.2ESR response enabled 2.5.1.4 6.3ESR response programmed 2.5.1.4 6.3ESR response programmed 2.5.2.3 5.4ESR response triggered 2.5.1.2 4.3ETC 2.7.1 9.1Extended F address 2.5.1.3 4.4.3Extended H address 2.5.1.2 4.4.3Extended M address 2.5.1.3 4.4.3Extended S address 2.5.1.3 4.4.3Extended T address 2.5.1.3 4.4.3Extended overstore active 2.5.1.2 4.3

FFAF signals (DB 32) 2.5.3 6.1FAF via command channel (DB 41) 2.7.6 10.4.9Fast auxiliary functions 2.5.1.3 4.4.3Feed 1:100 2.5.3 6.2Feedrate disable (axial) 2.5.3 6.2Feedrate disable general 2.5.1.1 4.2.4Feedrate disable general and read-in disable 2.5.1.1 4.2.4/4.2.5Feedrate override 2.5.1.1 4.2.2Feedrate override active 2.5.1.1 4.2.2Feedrate override for rapid traverse selected 2.5.1.2 4.3.2FIFO assigned 2.6.1 7.2.2Flashing frequency 0.5 Hz 2.4 3.1F modification 2.5.1.3 4.4.3Follow-up operation 2.5.3 6.2Function code number 2.7.3 9.3Function number (DB 41) 2.7.6 10.2Function result 2.7.2 9.2F word 2.5.1.3 4.4.3



NameInterface

Signal Descr.

Control element

Signal Descr.

GG00, rapid traverse 2.5.1.2 4.3.1G33, G63, G36 thread cutting 2.5.1.2 4.3.1G96, constant cutting speed 2.5.1.2 4.3.1Gear interpolation signals (axis-specific) 2.5.1.4 4.5Gear interpolation signals (spindle-specific) 2.5.2 5.4/5.5Gear switchover 2.5.2.1 5.2.1

HHandwheel active 1, 2 2.5.3 6.2Help key 2.7.1 9.1H modification 2.5.1.3 4.4.3H word 2.5.1.3 4.4.3H word valid 2.5.1.3 4.4.3

IIcons 2.12.1 2.12.1IKA signals (DB32) 2.5.3 6.1IKA via command channel (DB41) 2.7.6 10.4.8Information bit for alarm concept (FY) 2.4 3.1Initial number 2.6.2 8.2Insertion already active (acknowledge) 2.7.3 9.3.1Insertion executed (acknowledge) 2.7.3 9.3.1Installation menu 2.7.5 9.5Internal machine control panel 2.12.2 15Interrupt input 2.4 3.2

KKey disable to NC (Edit, Input, Cancel) 2.7.3 9.3.1Key hex code 2.7.5 9.5Key signals 2.7.1 9.1Key switch 2.8.1 11.1

LLast information 2.5.1.3 4.4.3LEDs (user) 2.7.5 9.5

MM00/M01, programmed stop 2.5.1.2 4.3.1M01 selected 2.5.1.2 4.3.2M01 active 2.5.1.1 4.2.3M02/M30, Program end, abort 2.5.1.2 4.3.1M03/M04 invert 2.5.2.2 5.3M19 acknowledge 2.5.2.2 5.3Machine area 2.7.5 9.5Menu/dialog text number 2.7.3 9.3


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


NameInterface

Signal Descr.

Control element

Signal Descr.

Menu number (user) 2.7.5 9.5Menu number change 2.7.5 9.5Messages (DB 58) 2.9 12.4Mirroring 2.5.3 6.2MMC CPU ready 2.4 3.4Mode group number 2.7.3 9.3.1M word 1/2/3 2.5.1.3 4.4.3M word 1/2/3 modification 2.5.1.3 4.4.3M word 1/2/3 not decoded 2.5.1.3 4.4.3

NNC emergency stop acknowledge 2.9 12.4NC in emergency stop state 2.9 12.4NC start 2.5.1.1 4.2.3NC start disable 2.5.1.1 4.2.6NC start inhibit 2.5.1.2 4.3.4NC stop 2.5.1.1 4.2.3Negative edge 2.4 3.3No reduction of the channel path velocity 2.5.1.1 4.2.3

OOperating mode group 2.7.1 9.1.1Operating mode group number 2.7.1 9.1.1Operating mode group ready 2.5.1.2 4.3.4Operating modes 2.5.1.1 4.2.1Operator panel lock 2.8.1 11.1Order number 2.7.3 9.3.1Oscillation speed 2.5.2.2 5.3Own insertion active (DB 40) 2.7.3 9.3.1

PParameter test 2.4 3.1Parking axis 2.5.3 6.2Parking spindle 2.5.2.5 5.6PLC emergency stop message 2.9 IA (12.4)PLC error message 2.9 12.4PLC error message acknowledge 2.9 12.4PLC MD bits user 2.10.2 IAPLC MD bits for basic program 2.10.2 IAPLC MD words for basic program 2.10.1 IAPLC MD words user 2.10.1 IAPLC operational message 2.9 12.4PLC spindle control 2.5.2.2 5.3PLC status display 2.7.5 9.5PLC trigger signal 2.8.1 11.1Position control active 2.5.3 6.1Position reached with exact stop fine 2.5.3 6.1Position reached with exact stop coarse 2.5.3 6.1Positive-related switch ON 2.5.1.4 6.3



NameInterface

Signal Descr.

Control element

Signal Descr.

Position spindle 2.5.2.2 5.3Positive edge 2.4 3.3Probe selected 2.4 3.5Processing delay 2.4 3.1Program end, abort; M02, M30 2.5.1.2 4.3.1Program interrupted 2.5.1.2 4.3.1Programmed speed too high 2.5.2 5.2Programmed stop; M00,M01 2.5.1.2 4.3.1Program running 2.5.1.2 4.3.1Program start/stop cycles off 2.5.1.1 4.2PSTEP select procedure step 2.5.1.1 4.2.3PSTEP procedure step selected 2.5.1.2 4.3.2

RRapid override 2.5.1.1 4.2.2Rapid override active 2.5.1.1 4.2.2Rapid traverse, G00 2.5.1.2 4.3.1Rapid traverse overlay 2.5.3 6.2Read-in disable 2.5.1.1 4.2.5Recall key 2.7.1 9.1Reference point reached 2.5.3 6.1Referencing W/O internal setpoint value 2.5.3 6.2Request bits 1. ... 8. UI 2.7.6 10.2Request for key lock (DB 40) 2.7.3 9.3.1Reset 2.5.1.1 4.2.1Resynchronize spindle 2.5.2.2 5.3Routed H word 2.5.1.3 4.4.4Routed T word 2.5.1.3 4.4.4

S2nd softwear limit switch +/- 2.5.3 6.2Screen dark 2.8.1 11.2Serial interface (DB 37) 2.6.2 8Servo enable axis 2.5.3 6.2Servo enable spindle 2.5.2 5.3Set direction of rotation clockwise 2.5.2.1 5.3Set gear stage 2.5.2.1 5.2Set reference dimension 2.5.3 6.2Set value 0 already assigned 2.5.2.1 5.3Single block 2.5.1.1 4.2.3Skip block 2.5.1.1 4.2.3Skip block in several planes (selection) 2.5.1.1 4.2.3Skip block in several planes selected 2.5.1.3 4.4.3Skip block selected 2.5.1.2 4.3.2Slave operation is active 2.5.3 6.1Softkey function calls 2.5.3 6.1Softkey function number (DB40) 2.7.1 9.1.2Softkey number change 2.7.1 9.1.2Software cam signals (DB32) 2.5.3 6.1/6.2S modification 2.5.1.3 4.4.3Source channel number 2.5.1.3 4.4.4


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


NameInterface

Signal Descr.

Control element

Signal Descr.

Source channel number (address extension) 2.5.1.3 4.4.4Source data word number 2.7.6 10.2Source DB/source DW (DB 41) 2.7.6 10.2Special recall 2.7.3 9.3.1Speed limit exceeded 2.5.2 5.2Spindle disable 2.5.2.2 5.3Spindle in set range 2.5.2.1 5.2Spindle number 2.5.1.1 4.2.3Spindle position reached 2.5.2.1 5.2Spindle reset 2.5.2 5.3Spindle speed override 2.5.2.2 5.3Spindle speed override active 2.5.2.2 5.3Spindle stationary 2.5.2.1 5.2Spindle synchronized 2.5.2.1 5.2Star/delta changeover (DB31) 611D 2.5.2.5 5.6Start signal from user (DB 40) 2.7.3 9.3Static function signals 2.7.1 9.1.2Static key signals 2.7.1 9.1Static M signals 2.5.1.3 4.4.3Static M signals (DB 30) 2.5.1.6 4.6Static signals (user) 2.7.5 9.5Status write disable 2.8.1 11.1Store traversed axes 2.5.13 4.4.4Strobe function number valid 2.7.2 9.2S word 2.5.1.3 4.4.3

TTEACH IN axis marking 2.5.1.3 4.4.5Temperature compensation via commandchannel (DB41)

2.7.6 10.4.7

Thread cutting; G33, G63 2.5.1.2 4.3.1T modification 2.5.1.3 4.4.3Transfer software cams (DB48) 2.8.1 11.1Transformation active 2.5.1.2 4.3.1Travel command +/– 2.5.3 6.1T word 2.5.1.3 4.4.3T word valid 2.5.1.3 4.4.3

UUser keys 2.7.5 9.5

WWait for position related switching 2.5.1.4 6.3Warm restart 2.8.1 11.1Warm restart ended 2.8.1 11.2

END OF SECTION


09.95 17 Terms and Abbreviations

17 Terms and Abbreviations

0 signal Binary zero

1 signal Binary one

@ See SINUMERIK 840 C Programming Guide

AC Alternating Current

Alarm byte Input byte the signals (bits) of which are separately monitoredfor edge change. Edge changes in the alarm byte may initiateprogram interrupts.

ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange

AUT NC operating mode AUTOMATIC

Basic signals Group of signals in the flag area

Baud Unit of transmission speed: 1 baud = 1 bit/sec

BCD Binary Coded Decimal; data format for storing decimalnumbers.

BFM Operator control macro, used for WS800A configuration

Binary Binary data format

Bit Binary digit ; binary unit of information; yes/no signal; binaryplace; dimensional unit for information quantity; unit formemory capacity

Block Software unit in the NC part program

Block preparation Block preparation used to prepare blocks of the part programto be interpreted by the block decoding logic in the NCchannel.

BRK BREAK, stop point (program modification)

Bus Link for transmitting signals, feed voltages, ground potential

Byte Storage unit, generally with 8 bits, can accommodate twodecimal digits or one alphanumeric character; smallestaddressable unit

CAD Computer Aided Design

Cancel Erase function (operation).

Central controller Subrack used to accommodate printed circuit boards of theSINUMERIK 840C.

Channel-specific Separate for each NC channel of the control


17 Terms and Abbreviations 09.95

CL Computer Link

CLR CLEAR, clear blocks in MDA (program modification)

COM Communication

CL800 Programming language for cycles

CNC Computerized Numerical Control; numerical control with oneor more integrated microcomputers and suitable operatingsoftware to implement several or all NC functions.

Cold restart Start-up of the PLC with new system initialization, e. g. afteroverall reset of machine data

CC Command Channel

Command channel Interface between PLC and NC used by the PLC to initiatefunctions in the NC and, at the same time, to transfer netdata (parameters). The command channel is divided into 8user interfaces enabling up to 8 functions to be initiated inthe NC quasi-parallel.

Configuring Compilation of user-specific operator inputs or cycles for acontrol incorporating a WS800 A NC worksstation. The con-figured operator inputs (e. g. messages, menus) or theconfigured cycles are stored in the user memory sub-module.

CPU Central Processing Unit, the actual computer for a definiterange.Example: NC CPU

Cycles Programmable subroutines for NC part programs

DAC Digital/Analog Converter

DB Data Block

DC Direct Current

DEC Abbreviation for block decoding in a NC channel

Def. Definition

DL Left data byte in a data word; it is the high data byte in thedata word.

DMP Abbreviation for Distributed Machine Peripherals.

DMP module Module used to interface machine signals.DMP modules have their own MPC interface module enablingDMP modules to be connected directly with one another andwith the central controller. In contrast to:I/O modules in the central controller or in EUs, I/O sub-modules at the operator panel.

DNC Direct Numerical Control; several NC controls linked to ahost computer


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


DR Data byte right in a data word; it is the low data byte in adata word.

DRF Differential Resolver Function, Interface for handwheels

DSP Digital Signal Processor (digital drive)

DW Data Word

DX Class of data blocks

EEC Electronically Endangered Components

EIA Electronic Industries Association

ELG Electronic gearbox

EM Error Message

EM Entry Menu

Emergency Stop Deactivation of all NC functions in an emergency situation bymeans of a special EMERGENCY STOP switch

ENABLE Enable signal or input

ESR Extended stopping and retraction

EU Expansion Unit

Expansion unit Subrack for I/O modules that are not plugged in the centralcontroller.

F word Word (parameter) in the part program specifying a feedvalue.

FAF Travel against fixed stop

FB Function Block

FDD Feed drive (digital)

FTR File transfer

FB package Package of function blocks containing several functionallyrelated function blocks. The FBs from the FB packages areloaded into the PLC as required and can then be called bythe PLC program.

FD Floppy Disk (drive)

Feedrate override Variation of specified feedrate

FIFO ”First in-First out”: defines a queue of data in the program.

File transfer Data transfer between host computer and NC.

Fixed-point number Numerical format, see ”PLC 135 WB ”Planning Guide, owndocumentation



Flag area Memory area that can be addressed bit by bit and is used fortemporary (dynamic) and retentive flags. Parts of the flagarea are saved in a kind of stack on program interruption.

Flag word Two consecutive bytes in the flag are beginning at an evenaddress

FMS Flexible Manufacturing System; group of machines linked byan automatic material handling system; manufacturing andhandling are controlled by computer

FTR File transfer

Function block package Parameterizable program block of the PLC program.In addition to FBs the user can create himself, there arealso ready-made FBs that are either already integrated inthe PLC operating system as function macros or can bereloaded from the FB packages.

Function macro Function block integrated in the PLC operating system.Special documentation on function macros is available.

FW Flag Word

FY Flag byte; byte in the flag area that can be addressed byteby byte.

G functions Functions in the part program specifying preparatoryfunctions for workpiece machining.

GI Gear interpolation

Handwheel Operating element used for manual actuation of axis motions

HD Hard Disk; fixed-disk drive

HMS High-resolution Measuring System

I/O byte A byte of the I/O address area accommodating the input andoutput signals, see also PII, PIQ

I Code 840C communication protocol

I/O modules Modules used to interface machine signals

I/O submodule Submodule (module) used to interface input and outputsignals

I/O word A word (two consecutive bytes beginning at an evenaddress) in the I/O area, I/O byte

I/Os General term defining machine signals or I/O modules, EUs, DMPs, I/O submodules for interfacing machinesignals

I/Os, central I/Os in the central controller

I/Q/F area Group of areas input area, output area and flag area.The common characteristic of these areas is that they can beaddressed bit by bit and are not located in data blocks.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


IAR Integrated drive control

IB Input Byte; byte in the input area imagining input signals,can be addressed bit by bit.

IBN Installation mode

IKA Interpolation and compensation with tables

IM Interface Module

INCR NC operating mode INCREMENT

Increment: Smallest unit of digital representation

Incremental dimension A dimension measured from the preceding point in a seriesof points

Incremental system A control system in which each coordinate or positionaldimension is taken from the last position rather than from acommon zero point as in an absolute system

Input buffer Used for WS800A configuration, e.g. supply of cycles - viainput displays; in connection with BFMs.

Int EU/16 BIT Interface module for the SIMATIK-EU inserted in the centralcontroller

Interface Interface to system components

Interface signal Individual bit or data that can be evaluated or modified by thePLC user program.The signal is used as a user interface ( interface) to anotherSINUMERIK 840 C component, e. g. an NC channel, theoperator panel. The interface signals are located in datablocks or in the I/Q/F areas.

Interpolator The interpolator computes the path points for workpiecemachining up to the target position programmed in the partprogram under consideration of the programmed preparatoryfunctions. Each NC channel has its own interpolator.

ISO International Organization for Standardization

Jog Manual mode with feed and rapid traverse as long as adirection key is pressed

KF Numerical format, fixed-point number decimal (binary withsign)

KK Command channel

Kv factor Servo gain factor

KY Numerical format, byte



LCD Liquid Crystal Display

LEC Leadscrew Error Compensation

LED Light Emitting Diode

LINK Link (in gear interpolation)

Link bus Bus in the central controller connecting the individual CPUsto those modules that can only be accessed by the relevantCPU.

Link RAM Memory area used for data exchange between differentCPUs.

Local bus Bus in the central controller connecting the individual CPUsto those modules that can only be accessed by the relevantCPU.

Logical partner See documentation on Computer Link

M decoding Mechanism on the PLC that influences the M signals on thePLC in accordance with the M function programmed in thepart program.

M function Miscellaneous function for NC part programs. Some Mfunctions have a defined meaning, other M functions can bedefined arbitrarily.

M signal Signal in data blocks influenced by M function programmedin the NC part program.

M word Word (parameter) in the part program belonging to amiscellaneous function.

m, n, x, k These letters are often used in table to specify a block indexdefining an address offset depending, e. g., on the axis orspindle number. The values of the relevant address offset aremostly given under the respective table or at the end of therespective Section.

M19tsr Miscellaneous function in the part program(configured in the PLC program):Oriented spindle stop through several revolutions,incremental or absolute (as from SW3) positioning

Machine data All data defined by the machine tool manufacturer requiredfor matching the control to the relevant machine tool arestored in machine data.

Main block Program block in the NC part program. Progam blocks areorganized in the part program in hierachical order as mainblocks and subblocks.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


MD Machine Data

MD 123* General notation for a machine data that exists separate,e. g. for each axis or spindle. The asterisk ”*” has to bereplaced for the relevant axis or spindle by the correspondingaxis or spindle number.

MDA NC operating mode

MDD Machine Data Dialog (MMC application)

Measuring circuit Unit in the NC containing set part positions from the interpolator and supplying actual part positions to theinterpolator for one drive (axis or spindle).

Menu Function- or data-related structure of the screen display

MIB Machine Input BufferUsed for WS800A configuration, e.g. supply of cycles - viainput displays; in connection with BFMs.

MMC Man Machine Communication

Mode group Group of NC channels that always operate in the sameoperating mode.

MPC Multi-port Control, interface to a fast serial (MPC) bus

MPF Abbreviation for Main Program File, defines the memory areain the NC reserved for part programs.

MSD Main spindle drive (digital)

Multiport RAM One type of memory module with the link RAM

NC Numerical ControlIn this documentation, ”NC” often refers to the NCcomponents (or the NC CPU) of the SINUMERIK 840 (seeSection 1, General Overview).

NC channel The SINUMERIK 840 NC component is divided into NCchannels. Each NC channel essentially contains one blockpreparation for part programs, one interpolator andone interface to the PLC.

NCK Numerical Control Kernel

NC part program Part program

Normal mode Operating mode of the PLC CPU, only allowing the PLCprogram to be interrupted at block bounderies. for thisreason, e. g. the processing of hardware interrupts is notpossible in normal mode (see ”PLC 135 WB/WB 2/WDPlanning Guide”, own documentation).



OB Organization Block in the PLC

OM Operational Message

OP Operator Panel

OPI Operator Panel Interface

Option Expansion of the SINUMERIK 840 standard functionality

OS Operating System

Overall reset Clearing of all variable memory areas, e. g. by entering fixedinitial values.

Override Alteration to programmed values by manually operated stepswitch (e.g. feedrate override, rapid traverse override).

Part program Numerical control program for machining workpieces on acontrolled machine.

PB Program Block in the PLC

PCB Printed Circuit Board

PII Process Input Image

Pin no. Pin no. (for connectors)

PIQ Process output image

PLC Programmable Logic Controller, SINUMERIK interface controlto the relevant machine

PLC user program Program for the PLC matching the SINUMERIK 840 to therelevant machine. This program is compiled by the user(=machine manufacturer). Programming languages:Step 5 (available in different types of representation) or ahigh-level language of the HLL interface (see ”PLC 135WB/WB 2/WD Planning Guide”, ”HLL Programming” owndocumentation).

Power Off Power off for the NC, also power failure in particular

Power On Power on for the NC, also, in particular, return of voltageafter mains failure

PP Part Program

PRESET Setting of values before operation

Printed circuit board Module installed in the central controller or in an expansion unit.

Process alarm byte Alarm byte

Process image Image of machine signals in the I/O area that can beaddressed bit by bit.

PS Power Supply


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


PSTEP Procedure step, program step (program modification)

PW I/O word

QB Output byte, byte in the output area imaging the outputsignals, can be addressed bit by bit

QW Output word, 2 consecutive QBs beginning at an evenaddress

R Parameter Arithmetic parameter

RAM Random Access Memory, read and write memory

Rapid traverse Accelerated travel of an axis

Rapid traverse override Variation of feedrate specified for rapid traverse.

REF NC operating mode (reference point)

Reference point Machine reference point for the reference system

REPOS NC operating mode (repositioning)

RESET Reset; channel or operating mode-specific

RGB Red Green Blue

ROM Read-Only Memory

RPA R Parameter Active, defines the memory area in the NCreserved for R parameter numbers (value allocation)

RS232C Serial interface in accordance with the RS232C StandardSpecification

RS422 Serial interface in accordance with the RS 422 StandardSpecification

RS485 Serial interface in accordance with RS 485 StandardSpecification

SB Sequence Block

SE Setting data

SEA Setting Data Active, defines the memory area in the NCreserved for setting data

Sequence block Program block having a specified structure, particularlysuitable for programming step-oriented sequences (see PLC135 WB Programming Guide or Step 5 Language Descrip-tion).

Setting data Setting data (like machine data) define statuses. In contrastto machine data, setting data are not protected by apassword and can be modified by the operator.Examples: Setting data for zero offsets, scaling modifications,speed limitations.



Signal In this documentation often used as equivalent to the termbit.

SIMATIC Siemens programmable logic controllers (S5/S7)

SINEC H1 Registered tradename for an industrial bus used to linkcomputers, e. g. a host computer and an NC.

Softkey Key arranged under/next to the operator panel screencapable of being assigned different functions.

Special mode Operating mode of the PLC CPU enabling hardwareinterrupts to be processed. For this purpose, the currentprogram can generally be interrupted after every Step 5command (see ”PLC 135 WB/WB 2/WD Planning Guide”,own documentation).

SPF Sub Program File, defines the memory area in the NCreserved for subroutines in part programs.

Spindle-specific Separate for each spindle of the machine

SPP Set Part Position

SR Subroutine

Step 5 Programming language

STL Abbreviation for Statement List, one form of representingStep 5 programs

Strobe Signal (bit) indicating the occurance of an event.

Subblock Program block in the NC part program, see main block

Submodule Block, module; also software block; modular design:composed of blocks.

TC Temperature Compensation

T Signal Tool signal

TEA Testing Date Active, refers to machine data.

Teach In Input and execution mode for part programs.

TO Tool Offset

TOA Tool Offset Active, defines/selects a memory area for tooloffsets in the NC.

tsr through several revolutions

UI User Interface

UMS File used to store operator input (menus, messages) and cycles configured by the user of the control system for aspecific machine (or machine type) or a specific customer.See also WS800, CL800, Section 1, General Overview.


SINUMERIK 840C (PJ)


User In this documentation, the term user mostly refers to the PLC user program or the machine manufacturer whoprepares the PLC user program.

V.24 Standard specification for a serial interface, often stands forthe term serial interface itself. ( RS232C)

Warm restart After power on, the PLC resumes the PLC user program atthe position it was interrupted on switching off.

WOP Workstation Oriented Programming

WS 800A NC workstation used to compile user-specific operatorenvironments or cycles for the SINUMERIK 840C.

XM Exit menu

ZOA Zero Offset Active, defines/selects a memory area in the NCreserved for zero point offsets.

END OF SECTION


Should you come across any printing errorswhen reading this publication, we would askyou to inform us accordingly, using thisform. We would also welcome any sugges-tions you may have in the way of improve-ment.

Planning Guide

Order No.: 6FC5197-6AA00-0BP2Edition: 09.2001

Suggestions

Corrections

For Publication/Manual:SINUMERIK 840CSoftware Version 1 to 6Interface DescriptionPart 1 : SignalsManufacturer Documentation

From:

Name

Company/Dept.

Address

Telephone /

Suggestions and/or corrections

Siemens AGA&D MC BMSP.O. Box 31 80D-91050 ErlangenFederal Republic of GermanyTel. +49 - 180 / 5050 - 222 [Hotline]Fax +49 - 9131 / 98 - 2176email: [email protected]

User Documentation

SINUMERIK

840C

SINUMERIK

Overview of SINUMERIK 840C Documentation / OEM Version for Windows

Brochure Catalog NC 36

Accessories

Catalog NC Z

SINUMERIK

SINUMERIKSINUMERIK

840C

SINUMERIK

General Documentation


SINUMERIK

ACR 20/805SM/840C

User/Manufacturer/Service Documentation

Link to SINEC L2--DP with Module-- IM328--N, Slave-- IM329--N, Master and Slave

Operator’s Guide-- OEM VersionWindows

-- Standard

Cycles,ProgrammingGuide

SINUMERIK SINUMERIK

Measuring CyclesVersion 20User’s Guide

User’s GuideSimulation Millingand Turning

SINUMERIK

840C

User Documentation

User’s GuideGraphic Programming System-- Drilling/Boring and MillingParts 1 + 2

-- Turning Parts 1 + 2-- On DOS PC-- Environment Description 840C

840C 840/840C/880/880 GA2

840/840C/850/880/880 GA2

840C 840C

Service Documentation


SINUMERIKSINUMERIK

840C

SINUMERIK

Interface:-- Signals-- ConnectionConditions

SINUMERIKWS 800A-- CL 800Cycle Language

-- User’s Guide

SINUMERIK

Function BlockPackagesFunction Macros

SINUMERIK

Planning GuideGraphicProgramming System

User’s GuideOEM Versionfor Windows

SINUMERIK

PLC 135 WB/WB2d/WDQuick Reference,PlanningS5--HLL

840/840C/880/880 GA2

840C 840C840C840/840C/880/880 GA2

SINUMERIK

Computer Link-- SINT-- SIN PS 231-- SIN PS 315

SINUMERIK

840C

Spare PartsList

SINUMERIK

Measuring CyclesVersion 20Start--up Guide

Installation Guide-- Instructions-- Lists-- DifferenceDescription Windows

SINUMERIK

Computer Link-- Message FrameDescription

-- GeneralDescription

840/840C/880/880 GA2

840/840C/880/880 GA2

840/840C/850/880/880 GA2

SINUMERIK

Diagnostics Guide

840C

840/880

SINUMERIK

Alarm Dialogfor PCOEM Versionfor Windows

SINUMERIKSIMODRIVE

SafetyIntegrated

840C

Description ofFunctionsSINUMERIKSafety Integra-ted

SINUMERIKSIMODRIVE

840C611D

SINUMERIK

840C611D

SIMODRIVE

DOC ON CD

Electronic Documentation

ProgrammingGuide

Interface Description Part 1: Signals - Siemens...Control SINUMERIK 840C/CE Standard export version...

Documents

Transcript of Interface Description Part 1: Signals - Siemens...Control SINUMERIK 840C/CE Standard export version...